PPG - PC Manual

PROTECTIVE COATINGS
MANUAL
DATA SHEETS | SYSTEM SHEETS | INFORMATION SHEETS
www.sigmacoatings.com/protective
Data sheet index

7460 - NOVAGUARD 810 7945 - NOVAGUARD 830 7468 - NOVAGUARD 840 7755 - NOVAGUARD 890 7447 - PHENGUARD 253 7409 - PHENGUARD 930 7435 - PHENGUARD 935 7436 - PHENGUARD 940 7959 - PHENGUARD 965 7589 - PITT-CHAR XP 7546 - PSX 700 7149 - SIGMA AQUACOVER 20 7145 - SIGMA AQUACOVER 22 7203 - SIGMA AQUACOVER 35 7251 - SIGMA AQUACOVER 40 7250 - SIGMA AQUACOVER 45 7152 - SIGMA AQUACOVER 80 7870 - SIGMA AQUACOVER 200 7871 - SIGMA AQUACOVER 400 7124 - SIGMA AQUAWELD 100 7406 - SIGMACOVER 211 7991 - SIGMACOVER 240 7412 - SIGMACOVER 256 7417 - SIGMACOVER 280 7424 - SIGMACOVER 280 LT 7472 - SIGMACOVER 300 7483 - SIGMACOVER 300 LT 7453 - SIGMACOVER 385 6823 - SIGMACOVER 410 7465 - SIGMACOVER 435 7466 - SIGMACOVER 456 7712 - SIGMACOVER 456 HS 7441 - SIGMACOVER 480 7420 - SIGMACOVER 522 7430 - SIGMACOVER 630 7434 - SIGMACOVER 630 LT 7988 - SIGMACOVER 640 7992 - SIGMACOVER 640 ALUMINIUM 7993 - SIGMACOVER 640 ALUMINIUM LT 7989 - SIGMACOVER 640 LT 7995 - SIGMACOVER 640 SEALER 7726 - SIGMACOVER 805 7450 - SIGMACOVER 1000 7715 - SIGMACOVER 1500 7531 - SIGMADUR CLEARCOAT 7524 - SIGMADUR 520 7740 - SIGMADUR 540 7537 - SIGMADUR 550 7530 - SIGMADUR 580 7518 - SIGMADUR 590 7529 - SIGMADUR 1800 7155 - SIGMAFAST 20 7234 - SIGMAFAST 40 7236 - SIGMAFAST 45 7802 - SIGMAFAST 205 7541 - SIGMAFAST 210 7705 - SIGMAFAST 213 7704 - SIGMAFAST 302 7803 - SIGMAFAST 370 0672UK - SIGMAFAST HS ENAMEL 7944 - SIGMAGUARD 260 7985 - SIGMAGUARD 603 7433 - SIGMAGUARD 720 7459 - SIGMAGUARD 730 7551 - SIGMAGUARD 750 7475 - SIGMAGUARD CSF 575 7785 - SIGMAGUARD CSF 585 7443 - SIGMAGUARD CSF 650 7753 - SIGMAGUARD CSF 660 7618 - SIGMALINE 445
7618 - SIGMALINE 445 7655 - SIGMALINE 855 7659 - SIGMALINE 859 7497 - SIGMALINE 2000 7667 - SIGMALINE 2500 7416 - SIGMAPRIME 200 7930 - SIGMAPRIME 700 7938 - SIGMAPRIME 800 7135 - SIGMARINE 24 7244 - SIGMARINE 35 7213 - SIGMARINE 40 7256 - SIGMARINE 41 7238 - SIGMARINE 48 7240 - SIGMARINE 49 7922 - SIGMASHIELD 220 7926 - SIGMASHIELD 220 LT 7951 - SIGMASHIELD 420 7955 - SIGMASHIELD 420 LT 7952 - SIGMASHIELD 460 7972 - SIGMASHIELD 460 LT 7745 - SIGMASHIELD 825 7749 - SIGMASHIELD 825 LT 7743 - SIGMASHIELD 880 7954 - SIGMASHIELD 905 7490 - SIGMASHIELD 1090 7744 - SIGMASHIELD 1200 7746 - SIGMASHIELD 1200 LT 7260 - SIGMATHERM 175 7445 - SIGMATHERM 230 7565 - SIGMATHERM 350 7563 - SIGMATHERM 450 7261 - SIGMATHERM 500 7555 - SIGMATHERM 520 7592 - SIGMATHERM 538 7564 - SIGMATHERM 540 7179 - SIGMAWELD 10 7112 - SIGMAWELD 15 7173 - SIGMAWELD 120 7171 - SIGMAWELD 165 7167 - SIGMAWELD 190 7177 - SIGMAWELD 199 7370 - SIGMAZINC 19 7402 - SIGMAZINC 102 7702 - SIGMAZINC 102 HS 7401 - SIGMAZINC 109 7701 - SIGMAZINC 109 HS 7558 - SIGMAZINC 158 7560 - SIGMAZINC 160 7570 - SIGMAZINC 170 7403 - SIGMAZINC 68 HS 7761 - STEELGUARD 551 7762 - STEELGUARD 552 7763 - STEELGUARD 553 7764 - STEELGUARD 554 7765 - STEELGUARD 561 7766 - STEELGUARD 562 7767 - STEELGUARD 563 7768 - STEELGUARD 564 7769 - STEELGUARD 581 7731 - STEELGUARD FM 549 7732 - STEELGUARD FM 550 7733 - STEELGUARD FM 560 7735 - STEELGUARD FM 585
System sheet index

2411 - ZINC RICH EPOXY/ GLOSSY PU SYSTEM FOR C5I 2412 - ZINC RICH EPOXY/ GLOSSY PU SYSTEM FOR C5M 2413 - ZINC RICH EPOXY/ SEMI GLOSS PU SYSTEM FOR C5M 2414 - ZINC RICH EPOXY/ POLYSILOXANE SYSTEM FOR C5M 2415 - ZINC RICH EPOXY/ SEMI GLOSS PU SYSTEM FOR C4 2416 - ZINC RICH EPOXY/ GLOSSY PU SYSTEM FOR C4 2417 - ZINC RICH EPOXY/ HS PU SYSTEM FOR C3 2418 - EPOXY/ SEMI GLOSS PU SYSTEM FOR C3 2419 - EPOXY/ GLOSSY PU SYSTEM FOR C3 2420 - ZINC RICH EPOXY/ EPOXY SYSTEM FOR C4 2421 - EPOXY SYSTEM FOR C4 2422 - EPOXY SYSTEM FOR C3 INTERIOR 2423 - ZINC RICH EPOXY/ EPOXY SYSTEM FOR C3 INTERIOR 2424 - ZINC RICH EPOXY/ HS PU SYSTEM FOR C5M 2425 - ZINC RICH EPOXY/ SEMI GLOSS PU SYSTEM FOR C5I 4010 - STEEL PROTECTION - INTERNAL DRY EXPOSURE - ALKYD PAINT SYSTEM 4011 - STEEL PROTECTION - INTERNAL DRY EXPOSURE - RECOATABLE EPOXY/POLYURETHANE SYSTEM 4012 - STEEL PROTECTION - INTERNAL DRY EXPOSURE - ACRYLIC DISPERSION SYSTEM 4016 - STEEL PROTECTION - INTERNAL DRY EXPOSURE - WATERBORNE EPOXY SYSTEM 4020 - STEEL PROTECTION - INTERNAL WET EXPOSURE - ALKYD PAINT SYSTEM 4021 - STEEL PROTECTION - INTERNAL WET EXPOSURE - RECOATABLE EPOXY/POLYURETHANE SYSTEM 4022 - STEEL PROTECTION - INTERNAL WET EXPOSURE - ACRYLIC DISPERSION SYSTEM 4024 - STEEL PROTECTION - INTERNAL WET EXPOSURE - HIGH SOLIDS EPOXY/POLYURETHANE SYSTEM 4026 - STEEL PROTECTION - INTERNAL WET EXPOSURE - WATERBORNE EPOXY SYSTEM 4030 - STEEL PROTECTION - RURAL ATMOSPHERIC EXPOSURE - ALKYD PAINT SYSTEM 4031 - STEEL PROTECTION - RURAL ATMOSPHERIC EXPOSURE - RECOATABLE EPOXY/POLYURETHANE SYSTEM 4032 - STEEL PROTECTION - RURAL ATMOSPHERIC EXPOSURE - ACRYLIC DISPERSION SYSTEM 4034 - STEEL PROTECTION - RURAL ATMOSPHERIC EXPOSURE - HIGH SOLIDS EPOXY/POLYURETHANE SYSTEM 4036 - STEEL PROTECTION - RURAL ATMOSPHERIC EXPOSURE - WATERBORNE EPOXY SYSTEM 4040 - STEEL PROTECTION - INDUSTRIAL AND COASTAL ATMOSPHERIC EXPOSURE - ALKYD PAINT SYSTEM 4041 - STEEL PROTECTION - INDUSTRIAL AND COASTAL ATMOSPHERIC EXPOSURE RECOATABLE EPOXY/POLYURETHANE SYSTEM 4042 - STEEL PROTECTION - INDUSTRIAL AND COASTAL ATMOSPHERIC EXPOSURE - HIGH SOLIDS EPOXY/POLYURETHANE SYSTEM 4045 - STEEL PROTECTION - INDUSTRIAL AND COASTAL ATMOSPHERIC EXPOSURE - SOLVENT FREE EPOXY/POLYURETHANE SYSTEM 4046 - STEEL PROTECTION - INDUSTRIAL AND COASTAL ATMOSPHERIC EXPOSURE WATERBORNE EPOXY/HIGH SOLIDS POLYURETHANE SYSTEM 4047 - STEEL PROTECTION - INDUSTRIAL AND COASTAL ATMOSPHERIC EXPOSURE - SOLVENT FREE EPOXY/POLYMERIC URETHANE SYSTEM 4050 - STEEL PROTECTION - ATMOSPHERIC EXPOSURE WITH ABRASION/IMPACT - SOLVENT FREE FLINT REINFORCED EPOXY SYSTEM 4051 - STEEL PROTECTION - ATMOSPHERIC EXPOSURE WITH ABRASION/IMPACT - HIGH SOLIDS GLASSFLAKE REINFORCED EPOXY SYSTEM 4060 - STEEL PROTECTION - HIGH TEMPERATURE RESISTANT ALKYD PAINT SYSTEM TEMPERATURE UP TO 175C/350F 4061 - STEEL PROTECTION - HIGH TEMPERATURE RESISTANT SILICATE/ACRYLIC PAINT SYSTEM TEMPERATURE UP TO 350C/660F 4062 - STEEL PROTECTION - HIGH TEMPERATURE RESISTANT EPOXY SYSTEM - TEMPERATURE UP TO 200C/390F 4064 - STEEL PROTECTION - HIGH TEMPERATURE RESISTANT SILICATE SYSTEM - TEMPERATURE UP TO 400C/750F 4070 - STEEL PROTECTION - IMMERSION IN WATER - EPOXY TAR SYSTEM 4071 - STEEL PROTECTION - IMMERSION IN WATER OR SUBSOIL CONDITIONS - SOLVENT FREE EPOXY SYSTEM 4072 - STEEL PROTECTION - IMMERSION IN WATER - HIGH SOLIDS TAR FREE EPOXY SYSTEM 4076 - STEEL PROTECTION - IMMERSION IN HOT WATER - PHENOLIC EPOXY SYSTEM - MIO EPOXY SYSTEM 4081 - STEEL PROTECTION - IMMERSION IN CHEMICALS - PHENOLIC EPOXY SYSTEM 4082 - STEEL PROTECTION - IMMERSION IN CHEMICALS - SOLVENT FREE EPOXY SYSTEM 4083 - STEEL PROTECTION - IMMERSION IN CHEMICALS - ZINC ETHYL SILICATE SYSTEM 4090 - STEEL PROTECTION - IMMERSION IN REFINED PETROLEUM PRODUCTS AND CRUDE OIL HIGH SOLIDS EPOXY SYSTEM
4091 - STEEL PROTECTION - IMMERSION IN REFINED PETROLEUM PRODUCTS AND CRUDE OIL EPOXY TAR SYSTEM 4092 - STEEL PROTECTION - IMMERSION IN REFINED PETROLEUM PRODUCTS AND CRUDE OIL SOLVENT FREE EPOXY SYSTEM 4101 - STEEL PROTECTION - IMMERSION IN WASTE WATER AND SLURRY - EPOXY TAR SYSTEM 4102 - STEEL PROTECTION - IMMERSION IN WASTE WATER AND SLURRY - HIGH SOLIDS TAR FREE EPOXY SYSTEM 4103 - STEEL PROTECTION - IMMERSION IN WASTE WATER AND SLURRY - SOLVENT FREE PHENLIC EPOXY SYSTEM 4113 - STEEL PROTECTION - SYSTEM FOR SPECIAL CONDITIONS - ZINC EPOXY PRIMED STEEL
Information sheet index

1410 - CONVERSION TABLES 1411 - EXPLANATION TO PRODUCT DATA SHEETS 1430 - SAFETY INDICATIONS 1431 - SAFETY IN CONFINED SPACES AND HEALT SAFETY EXPLOSION HAZARD - TOXIC HAZARD 1433 - SAFE WORKING IN CONFINED SPACES 1434 - DIRECTIVES FOR VENTILATION PRACTICE 1490 - CLEANING OF STEEL AND REMOVAL OF RUST 1491 - SPECIFICATION FOR MINERAL ABRASIVES 1492 - SURFACE PREPARATION OF STEEL PIPES AND FITTINGS - SHOP APPLICATION 1493 - INTERNAL CHEMICAL CLEANING OF STEEL PIPES - IN-SITU APPLICATION 1496 - SURFACE PREPARATION OF CONCRETE (FLOORS) 1650 - RELATIVE HUMIDITY - SUBSTRATE TEMPERATURE - AIR TEMPERATURE
NOVAGUARD 810
4 pages November 2010
DESCRIPTION
two component solvent free amine rapid cured phenolic epoxy coating one coat tank coating system excellent resistance to crude oil up to 176F (80C) suitable for storage of unleaded gasolines good chemical resistance against chemicals and solvents good visibility due to light colour dry heat resistance 248F (120C) easy to clean reduced explosion risk and re hazard
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20C Mass density Volume solids VOC (supplied) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Full cure after Shelf life (cool and dry place)
light grey - semigloss (1 g/cm = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) approx. 11.0 lbs/gal (1.3 g/cm) 98 2% max. 97 g/l (0.81 lb/gal) see information sheet 1411 300 - 600 m depending on system 134.3 ft/gal for 12 mils ( 3.3 m/l for 300 m) 4 hours min. 6 hours * max. 28 days * 2 days * (data for components) at least 12 months
* see additional data
RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES
steel; blast cleaned to a minimum of ISO-Sa2 or SSPC-SP10 , blasting prole 2 - 4 mils (50 - 100 m) substrate temperature should be above 41F ( 5C) and at least 5F (3C) above dew point during application and curing mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 80 : 20 ( 4:1 ) the temperature of the mixed base and hardener should preferably be at least 104F (40C) at lower temperature the viscosity will be too high for spray application no thinner should be added for recommended application instructions: see working procedure
INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE
Induction time
none
page 1/4
NOVAGUARD 810
November 2010
AIRLESS SPRAY
Recommended thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure CLEANING SOLVENT
use heated airless spray plural component equipment in-line heating or insulated hoses may be necessary to avoid cooling down of paint in hoses at low air temperature length of hoses should be as short as possible no thinner should be added approx 0.019- 0.023 in 4000 Psi ( approx 280 Bar ) Thinner 90-53 all equipment used for application must be cleaned immediately after use paint inside the spraying equipment must be removed before the pot life time has been expired for paint and recommended thinners see safety sheets 1430, 1431 and relevant material safety data sheets although this is a solvent free paint, care should be taken to avoid inhalation of spray mist as well as contact between the wet paint and exposed skin or eyes no solvent present; however, spray mist is not harmless, a fresh air mask should be used during spraying ventilation should be provided in conned spaces to maintain good visibility
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
ADDITIONAL DATA
Film thickness and spreading rate theoretical spreading rate ft/gal 134.3 dft in mils 12 69.2 24
measuring wet lm thickness a deviation is often obtained between the measured apparent wft and the real applied wft this is due to the thixotropy and the surface tension of the paint which retards the release of air trapped in the paint lm for some time recommendation is to apply a wft which is equal to the specied dft plus 2.4 mil (60 m) measuring dry lm thickness because of low initial hardness the dft cannot be measured within some days due to the penetration of the measuring device into the soft paint lm the dft should be measured using a calibration foil of known thickness placed in between the coating and the measuring device
page 2/4
NOVAGUARD 810
November 2010
Overcoating with Novaguard 810 (spot repair and stripe coating) substrate temperature minimum interval maximum interval 50F (10C) 12 hours 28 days 68F (20C) 6 hours 28 days 86F (30C) 4 hours 28 days 122F (50C) 2 hours 14 days
surface should be dry and free from any contamination Curing table substrate temperature 50F (10C) 68F (20C) 86F (30C) 122F (50C) dry to handle 20 hours 9 hours 7 hours 4 hours full cure 3 days 2 days 1 day 12 hours
adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) for storage and transport of drinking water the recommended working procedure should be followed Worldwide availability Whilst it is always the aim of PPG Protective & Marine Coatings to supply the same product on a worldwide basis, slight modication of the product is sometimes necessary to comply with local or national rules/circumstances. Under these circumstances an alternative product data sheet is used. Explanation to product data sheets Safety indications Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard Safe working in conned spaces Directives for ventilation practice Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Specication for mineral abrasives see information sheet 1411 see information sheet 1430 see information sheet 1431 see information sheet 1433 see information sheet 1434 see information sheet 1490 see information sheet 1491
REFERENCES
page 3/4
NOVAGUARD 810
November 2010
LIMITATION OF LIABILITY The information in this data sheet is based upon laboratory tests we believe to be accurate and is intended for guidance only. All recommendations or suggestions relating to the use of the Sigma Coatings products made by PPG Protective & Marine Coatings, whether in technical documentation, or in response to a specic enquiry, or otherwise, are based on data which to the best of our knowledge are reliable. The products and information are designed for users having the requisite knowledge and industrial skills and it is the end-user's responsibility to determine the suitability of the product for its intended use. PPG Protective & Marine Coatings has no control over either the quality or condition of the substrate, or the many factors affecting the use and application of the product. PPG Protective & Marine Coatings does therefore not accept any liability arising from loss, injury or damage resulting from such use or the contents of this data sheet (unless there are written agreements stating otherwise). The data contained herein are liable to modication as a result of practical experience and continuous product development. This data sheet replaces and annuls all previous issues and it is therefore the user's responsibility to ensure that this sheet is current prior to using the product. The English text of this document shall prevail over any translation thereof.
PDS
7460
page 4/4
NOVAGUARD 830
3 pages April 2009 Revision of November 2005
DESCRIPTION
two component solvent free amine cured phenolic epoxy compound
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS sprayable caulking to overlap the welding seams suitable caulking compound for use under SigmaGuard CSF 650 and Novaguard 840 excellent chemical resistance against crude oil, unleaded gasolines and a wide range of petrochemicals and solvents can be applied by heavy duty single feed airless spray equipment (60:1) good visibility due to light colour reduced explosion risk and re hazard COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20C Mass density Volume solids VOC (supplied) Recommended dry lm thickness Touch dry after Overcoating interval Full cure after cream - gloss (1 g/cm = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.4 g/cm 100% max. 105 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 144 g/l (approx. 1.2 lb/gal) 3500 - 5000 m depending on system 6 hours min. 16 hours * max. 3 months * 5 days * (data for components) Shelf life (cool and dry place) RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE at least 12 months steel; blast cleaned to a minimum of ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 50 - 100 m steel with suitable holding primer (SigmaGuard 260 or SigmaCover 280) which must be dry, clean and free from any contamination mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 75 : 25 when mixing the temperature of the base and hardener should be at least 20C at lower temperature the viscosity will be too high for spray application no thinner should be added Induction time Pot life none 1 hour at 20C *
page 1/3
NOVAGUARD 830
April 2009
AIRLESS SPRAY
Recommended thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure
heavy duty single feed airless spray equipment with a minimum of 60:1 pump ratio and suitable high pressure hoses in-line heating or insulated hoses may be necessary to avoid cooling down of paint in hoses at low air temperature length of hoses should be as short as possible no thinner should be added approx. 0.67 mm (= 0.026 in) at an angle of 30 40 at 20C (paint temperature) min. 30 MPa (= approx. 350 bar; 5000 p.s.i.) at 30C (paint temperature) min. 25 MPa (= approx. 250 bar; 3500 p.s.i.) Thinner 90-83 all application equipment must be cleaned immediately after use paint inside the spraying equipment must be removed before the pot life time has been expired for paint and recommended thinners see safety sheets 1430, 1431 and relevant material safety data sheets Film thickness and spreading rate theoretical spreading rate m/l dft in m 0.3 3000
CLEANING SOLVENT
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
ADDITIONAL DATA
structure: in different layers wet in wet in order to reach the required lm thickness Overcoating table with solvent free tanklinings substrate temperature 10C minimum interval maximum interval 30 hours 3 months 20C 16 hours 2 months 30C 12 hours 1 month
surface should be dry and free from any contamination Curing table substrate temperature 10C 20C 30C dry to handle 30 hours 16 hours 10 hours full cure 7 days 5 days 3 days
although the paint is solvent free adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheet 1433 and 1434)
page 2/3
NOVAGUARD 830
April 2009
Pot life 20C 30C 60 min. 45 min.
due to exothermic reaction, temperature during and after mixing may increase Worldwide availability Whilst it is always the aim of PPG Protective & Marine Coatings to supply the same product on a worldwide basis, slight modication of the product is sometimes necessary to comply with local or national rules/circumstances. Under these circumstances an alternative product data sheet is used. Explanation to product data sheets Safety indications Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard Safe working in conned spaces Directives for ventilation practice Cleaning of steel and removal of rust see information sheet 1411 see information sheet 1430 see information sheet 1431 see information sheet 1433 see information sheet 1434 see information sheet 1490
REFERENCES
PDS
7945
page 3/3
NOVAGUARD 840
5 pages March 2011 Revision of April 2009
DESCRIPTION
two component solvent free amine cured novolac phenolic epoxy coating
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS one coat tank coating system clear version for glassmat reinforced solvent free tank bottom system (see system sheet 4145) excellent resistance to crude oil up to 90C suitable for storage of unleaded gasolines good chemical resistance against a wide range of chemicals and solvents good visibility due to light colour glossy and smooth appearance easy to clean can be applied by heavy duty single feed airless spray equipment (60:1) reduced explosion risk and re hazard approved to Air BP F2D2 section 2.1 for the storage of jet fuels COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20C Mass density Volume solids VOC (supplied) green, cream, clear - gloss (1 g/cm = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.3 g/cm 100% max. 106 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 142 g/l (approx. 1.2 lb/gal) 73 g/ltr (0.9 lb/gal) (by EPA Method 24) see information sheet 1411 300 - 600 m depending on system 3.3 m/l for 300 m * 6 hours min. 24 hours * max. 2 months * 5 days * (data for components) Shelf life (cool and dry place) at least 12 months
Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Full cure after
steel; blast cleaned to a minimum of ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 50 - 100 m substrate temperature must be above 5C and at least 3C above dew point during application and curing steel with suitable primer (SigmaGuard 260) which must be dry, clean and free from any contamination
page 1/5
NOVAGUARD 840
March 2011
mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 80 : 20 the temperature of the mixed base and hardener should preferably be at least 20C at lower temperature the viscosity will be too high for spray application no thinner should be added for recommended application instructions: see working procedure
Induction time Pot life
none 1 hour at 20C *

AIRLESS SPRAY
use heavy duty single feed airless spray equipment preferably 60:1 pump ratio and suitable high pressure hoses in-line heating or insulated hoses may be necessary to avoid cooling down of paint in hoses at low air temperature length of hoses should be as short as possible no thinner should be added approx. 0.53 mm (= 0.021 in) at 20C (paint temperature) min. 28 MPa (= approx. 280 bar; 4000 p.s.i.) at 30C (paint temperature) min. 22 MPa (= approx. 220 bar; 3000 p.s.i.) for stripe coating and spot repair only no thinner should be added Thinner 90-83 (preferred) or Thinner 90-53 all equipment used for application must be cleaned immediately after use paint inside the spraying equipment must be removed before the pot life time has been expired for paint and recommended thinners see safety sheets 1430, 1431 and relevant material safety data sheets although this is a solvent free paint, care should be taken to avoid inhalation of spray mist as well as contact between the wet paint and exposed skin or eyes no solvent present; however, spray mist is not harmless, a fresh air mask should be used during spraying ventilation should be provided in conned spaces to maintain good visibility
BRUSH/ROLLER Recommended thinner CLEANING SOLVENT
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 2/5
NOVAGUARD 840
March 2011
ADDITIONAL DATA
Film thickness and spreading rate theoretical spreading rate m/l dft in m max. dft when brushing: 3.3 300 1.7 600 150 m
measuring wet lm thickness a deviation is often obtained between the measured apparent wft and the real applied wft this is due to the thixotropy and the surface tension of the paint which retards the release of air trapped in the paint lm for some time recommendation is to apply a wft which is equal to the specied dft plus 60 m measuring dry lm thickness because of low initial hardness the dft cannot be measured within some days due to the penetration of the measuring device into the soft paint lm the dft should be measured using a calibration foil of known thickness placed in between the coating and the measuring device Overcoating with Novaguard 840 (spot repair and stripe coating) substrate temperature minimum interval maximum interval 5C 80 hours 3 months 10C 36 hours 3 months 20C 24 hours 2 months 30C 16 hours 1 month
surface should be dry and free from any contamination
page 3/5
NOVAGUARD 840
March 2011
Curing table substrate temperature 5C 10C 20C 30C dry to handle 60 hours 30 hours 16 hours 10 hours full cure 15 days 7 days 5 days 3 days
adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) for storage and transport of drinking water the recommended working procedure should be followed WASHING PROCEDURE all personnel should wear watertight suits, boots and gloves properly cleaned with a sodium hypochlorite solution (1% active chlorine per liter) all tank sides, bottom and deckheads etc. should be brush cleaned or highpressure spray cleaned with 1% active chlorine solution as above note: this can also be done by butterworth washing all parts should be high pressure cleaned with tap water and tanks drained concentrated active chlorine solution should be sprinkled on bottom; approx. 1 ltr/10 m tanks should be lled with tap water to a depth of approx. 20 cm and the water should remain in the tank for at least 2 hours (max. 24 hours) tanks should be thoroughly ushed out with tap water depending upon local regulations it may be necessary to take water samples, after lling tank completely, to check on bacteria after this procedure the tanks will be t to carry drinking water Pot life (at application viscosity) 20C 30C 60 min. 45 min.
due to exothermic reaction, temperature during and after mixing may increase Worldwide availability Whilst it is always the aim of PPG Protective & Marine Coatings to supply the same product on a worldwide basis, slight modication of the product is sometimes necessary to comply with local or national rules/circumstances. Under these circumstances an alternative product data sheet is used.
page 4/5
NOVAGUARD 840
March 2011
REFERENCES
Explanation to product data sheets Safety indications Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard Safe working in conned spaces Directives for ventilation practice Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Specication for mineral abrasives
see information sheet 1411 see information sheet 1430 see information sheet 1431 see information sheet 1433 see information sheet 1434 see information sheet 1490 see information sheet 1491
237775 180207
PDS cream green
7468 3012002200 4000001400
page 5/5
NOVAGUARD 890
DESCRIPTION
two component solvent free amine cured novolac phenolic epoxy coating
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS one coat tank coating system excellent resistance to crude oil up to 90C suitable for storage of unleaded gasolines blended up to 100% ethanol (E5 up to E100) suitable for storage of biodiesel (EN14214) good chemical resistance against a wide range of chemicals and solvents good visibility due to light colour semigloss and smooth appearance clear version for glassmat reinforced solvent free tank bottom system (see system sheet 4155) easy to clean can be applied by heavy duty single feed airless spray equipment (60:1) reduced explosion risk and re hazard COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20C Mass density Volume solids VOC (supplied) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Full cure after Shelf life (cool and dry place) green, cream, clear - semigloss (1 g/cm = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.4 g/cm 100% max. 94 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 131 g/l (approx. 1.1 lb/gal) see information sheet 1411 300 - 600 m depending on system 3.3 m/l for 300 m * 8 hours min. 24 hours * max. 2 months * 6 days * (data for components) at least 12 months
steel; blast cleaned to a minimum of ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 50 - 100 m substrate temperature should be above 5C and at least 3C above dew point during application and curing steel with suitable primer (SigmaGuard 260) which must be dry, clean and free from any contamination
page 1/4
NOVAGUARD 890
March 2011

AIRLESS SPRAY Recommended thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure
use heavy duty single feed airless spray equipment preferably 60:1 pump ratio and suitable high pressure hoses no thinner should be added approx. 0.53 mm (= 0.021 in) at 20C (paint temperature) min. 28 MPa (= approx. 280 bar; 4000 p.s.i.) at 30C (paint temperature) min. 22 MPa (= approx. 220 bar; 3000 p.s.i.) for stripe coating and spot repair only no thinner should be added Thinner 90-83 (preferred) or Thinner 90-53 all application equipment must be cleaned immediately after use paint inside the spraying equipment must be removed before the pot life time has been expired for paint and recommended thinners see safety sheets 1430, 1431 and relevant material safety data sheets although this is a solvent free paint, care should be taken to avoid inhalation of spray mist as well as contact between the wet paint and exposed skin or eyes no solvent present; however, spray mist is not harmless, a fresh air mask should be used during spraying ventilation should be provided in conned spaces to maintain good visibility
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 2/4
NOVAGUARD 890
March 2011
ADDITIONAL DATA
measuring wet lm thickness a deviation is often obtained between the measured apparent wft and the real applied wft this is due to the thixotropy and the surface tension of the paint which retards the release of air trapped in the paint lm for some time recommendation is to apply a wft which is equal to the specied dft plus 60 m measuring dry lm thickness because of low initial hardness the dft cannot be measured for some days (depending on ambient temperature) after application due to the penetration of the measuring device into the paint lm the dft should be measured using a calibration foil of known thickness placed in between the coating and the measuring device Overcoating table with itself (spot repair and stripe coating) substrate temperature minimum interval maximum interval 10C 36 hours 3 months 20C 24 hours 2 months 30C 16 hours 1 month
adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) for storage and transport of drinking water the recommended working procedure should be followed
page 3/4
NOVAGUARD 890
March 2011
Pot life (at application viscosity) 20C 30C 60 min. 45 min.
due to exothermic reaction, temperature during and after mixing may increase Worldwide availability Whilst it is always the aim of PPG Protective & Marine Coatings to supply the same product on a worldwide basis, slight modication of the product is sometimes necessary to comply with local or national rules/circumstances. Under these circumstances an alternative product data sheet is used. Explanation to product data sheets Safety indications Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard Safe working in conned spaces Directives for ventilation practice Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Specication for mineral abrasives see information sheet 1411 see information sheet 1430 see information sheet 1431 see information sheet 1433 see information sheet 1434 see information sheet 1490 see information sheet 1491
REFERENCES
269264 282887
PDS green cream
7755 4194542200 3002002200
page 4/4
PHENGUARD 253
4 pages September 2011
DESCRIPTION
two component high build amine adduct cured novolac phenolic epoxy primer
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS excellent resistance to a wide range of organic acids, alcohols, edible oils and solvents maximum cargo exibility low cargo absorption Recognized corrosion control coating (Lloyd's register), see sheet 1886 good application properties, resulting in a smooth surface COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20C Mass density Volume solids VOC (supplied) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Overcoating interval Curing time Shelf life (cool and dry place) grey, offwhite - eggshell (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.4 g/cm 72 3% max. 200 g/l (approx. 1.8 lb/gal) 100 - 150 m 7.2 m/l for 100 m * min. 10 hours * max. 5 days * see curing table * (data for components) at least 12 months
steel; blast cleaned in situ to at least ISO-Sa2 and free from rust, scale, shop primer and any other contamination blasting prole 50 - 100 m the substrate must be perfectly dry before and during application of Phenguard 253 substrate temperature must be above 10C and at least 3C above dew point during application and curing mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 80 : 20 the temperature of the mixed base and hardener should preferably be above 15C, otherwise extra solvent may be required to obtain application viscosity too much solvent results in reduced sag resistance and slower cure thinner should be added after mixing the components
Induction time
allow induction time before use 15C - 45 min. 20C - 30 min. 25C - 15 min. 4 hours at 20C *
Pot life
page 1/4
PHENGUARD 253
September 2011
AIRLESS SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure AIR SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure BRUSH/ROLLER Recommended thinner Volume of thinner CLEANING SOLVENT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Thinner 91-92 5 - 10%, depending on required thickness and application conditions approx. 0.46 - 0.53 mm (= 0.018 - 0.021 in) 15 MPa (= approx. 150 bar; 2130 p.s.i.) Thinner 91-92 5 - 10%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 2 mm 0.3 MPa (= approx. 3 bar; 43 p.s.i.) only for spot repair and stripe coating Thinner 91-92 0 - 5% Thinner 90-53 for paint and recommended thinners see safety sheets 1430, 1431 and relevant material safety data sheets this is a solvent borne paint and care should be taken to avoid inhalation of spray mist or vapour as well as contact between the wet paint and exposed skin or eyes
ADDITIONAL DATA
Film thickness and spreading rate theoretical spreading rate m/l dft in m 7.2 100 4.8 150
Overcoating table for Phenguard 253 substrate temperature minimum interval maximum interval 10C 24 hours 7 days 15C 16 hours 6 days 20C 10 hours 5 days 30C 4 hours 4 days 40C 3 hours 3 days
page 2/4
PHENGUARD 253
September 2011
Curing table substrate temperature min. curing time of Phenguard 253 tankcoating system before transport of cargoes. Please contact your PPG PMC representative for further details. 14 days 10 days 7 days 4 days 4 days
10C 15C 20C 30C 40C Pot life (at application viscosity) 10C 20C 30C Worldwide availability
6 hours 4 hours 2 hours
Whilst it is always the aim of PPG Protective & Marine Coatings to supply the same product on a worldwide basis, slight modication of the product is sometimes necessary to comply with local or national rules/circumstances. Under these circumstances an alternative product data sheet is used. Explanation to product data sheets Safety indications Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard Safe working in conned spaces Directives for ventilation practice Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Specication for mineral abrasives see information sheet 1411 see information sheet 1430 see information sheet 1431 see information sheet 1433 see information sheet 1434 see information sheet 1490 see information sheet 1491
REFERENCES
page 3/4
PHENGUARD 253
September 2011
PDS
7447
page 4/4
PHENGUARD 930
DESCRIPTION
two component high build amine adduct cured novolac phenolic epoxy primer
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS primer coat in the Phenguard tankcoating system excellent resistance to a wide range of organic acids, alcohols, edible oils, fats (regardless of free fatty acid content) and solvents maximum cargo exibility low cargo absorption good resistance to hot water Recognized corrosion control coating (Lloyd's register), see sheet 1886 good application properties, resulting in a smooth surface COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20C Mass density Volume solids VOC (supplied) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Curing time Shelf life (cool and dry place) offwhite - eggshell (1 g/cm = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.7 g/cm 66 2% max. 191 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 315 g/l (approx. 2.6 lb/gal) 100 m * 6.6 m/l for 100 m * 2 hours min. 36 hours * max. 21 days * see curing table * (data for components) at least 12 months
steel; blast cleaned in situ to at least ISO-Sa2 and free from rust, scale, shop primer and any other contamination blasting prole 50 - 100 m the substrate must be perfectly dry before and during application of Phenguard 930 substrate temperature must be above 10C and at least 3C above dew point during application and curing marine tankcoatings system sheet: 3141 system sheet: 3322
SYSTEM SPECIFICATION
page 1/4
PHENGUARD 930
March 2011
mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 88 : 12 the temperature of the mixed base and hardener should preferably be above 15C, otherwise extra solvent may be required to obtain application viscosity too much solvent results in reduced sag resistance and slower cure thinner should be added after mixing the components
Induction time
Pot life
ADDITIONAL DATA
page 2/4
PHENGUARD 930
March 2011
Overcoating table for Phenguard 935 and SigmaGuard 790 substrate temperature minimum interval maximum interval 10C 60 hours 28 days 15C 48 hours 25 days 20C 36 hours 21 days 30C 24 hours 14 days 40C 16 hours 7 days
surface should be dry and free from any contamination Curing table substrate temperature min. curing time of Phenguard tankcoating system before transport of cargoes without note 4, 7, 8 or 11 and ballast water and tanktest with sea water 14 days 14 days 10 days 7 days 5 days
10C 15C 20C 30C 40C
minimum curing time of Phenguard tankcoating system before transport of cargoes with note 4, 7, 8 or 11: 3 months for detailed information on resistance and resistance notes, please refer to the latest issue of the Cargo Resistance List for transport of methanol and vinyl acetate monomer, a hot cargo cure is required which cannot be substituted by a service period of 3 months with non-aggressive cargoes adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) the performance of the applied system strongly depends on the curing degree of the rst coat at time of recoating. Therefore overcoating time between 1st and 2nd coat is extended in comparison between 2nd and 3rd coat (see overcoating details) when used as a primer under solvent free tank-linings the dft must be limited to a maximum of 100 m Pot life (at application viscosity) 10C 20C 30C 6 hours 4 hours 1.5 hour
page 3/4
PHENGUARD 930
March 2011
Worldwide availability
REFERENCES
180706
PDS offwhite
7409 7001002200
page 4/4
PHENGUARD 935
DESCRIPTION
two component high build amine adduct cured novolac phenolic epoxy coating
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS second coat in the Phenguard tankcoating system excellent resistance to a wide range of organic acids, alcohols, edible oils, fats (regardless of free fatty acid content) and solvents maximum cargo exibility low cargo absorption good resistance to hot water Recognized corrosion control coating (Lloyd's register), see sheet 1886 good application properties, resulting in a smooth surface COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20C Mass density Volume solids VOC (supplied) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Curing time Shelf life (cool and dry place) pink - eggshell (1 g/cm = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.7 g/cm 66 2% max. 191 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 315 g/l (approx. 2.6 lb/gal) 100 m * 6.6 m/l for 100 m * 2 hours min. 24 hours * max. 21 days * see curing table * (data for components) at least 12 months
previous coat of Phenguard 930; dry and free from any contamination the substrate must be perfectly dry before and during application of Phenguard 935 substrate temperature must be above 10C and at least 3C above dew point during application and curing marine tankcoatings system sheet: 3141 system sheet: 3322
page 1/4
PHENGUARD 935
March 2011
Induction time
Pot life
Thinner 91-92 2 - 10%, depending on required thickness and application conditions approx. 0.46 - 0.53 mm (= 0.018 - 0.021 in) 15 MPa (= approx. 150 bar; 2130 p.s.i.) Thinner 91-92 2 - 10%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 2 mm 0.3 MPa (= approx. 3 bar; 43 p.s.i.) Thinner 91-92 0 - 5% Thinner 90-53 for paint and recommended thinners see safety sheets 1430, 1431 and relevant material safety data sheets this is a solvent borne paint and care should be taken to avoid inhalation of spray mist or vapour as well as contact between the wet paint and exposed skin or eyes
ADDITIONAL DATA
page 2/4
PHENGUARD 935
March 2011
10C 15C 20C 30C 40C
minimum curing time of Phenguard tankcoating system before transport of cargoes with note 4, 7, 8 or 11: 3 months for detailed information on resistance and resistance notes, please refer to the latest issue of the Cargo Resistance List for transport of methanol and vinyl acetate monomer, a hot cargo cure is required which cannot be substituted by a service period of 3 months with non-aggressive cargoes adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) the performance of the applied system strongly depends on the curing degree of the rst coat at time of recoating. Therefore overcoating time between 1st and 2nd coat is extended in comparison between 2nd and 3rd coat (see overcoating details) Pot life (at application viscosity) 10C 20C 30C 6 hours 4 hours 1.5 hour
page 3/4
PHENGUARD 935
March 2011
Whilst it is always the aim of PPG Protective & Marine Coatings to supply the same product on a worldwide basis, slight modication of the product is sometimes necessary to comply with local or national rules/circumstances. Under these circumstances an alternative product data sheet is used. Explanation to product data sheets Safety indications Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard Safe working in conned spaces Directives for ventilation practice Specication for mineral abrasives see information sheet 1411 see information sheet 1430 see information sheet 1431 see information sheet 1433 see information sheet 1434 see information sheet 1491
REFERENCES
179115
PDS pink
7435 6007002200
page 4/4
PHENGUARD 940
DESCRIPTION
two component high build amine adduct cured novolac phenolic epoxy nish
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS nish coat in the Phenguard tankcoating system excellent resistance to a wide range of organic acids, alcohols, edible oils, fats (regardless of free fatty acid content) and solvents maximum cargo exibility low cargo absorption good resistance to hot water Recognized corrosion control coating (Lloyd's register), see sheet 1886 good application properties, resulting in a smooth surface easy to clean COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20C Mass density Volume solids VOC (supplied) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Curing time Shelf life (cool and dry place) light grey (green on request) - eggshell (1 g/cm = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.7 g/cm 66 2% max. 191 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 315 g/l (approx. 2.6 lb/gal) 100 m * 6.6 m/l for 100 m * 2 hours min. 24 hours * max. 21 days * see curing table * (data for components) at least 12 months
previous coat of Phenguard 935; dry and free from any contamination the substrate must be perfectly dry before and during application of Phenguard 940 substrate temperature must be above 10C and at least 3C above dew point during application and curing marine tankcoatings system sheet: 3141 system sheet: 3322
page 1/4
PHENGUARD 940
March 2011
Induction time
Pot life
ADDITIONAL DATA
page 2/4
PHENGUARD 940
March 2011
10C 15C 20C 30C 40C
minimum curing time of Phenguard tankcoating system before transport of cargoes with note 4, 7, 8 or 11: 3 months for detailed information on resistance and resistance notes, please refer to the latest issue of the Cargo Resistance List for transport of methanol and vinyl acetate monomer, a hot cargo cure is required which cannot be substituted by a service period of 3 months with non-aggressive cargoes adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) the performance of the applied system strongly depends on the curing degree of the rst coat at time of recoating. Therefore overcoating time between 1st and 2nd coat is extended in comparison between 2nd and 3rd coat (see overcoating details) Pot life (at application viscosity) 10C 20C 30C 6 hours 4 hours 1.5 hour
page 3/4
PHENGUARD 940
March 2011
Whilst it is always the aim of PPG Protective & Marine Coatings to supply the same product on a worldwide basis, slight modication of the product is sometimes necessary to comply with local or national rules/circumstances. Under these circumstances an alternative product data sheet is used. Explanation to product data sheets Safety indications Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard Safe working in conned spaces Directives for ventilation practice Specication for mineral abrasives see information sheet 1411 see information sheet 1430 see information sheet 1431 see information sheet 1433 see information sheet 1434 see information sheet 1491
REFERENCES
179116 179118
PDS green grey
7436 4000002200 5000002200
page 4/4
PHENGUARD 965
DESCRIPTION
two component high build amine adduct cured novolac phenolic epoxy coating
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS Phenguard 965 system excellent resistance to a wide range of organic acids, alcohols, fats (regardless of free fatty acid content) and solvents maximum cargo exibility low cargo absorption easy to clean good resistance to hot water can be applied and cures at temperatures down to +5C good application properties, resulting in a smooth surface COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20C Mass density Volume solids VOC (supplied) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Full cure after Shelf life (cool and dry place) RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES offwhite, pink, grey - eggshell (1 g/cm = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.7 g/cm 68 2% max. 195 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 329 g/l (approx. 2.7 lb/gal) 100 m * 6.8 m/l for 100 m * 2 - 3 hours at 20C, 14 - 16 hours at 5C min. 8 hours * max. 14 days * see curing table * (data for components) at least 12 months
steel; blast cleaned in situ to at least ISO-Sa2 and free from rust, scale, shop primer and any other contamination blasting prole 50 - 100 m the substrate must be perfectly dry before and during application of Phenguard 965 substrate temperature must be above 5C and at least 3C above dew point during application and curing Phenguard 965 offwhite Phenguard 965 pink Phenguard 965 grey 100 m 100 m 100 m
page 1/4
PHENGUARD 965
March 2011
mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 87 : 13 the temperature of the mixed base and hardener should preferably be above 15C, otherwise extra solvent may be required to obtain application viscosity too much solvent results in reduced sag resistance thinner should be added after mixing the components
Induction time
Pot life AIRLESS SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure AIR SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure BRUSH/ROLLER Recommended thinner Volume of thinner CLEANING SOLVENT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
ADDITIONAL DATA
page 2/4
PHENGUARD 965
March 2011
Overcoating table for Phenguard 965 for dft up to 100 m substrate temperature minimum interval maximum interval 5C 24 hours 28 days 10C 20 hours 25 days 15C 14 hours 21 days 20C 8 hours 14 days 30C 6 hours 7 days
surface should be dry and free from any contamination Curing table for dft up to 100 m substrate temperature min. curing time of Phenguard 965 system before transport of cargoes without note 4, 7, 8 or 11 and ballast water and tanktest with sea water 7 days 5 days 4 days 3 days 2 days
5C 10C 15C 20C 30C
minimum curing time of Phenguard 965 system before transport of cargoes with note 4, 7, 8 or 11: 3 months for detailed information on resistance and resistance notes, please refer to the latest issue of the Cargo Resistance List for transport of methanol and vinyl acetate monomer, a hot cargo cure is required which cannot be substituted by a service period of 3 months with non-aggressive cargoes adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) when used as a primer under solvent free tank-linings the dft must be limited to a maximum of 100 m Pot life (at application viscosity) 5C 10C 15C 20C 30C 8 hours 6 hours 4 hours 2 hours 1 hour
page 3/4
PHENGUARD 965
March 2011
Whilst it is always the aim of PPG Protective & Marine Coatings to supply the same product on a worldwide basis, slight modication of the product is sometimes necessary to comply with local or national rules/circumstances. Under these circumstances an alternative product data sheet is used. Explanation to product data sheets Safety indications Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard Safe working in conned spaces Directives for ventilation practice Cleaning of steel and removal of rust see information sheet 1411 see information sheet 1430 see information sheet 1431 see information sheet 1433 see information sheet 1434 see information sheet 1490
REFERENCES
199289 199282 199284
PDS offwhite pink grey
7959 7001002200 6007002200 5000002200
page 4/4
PITT-CHAR XP
3 pages July 2010 Revision of January 2009
DESCRIPTION
solvent free thick lm intumescent epoxy coating for hydrocarbon pool and jet res
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS highly durable intumescent coating for protection of steel against hydrocarbon pool and jet res; typical applications include: Offshore - structural steel members, bulkheads and decks Onshore - pipework, storage tanks and vessels unique exibility offers enhanced performance on vibrating structures and in conditions of explosion overpressure suitable for use in cryogenic conditions good resistance to splash and spillage of chemicals excellent abrasion resistance suitable for corrosivity categories up to C5-I and C5-M meets the requirements for Norsok M501 rev 5 accelerated aging and hydrocarbon re testing approved by DNV, Lloyds, BV, UL and GASAFE COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20C Mass density Volume solids VOC (supplied) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval grey - matt (1 g/cm = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.10 g/cm note:the applied density is dependent upon many variables such as temperature, test method and application method 100% max. 0 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 0 g/l (0 lb/gal) see information sheet 1411 normally 1000 - 7000 m applied in one coat note:the required dry lm thickness must be in accordance with the approval certication 1.10 kg/m for 1000 m * 10 hours * min. 4 hours max. 1 month (data for components) Shelf life (cool and dry place) base: at least 18 months hardener: at least 24 months
page 1/3
PITT-CHAR XP
July 2010
approved primer, dry, sound and free from contamination where mesh reinforcement of Pitt-Char XP is necessary, this should be carried out in accordance with the Pitt-Char XP Application Guidelines substrate temperature should be at least 5C and at least 3C above dew point during application and curing curing will be retarded at temperatures below 10C and will cease below 5C relative humidity during application must be lower than 85% mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener mixing ratio by weight: base to hardener for details see the Pitt-Char XP Application Guidelines none 45 minutes at 25C * twin feed application twin feed spray equipment utilising a minimum 10 inch King air motor is recommended base and hardener need to be pre-heated to a minimum of 60C while circulating through the unit suitable insulated and heated hoses should be used no thinner should be added 40 (for large at surfaces) approx. 0.89 - 1.09 mm (= 0.035 - 0.043 in) 24 MPa (= approx. 240 bar; 3500 p.s.i.) single feed application 5% - 7% of Thinner 60-30 may be necessary, but the quantity shall never exceed 10%. The addition of thinner will affect sag resistance and overcoating intervals. 60 (for large at surfaces) approx. 0.84 - 0.89 mm (= 0.033 - 0.035 in) 35 MPa (= approx. 350 bar; 5000 p.s.i.) use of spray equipment with a ratio of 74 : 1 is recommended material temperature (mixed): 23 - 35C the maximum length of the hoses should not exceed 30 m (recommended for small areas and touch up only) no thinner should be added Thinner 90-53 for paint and recommended thinners see safety sheets 1430, 1431 and relevant material safety data sheets although this is a solvent free paint, care should be taken to avoid inhalation of spray mist as well as contact between the wet paint and exposed skin or eyes 2.33 : 1 3.25 : 1
Induction time Pot life AIRLESS SPRAY
Recommended thinner Nozzle angle Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure Recommended thinner Nozzle angle Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure
TROWEL Recommended thinner CLEANING SOLVENT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 2/3
PITT-CHAR XP
July 2010
ADDITIONAL DATA
Curing table (for solvent free aplication) substrate temperature 10C 15C 25C 40C dry to handle (Shore D = 25) 52 hours 40 hours 13 hours 7 hours
curing times may vary depending on substrate, ambient and material temperature adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) REFERENCES Explanation to product data sheets Safety indications Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard see information sheet 1411 see information sheet 1430 see information sheet 1431
LIMITATION OF LIABILITY The information in this data sheet is based upon laboratory tests we believe to be accurate and is intended for guidance only. All recommendations or suggestions relating to the use of the coatings products made by PPG Protective & Marine Coatings, whether in technical documentation, or in response to a specic enquiry, or otherwise, are based on data which to the best of our knowledge are reliable. The products and information are designed for users having the requisite knowledge and industrial skills and it is the end-user's responsibility to determine the suitability of the product for its intended use. PPG Protective & Marine Coatings has no control over either the quality or condition of the substrate, or the many factors affecting the use and application of the product. PPG Protective & Marine Coatings does therefore not accept any liability arising from loss, injury or damage resulting from such use or the contents of this data sheet (unless there are written agreements stating otherwise). The data contained herein are liable to modication as a result of practical experience and continuous product development. This data sheet replaces and annuls all previous issues and it is therefore the user's responsibility to ensure that this sheet is current prior to using the product. The English text of this document shall prevail over any translation thereof.
281999
PDS grey
7589 3000002504
page 3/3
PSX 700
3 pages May 2011 Revision of February 2010
DESCRIPTION
two component engineered siloxane coating unique, high gloss, engineered siloxane can be applied directly over inorganic zinc excellent colour and gloss retention high solids, VOC compliant applied by brush, roller or spray, without thinning good resistance to splash and spillage of chemicals
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20C Mass density Volume solids VOC (supplied) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval
full colour range - gloss (data for mixed product) 1.36 g/cm 90 2% max. 119 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 164 g/l (approx. 1.4 lb/gal) 84 g/ltr (0.7 lb/gal) (by EPA Method 24) 75 - 175 m per coat 7.2 m/l for 125 m * 2 hours min. 3 hours * (data for components)
previous suitable coat; dry and free from any contamination aged suitable coatings; dry and free from any contamination and sufciently roughened prepare damaged areas to original surface preparation specications, feathering edges of intact coating for touch-up and repair; apply additional material after removing dirt, contaminants and old loose coatings or antifoulings substrate temperature should be above 0C and at least 3C above dew point during application and curing mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 80 : 20 use power mixer powered by an air- or an explosion proof electric motor none 4 hours at 20C *
INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE Induction time Pot life
page 1/3
PSX 700
May 2011
AIRLESS SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice BRUSH/ROLLER
Thinner 60-12/ Thinner 21-06 0 - 10%, depending on required thickness and application conditions approx. 0.15 - 0.21 mm (= 0.006 - 0.008 in) the recommended dft cannot be reached in one coat natural bristle maintain a wet edge level any air bubbles with bristle brush
CLEANING SOLVENT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Thinner 90-58 for paint and recommended thinners see safety sheets 1430, 1431 and relevant material safety data sheets this is a solvent borne paint and care should be taken to avoid inhalation of spray mist or vapour as well as contact between the wet paint and exposed skin or eyes
ADDITIONAL DATA
Film thickness and spreading rate dft in m theoretical spreading rate m/l 75 12.0 125 7.2 175 5.1
when applying more than 1 coat it is recommended that the total dry lm thickness does not exceed 250 m
Overcoating table for PSX 700 for dft up to 175 m substrate temperature minimum interval 5C 12 hours 10C 7 hours 20C 3 hours 30C 2 hours
Curing table for dft up to 175 m substrate temperature 5C 10C 20C 30C touch dry 7 hours 4.5 hours 2 hours 1 hour dry to handle 16 hours 8.5 hours 4.5 hours 3 hours
page 2/3
PSX 700
May 2011
Pot life (at application viscosity) 10C 20C 30C Worldwide availability 6.5 hours 4 hours 1.5 hour
Whilst it is always the aim of PPG Protective & Marine Coatings to supply the same product on a worldwide basis, slight modication of the product is sometimes necessary to comply with local or national rules/circumstances. Under these circumstances an alternative product data sheet is used. Explanation to product data sheets Safety indications Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard Surface preparation of concrete (oors) see information sheet 1411 see information sheet 1430 see information sheet 1431 see information sheet 1496
REFERENCES
PDS
7546
page 3/3
SIGMA AQUACOVER 20
3 pages September 2009 Revision of April 2007
DESCRIPTION
one component water borne high build zinc phosphate primer/coating based on acrylic dispersion
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS particularly suitable when solvents are not permitted because of health and safety reasons excellent adhesion to well pretreated steel good anticorrosive properties fast drying can be overcoated with most water borne acrylics, water borne epoxy coatings and alkyd paints as well as certain solvent borne two component products COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20C Mass density Volume solids VOC (supplied) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Shelf life (cool and dry place) RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES RAL colours (other colours available on request) - at (1 g/cm = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) 1.3 g/cm 43 2% max. 19 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 25 g/l (approx. 0.2 lb/gal) 75 m per coat 5.7 m/l for 75 m 30 minutes min. 4 hours max. unlimited at least 12 months steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 40 - 70 m steel; pretreated according to ISO-St3 shop primed steel; sweep blasted or power tool cleaned to SPSS-Ss or SPSS-Pt2 substrate temperature should be at least 5C and at least 3C above dew point during application and curing maximum relative humidity during application and curing is 75% stir well before use the temperature of the paint should preferably be above 15C, otherwise extra tap water may be required to obtain application viscosity too much tap water results in reduced sag resistance must be protected from freezing at all times during storage and/or transport
AIRLESS SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure
tap water 0 - 5%, depending on required thickness and application conditions approx. 0.46 - 0.53 mm (= 0.018 - 0.021 in) 12 - 15 MPa (= approx. 120 - 150 bar; 1700 - 2130 p.s.i.)
page 1/3
SIGMA AQUACOVER 20
September 2009
AIR SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure BRUSH/ROLLER * Recommended thinner Volume of thinner
tap water 5 - 10%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 1.8 - 2 mm 0.3 - 0.4 MPa (= approx. 3 - 4 bar; 43 - 57 p.s.i.) long haired brush or polyether roller with rounded edges tap water 0 - 5%
* for localised areas of difcult access only
CLEANING SOLVENT
tap water and Thinner 70-05 Cleaning Procedures of the spray equipment: pulsator lter and tip lter must be taken out of the equipment and cleaned properly following tables illustrate the cleaning procedure of the spray equipment when changing spraying from solvent borne paint to water borne paints (table 1) and from water borne paints to solvent borne paints (table 2)
CLEANING PROCEDURE
Table 1: from solvent borne- to water borne paints 1st cleaning 2nd cleaning 3rd cleaning with Thinner 90-53 with Thinner 70-05 with warm tap water (30 - 35C) after which water borne paints can be sprayed
Table 2: from water borne- to solvent borne paints 1st cleaning 2nd cleaning 3rd cleaning with warm tap water (30 - 35C) with Thinner 70-05 with Thinner 90-53
Thinner 70-05 can be re-used
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
for paint and recommended thinners see safety sheets 1430, 1431 and relevant material safety data sheets although this is a water borne paint, care should be taken to avoid inhalation of spray mist or vapour as well as contact between the wet paint and exposed skin or eyes
page 2/3
SIGMA AQUACOVER 20
September 2009
ADDITIONAL DATA with water borne acrylic and alkyd nishes
Overcoating table for Sigma Aquacover 20 for dft up to 75 m substrate temperature minimum interval maximum interval 5C 16 hours unlimited 10C 6 hours unlimited 20C 4 hours unlimited 30C 3 hours unlimited
surface should be dry and free from any contamination Worldwide availability Whilst it is always the aim of PPG Protective & Marine Coatings to supply the same product on a worldwide basis, slight modication of the product is sometimes necessary to comply with local or national rules/circumstances. Under these circumstances an alternative product data sheet is used. Explanation to product data sheets Safety indications Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard Cleaning of steel and removal of rust see information sheet 1411 see information sheet 1430 see information sheet 1431 see information sheet 1490
REFERENCES
177804 186582
PDS redbrown RAL 7030
7149 2008002200 7030262200
page 3/3
SIGMA AQUACOVER 22
DESCRIPTION
one component water borne micaceous iron oxide pigmented primer based on acrylic dispersion
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS particularly suitable when solvents are not permitted because of health and safety reasons developed to give excellent adhesion to galvanised steel fast drying can be overcoated with most water borne acrylics, water borne epoxy coatings and alkyd paints COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20C Mass density Volume solids VOC (supplied) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Shelf life (cool and dry place) RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES redbrown - at (1 g/cm = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) 1.4 g/cm 40 2% max. 35 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 50 g/l (approx. 0.4 lb/gal) 50 m per coat 8 m/l for 50 m 15 - 30 minutes min. 4 hours max. unlimited at least 12 months galvanised steel; sweep blasted or otherwise roughened; dry and free from salts and other contamination substrate temperature should be at least 5C and at least 3C above dew point during application and curing maximum relative humidity during application and curing is 75% stir well before use the temperature of the paint should preferably be above 15C, otherwise extra tap water may be required to obtain application viscosity too much tap water results in reduced sag resistance must be protected from freezing at all times during storage and/or transport
page 1/3
SIGMA AQUACOVER 22
September 2009
AIR SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure BRUSH/ROLLER Recommended thinner Volume of thinner CLEANING SOLVENT
tap water 5 - 15%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 1.8 - 2 mm 0.3 - 0.4 MPa (= approx. 3 - 4 bar; 43 - 57 p.s.i.) long haired brush or polyether roller with rounded edges tap water 0 - 5% tap water and Thinner 70-05 Cleaning Procedures of the spray equipment: pulsator lter and tip lter must be taken out of the equipment and cleaned properly following tables illustrate the cleaning procedure of the spray equipment when changing spraying from solvent borne paint to water borne paints (table 1) and from water borne paints to solvent borne paints (table 2)
CLEANING PROCEDURE
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 2/3
SIGMA AQUACOVER 22
September 2009
ADDITIONAL DATA with water borne acrylic and alkyd nishes
surface should be dry and free from any contamination Worldwide availability Whilst it is always the aim of PPG Protective & Marine Coatings to supply the same product on a worldwide basis, slight modication of the product is sometimes necessary to comply with local or national rules/circumstances. Under these circumstances an alternative product data sheet is used. Explanation to product data sheets Safe working in conned spaces Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard Cleaning of steel and removal of rust see information sheet 1411 see information sheet 1433 see information sheet 1431 see information sheet 1490
REFERENCES
140103
PDS redbrown
7145 2008002200
page 3/3
SIGMA AQUACOVER 35
DESCRIPTION
one component water borne micaceous iron oxide pigmented acrylic dispersion coating
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS particularly suitable when solvents are not permitted because of health and safety reasons contains non toxic pigments excellent adhesion to various types of old or weathered paints fast drying can be overcoated with most water borne acrylics, water borne epoxy coatings and alkyd paints as well as certain solvent borne two component products COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20C Mass density Volume solids VOC (supplied) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Shelf life (cool and dry place) RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES standard mio colours available - at (1 g/cm = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) 1.5 g/cm 40 2% max. 13 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 20 g/l (approx. 0.2 lb/gal) 50 - 75 m per coat 8.0 m/l for 50 m, 5.3 m/l for 75 m 30 - 60 minutes min. 4 hours max. unlimited at least 12 months steel coated with suitable primer (e.g. Sigma AquaCover 20) galvanised steel coated with suitable primer (e.g. Sigma AquaCover 22) previous suitable coat; dry and free from any contamination substrate temperature should be above 5C and at least 3C above dew point during application and curing maximum relative humidity during application and curing is 75% maintenance p.c. system sheets: 4012, 4022, 4032
SYSTEM SPECIFICATION INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE
stir well before use the temperature of the paint should preferably be above 15C, otherwise extra thinner may be required to obtain application viscosity too much tap water results in reduced sag resistance must be protected from freezing at all times during storage and/or transport
page 1/3
SIGMA AQUACOVER 35
September 2009
BRUSH/ROLLER Recommended thinner Volume of thinner CLEANING SOLVENT
long haired brush or polyether roller with rounded edges tap water 0 - 5% tap water and Thinner 70-05 Cleaning Procedures of the spray equipment: pulsator lter and tip lter must be taken out of the equipment and cleaned properly following tables illustrate the cleaning procedure of the spray equipment when changing spraying from solvent borne paint to water borne paints (table 1) and from water borne paints to solvent borne paints (table 2)
CLEANING PROCEDURE
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 2/3
SIGMA AQUACOVER 35
September 2009
ADDITIONAL DATA with itself
surface should be dry and free from any contamination Worldwide availability Whilst it is always the aim of PPG Protective & Marine Coatings to supply the same product on a worldwide basis, slight modication of the product is sometimes necessary to comply with local or national rules/circumstances. Under these circumstances an alternative product data sheet is used. Explanation to product data sheets Safety indications Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard Cleaning of steel and removal of rust see information sheet 1411 see information sheet 1430 see information sheet 1431 see information sheet 1490
REFERENCES
PDS 7203 various SAP codes
page 3/3
SIGMA AQUACOVER 40
DESCRIPTION
one component water borne acrylic dispersion nish
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS particularly suitable when solvents are not permitted because of health and safety reasons good weather resistance good colour retention fast drying fast handling not suitable for immersion in water COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20C Mass density Volume solids VOC (supplied) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Shelf life (cool and dry place) RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES RAL colours (other colours available on request) - semigloss (1 g/cm = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) 1.1 g/cm 42 2% max. 12 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 14 g/l (approx. 0.1 lb/gal) 50 m per coat 8.2 m/l for 50 m 30 minutes min. 4 hours max. unlimited at least 12 months steel coated with suitable primer (e.g. Sigma AquaCover 20) previous suitable coat; dry and free from any contamination substrate temperature should be above 5C and at least 3C above dew point during application and curing maximum relative humidity during application and curing is 75% stir well before use the temperature of the paint should preferably be above 15C, otherwise extra tap water may be required to obtain application viscosity too much tap water results in reduced sag resistance must be protected from freezing at all times during storage and/or transport
page 1/3
SIGMA AQUACOVER 40
September 2009
AIR SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure BRUSH/ROLLER * Recommended thinner Volume of thinner
tap water 5 - 10%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 1.8 - 2 mm 0.3 - 0.4 MPa (= approx. 3 - 4 bar; 43 - 57 p.s.i.) long haired brush or polyether roller with rounded edges tap water 0 - 5%
* for localised areas of difcult access only
CLEANING SOLVENT
CLEANING PROCEDURE
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 2/3
SIGMA AQUACOVER 40
September 2009
surface should be dry and free from any contamination Worldwide availability Whilst it is always the aim of PPG Protective & Marine Coatings to supply the same product on a worldwide basis, slight modication of the product is sometimes necessary to comply with local or national rules/circumstances. Under these circumstances an alternative product data sheet is used. Explanation to product data sheets Safety indications Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard see information sheet 1411 see information sheet 1430 see information sheet 1431
REFERENCES
199310 199313
PDS base L base Z
7251 0710002197 0070002185
page 3/3
SIGMA AQUACOVER 45
DESCRIPTION
one component water borne acrylic dispersion nish
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS nish for interior accommodation, machinery spaces and superstructure particularly suitable when solvents are not permitted because of health and safety reasons fast drying and recoatable good weather resistance good colour retention allows safer working during hull outtting of new buildings certicate for low ame spread: see sheet 1883 COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20C Mass density Volume solids VOC (supplied) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Shelf life (cool and dry place) RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES white (other colours on request) - gloss (1 g/cm = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) 1.2 g/cm 34 2%, depending on colour max. 9 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 10 g/l (approx. 0.1 lb/gal) 50 m per coat 6.8 m/l for 50 m 6 hours at 5C, 3 hours at 10C, 1 hour at 20C min. 6 hours * max. unlimited * at least 12 months, keep above 0C previous suitable coat; (e.g. Sigma Aquacover 25) dry and free from any contamination substrate temperature should be at least 5C and at least 3C above dew point during application and curing maximum relative humidity during application and curing is 75% marine system sheets: 3104, 3105
stir well before use the temperature of the paint should preferably be above 15C, otherwise extra tap water may be required to obtain application viscosity too much tap water results in reduced sag resistance adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) must be protected from freezing at all times during storage and/or transport
page 1/3
SIGMA AQUACOVER 45
September 2009
CLEANING SOLVENT
CLEANING PROCEDURE
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
for paint and recommended thinners see safety sheets 1430, 1431 and relevant material safety data sheets although this is a solvent free paint, care should be taken to avoid inhalation of spray mist as well as contact between the wet paint and exposed skin or eyes
page 2/3
SIGMA AQUACOVER 45
September 2009
Whilst it is always the aim of PPG Protective & Marine Coatings to supply the same product on a worldwide basis, slight modication of the product is sometimes necessary to comply with local or national rules/circumstances. Under these circumstances an alternative product data sheet is used. Explanation to product data sheets Safety indications Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard Safe working in conned spaces Directives for ventilation practice see information sheet 1411 see information sheet 1430 see information sheet 1431 see information sheet 1433 see information sheet 1434
REFERENCES
146103 146104
PDS white white
7250 7000002200 7000001400
page 3/3
SIGMA AQUACOVER 80
3 pages June 2009
DESCRIPTION
water borne high build acrylic coating reduced explosion risk and re hazard excellent adhesion to various types of old or weathered paints fast drying can be overcoated with dispersion paints single coat application excellent elongation (exible)
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20C Mass density Volume solids VOC (supplied)
grey RAL 7032 (other colours on request) - semigloss (1 g/cm = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) 1.2 g/cm 45 2% max. 29 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 35 g/l (approx. 0.3 lb/gal) see information sheet 1411 150 - 300 m per coat 3.0 m/l for 150 m, 1.5 m/l for 300 m 4 hours * min. 6 hours max. unlimited at least 12 months
Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Shelf life (cool and dry place)
steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2 or power tool cleaned to ISO-St2 for good corrosion protection substrate temperature should be at least 5C and at least 3C above dew point during application and curing preferably relative humidity should not exceed 80% clean, dry and free from any contamination good ventilation is required during application and curing (please refer to sheet 1433 and 1434) stir well before use the temperature of the paint should preferably be above 15C, otherwise extra tap water may be required to obtain application viscosity too much tap water results in reduced sag resistance
page 1/3
SIGMA AQUACOVER 80
June 2009
preferable not to be thinned, if necessary tap water tap water and Thinner 70-05 Cleaning Procedures of the spray equipment: pulsator lter and tip lter must be taken out of the equipment and cleaned properly following tables illustrate the cleaning procedure of the spray equipment when changing spraying from solvent borne paint to water borne paints (table 1) and from water borne paints to solvent borne paints (table 2)
CLEANING PROCEDURE
Table 1: from solvent borne- to water borne paints paint type: 1st cleaning with Thinner 2nd cleaning 3rd cleaning alkyd 20-05 chlorinated rubber 21-22 epoxy 90-53 pur 91-88
with Thinner 70-05 with warm tap water (30 - 35C) after which water borne paints can be sprayed
Table 2: from water borne- to solvent borne paints 1st cleaning 2nd cleaning 3rd cleaning with Thinner paint type: with warm tap water (30 - 35C) with Thinner 70-05 none alkyd none chlorinated rubber 90-53 epoxy 91-84 pur
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 2/3
SIGMA AQUACOVER 80
June 2009
ADDITIONAL DATA
REFERENCES
PDS
7152
page 3/3
SIGMA AQUACOVER 200

DESCRIPTION
two component polyamine cured water borne epoxy primer
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS general purpose epoxy primer in protective coating systems for steel structures in atmospheric exposure particularly suitable when solvents are not permitted because of health and safety reasons excellent rust preventing properties in industrial or coastal atmospheres good adhesion to steel and galvanised steel free from lead and chromate containing pigments can be overcoated with most dispersion and alkyd paints and 2 component durable nishes easy application by brush/roller and (airless) spray COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20C Mass density Volume solids VOC (supplied) grey (RAL 7038), buff (RAL 1015) - eggshell (1 g/cm = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.3 g/cm 53 2% max. 5 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 6 g/l (approx. 0.1 lb/gal) see information sheet 1411 75 - 100 m depending on system 7.1 m/l for 75 m, 5.3 m/l for 100 m 1.5 hour min. 2 hours (with itself) max. 6 months 4 days * (data for components) Shelf life (cool and dry place) at least 6 months
steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 40 - 70 m or power tool cleaned to min. ISO-St3 galvanised steel; sweep blasted or otherwise roughened; dry and free from salts and other contamination substrate temperature must be above 10C and at least 3C above dew point during application and curing maximum relative humidity during application and curing is 75%
page 1/4
SIGMA AQUACOVER 200

September 2009
mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 70 : 30 the temperature of the mixed base and hardener should preferably be above 15C, otherwise extra water may be required to obtain application viscosity too much water results in reduced sag resistance and slower cure water should be added after mixing the components adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) must be protected from freezing at all times during storage and/or transport
none 3 hours at 20C *

AIRLESS SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure BRUSH/ROLLER Recommended thinner Volume of thinner CLEANING SOLVENT
tap water 0 - 5%, depending on required thickness and application conditions approx. 0.48 mm (= 0.019 in) 15 MPa (= approx. 150 bar; 2130 p.s.i.)
tap water 0 - 5% tap water and Thinner 70-05 Cleaning Procedures of the spray equipment: pulsator lter and tip lter must be taken out of the equipment and cleaned properly following tables illustrate the cleaning procedure of the spray equipment when changing spraying from solvent borne paint to water borne paints (table 1) and from water borne paints to solvent borne paints (table 2)
CLEANING PROCEDURE
page 2/4
SIGMA AQUACOVER 200

September 2009
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
ADDITIONAL DATA
Overcoating table for Sigma Aquacover 200 for dft up to 100 m substrate temperature 10C 3 hours 24 hours 6 months 20C 2 hours 16 hours 6 months 30C 1 hour 12 hours 6 months 40C 45 min. 8 hours 6 months
with Sigma AquaCover 400
minimum interval
with SigmaDur 520, SigmaDur 550 minimum interval maximum interval
Curing table for dft up to 100 m substrate temperature 10C 20C 30C 40C touch dry 3 hours 1.5 hour 1 hour 45 min. dry to handle 16 hours 5 hours 4 hours 3 hours full cure 6 days 4 days 3 days 2 days
Pot life (at application viscosity) 10C 20C 30C 40C 4 hours 3 hours 2 hours 1 hour
page 3/4
SIGMA AQUACOVER 200

September 2009
REFERENCES
220700 240678
PDS 7870 RAL 7038 (grey) 7038262160 RAL 1015 (buff) 1015262160
page 4/4
SIGMA AQUACOVER 400

DESCRIPTION
two component polyamine cured water borne epoxy coating
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS general purpose epoxy build coat in protective coating systems for steel structures in atmospheric exposure particularly suitable when solvents are not permitted because of health and safety reasons free from lead and chromate containing pigments can be overcoated with most dispersion and alkyd paints and 2 component durable nishes easy application by brush/roller and (airless) spray suitable for concrete oors COLOURS AND GLOSS limited colour range available - semigloss due to the lead and chromate free pigmentation bright colours might have a reduced opacity a primer in a suitable colour may be necessary (1 g/cm = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.3 g/cm 53 2% max. 5 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 6 g/l (approx. 0.1 lb/gal) see information sheet 1411 75 - 100 m depending on system 7.1 m/l for 75 m, 5.3 m/l for 100 m 1.5 hour min. 2 hours (with itself) max. 6 months 4 days * (data for components) Shelf life (cool and dry place) at least 6 months
BASIC DATA AT 20C Mass density Volume solids VOC (supplied)
steel with suitable primer (e.g. Sigma AquaCover 200); dry and free from any contamination and within the recoat times galvanised steel; sweep blasted or otherwise roughened; dry and free from salts and other contamination substrate temperature must be above 10C and at least 3C above dew point during application and curing maximum relative humidity during application and curing is 75%
page 1/4
SIGMA AQUACOVER 400

September 2009
mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 70 : 30 the temperature of the mixed base and hardener should preferably be above 15C, otherwise extra water may be required to obtain application viscosity too much water results in reduced sag resistance and slower cure water should be added after mixing the components adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) must be protected from freezing at all times during storage and/or transport

AIRLESS SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure BRUSH/ROLLER Recommended thinner Volume of thinner CLEANING SOLVENT
tap water 0 - 5%, depending on required thickness and application conditions approx. 0.48 mm (= 0.019 in) 15 MPa (= approx. 150 bar; 2130 p.s.i.)
tap water 0 - 5% tap water and Thinner 70-05 Cleaning Procedures of the spray equipment: pulsator lter and tip lter must be taken out of the equipment and cleaned properly following tables illustrate the cleaning procedure of the spray equipment when changing spraying from solvent borne paint to water borne paints (table 1) and from water borne paints to solvent borne paints (table 2)
CLEANING PROCEDURE
page 2/4
SIGMA AQUACOVER 400

September 2009
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
ADDITIONAL DATA
Overcoating table for Sigma Aquacover 400 for dft up to 100 m substrate temperature 10C 3 hours 24 hours 6 months 20C 2 hours 16 hours 6 months 30C 1 hour 12 hours 6 months 40C 45 min. 8 hours 6 months
with itself
minimum interval
with SigmaDur 520, SigmaDur 550 minimum interval maximum interval
Curing table for dft up to 100 m substrate temperature 10C 20C 30C 40C touch dry 3 hours 1.5 hour 1 hour 45 min. dry to handle 18 hours 6 hours 5 hours 4 hours full cure 6 days 4 days 3 days 2 days
Pot life (at application viscosity) 10C 20C 30C 40C 4 hours 3 hours 2 hours 1 hour
page 3/4
SIGMA AQUACOVER 400

September 2009
REFERENCES
220702
PDS 7871 RAL 5011 (grey) 5011262160
page 4/4
SIGMA AQUAWELD 100

5 pages August 2010 Revision of September 2007
DESCRIPTION
two component moisture curing, water borne low zinc (ethyl) silicate prefabrication primer
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS suitable for automatic application on shot blasted steel plates fast drying properties good cutting and excellent welding properties, including MIG/MAG welding in various positions (either automatic or manual welding) provides regular, smooth weld seams low fume release during welding and cutting no adherence of weldspatter at surrounding primed surface good thermal stability minimizes heat damage during hot work procedures for use in sea water immersion in combination with controlled cathodic protection systems please contact your nearest PPG Protective & Marine Coatings sales ofce certied by Lloyds, SLV and Newcastle OHH COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20C Mass density Volume solids VOC (supplied) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval redbrown - at (1 g/cm = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.7 g/cm 30 2% 0 - 40 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) 0 - 25 g/l (0.0 - 0.3 lb/gal) see information sheet 1411 18 m - see further: "Recommended substrate conditions and temperatures" 15 m/l for 18 m * under optimal ventilation conditions: 10 min. at substrate temperature of 20C and 6 min. at substrate temperature of 40C min. 7 days max. 6 months longer overcoating intervals can be permitted when primer is still in sound condition (data for components) Shelf life (cool and dry place) binder: at least 9 months (store above 5C) powder: at least 12 months (store powder moisture free)
page 1/5
SIGMA AQUAWELD 100

August 2010
dry and free from oil and grease and any contamination steel; shot blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 40 - 70 m on steel blasted to above prole, the recommended dft, 18 m, corresponds to 22 m as measured on a smooth test panel minimum thickness for a closed lm is 15 m measured on a smooth test panel substrate temperature should be between 25C and 40C for automatic application a substrate temperature of 30C - 35C is recommended substrate temperature should be at least 3C above dew point relative humidity during curing should be above 50% preferably the relative humidity should not exceed 85% adequate ventilation is required rst coat shall be SigmaCover 280 or SigmaPrime 200 or other approved systems during storage and construction, contamination of the prefabrication primer should be limited after fabrication, surface defects should be treated according to the scheme below where two possible surface treatments are indicated, the choice of treatment is dependent on the location and on the system to be applied (see system sheets) the preferred pretreatment for optimal results is shown; other possibilities are indicated in brackets areas contamination weldseams burned damaged corroded white rust immersed conditions to be removed ISO-Sa2 (SPSS-Pt3) ISO-Sa2 (SPSS-Pt3) ISO-Sa2 (SPSS-Pt3) SPSS-ID Pt2 (SCAP *) atmospheric conditions to be removed SPSS-Pt2 SPSS-Ss (SPSS-Pt2) SPSS-Ss (SPSS-Pt2) SPSS-ID Pt1 (SCAP *)
SECONDARY SURFACE PREPARATION
* cleaning by silicon carbide impregnated abrasive pad
Note that the back of welded plate may show discoloration (especially on plate where llets have been welded on), this is not to be confused with burned areas and does not require special treatment. Burned through areas may be present (this happens especially when welding thin steel) and these should then be treated as per 'burned areas' above.
page 2/5
SIGMA AQUAWELD 100

August 2010
mixing ratio by weight: binder to powder 48 : 52 pour the binder in the empty steeldrum add the powder to the binder the temperature of the mixture of binder and powder should preferably be above 15C stir the powder thoroughly into the binder stir thoroughly till homogeneous strain mixture through a 30 - 60 mesh screen mixed paint is ready for use agitate continuously during application, adjust speed so foam formation will be minimized best performance is obtained when sprayed steel structure stored dry for 24 hours mixed paint should not be stored in closed containers, please consult your local PPG Protective & Marine Coatings sales ofce
Pot life AIRLESS SPRAY Recommended thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure CLEANING SOLVENT
4 hours at 20C restrictor plate PN 029025 (Nordson) prior to nozzle no thinner should be added approx. 0.43 - 0.53 mm (= 0.017 - 0.021 in) 8 - 12 MPa (= approx. 80 - 120 bar; 1140 - 1700 p.s.i.) tap water and Thinner 70-05 Cleaning Procedures of the spray equipment: pulsator lter and tip lter must be taken out of the equipment and cleaned properly following tables illustrate the cleaning procedure of the spray equipment when changing spraying from solvent borne paint to water borne paints (table 1) and from water borne paints to solvent borne paints (table 2)
CLEANING PROCEDURE
Table 1: from solvent borne- to water borne shop primer paint type: 1st cleaning with 2nd cleaning 3rd cleaning solvent borne shop primer suitable cleaning thinner for previous product with Thinner 70-05 with warm tap water (30 - 35C) after which water borne paints can be sprayed
page 3/5
SIGMA AQUAWELD 100

August 2010
Table 2: from water borne- to solvent borne shop primer 1st cleaning 2nd cleaning 3rd cleaning paint type: with warm tap water (30 - 35C) with Thinner 70-05 with suitable cleaning thinner for the next product solvent borne shop primer
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Whilst it is always the aim of PPG Protective & Marine Coatings to supply the same product on a worldwide basis, slight modication of the product is sometimes necessary to comply with local or national rules/circumstances. Under these circumstances an alternative product data sheet is used. Explanation to product data sheets Safety indications Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Relative humidity - substrate temperature air temperature see information sheet 1411 see information sheet 1430 see information sheet 1431 see information sheet 1490 see information sheet 1650
REFERENCES
page 4/5
SIGMA AQUAWELD 100

August 2010
268430
PDS redbrown
7124 2008002180
page 5/5
SIGMACOVER 211
4 pages September 2009 Revision of September 2005
DESCRIPTION
two component polyamide cured epoxy primer
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS epoxy primer in protective coating systems for concrete and sand/cement substrates (oors and walls) can be recoated with most two component coatings good water resistance fair chemical resistance to spillage and splash resistant to impact and abrasion easy to clean COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20C Mass density Volume solids VOC (supplied) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Full cure after white - eggshell (1 g/cm = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.4 g/cm 51 2% max. 278 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 396 g/l (approx. 3.3 lb/gal) 35 m 14.6 m/l for 35 m 30 minutes * min. 16 hours * max. 10 days * 7 days * (data for components) Shelf life (cool and dry place) at least 12 months
concrete, sand/cement; dry and free from any contamination moisture content of concrete should be max. 4% substrate temperature should be above 5C and at least 3C above dew point during application and curing mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 75 : 25 the temperature of the mixed base and hardener should preferably be above 15C, otherwise extra solvent may be required to obtain application viscosity too much solvent results in reduced sag resistance and slower cure thinner should be added after mixing the components for impregnation of concrete 30% thinner should be added

page 1/4
SIGMACOVER 211
September 2009
Thinner 91-92 10 - 20%, depending on required thickness and application conditions approx. 0.33 mm (= 0.013 in) 15 MPa (= approx. 150 bar; 2130 p.s.i.)
Thinner 91-92 10 - 20%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 1.5 - 2 mm 0.3 - 0.4 MPa (= approx. 3 - 4 bar; 43 - 57 p.s.i.)
Thinner 91-92 5 - 10% Thinner 90-53 for paint and recommended thinners see safety sheets 1430, 1431 and relevant material safety data sheets this is a solvent borne paint and care should be taken to avoid inhalation of spray mist or vapour as well as contact between the wet paint and exposed skin or eyes
ADDITIONAL DATA
Film thickness and spreading rate theoretical spreading rate m/l dft in m 14.6 35 12.8 40 10.2 50
Overcoating table for SigmaCover 211 for dft up to 35 m substrate temperature with most 2 component coatings minimum interval maximum interval 10C 48 hours 21 days 15C 24 hours 14 days 20C 16 hours 10 days 30C 8 hours 7 days
page 2/4
SIGMACOVER 211
September 2009
Curing table for dft up to 35 m substrate temperature 5C 10C 15C 20C 30C touch dry 120 min. 60 min. 45 min. 30 min. 20 min. dry to handle 6 hours 4 hours 3 hours 2 hours 1 hour full cure 21 days 14 days 10 days 7 days 5 days
adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) Pot life (at application viscosity) 15C 20C 25C 30C 35C Worldwide availability 16 hours 14 hours 11 hours 8 hours 5 hours
REFERENCES
page 3/4
SIGMACOVER 211
September 2009
179505 179506
PDS white white
7406 7000001400 7000002200
page 4/4
SIGMACOVER 240
4 pages August 2011 Revision of March 2011
DESCRIPTION
two component high solids polyamine adduct cured epoxy coating can be used directly to metal very good surface wetting excellent corrosion resistance outstanding (sea)water resistance resistant to well designed/controlled cathodic protection good resistance against chemically polluted water good abrasion resistance NAVSEA-MIL-PRF-4556-F approved NAVSEA-MIL-PRF-23236-D approved low temperature cure down to -18 C
limited colour range available - semigloss (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.6 g/cm 87 2% max. 102 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 153 g/l (approx. 1.3 lb/gal) 100 - 300 m depending on system * 8.7 m/l for 100 m * 5 hours min. 5 hours * max. 6 months * (data for components) at least 12 months
Shelf life (cool and dry place) RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES
for immersion exposure: steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 40 - 70 m steel with approved zinc silicate shop primer; pretreated according to SPSS-Ss for atmospheric exposure conditions: steel; pretreated preferably to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 40 - 70 m or according to ISO-St3, St2 shop primed steel; pretreated to SPSS-Pt3 previous coat; (e.g. SigmaCover 240 or suitable primer) dry and free from any contamination and within the minimum and maximum overcoating time substrate temperature should be at least 3C above dew point during application and drying
page 1/4
SIGMACOVER 240
August 2011
Induction time Pot life AIRLESS SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure CLEANING SOLVENT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
15 minutes at 20C 1.5 hour at 20C *

Thinner 21-06 0 - 5%, depending on required thickness and application conditions approx. 0.48 - 0.53 mm (= 0.019 - 0.021 in) 15 MPa (= approx. 150 bar; 2130 p.s.i.) Thinner 90-58 for paint and recommended thinners see safety sheets 1430, 1431 and relevant material safety data sheets this is a solvent borne paint and care should be taken to avoid inhalation of spray mist or vapour as well as contact between the wet paint and exposed skin or eyes
ADDITIONAL DATA
Overcoating table for SigmaCover 240 for dft up to 300 m with itself substrate temperature minimum interval * maximum interval -5C 28 hours 6 months 0C 14 hours 6 months 10C 8 hours 6 months 20C 5 hours 6 months 30C 2 hours 6 months
* for polyurethane paints like SigmaDur 550 and SigmaDur 520 the minimum overcoating time should be raised with 50%
surface should be dry and free from any contamination adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434)
page 2/4
SIGMACOVER 240
August 2011
Curing table for dft up to 300 m substrate temperature -5C 0C 10C 20C 30C touch dry 28 hours 24 hours 10 hours 5 hours 3 hours for immersion in water 7 days 7 days 7 days 7 days 3 days dry to handle 48 hours 30 hours 13 hours 8 hours 6 hours
Pot life (at application viscosity) 15C 20C 30C Worldwide availability 2 hours 90 min. 40 min.
REFERENCES
page 3/4
SIGMACOVER 240
August 2011
PDS
7991
page 4/4
SIGMACOVER 256
4 pages January 2011 Revision of August 2010
DESCRIPTION
two component high build polyamide cured recoatable zinc phosphate epoxy primer
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS general purpose epoxy primer or build coat for steel and concrete structures suitable for atmospheric and marine conditions can be recoated with various two component and conventional coatings even after long weathering periods lead- and chromate free excellent rust preventing properties in industrial or coastal atmospheres tough, with long term exibility cures even at temperatures down to -10C good adhesion to steel, galvanised steel and aged epoxy coatings easy application, both by airless spray and brush can be used as epoxy primer/nish (for dry internal areas) COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20C Mass density Volume solids VOC (supplied) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Full cure after Shelf life (cool and dry place) RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES cream, pink (other colours on request) - eggshell (1 g/cm = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.4 g/cm 63 2% max. 245 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 338 g/l (approx. 2.8 lb/gal) 75 - 150 m depending on system 6.3 m/l for 100 m * 2 hours min. 3 hours * max. unlimited 4 days * (data for components) at least 12 months
steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 40 - 70 m shop primed steel; pretreated to SPSS-Pt3 / SSPC-SP3 galvanised steel; free from any contamination and sweep blasted till an even at appearance (only for internal dry exposure conditions) aged suitable coatings; dry and free from any contamination and sufciently roughened during application and curing a substrate temperature down to -10C is acceptable provided substrate is dry and free from ice substrate temperature at least 3C above dew point maximum relative humidity during application and curing is 95%
page 1/4
SIGMACOVER 256
January 2011
Induction time Pot life AIRLESS SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure AIR SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure BRUSH/ROLLER Recommended thinner Volume of thinner CLEANING SOLVENT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
20 minutes if applied at temperatures below 10C none above 10C 8 hours at 20C *
Thinner 91-92 5 - 10%, depending on required thickness and application conditions approx. 0.48 mm (= 0.019 in) 15 MPa (= approx. 150 bar; 2130 p.s.i.) Thinner 91-92 10 - 15%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 1.5 - 3 mm 0.3 - 0.4 MPa (= approx. 3 - 4 bar; 43 - 57 p.s.i.) Thinner 91-92 0 - 5% Thinner 90-53 for paint and recommended thinners see safety sheets 1430, 1431 and relevant material safety data sheets this is a solvent borne paint and care should be taken to avoid inhalation of spray mist or vapour as well as contact between the wet paint and exposed skin or eyes
ADDITIONAL DATA
page 2/4
SIGMACOVER 256
January 2011
Overcoating table for dft up to 100 m for SigmaCover 256, SigmaCover 435, SigmaCover 456, SigmaCover 410 substrate temperature minimum interval maximum interval -5C 5C 10C 20C 30C 40C
36 hours
10 hours
4 hours
3 hours
2 hours
2 hours
no limitation, provided that the surface is free from any contamination
Overcoating table for dft up to 100 m substrate for SigmaDur 520, temperature SigmaDur 550, various chlorinated rubbers, vinyls, acrylates and alkyd paints minimum interval maximum interval -5C 5C 10C * 20C 30C 40C
72 hours
24 hours
16 hours
8 hours
5 hours
3 hours
nishes require a corresponding undercoat SigmaCover 256 should not be overcoated with coal tar epoxy coatings Curing table for dft up to 100 m substrate temperature -10C -5C 0C 5C 10C 15C 20C 30C 40C dry to handle 24 - 48 hours 24 - 30 hours 18 - 24 hours 18 hours 12 hours 8 hours 6 hours 4 hours 3 hours full cure 20 days 14 days 10 days 8 days 6 days 5 days 4 days 3 days 2 days
adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434)
page 3/4
SIGMACOVER 256
January 2011
Pot life (at application viscosity) 10C 15C 20C 30C 35C Worldwide availability 16 hours 10 hours 8 hours 5 hours 4 hours
REFERENCES
179630 179635
PDS cream pink
7412 3012002200 6007002200
page 4/4
SIGMACOVER 280
5 pages November 2010 Revision of February 2010
DESCRIPTION
two component polyamide cured epoxy primer
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS general purpose epoxy primer in protective coating systems for steel and non ferrous metals good adhesion to steel and galvanised steel good adhesion to non ferrous metals good ow and wetting properties good water and corrosion resistance cures at temperatures down to +5C suitable for touching up of weld seams and damages of epoxy coatings during construction excellent recoatability can be overcoated with most alkyd-, chlorinated rubber-, vinyl-, epoxy- and two component polyurethane coatings suitable on wet blast cleaned substrates (damp or dry) compatible with well designed cathodic protection systems COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20C Mass density Volume solids VOC (supplied) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Full cure after Shelf life (cool and dry place) yellow/green (redbrown on request) - eggshell (1 g/cm = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.3 g/cm 57 2% max. 327 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 432 g/l (approx. 3.6 lb/gal) 50 - 100 m depending on system 11.4 m/l for 50 m, 5.7 m/l for 100 m * 1.5 hour min. see tables * max. see tables * 7 days * (data for components) at least 24 months
page 1/5
SIGMACOVER 280
November 2010
for immersion exposure: steel or steel with not approved zinc silicate shop primer; blast cleaned (dry or wet) to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 30 - 75 m steel with approved zinc silicate shop primer; weld seams and areas of damaged shop primer or breakdown should be blast cleaned to ISOSa2, blasting prole 30 - 75 m or power tool cleaned to SPSS-Pt3 coated steel; hydrojetted to VIS WJ2 L (blasting prole 30 - 75 m) IMO-MSC.215(82) Requirements for Water Ballast Tanks: steel; ISO 8501-3:2006 grade P2, with all edges treated to a rounded radius of minimum 2 mm or subject to three pass grinding steel or steel with not approved zinc silicate shop primer; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 30 - 75 m steel with approved zinc silicate shop primer; weld seams and areas of damaged shop primer or breakdown should be blast cleaned to ISOSa2, blasting prole 30 - 75 m for shop primer with IMO type approval; no additional requirements for shop primer without IMO type approval; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2 removing at least 70% of intact shop primer, blasting prole 30 - 75 m dust quantity rating "1" for dust size class "3", "4" or "5", lower dust size classes to be removed if visible on the surface to be coated without magnication (ISO 8502-3:1992) for atmospheric exposure conditions: steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 30 - 75 m or according to ISO-St3 shop primed steel; pretreated to SPSS-Pt3 galvanised steel; cleaned from grease, salts, contamination and roughened up substrate temperature should be above 5C and at least 3C above dew point during application and curing maximum relative humidity during application and curing is 85% marine system sheets: 3101, 3102, 3103, 3104, 3105, 3106 (spec. 5,7), 3107, 3108

page 2/5
SIGMACOVER 280
November 2010
Thinner 91-92 0 - 10%, depending on required thickness and application conditions approx. 0.46 mm (= 0.018 in) 15 MPa (= approx. 150 bar; 2130 p.s.i.) Thinner 91-92 0 - 10%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 1.5 - 2 mm 0.3 - 0.4 MPa (= approx. 3 - 4 bar; 43 - 57 p.s.i.) no extra thinner is necessary, but up to 5% Thinner 91-92 can be added if desired Thinner 90-53 for paint and recommended thinners see safety sheets 1430, 1431 and relevant material safety data sheets this is a solvent borne paint and care should be taken to avoid inhalation of spray mist or vapour as well as contact between the wet paint and exposed skin or eyes
ADDITIONAL DATA
Film thickness and spreading rate theoretical spreading rate m/l dft in m max. dft when brushing: 11.4 50 7.6 75 5.7 100 50 m
page 3/5
SIGMACOVER 280
November 2010
Overcoating table for SigmaCover 280 for dft up to 100 m with various two pack epoxy- and polyurethane coatings substrate temperature minimum interval maximum interval when not exposed to sunshine maximum interval when exposed to direct sunshine 5C 36 hours 6 months 10C 16 hours 6 months 20C 8 hours 6 months 30C 6 hours 4 months 40C 4 hours 3 months
3 months
3 months
3 months
2 months
2 months
surface should be dry and free from any contamination Overcoating table for SigmaCover 280 for dft up to 100 m with other types of paint like: most chlorinated rubber-, vinyl-, alkyd coatings substrate temperature minimum interval maximum interval 5C 10C 20C 30C 40C
16 hours 21 days
10 hours 21 days
5 hours 10 days
3 hours 7 days
2 hours 4 days
surface should be dry and free from any contamination glossy nishes require a corresponding undercoat Curing table for dft up to 100 m substrate temperature 5C 10C 20C 30C 40C touch dry 8 hours 4 hours 2 hours 1 hour 45 min. dry to handle 13 hours 6 hours 2.5 hours 1.5 hour 1 hour full cure 21 days 14 days 7 days 5 days 3 days
page 4/5
SIGMACOVER 280
November 2010
Pot life (at application viscosity) 15C 20C 30C 35C Worldwide availability 10 hours 8 hours 5 hours 4 hours
Whilst it is always the aim of PPG Protective & Marine Coatings to supply the same product on a worldwide basis, slight modication of the product is sometimes necessary to comply with local or national rules/circumstances. Under these circumstances an alternative product data sheet is used. Explanation to product data sheets see information sheet 1411 Safety indications see information sheet 1430 Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard see information sheet 1431 Safe working in conned spaces see information sheet 1433 Directives for ventilation practice see information sheet 1434 Cleaning of steel and removal of rust see information sheet 1490 PPG Protective & Marine Coatings Ballast Tank Working Procedure New Building
REFERENCES
179083 179085
PDS yellow/green redbrown
7417 4009002200 (144497 base, 142014 hardener) 6137002200 (144493 base, 142014 hardener)
page 5/5
SIGMACOVER 280 LT
6 pages February 2010 Revision of December 2006
DESCRIPTION
two component polyamide cured epoxy primer general purpose epoxy primer in protective coating systems for steel good adhesion to steel and galvanised steel good ow and wetting properties good water and corrosion resistance suitable for touching up of weld seams and damages of epoxy coatings during construction recoatable with most two component epoxy- and polyurethane coatings compatible with well designed controlled cathodic protection systems cures at temperatures down to -10C yellow/green - eggshell (1 g/cm = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.4 g/cm 57 2% max. 332 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 438 g/l (approx. 3.7 lb/gal) 50 - 100 m depending on system 11.4 m/l for 50 m, 5.7 m/l for 100 m * 3 hours min. 8 hours * max. see overcoating table * 7 days * (data for components) at least 24 months
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS
COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 10C Mass density Volume solids VOC (supplied) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Full cure after Shelf life (cool and dry place)
page 1/6
SIGMACOVER 280 LT
February 2010
for immersion exposure: steel or steel with not approved zinc silicate shop primer; blast cleaned (dry or wet) to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 30 - 75 m steel with approved zinc silicate shop primer; weld seams and areas of damaged shop primer or breakdown should be blast cleaned to ISOSa2, blasting prole 30 - 75 m or power tool cleaned to SPSS-Pt3 IMO-MSC.215(82) Requirements for Water Ballast Tanks: steel; ISO 8501-3:2006 grade P2, with all edges treated to a rounded radius of minimum 2 mm or subject to three pass grinding steel or steel with not approved zinc silicate shop primer; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 30 - 75 m steel with approved zinc silicate shop primer; weld seams and areas of damaged shop primer or breakdown should be blast cleaned to ISOSa2, blasting prole 30 - 75 m for shop primer with IMO type approval; no additional requirements for shop primer without IMO type approval; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2 removing at least 70% of intact shop primer, blasting prole 30 - 75 m dust quantity rating "1" for dust size class "3", "4" or "5", lower dust size classes to be removed if visible on the surface to be coated without magnication (ISO 8502-3:1992) for atmospheric exposure conditions: steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 30 - 75 m or according to ISO-St3 shop primed steel; pretreated to SPSS-Pt3 galvanised steel; cleaned from grease, salts, contamination and roughened up substrate temperature should be between -10C up to 15C during application and curing and at least 3C above dew point and free from ice and any contamination during application and curing a substrate temperature down to -10C is possible, but curing to hardness takes longer and complete resistance will be reached when temperature increases maximum relative humidity during application and curing is 85% marine system sheets: 3101, 3102, 3103, 3104, 3105, 3106 (spec. 7, 8), 3107, 3108
Induction time
none
page 2/6
SIGMACOVER 280 LT
February 2010
Pot life AIRLESS SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure AIR SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure BRUSH/ROLLER Recommended thinner Volume of thinner CLEANING SOLVENT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
8 hours at 10C *
Thinner 91-92 0 - 10%, depending on required thickness and application conditions approx. 0.46 mm (= 0.018 in) 15 MPa (= approx. 150 bar; 2130 p.s.i.) Thinner 91-92 0 - 10%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 1.5 - 2 mm 0.3 - 0.4 MPa (= approx. 3 - 4 bar; 43 - 57 p.s.i.) no extra thinner is necessary, but up to 5% Thinner 91-92 can be added if desired Thinner 90-53 for paint and recommended thinners see safety sheets 1430, 1431 and relevant material safety data sheets this is a solvent borne paint and care should be taken to avoid inhalation of spray mist or vapour as well as contact between the wet paint and exposed skin or eyes
ADDITIONAL DATA
page 3/6
SIGMACOVER 280 LT
February 2010
Overcoating table for SigmaCover 280 LT for dft up to 75 m with various two pack epoxy- and polyurethane coatings substrate temperature minimum interval maximum interval when not exposed to sunshine maximum interval when exposed to direct sunshine -10C 48 hours 3 months -5C 24 hours 3 months 0C 16 hours 3 months 5C 12 hours 2 months 10C 8 hours 2 months 15C 6 hours 1 month
2 months
2 months
2 months
1 month
1 month
1 month
surface should be dry and free from any contamination Overcoating table for SigmaCover 280 LT for dft up to 75 m with other types of paint like: most chlorinated rubber-, vinyl-, alkyd coatings substrate temperature minimum interval maximum interval -10C -5C 0C 5C 10C 15C
24 hours
16 hours
12 hours
8 ours 4 days
4 hours 4 days
3 hours 4 days
10 days 10 days 7 days
surface should be dry and free from any contamination glossy nishes require a corresponding undercoat
page 4/6
SIGMACOVER 280 LT
February 2010
Curing table for dft up to 75 m substrate temperature -10C -5C 5C 10C 15C touch dry 20 hours 10 hours 5 hours 3 hours 2 hours dry to handle 32 hours 16 hours 6 hours 4 hours 3 hours full cure 21 days 14 days 9 days 7 days 5 days
adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) Pot life (at application viscosity) 5C 10C Worldwide availability 10 hours 8 hours
REFERENCES
page 5/6
SIGMACOVER 280 LT
February 2010
181451
PDS yellow/green
7424 4009002200 (144497 base, 181453 hardener)
page 6/6
SIGMACOVER 300
DESCRIPTION
two component high build polyamine adduct cured coaltar epoxy coating outstanding (sea)water resistance (outside hull and ballast tanks) outstanding water and crude oil resistance excellent corrosion resistance good resistance against chemically polluted water can be applied and cures at low temperatures (application possible down to -5C, provided the substrate is free from ice) good abrasion resistance Recognized corrosion control coating (Lloyd's register), see sheet 1886 resistant to well designed/controlled cathodic protection black, brown - eggshell (1 g/cm = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.5 g/cm 71 2% max. 207 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 305 g/l (approx. 2.5 lb/gal) 125 - 500 m (see system sheets) 5.7 m/l for 125 m * 4 hours min. 6 hours * max. 5 days * 7 days * (data for components)
COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20C Mass density Volume solids VOC (supplied) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Full cure after
Shelf life (cool and dry place)
at least 12 months
for immersion in water, with cathodic protection: steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 40 - 70 m steel with approved zinc silicate shop primer; sweep blasted to SPSS-Ss or power tool cleaned to SPSS-Pt3 existing coal tar epoxy coating; sufciently roughened and free from any contamination for immersion in water, without cathodic protection: steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 40 - 70 m steel with approved shop primer; sweep blasted to SPSS-Ss or power tool cleaned to SPSS-Pt3 existing coal tar epoxy coating; sufciently roughened and free from any contamination for atmospheric exposure conditions: steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2 or ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 40 - 70 m steel; hydrojetted to VIS WJ2/3 L
page 1/5
SIGMACOVER 300
September 2009
steel with approved shop primer; power tool cleaned to SPSS-Pt2 or SPSS-Pt3 existing coal tar epoxy coating; sufciently roughened and free from any contamination in order to obtain the maximum resistance against chemical- and mechanical inuences the substrate temperature should be above 5C during application and curing application at temperatures down to -5C is possible but curing to hardness takes longer and complete cure will be reached when temperature increases substrate temperature should be at least 3C above dew point SYSTEM SPECIFICATION INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE marine system sheets: 3101, 3102, 3106, 3107

AIRLESS SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure AIR SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure BRUSH/ROLLER Recommended thinner Volume of thinner CLEANING SOLVENT
Thinner 91-79 0 - 5% for a dft of 250 m 10 - 15% for a dft of 125 m approx. 0.53 - 0.64 mm (= 0.021 - 0.025 in) 15 MPa (= approx. 150 bar; 2130 p.s.i.)
Thinner 91-79 5 - 10%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 1.5 - 3 mm 0.2 - 0.4 MPa (= approx. 2 - 4 bar; 28 - 57 p.s.i.) only for touch up and spot repair Thinner 91-79 0 - 5% Thinner 90-53
page 2/5
SIGMACOVER 300
September 2009
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
for paint and recommended thinners see safety sheets 1430, 1431 and relevant material safety data sheets this is a solvent borne paint and care should be taken to avoid inhalation of spray mist or vapour as well as contact between the wet paint and exposed skin or eyes
ADDITIONAL DATA
Film thickness and spreading rate theoretical spreading rate m/l dft in m 5.7 125 2.8 250 2.4 300 1.8 400 1.4 500 125 m
max. dft when brushing (touch up and spot repair): Overcoating table for dft up to 250 m substrate temperature with SigmaCover 300 and SigmaCover 510 and other compatible paints minimum interval maximum interval when exposed to direct sunshine maximum interval when not exposed to direct sunshine -5C 48 hours 21 days 5C 24 hours 21 days 10C 18 hours 12 days 15C 12 hours 8 days 20C 6 hours 4 days 30C 4 hours 3 days
40C 3 hours 2 days
40 days
40 days
30 days
24 days
18 days
14 days
7 days
surface should be dry and free from any contamination when overcoated with other paints, tar bleeding will occur when overcoating work is to be carried out on coats thicker than 250 m applied in one coat, the minimum overcoating interval must be extended as follows: for 300 m : 2 times as long for 400 m : 3 times as long for 500 m : 4 times as long adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434)
page 3/5
SIGMACOVER 300
September 2009
Curing table for dft up to 250 m substrate temperature dry to handle initial cure for exposure to sea water and to slightly polluted atmosphere 96 hours 48 hours 30 hours 24 hours 18 hours 12 hours full cure for immersion in polluted water or crude oil -15 days 10 days 7 days 3 days 2 days
5C 10C 15C 20C 30C 40C
48 hours 30 hours 24 hours 16 hours 8 hours 5 hours
adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) Drydockings exposure to sea water is permitted after the initial curing time if SigmaCover 300 has been applied by means of hot airless spray, exposure to sea water is permitted after an initial cure of 4 hours at dfts ranging from 250 - 500 m applied in a one coat application the curing times have to be doubled in order to obtain sufcient mechanical strength the mechanical strength, when cured at low temperature, is low initially, but will increase quickly when exposed to sea water Pot life (at application viscosity) 15C 20C 25C 30C 35C Worldwide availability 8 hours 6 hours 5 hours 4 hours 2 hours
Whilst it is always the aim of PPG Protective & Marine Coatings to supply the same product on a worldwide basis, slight modication of the product is sometimes necessary to comply with local or national rules/circumstances. Under these circumstances an alternative product data sheet is used.
page 4/5
SIGMACOVER 300
September 2009
REFERENCES
Explanation to product data sheets Safety indications Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard Safe working in conned spaces Directives for ventilation practice Cleaning of steel and removal of rust
see information sheet 1411 see information sheet 1430 see information sheet 1431 see information sheet 1433 see information sheet 1434 see information sheet 1490
179000 178998
PDS black brown
7472 8000002200 2000002200
page 5/5
SIGMACOVER 300 LT
DESCRIPTION
two component high build polyamine adduct cured coaltar epoxy primer/coating outstanding sea water resistance (outside hull and ballast tanks) excellent corrosion resistance good resistance against chemically polluted water cures even at temperatures down to -10C rapid throughput of work can be maintained even at low temperatures resistant to well designed/controlled cathodic protection
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 10C Mass density Volume solids VOC (supplied) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Full cure after
black, brown - eggshell (1 g/cm = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.5 g/cm 71 2% max. 207 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 305 g/l (approx. 2.5 lb/gal) 125 - 250 m 5.7 m/l for 125 m, 2.8 m/l for 250 m * 6 hours min. 12 hours * max. see overcoating table * 7 days * (data for components)
at least 12 months
for immersion in water, with or without cathodic protection steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 40 - 70 m steel with approved zinc silicate shop primer; sweep blasted to SPSS-Ss or power tool cleaned to SPSS-Pt3 existing suitable epoxy coating or coaltar epoxy coating; in sound condition and sufciently roughened and free from any contamination for atmospheric exposure conditions: steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2 or ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 40 - 70 m steel with approved shop primer; power tool cleaned to SPSS-Pt2 or SPSS-Pt3 existing suitable epoxy coating or coaltar epoxy coating; in sound condition and sufciently roughened and free from any contamination substrate temperature should be between -10C up to 15C during application and curing and at least 3C above dew point and free from ice and any contamination
page 1/5
SIGMACOVER 300 LT
September 2009
during application and curing a substrate temperature down to -10C is possible, but curing to hardness takes longer and complete resistance will be reached when temperature increases maximum relative humidity during application and curing is 85% SYSTEM SPECIFICATION INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE marine mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 86 : 14 the temperature of the mixed base and hardener should preferably be above 5C, otherwise extra solvent may be required to obtain application viscosity too much solvent results in reduced sag resistance and slower cure thinner should be added after mixing the components Induction time Pot life none 6 hours at 10C *
system sheets: 3101, 3106
Thinner 91-79 0 - 5% for a dft of 250 m 10 - 15% for a dft of 125 m approx. 0.53 - 0.64 mm (= 0.021 - 0.025 in) 15 MPa (= approx. 150 bar; 2130 p.s.i.)
Thinner 91-79 5 - 10%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 1.5 - 3 mm 0.2 - 0.4 MPa (= approx. 2 - 4 bar; 28 - 57 p.s.i.) only for touch up and spot repair Thinner 91-79 0 - 5% Thinner 90-53 for paint and recommended thinners see safety sheets 1430, 1431 and relevant material safety data sheets this is a solvent borne paint and care should be taken to avoid inhalation of spray mist or vapour as well as contact between the wet paint and exposed skin or eyes
page 2/5
SIGMACOVER 300 LT
September 2009
ADDITIONAL DATA
Film thickness and spreading rate theoretical spreading rate m/l dft in m 5.7 125 2.8 250 70 m
max. dft when brushing (touch up and spot repair): Overcoating table for dft up to 250 m substrate temperature minimum interval with SigmaCover 300 and SigmaCover 510 and other compatible paints maximum interval when exposed to direct sunshine maximum interval when not exposed to direct sunshine -10C 48 hours 15 days 0C 24 hours 5 days 10C 12 hours 3 days 15C
8 hours 2 days
30 days
30 days
30 days
20 days
surface should be dry and free from any contamination and ice when overcoated with other paints, tar bleeding will occur when overcoating work is to be carried out on coats thicker than 125 m applied in one coat, the minimum overcoating interval must be extended as follows: for 250 m : 2 times as long for 375 m : 3 times as long for 500 m : 4 times as long adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) when application has to be executed at low temperature care should be taken that the temperature of the mixed paint is at least 15C, the induction time should be increased to at least one hour
page 3/5
SIGMACOVER 300 LT
September 2009
Curing table for dft up to 250 m substrate temperature dry to handle initial cure for exposure to sea water and to slightly polluted atmosphere 12 days 7 days 5 days 3 days 48 hours 42 hours full cure for immersion in polluted water or crude oil -21 days 15 days 10 days 7 days 5 days
-10C -5C 0C 5C 10C 15C
72 hours 48 hours 30 hours 20 hours 12 hours 8 hours
REFERENCES
page 4/5
SIGMACOVER 300 LT
September 2009
179014 179015
PDS brown black
7483 2000002200 8000002200
page 5/5
SIGMACOVER 385
DESCRIPTION
two component high build multi purpose epoxy primer/ coating
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS general purpose epoxy primer or build coat for steel and concrete structures suitable for atmospheric and marine conditions can be recoated with various two component and conventional coatings even after long weathering periods lead- and chromate free excellent rust preventing properties in industrial or coastal atmospheres tough, with long term exibility good adhesion to steel, galvanised steel and aged epoxy coatings easy application, both by airless spray and brush COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20C Mass density Volume solids VOC (supplied) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Full cure after Shelf life (cool and dry place) RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES white, oxide red, black, buff - at (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.4 g/cm 68 2% max. 231 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 326 g/l (approx. 2.7 lb/gal) 276 g/ltr (2.3 lb/gal) (by EPA Method 24) 100 - 200 m depending on system * 6.8 m/l for 100 m * 2 hours min. 8 hours * max. 6 months ( with itself) 4 days * (data for components) at least 12 months
steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 40 - 70 m shop primed steel; pretreated to SPSS-Pt3 / SSPC-SP3 aged suitable coatings; dry and free from any contamination and sufciently roughened substrate temperature should be above 10C and at least 3C above dew point during application and curing mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 50 : 50 the temperature of the mixed base and hardener should preferably be above 15C, otherwise extra solvent may be required to obtain application viscosity too much solvent results in reduced sag resistance and slower cure thinner should be added after mixing the components
Pot life
3 hours at 20C *
page 1/4
SIGMACOVER 385
September 2011
Thinner 91-92 5 - 10%, depending on required thickness and application conditions approx. 0.48 mm (= 0.019 in) 15 MPa (= approx. 150 bar; 2130 p.s.i.) Thinner 91-92 10 - 15%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 1.5 - 3 mm 0.3 - 0.4 MPa (= approx. 3 - 4 bar; 43 - 57 p.s.i.) Thinner 91-92 0 - 5% Thinner 90-53 for paint and recommended thinners see safety sheets 1430, 1431 and relevant material safety data sheets this is a solvent borne paint and care should be taken to avoid inhalation of spray mist or vapour as well as contact between the wet paint and exposed skin or eyes
ADDITIONAL DATA
Overcoating table for dft up to 100 m with itself substrate temperature minimum interval maximum interval 10C 10 hours 6 months 20C 8 hours 6 months 30C 6 hours 6 months
page 2/4
SIGMACOVER 385
September 2011
Overcoating table for dft up to 100 m with polyurethanes substrate temperature minimum interval maximum interval 10C 10 hours 42 days 20C 8 hours 30 days 30C 6 hours 14 days
Curing table for dft up to 100 m substrate temperature 10C 20C 30C dry to handle 24 hours 16 hours 10 hours full cure 6 days 4 days 3 days
adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) Pot life (at application viscosity) 10C 20C 30C Worldwide availability 4 hours 2.5 hours 1.5 hour
REFERENCES
page 3/4
SIGMACOVER 385
September 2011
PDS
7453
page 4/4
SIGMACOVER 410
4 pages August 2011 Revision of May 2011
DESCRIPTION
two component high solids, high build, polyamide cured epoxy coating pigmented with micaceous iron oxide (MIO) or in selected colours
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS general purpose epoxy build coat in protective coating systems for steel and concrete structures exposed to atmospheric land or marine conditions excellent durability can be recoated with various two component and conventional coatings even after long weathering periods easy application by airless spray available in MIO or conventional pigmented grade COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20C Mass density Volume solids VOC (supplied) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Full cure after Shelf life (cool and dry place) RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES MIO and a selected range of colours - at (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.9 g/cm (MIO) ,1.5 g/cm (conventional pigmented grade) 80 2% max. 126 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 240 g/l (approx. 2.0 lb/gal) 75 - 200 m depending on system 10.0 m/l for 75 m * 3 hours * min. 10 hours * max. 6 months * 7 days * (data for components) at least 12 months
previous suitable primer; dry and free from any contamination and zinc salts, and sufciently roughened if necessary when applied to zinc silicate, a mist coat and full coat technique is required substrate temperature should be at least 5C and at least 3C above dew point during application and curing mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 80 : 20 the temperature of the mixed base and hardener should preferably be above 15C, otherwise extra solvent may be required to obtain application viscosity too much solvent results in reduced sag resistance and slower cure thinner should be added after mixing the components

page 1/4
SIGMACOVER 410
August 2011
AIRLESS SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure BRUSH/ROLLER Recommended thinner Volume of thinner
Thinner 91-92 0 - 10%, 30 - 40% when mist coat applied approx. 0.45 - 0.53 mm (= 0.018 - 0.021 in) 20 - 25 MPa (= 200 - 250 bar; 2800 - 3500 p.s.i.) Thinner 91-92 0 - 5%
Application by brush may show brush marking, due to the thixatropic nature of the paint and is most suitable to small areas, tight angle areas or for stripe coating or touch up. Application by roller will leave roller marking and is suitable for minimum dft requirements only. A roller suitable for epoxy application only must be used.
ADDITIONAL DATA
Overcoating table for SigmaCover 410 for dft up to 200 m substrate temperature for various two pack epoxy- or polyurethane paint minimum interval maximum interval * 5C 36 hours -10C 24 hours -20C 8 hours -30C 6 hours -40C 4 hours --
* This product has an unlimited maximum overcoating interval provided the surface is free from chalking and other contamination. In cases of exposure to direct sunlight or when the surface is contaminated it is recommended that the surface be cleaned and roughened to ensure good adhesion of the subsequent coating. The optimum intercoat adhesion is obtained when the subsequent coating is applied before the full cure time of the previous coating has elapsed.
page 2/4
SIGMACOVER 410
August 2011
Curing table for dft up to 200 m substrate temperature 5C 10C 15C 20C 30C 40C touch dry 12 hours 6 hours 4 hours 3 hours 2 hours 1.5 hour dry to handle 30 hours 24 hours 10 hours 8 hours 6 hours 4 hours full cure 20 days 14 days 10 days 7 days 5 days 3 days
adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) Pot life (at application viscosity) 10C 15C 20C 25C 30C 40C Worldwide availability 12 hours 10 hours 6 hours 4 hours 3 hours 2 hours
REFERENCES
page 3/4
SIGMACOVER 410
August 2011
PDS
6823
page 4/4
SIGMACOVER 435
5 pages May 2011 Revision of August 2010
DESCRIPTION
two component high build micaceous iron oxide pigmented polyamide cured recoatable epoxy coating
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS general purpose epoxy build coat or nish in protective coating systems for steel and concrete structures exposed to atmospheric land or marine conditions easy application, both by airless spray and brush cures even at temperatures down to -10C a high relative humidity max. 95%, during application and curing does not inuence the quality of the coating good adhesion on most aged, sound alkyd-, chlorinated rubber- and epoxy coatings can be recoated with various two component and conventional coatings even after long weathering periods resistant to water and splash of mild chemicals excellent durability tough, with long term exibility resistant to temperatures up to 200C (see system sheet 4062) COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20C Mass density Volume solids VOC (supplied) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Curing time Shelf life (cool and dry place) RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES light grey (9553-05), dark grey ( 9558-05), green (9441-05), aluminium (959005) - eggshell (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.4 g/cm 63 2% max. 241 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 344 g/l (approx. 2.9 lb/gal) 75 - 150 m depending on system 6.3 m/l for 100 m * 2 hours min. 3 hours * max. unlimited 4 days * (data for components) at least 24 months
steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 40 - 70 m steel with approved zinc silicate shop primer; pretreated according to SPSS or powertool cleaned to SPSS-Pt3 previous coat; dry and free from any contamination during application and curing a substrate temperature down to -10C is acceptable provided substrate is dry and free from ice substrate temperature should be at least 3C above dew point
page 1/5
SIGMACOVER 435
May 2011
marine mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 82 : 18
system sheets: 3102, 3103
the temperature of the mixed base and hardener should preferably be above 10C, otherwise extra solvent may be required to obtain application viscosity too much solvent results in reduced sag resistance thinner should be added after mixing the components Induction time Pot life AIRLESS SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure AIR SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure BRUSH/ROLLER Recommended thinner Volume of thinner CLEANING SOLVENT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS none 6 hours at 20C
Thinner 91-92 5 - 10%, depending on required thickness and application conditions approx. 0.48 - 0.58 mm (= 0.019 - 0.023 in) 15 MPa (= approx. 150 bar; 2130 p.s.i.) Thinner 91-92 10 - 15%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 1.5 - 3 mm 0.3 - 0.4 MPa (= approx. 3 - 4 bar; 43 - 57 p.s.i.) Thinner 91-92 0 - 5% Thinner 90-53 for paint and recommended thinners see safety sheets 1430, 1431 and relevant material safety data sheets this is a solvent borne paint and care should be taken to avoid inhalation of spray mist or vapour as well as contact between the wet paint and exposed skin or eyes
ADDITIONAL DATA
page 2/5
SIGMACOVER 435
May 2011
Overcoating table for dft up to 150 m for SigmaCover 435, SigmaCover 456 substrate temperature minimum interval maximum interval -5C 36 hours 5C 10 hours 10C 4 hours 20C 3 hours 30C 2 hours 40C 2 hours
no limitation
surface should be dry and free from chalking and contamination Overcoating table for dft up to 150 m for Sigma Vikote 46, SigmaDur substrate 550, SigmaDur 520 and Sigmarine temperature 40 minimum interval maximum interval -5C 5C 10C 20C 30C 40C
72 hours
24 hours
16 hours
8 hours
5 hours
3 hours
no limitation
surface should be dry and free from chalking and contamination nishes require a corresponding undercoat SigmaCover 435 should not be overcoated with coal tar epoxy coatings
page 3/5
SIGMACOVER 435
May 2011
Curing table for dft up to 150 m substrate temperature -10C -5C 0C 5C 10C 15C 20C 30C 40C dry to handle 24 - 48 hours 24 - 30 hours 18 - 24 hours 18 hours 12 hours 8 hours 6 hours 4 hours 3 hours full cure 20 days 14 days 10 days 8 days 6 days 5 days 4 days 3 days 2 days
In exceptional cases SigmaCover 435 may be applied at lower substrate temperatures (down to -15C) provided that the surface is free from ice and other contamination. In such cases special care must be taken to avoid thick lm application as this may lead to checking/crazing or solvent entrapment.It should be clear that application at lower temperatures will require additional thinning to obtain application viscosity, however this will affect the sag resistance of the applied coating and can induce solvent retention. Optimal curing and designed product properties will only be achieved when minimum required substrate temperature is reached.
adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) Pot life (at application viscosity) 10C 20C 30C 40C Worldwide availability 12 hours 6 hours 4 hours 2 hours
REFERENCES
page 4/5
SIGMACOVER 435
May 2011
179025 179496
PDS lightgrey darkgrey
7465 9553052200 9558052200
page 5/5
SIGMACOVER 456
5 pages August 2010 Revision of September 2009
DESCRIPTION
two component high build polyamide cured recoatable epoxy coating
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS general purpose epoxy build coat or nish in protective coating systems for steel and concrete structures exposed to atmospheric land or marine conditions easy application, both by airless spray and brush cures even at temperatures down to -10C a high relative humidity max. 95%, during application and curing does not inuence the quality of the coating good adhesion on most aged, sound alkyd-, chlorinated rubber- and epoxy coatings can be recoated with various two component and conventional coatings even after long weathering periods resistant to water and splash of mild chemicals excellent durability tough, with long term exibility COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20C Mass density Volume solids VOC (supplied) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Curing time Shelf life (cool and dry place) RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES SYSTEM SPECIFICATION white and various other colours (see also the SigmaCare Shade Card of PPG Protective & Marine Coatings) - semigloss (1 g/cm = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.4 g/cm 65 2% (white); 62 - 65 2% (colours) max. 250 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 347 g/l (approx. 2.9 lb/gal) 75 - 150 m depending on system 6.5 m/l for 100 m, 8.7 m/l for 75 m * 2 hours min. 3 hours * max. unlimited 4 days * (data for components) at least 24 months
previous coat; dry and free from any contamination during application and curing a substrate temperature down to -10C is acceptable provided substrate is dry and free from ice substrate temperature should be at least 3C above dew point marine system sheets: 3102, 3103, 3104, 3105
page 1/5
SIGMACOVER 456
August 2010
none 6 hours at 20C

Thinner 91-92 0 - 5%, depending on required thickness and application conditions approx. 0.48 - 0.58 mm (= 0.019 - 0.023 in) 15 MPa (= approx. 150 bar; 2130 p.s.i.) Thinner 91-92 5 - 10%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 1.5 - 3 mm 0.3 - 0.4 MPa (= approx. 3 - 4 bar; 43 - 57 p.s.i.) Thinner 91-92 0 - 5% Thinner 90-53 for paint and recommended thinners see safety sheets 1430, 1431 and relevant material safety data sheets this is a solvent borne paint and care should be taken to avoid inhalation of spray mist or vapour as well as contact between the wet paint and exposed skin or eyes
ADDITIONAL DATA
page 2/5
SIGMACOVER 456
August 2010
Overcoating table for dft up to 150 m for SigmaCover 435, SigmaCover 456 substrate temperature minimum interval maximum interval -5C 36 hours 5C 10 hours 10C 4 hours 20C 3 hours 30C 2 hours 40C 2 hours
no limitation
surface should be dry and free from chalking and contamination Overcoating table for dft up to 150 m for Sigma Vikote 46, SigmaDur substrate 550, SigmaDur 520 and Sigmarine temperature 40 minimum interval maximum interval for Sigma Vikote 56 * and Sigmarine 48 * maximum interval -5C 5C 10C 20C 30C 40C
72 hours
24 hours
16 hours
8 hours
5 hours
3 hours
no limitation 17 days 14 days 10 days 7 days 4 days 2 days
* colour of SigmaCover 456 should be adapted to the colour of Sigma Vikote 56 or Sigmarine 48
surface should be dry and free from chalking and contamination nishes require a corresponding undercoat SigmaCover 456 should not be overcoated with coal tar epoxy coatings
page 3/5
SIGMACOVER 456
August 2010
Curing table for dft up to 150 m substrate temperature -10C -5C 0C 5C 10C 15C 20C 30C 40C dry to handle 24 - 48 hours 24 - 30 hours 18 - 24 hours 18 hours 12 hours 8 hours 6 hours 4 hours 3 hours full cure 20 days 14 days 10 days 8 days 6 days 5 days 4 days 3 days 2 days
In exceptional cases SigmaCover 456 may be applied at lower substrate temperatures (down to -15C) provided that the surface is free from ice and other contamination. In such cases special care must be taken to avoid thick lm application as this may lead to checking/crazing or solvent entrapment. It should be clear that application at lower temperatures will require additional thinning to obtain application viscosity, however this will affect the sag resistance of the applied coating and can induce solvent retention. Optimal curing and designed product properties will only be achieved when minimum required substrate temperature is reached.
REFERENCES
page 4/5
SIGMACOVER 456
August 2010
179073
PDS white
7466 7000002200
page 5/5
SIGMACOVER 456 HS
DESCRIPTION
two component high solids polyamide cured recoatable zinc phosphate epoxy primer/coating
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS general purpose epoxy primer/coating for steel and concrete structures in atmospheric exposure can be recoated with various two component and conventional coatings even after long weathering periods free from lead and chromate containing pigments excellent rust preventing properties in industrial or coastal atmospheres tough, with long term exibility cures at temperatures down to -5C good adhesion to steel easy application, both by airless spray and brush COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20C Mass density Volume solids VOC (supplied) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Full cure after cream (other colours on request) - eggshell (1 g/cm = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.4 g/cm 73 2% max. 192 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 277 g/l (approx. 2.3 lb/gal) 75 - 150 m depending on system 7.3 m/l for 100 m * 8 hours min. 8 hours * max. unlimited 4 days * (data for components) Shelf life (cool and dry place) at least 12 months
steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 40 - 70 m previous suitable coat; dry and free from any contamination during application and curing a substrate temperature down to -5C is acceptable provided the substrate is dry and free from ice substrate temperature should be at least 3C above dew point
page 1/4
SIGMACOVER 456 HS
September 2009
20 minutes if applied at temperatures below 10C none above 10C 4 hours at 20C *
ADDITIONAL DATA
page 2/4
SIGMACOVER 456 HS
September 2009
Overcoating table for SigmaCover 456 HS for dft up to 150 m substrate temperature minimum interval maximum interval -5C 48 hours unlimited 5C 20 hours 10C 16 hours 20C 8 hours 30C 6 hours 40C 4 hours
surface should be dry and free from any contamination for polyurethane paints the minimum overcoating time should be raised with 100% Curing table for dft up to 150 m substrate temperature -5C 0C 5C 10C 15C 20C 30C 40C dry to handle 24 - 48 hours 24 - 30 hours 18 - 24 hours 18 hours 12 hours 8 hours 6 hours 4 hours full cure 14 days 10 days 8 days 6 days 5 days 4 days 3 days 2 days
adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) Pot life (at application viscosity) 10C 15C 20C 30C 35C Worldwide availability 8 hours 5 hours 4 hours 2.5 hours 2 hours
page 3/4
SIGMACOVER 456 HS
September 2009
REFERENCES
Explanation to product data sheets Safety indications Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard Safe working in conned spaces Directives for ventilation practice
see information sheet 1411 see information sheet 1430 see information sheet 1431 see information sheet 1433 see information sheet 1434
215902
PDS cream
7712 9010262200
page 4/4
SIGMACOVER 480
DESCRIPTION
two component chemical resistant nish based on polyamide cured epoxy resins general purpose epoxy nish easy application by brush/roller and (airless) spray good water resistance good chemical resistance to spillage and splash resistant to impact and abrasion easy to clean
selected range of colours is available - semigloss (1 g/cm = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.4 g/cm 50 2% max. 308 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 418 g/l (approx. 3.5 lb/gal) 50 m 10.0 m/l * 30 minutes * min. 8 hours * max. 2 - 3 months * 7 days * (data for components)
at least 12 months
previous epoxy coats; dry and free from any contamination and sufciently roughened if necessary substrate temperature should be above 5C and at least 3C above dew point during application and curing mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 76 : 24 the temperature of the mixed base and hardener should preferably be above 10C, otherwise extra solvent may be required to obtain application viscosity too much solvent results in reduced sag resistance thinner should be added after mixing the components
Pot life
8 hours at 20C *
page 1/4
SIGMACOVER 480
September 2009
Thinner 91-92 10 - 15%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 2 mm 0.3 MPa (= approx. 3 bar; 43 p.s.i.)
ADDITIONAL DATA
Overcoating table for SigmaCover 480 for dft up to 50 m substrate temperature minimum interval maximum interval 5C 36 hours 3 months 10C 24 hours 3 months 20C 12 hours 3 months 30C 8 hours 2 months 40C 6 hours 2 months
surface should be dry and free from chalking and contamination
page 2/4
SIGMACOVER 480
September 2009
Curing table for dft up to 50 m substrate temperature 5C 10C 15C 20C 30C touch dry 4 hours 2 hours 1 hour 30 min. 30 min. dry to handle 12 hours 8 hours 6 hours 4 hours 3 hours full cure 21 days 14 days 10 days 7 days 5 days
REFERENCES
page 3/4
SIGMACOVER 480
September 2009
179559
PDS white
7441 7000002200
page 4/4
SIGMACOVER 522
DESCRIPTION
two component micaceous iron oxide pigmented polyamide cured epoxy primer/ sealer/coating
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS may be used as a primer, sealer or coating excellent adhesion to and sealing of weathered, cleaned zinc rich primers and metal sprayed steel good adhesion to properly pretreated galvanised steel excellent adhesion to blast cleaned steel can be used in systems for atmospheric or water immersed exposure conditions good resistance to industrial or chemical contaminated atmospheric exposure conditions good abrasion and impact resistance good adhesion characteristics for subsequent coats resistant to temperatures up to 200C in dry atmospheric exposure conditions COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20C Mass density Volume solids VOC (supplied) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Full cure after redbrown, greenish grey - low metallic sheen (1 g/cm = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.8 g/cm 60 2% max. 210 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 374 g/l (approx. 3.1 lb/gal) 40 - 80 m depending on system * 15 m/l for 40 m * 2 hours * min. 8 hours * max. 1 month * 7 days * (data for components) Shelf life (cool and dry place) at least 24 months
steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 40 - 70 m shop primed steel; sweep blasted to SPSS-Ss or power tool cleaned to SPSS-Pt3 zinc primed steel; free from any contamination and zinc salts galvanised steel; for atmospheric exposure conditions disc sanding, free from any contamination and zinc salts; for water immersed exposure conditions sweep blasting is required not weathered metal sprayed steel; free from any contamination and salts previous suitable coat; dry and free from any contamination
page 1/4
SIGMACOVER 522
September 2009
substrate temperature should be above 10C and at least 3C above dew point during application and curing for atmospheric exposure conditions the minimum substrate temperature for application may be 5C, but at low temperature the curing slows down according to the overcoating and curing tables REMARK when used as an adhesion primer or when a long overcoating interval is expected a max. dft of 50 m must be specied in order to preserve the rough texture INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 82 : 18 the temperature of the mixed base and hardener should preferably be above 15C, otherwise extra solvent may be required to obtain application viscosity too much solvent results in reduced sag resistance thinner should be added after mixing the components Induction time Pot life none 8 hours at 20C *
AIRLESS SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner
Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure AIR SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure BRUSH/ROLLER Recommended thinner Volume of thinner CLEANING SOLVENT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Thinner 91-92 5 - 10% for dft of approx. 80 m 25 - 30% for dft of approx. 40 m when used for sealing inorganic zinc and metal sprayed steel approx. 0.48 - 0.53 mm (= 0.019 - 0.021 in) 12 - 15 MPa (= approx. 120 - 150 bar; 1700 - 2130 p.s.i.)
page 2/4
SIGMACOVER 522
September 2009
ADDITIONAL DATA
Overcoating table for SigmaCover 522 substrate temperature minimum interval dft 50 m minimum interval dft 80 m maximum interval 5C 36 hours 10C 16 hours 20C 8 hours 30C 6 hours 40C 4 hours
3 days
32 hours
16 hours
12 hours
8 hours
28 days
28 days
28 days
14 days
7 days
surface should be dry and free from any contamination Note the minimum overcoating time should be multiplied by 5 when SigmaCover 522 is to be applied on top of an existing old (alkyd) primer or coating the maximum overcoating time of SigmaCover 522 could be extended up to 6 months provided the dft is not higher than 50 m surface should be properly cleaned glossy nishes require an adhesion promoting undercoat Curing table for dft up to 40 m substrate temperature 5C 10C 15C 20C 25C touch dry 8 hours 5 hours 3.5 hours 2 hours 1.5 hour dry to handle 18 hours 8 hours 6 hours 4 hours 4 hours full cure 20 days 15 days 10 days 7 days 5 days
adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) for optimum resistance in tankcoating systems a minimum substrate temperature of 10C is essential
page 3/4
SIGMACOVER 522
September 2009
Pot life (at application viscosity) 15C 20C 25C 30C 35C Worldwide availability 10 hours 8 hours 6 hours 5 hours 4 hours
REFERENCES
179510 179508
PDS greenish grey redbrown
7420 9048052200 9028052200
page 4/4
SIGMACOVER 630
5 pages September 2009 Revision of November 2007
DESCRIPTION
two component surface tolerant high build polyamine cured epoxy primer/ coating
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS surface tolerant coating for lower grade of steel preparation particularly suited as maintenance coating for dry cargo holds, decks and hulls general purpose epoxy build coat or nish in protective coating systems for steel and concrete structures exposed to atmospheric land or marine conditions compatible with various aged coatings overcoatable with most types of coatings excellent corrosion resistance resistant to splash and spillage of a wide range of chemicals good exibility COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20C Mass density Volume solids VOC (supplied) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Curing time green, grey, redbrown, black, aluminium - semigloss (1 g/cm = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.4 g/cm 83 2% max. 166 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 232 g/l (approx. 1.9 lb/gal) 60 - 100 m for brush/roller 125 - 200 m for airless spray 6.6 m/l for 125 m, 4.1 m/l for 200 m 6 hours min. 9 hours * max. 9 months * 7 days (data for components) Shelf life (cool and dry place) at least 12 months
for atmospheric exposure conditions: steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2 for excellent corrosion protection steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 40 - 70 m or power tool cleaned to ISO-St2 for good corrosion protection shop primed steel; pretreated to SPSS-Pt3 coated steel; hydrojetted to VIS WJ2/3 L existing sound epoxy coating systems and most sound alkyd coating systems; sufciently roughened, dry and free from any contamination
page 1/5
SIGMACOVER 630
September 2009
for immersion in sea water: (resistant to Cathodic Protection in systems) steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 40 - 70 m steel with approved zinc silicate shop primer; sweep blasted to SPSS-Ss or power tool cleaned to SPSS-Pt3 rst coat SigmaCover 630 aluminium substrate temperature should be above 10C and at least 3C above dew point INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 83 : 17 the temperature of the mixed base and hardener should preferably be above 15C, otherwise extra solvent may be required to obtain application viscosity too much solvent results in reduced sag resistance and slower cure thinner should be added after mixing the components Induction time Pot life none 2 hours at 20C *
Thinner 91-92 0 - 5%, depending on required thickness and application conditions approx. 0.48 - 0.53 mm (= 0.019 - 0.021 in) 15 MPa (= approx. 150 bar; 2130 p.s.i.)
page 2/5
SIGMACOVER 630
September 2009
ADDITIONAL DATA
Film thickness and spreading rate theoretical spreading rate m/l dft in m for airless spray dft in m for brush/roller max. dft when brushing: Overcoating table for dft up to 150 m substrate temperature 10C 20 hours 48 hours 12 months 6 months 20C 9 hours 24 hours 9 months 3 months 30C 5 hours 12 hours 6 months 1 month 40C 3 hours 6 hours 3 months 1 month 60 13.8 6.6 125 100 100 m 8.3 4.1 200
with various two pack epoxy coatings with polyurethanes with itself with various epoxy- and polyurethane coatings
minimum interval minimum interval maximum interval maximum interval
surface should be dry and free from any contamination Overcoating table for dft up to 150 m substrate temperature with various alkyds minimum interval maximum interval 10C 24 hours 21 days 20C 16 hours 10 days 30C 8 hours 7 days 40C 5 hours 3 days
after exceeding of the maximum interval, glossy nishes require a corresponding undercoat surface should be dry and free from any contamination best intercoat adhesion occurs when the subsequent coat is applied before the preceding coat is fully cured if this time is exceeded it may be necessary to roughen the surface
page 3/5
SIGMACOVER 630
September 2009
Curing table for dft up to 150 m substrate temperature 10C 20C 30C 40C touch dry 14 hours 6 hours 4 hours 2 hours dry to handle 20 hours 9 hours 5 hours 3 hours full cure 15 days 7 days 4 days 2 days
adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) Pot life (at application viscosity) 15C 20C 30C 40C Worldwide availability 3 hours 2 hours 1 hour 0.5 hour
REFERENCES
page 4/5
SIGMACOVER 630
September 2009
179099 179101 179103 179105 179106 179583 179586
PDS green grey redbrown black aluminium RAL 6002 offwhite
7430 4199052200 5177052200 6179052200 8000002200 9000002200 6002262200 7001002200
page 5/5
SIGMACOVER 630 LT
4 pages November 2010 Revision of September 2009
DESCRIPTION
two component surface tolerant high solids polyamine cured epoxy primer/ coating
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS self priming coating tolerant to lower grades of steel preparation for atmospheric exposure cures at temperatures down to -5C particularly well suited as maintenance coating for steel structures excellent corrosion resistance resistant to splash and spillage of a wide range of chemicals good abrasion resistance good exibility compatible with various aged coatings good recoatability with most epoxy-, polyurethane-, chlorinated rubber-, alkyd- and acrylic paints COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 10C Mass density Volume solids VOC (supplied) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Curing time Shelf life (cool and dry place) RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES grey, offwhite (other colours on request) - gloss (1 g/cm = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.4 g/cm 85 2% (for offwhite) max. 190 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 268 g/l (approx. 2.2 lb/gal) 60 - 150 m 14.2 m/l for 60 m, 5.7 m/l for 150 m 12 hours * min. 16 hours * max. 2 months * 7 days (data for components) at least 12 months
steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2 for excellent corrosion protection steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 40 - 70 m or power tool cleaned to ISO-St2 for good corrosion protection shop primed steel; pretreated to SPSS-Pt3 existing sound epoxy coating systems and most sound alkyd coating systems; sufciently roughened, dry and free from any contamination substrate temperature should be at least 3C above dew point during application and curing
page 1/4
SIGMACOVER 630 LT
November 2010
15 minutes, for substrate temperatures below +10C 2 hours at 10C *

Thinner 91-92 5 - 10%, depending on required thickness and application conditions approx. 0.48 - 0.53 mm (= 0.019 - 0.021 in) 15 MPa (= approx. 150 bar; 2130 p.s.i.) Thinner 91-92 10 - 15%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 1.8 - 2 mm 0.3 - 0.4 MPa (= approx. 3 - 4 bar; 43 - 57 p.s.i.) Thinner 91-92 or Thinner 91-99 for better ow 5 - 10% Thinner 90-53 for paint and recommended thinners see safety sheets 1430, 1431 and relevant material safety data sheets this is a solvent borne paint and care should be taken to avoid inhalation of spray mist or vapour as well as contact between the wet paint and exposed skin or eyes
ADDITIONAL DATA
page 2/4
SIGMACOVER 630 LT
November 2010
Overcoating table for dft up to 150 m substrate temperature with various two pack epoxy coatings minimum interval maximum interval -5C 48 hours 2 months 0C 24 hours 2 months 5C 20 hours 2 months 10C 16 hours 2 months 20C 8 hours 2 months
surface should be dry and free from any contamination Overcoating table for dft up to 150 m substrate temperature with polyurethanes minimum interval maximum interval -5C 96 hours 1 month 0C 64 hours 1 month 5C 36 hours 1 month 10C 24 hours 1 month 20C 16 hours 1 month
after exceeding of the maximum interval, glossy nishes require a corresponding undercoat surface should be dry and free from any contamination best intercoat adhesion occurs when the subsequent coat is applied before the preceding coat is fully cured if this time is exceeded it may be necessary to roughen the surface Curing table for dft up to 150 m substrate temperature -5C 0C 5C 10C 20C touch dry 48 hours 24 hours 18 hours 12 hours 4 hours dry to handle 48 hours 24 hours 20 hours 16 hours 8 hours full cure 21 days 14 days 10 days 7 days 5 days
page 3/4
SIGMACOVER 630 LT
November 2010
Pot life (at application viscosity) 0C 10C 20C Worldwide availability 3 hours 2 hours 1 hour
REFERENCES
179613 179609 173524
PDS base L base Z clear
7434 20 ltr 20 ltr hardener
page 4/4
SIGMACOVER 640
3 pages March 2011 Revision of September 2010
DESCRIPTION
two component high solids epoxy coating high performance self priming universal epoxy high solids, low VOC surface tolerant and abrasion resistant compatible with prepared damp surfaces good adhesion on most existing coatings available in a wide colour range also available with MIO pigmentation good resistance to splash and spillage of chemicals
RAL colours (other colours available on request) - semigloss (data for mixed product) 1.4 g/cm (white) 87 2% max. 114 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 163 g/l (approx. 1.4 lb/gal) 180 g/ltr (1.5 lb/gal) (by EPA Method 24) 100 - 200 m 8.7 m/l for 100 m * 6 hours * min. 16 hours * max. see tables * (data for components) at least 12 months
steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, power tool cleaned to min. ISO-St3 or hand tool clean to ISO-St2 or ultra high pressure water jet to WJ2L for immersion exposure: steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2 concrete and other cement-bonded substrates; dry, hard and free from contamination such as laitance, grease and dust aged suitable coatings; dry and free from any contamination and sufciently roughened for single pack coatings; extra precautions are necessary mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 1 : 1 the paint should be stirred well before use, preferably by means of a mechanical mixer, to ensure homogeneity add cure to resin and continue stirring until homogeneous
Pot life
2 hours at 20C
page 1/3
SIGMACOVER 640
March 2011
AIRLESS SPRAY Recommended thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure AIR SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner BRUSH/ROLLER
no extra thinner needed approx. 0.48 mm (= 0.019 in) 15 - 18 MPa (= approx. 150 - 180 bar; 2130 - 2560 p.s.i.) Thinner 91-92 0 - 10%, depending on required thickness and application conditions apply evenly, using a well loaded brush or roller application by brush or roller will provide approx. 80 microns dft in a single coat application Thinner 90-58 for paint and recommended thinners see safety sheets 1430, 1431 and relevant material safety data sheets this is a solvent borne paint and care should be taken to avoid inhalation of spray mist or vapour as well as contact between the wet paint and exposed skin or eyes
ADDITIONAL DATA
Overcoating table for SigmaCover 640 for dft at 125 m substrate temperature minimum interval maximum interval
*
10C 48 hours extended *
20C 16 hours
30C 4 hours
40C 3 hours
This product has an extended maximum overcoating time. Surfaces to be overcoated must be clean and dry. Any contamination must be identied and adequately removed. Particular attention must be paid to surfaces that have been exposed to heat and/o rsunlight and where chalking may be present. A degree of surface cleaning will be required. Your PPG representative can advise onsuitable cleaning methods.
page 2/3
SIGMACOVER 640
March 2011
Curing table for dft at 125 m substrate temperature 10C 20C 30C 40C touch dry 24 hours 6 hours 3 hours 1 hour dry to handle 48 hours 20 hours 5 hours 3 hours full cure 21 days 7 days 4 days 2 days
during the curing period precautions must be taken to avoid contact of the coating with moisture, otherwise blushing may occur Worldwide availability Whilst it is always the aim of PPG Protective & Marine Coatings to supply the same product on a worldwide basis, slight modication of the product is sometimes necessary to comply with local or national rules/circumstances. Under these circumstances an alternative product data sheet is used. Explanation to product data sheets Safety indications Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard Safe working in conned spaces Directives for ventilation practice Surface preparation of concrete (oors) see information sheet 1411 see information sheet 1430 see information sheet 1431 see information sheet 1433 see information sheet 1434 see information sheet 1496
REFERENCES
PDS
7988
page 3/3
SIGMACOVER 640 ALUMINIUM

3 pages March 2011 Revision of December 2009
DESCRIPTION
two component high solids epoxy coating high performance self priming universal epoxy high solids, low VOC surface tolerant and abrasion resistant compatible with prepared damp surfaces good adhesion on most existing coatings good resistance to splash and spillage of chemicals
aluminium - semigloss (data for mixed product) 1.3 g/cm 85 2% max. 157 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 196 g/l (approx. 1.6 lb/gal) 125 m 6.8 m/l for 125 m * 6 hours * min. 16 hours * max. see tables * (data for components) at least 12 months
steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, power tool cleaned to min. ISO-St3 or hand tool clean to ISO-St2 or ultra high pressure water jet to WJ2L for immersion exposure: steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2 aged suitable coatings; dry and free from any contamination and sufciently roughened substrate temperature should be above 10C and at least 3C above dew point mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 1 : 1 the paint should be stirred well before use, preferably by means of a mechanical mixer, to ensure homogeneity add cure to resin and continue stirring until homogeneous
Pot life AIRLESS SPRAY Recommended thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure
4 hours at 20C no extra thinner needed approx. 0.48 mm (= 0.019 in) 15 - 18 MPa (= approx. 150 - 180 bar; 2130 - 2560 p.s.i.)
page 1/3

March 2011
AIR SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner BRUSH/ROLLER
Thinner 91-83 0 - 10%, depending on required thickness and application conditions apply evenly, using a well loaded brush or roller application by brush or roller will provide approx. 80 microns dft in a single coat application Thinner 90-58 for paint and recommended thinners see safety sheets 1430, 1431 and relevant material safety data sheets this is a solvent borne paint and care should be taken to avoid inhalation of spray mist or vapour as well as contact between the wet paint and exposed skin or eyes
ADDITIONAL DATA
Overcoating table for SigmaCover 640 Aluminium for dft at 125 m substrate temperature minimum interval maximum interval
*
20C 16 hours
30C 8 hours
This product has an extended maximum overcoating time. Surfaces to be overcoated must be clean and dry. Any contamination must be identied and adequately removed. Particular attention must be paid to surfaces that have been exposed to heat and/or sunlight and where chalking may be present. A degree of surface cleaning will be required. Your PPG representative can advise on suitable cleaning methods.
Curing table for dft at 125 m substrate temperature 10C 20C 30C touch dry 16 hours 6 hours 4 hours dry to handle 72 hours 24 hours 10 hours full cure 21 days 7 days 4 days
during the curing period precautions must be taken to avoid contact of the coating with moisture, otherwise blushing may occur
page 2/3

March 2011
Whilst it is always the aim of PPG Protective & Marine Coatings to supply the same product on a worldwide basis, slight modication of the product is sometimes necessary to comply with local or national rules/circumstances. Under these circumstances an alternative product data sheet is used. Explanation to product data sheets Safety indications Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard Safe working in conned spaces Directives for ventilation practice Surface preparation of concrete (oors) see information sheet 1411 see information sheet 1430 see information sheet 1431 see information sheet 1433 see information sheet 1434 see information sheet 1496
REFERENCES
PDS
7992
page 3/3
SIGMACOVER 640 ALUMINIUM LT

DESCRIPTION
two component high solids epoxy coating low temperature curing down to 0C high performance self priming universal epoxy high solids, low VOC surface tolerant and abrasion resistant compatible with prepared damp surfaces good adhesion on most existing coatings good resistance to splash and spillage of chemicals
aluminium - semigloss (data for mixed product) 1.3 g/cm 79 2% max. 197 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 240 g/l (approx. 2.0 lb/gal) 125 m 6.3 m/l for 125 m * 7 hours * min. 16 hours * max. see tables * (data for components) at least 12 months
steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, power tool cleaned to min. ISO-St3 or hand tool clean to ISO-St2 or ultra high pressure water jet to WJ2L for immersion exposure: steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2 aged suitable coatings; dry and free from any contamination and sufciently roughened substrate temperature should be above 0C and at least 3C above dew point mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 1 : 1 the paint should be stirred well before use, preferably by means of a mechanical mixer, to ensure homogeneity add cure to resin and continue stirring until homogeneous
Pot life AIRLESS SPRAY Recommended thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure
2.5 hours at 10C no extra thinner needed approx. 0.48 mm (= 0.019 in) 15 - 18 MPa (= approx. 150 - 180 bar; 2130 - 2560 p.s.i.)
page 1/3

March 2011
AIR SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner BRUSH/ROLLER
Thinner 91-83 0 - 10%, depending on required thickness and application conditions apply evenly, using a well loaded brush or roller application by brush or roller will provide approx. 80 microns dft in a single coat application Thinner 90-58 for paint and recommended thinners see safety sheets 1430, 1431 and relevant material safety data sheets this is a solvent borne paint and care should be taken to avoid inhalation of spray mist or vapour as well as contact between the wet paint and exposed skin or eyes
ADDITIONAL DATA
Overcoating table for SigmaCover 640 Aluminium LT for dft at 125 m substrate temperature minimum interval maximum interval
*
10C 16 hours
20C 8 hours
Curing table for dft at 125 m substrate temperature 5C 10C 20C touch dry 9 hours 7 hours 2 hours dry to handle 18 hours 14 hours 4 hours full cure 14 days 14 days 7 days
during the curing period precautions must be taken to avoid contact of the coating with moisture, otherwise blushing may occur
page 2/3

March 2011
Whilst it is always the aim of PPG Protective & Marine Coatings to supply the same product on a worldwide basis, slight modication of the product is sometimes necessary to comply with local or national rules/circumstances. Under these circumstances an alternative product data sheet is used. Explanation to product data sheets Safety indications Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard Safe working in conned spaces Directives for ventilation practice Surface preparation of concrete (oors) see information sheet 1411 see information sheet 1430 see information sheet 1431 see information sheet 1433 see information sheet 1434 see information sheet 1496
REFERENCES
PDS
7993
page 3/3
SIGMACOVER 640 LT
3 pages March 2011 Revision of November 2009
DESCRIPTION
two component high solids epoxy coating low temperature curing down to 0C high performance self priming universal epoxy high solids, low VOC surface tolerant and abrasion resistant compatible with prepared damp surfaces good adhesion on most existing coatings available in a wide colour range also available with MIO pigmentation good resistance to splash and spillage of chemicals
RAL colours (other colours available on request) - semigloss (data for mixed product) 1.4 g/cm (white) 88 2% max. 114 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 163 g/l (approx. 1.4 lb/gal) 180 g/ltr (1.5 lb/gal) (by EPA Method 24) 100 - 200 m 8.8 m/l for 100 m * 6 hours * min. 14 hours * max. see tables * (data for components) at least 12 months
steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, power tool cleaned to min. ISO-St3 or hand tool clean to ISO-St2 or ultra high pressure water jet to WJ2L for immersion exposure: steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2 concrete and other cement-bonded substrates; dry, hard and free from contamination such as laitance, grease and dust aged suitable coatings; dry and free from any contamination and sufciently roughened for single pack coatings; extra precautions are necessary mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 1 : 1 the paint should be stirred well before use, preferably by means of a mechanical mixer, to ensure homogeneity add cure to resin and continue stirring until homogeneous
Pot life
1 hour at 20C
page 1/3
SIGMACOVER 640 LT
March 2011
AIRLESS SPRAY Recommended thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure AIR SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner BRUSH/ROLLER
no extra thinner needed approx. 0.48 mm (= 0.019 in) 15 - 18 MPa (= approx. 150 - 180 bar; 2130 - 2560 p.s.i.) Thinner 21-06 0 - 10%, depending on required thickness and application conditions apply evenly, using a well loaded brush or roller application by brush or roller will provide approx. 80 microns dft in a single coat application Thinner 90-58 for paint and recommended thinners see safety sheets 1430, 1431 and relevant material safety data sheets this is a solvent borne paint and care should be taken to avoid inhalation of spray mist or vapour as well as contact between the wet paint and exposed skin or eyes
ADDITIONAL DATA
Overcoating table for SigmaCover 640 LT for dft at 125 m substrate temperature minimum interval maximum interval
*
10C 14 hours
20C 6 hours
30C 3 hours
page 2/3
SIGMACOVER 640 LT
March 2011
Curing table for dft at 125 m substrate temperature 10C 20C dry to handle 16 hours 5 hours full cure 14 days 7 days
during the curing period precautions must be taken to avoid contact of the coating with moisture, otherwise blushing may occur Worldwide availability Whilst it is always the aim of PPG Protective & Marine Coatings to supply the same product on a worldwide basis, slight modication of the product is sometimes necessary to comply with local or national rules/circumstances. Under these circumstances an alternative product data sheet is used. Explanation to product data sheets Safety indications Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard Safe working in conned spaces Directives for ventilation practice Surface preparation of concrete (oors) see information sheet 1411 see information sheet 1430 see information sheet 1431 see information sheet 1433 see information sheet 1434 see information sheet 1496
REFERENCES
PDS
7989
page 3/3
SIGMACOVER 640 SEALER

(Amerlock Sealer)
3 pages January 2010
DESCRIPTION
two component surface tolerant solvent free rust penetrating epoxy sealer penetrates rust and adheres to aged coatings surface tolerant coating for lower grade of steel preparation primer for concrete surfaces good ow and wetting properties overcoatable with most types of coatings
clear - gloss (1 g/cm = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.1 g/cm 100% max. 0 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 0 g/l (0 lb/gal) 40 m 25 m/l for 40 m 12 hours * max. 1 month * min. 24 hours 7 days * (data for components)
at least 12 months
concrete, sand/cement; dry and free from any contamination moisture content of concrete should be max. 4% steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2 or power tool cleaned to ISO-St2 for good corrosion protection substrate temperature should be above 5C and at least 3C above dew point during application and curing mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 50 : 50 for airless application the temperature of base and hardener should be at least 15C lower temperatures possible for roller application no thinner should be added
none approx. 1 hour at 20C *

page 1/3

(Amerlock Sealer)
January 2010
AIRLESS SPRAY Recommended thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure BRUSH/ROLLER Recommended thinner CLEANING SOLVENT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
no thinner should be added approx. 0.43 mm (= 0.017 in) at 20C (paint temperature) min. 15 MPa (= approx. 150 bar; 2130 p.s.i.) ROLLER: nylon suitable for 2 component epoxy with hair length 8 mm BRUSH: for stripe coating and spot repair only no thinner should be added Thinner 90-58 for paint and recommended thinners see safety sheets 1430, 1431 and relevant material safety data sheets although this is a solvent free paint, care should be taken to avoid inhalation of spray mist as well as contact between the wet paint and exposed skin or eyes spray mist is not harmless, a fresh air mask and gloves should be used during spraying ventilation should be provided in conned spaces to maintain good visibility
ADDITIONAL DATA
Overcoating table for dft up to 40 m substrate temperature 5C 34 hours 1 month 10C 30 hours 1 month 20C 24 hours 1 month 30C 18 hours 1 month
for various two pack epoxies
minimum interval maximum interval
surface should be dry and free from any contamination best intercoat adhesion occurs when the subsequent coat is applied before the fully cured stage is reached if this time is exceeded the surface has to be roughened Curing table for dft up to 40 m substrate temperature 5C 10C 20C 30C touch dry 24 hours 18 hours 12 hours 8 hours dry to handle 48 hours 36 hours 28 hours 24 hours full cure 21 days 14 days 7 days 3 days
page 2/3

(Amerlock Sealer)
January 2010
due to exothermic reaction, temperature during pot life may increase up to 60C at gel point
Whilst it is always the aim of PPG Protective & Marine Coatings to supply the same product on a worldwide basis, slight modication of the product is sometimes necessary to comply with local or national rules/circumstances. Under these circumstances an alternative product data sheet is used. Explanation to product data sheets Safety indications explosion hazard- toxic hazard Safe working in conned spaces Directives for ventilation practice see information sheet 1411 see information sheet 1430 see information sheet 1431 see information sheet 1433 see information sheet 1434
REFERENCES
PDS
7995
page 3/3
SIGMACOVER 805
DESCRIPTION
two component high solids polyamine adduct cured epoxy coating can be used directly to metal very good surface wetting excellent corrosion resistance outstanding (sea)water resistance resistant to well designed/controlled cathodic protection good resistance against chemically polluted water good abrasion resistance tar free
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20C Mass density Volume solids VOC (supplied) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Ready for immersion
limited colour range available - gloss (1 g/cm = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.6 g/cm 82 2% max. 158 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 221 g/l (approx. 1.8 lb/gal) 150 m depending on system 5.5 m/l for 150 m * 3 hours min. 16 hours * max. 28 days * 3 days * (data for components)
at least 12 months
for immersion exposure: steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 40 - 70 m steel with approved zinc silicate shop primer; pretreated according to SPSS-Ss substrate temperature should be above 5C and at least 3C above dew point during application and curing for atmospheric exposure conditions: steel; pretreated preferably to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 40 - 70 m or according to ISO-St3 shop primed steel; pretreated to SPSS-Pt3 previous coat; (e.g. SigmaCover 805 or suitable primer) dry and free from any contamination and within the minimum and maximum overcoating time substrate temperature should be above 5C and at least 3C above dew point during application and curing
page 1/4
SIGMACOVER 805
September 2009
Pot life
2 hours at 20C *
AIRLESS SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure CLEANING SOLVENT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Thinner 91-92 0 - 5%, depending on required thickness and application conditions approx. 0.48 - 0.53 mm (= 0.019 - 0.021 in) 15 MPa (= approx. 150 bar; 2130 p.s.i.) Thinner 90-53 for paint and recommended thinners see safety sheets 1430, 1431 and relevant material safety data sheets this is a solvent borne paint and care should be taken to avoid inhalation of spray mist or vapour as well as contact between the wet paint and exposed skin or eyes
ADDITIONAL DATA
Film thickness and spreading rate theoretical spreading rate m/l dft in m 5.5 150
Overcoating table for SigmaCover 805 for dft up to 150 m with itself substrate temperature minimum interval * maximum interval 5C 36 hours 28 days 10C 24 hours 28 days 20C 16 hours 28 days 30C 8 hours 14 days
* for polyurethane paints like SigmaDur 550 and SigmaDur 520 the minimum overcoating time should be raised with 50%
surface should be dry and free from any contamination adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434)
page 2/4
SIGMACOVER 805
September 2009
Curing table for dft up to 150 m substrate temperature 5C 10C 15C 20C 30C 40C Pot life (at application viscosity) 15C 20C 30C 40C Worldwide availability 3 hours 2 hours 1 hour 0.5 hour for immersion in water 10 days 7 days 5 days 3 days 2.5 days 1.5 day
REFERENCES
page 3/4
SIGMACOVER 805
September 2009
182345 190856 182348
PDS offwhite brown black
7726 7001002200 2000002200 8000002200
page 4/4
SIGMACOVER 1000
5 pages September 2009 Revision of December 2008
DESCRIPTION
two component solvent free amine cured epoxy coating
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS one coat protection for steel structures with excellent corrosion resistance can be applied at a dft up to 1000 m by heavy duty single feed airless spray equipment (60:1) one coat heavy duty deck system reduced explosion risk and re hazard good visibility due to light colour resistant to well designed/controlled cathodic protection can be immersed in (sea)water after 4 hours of curing at 20C COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20C Mass density Volume solids VOC (supplied) grey (other colours on request) - gloss (1 g/cm = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.4 g/cm 100% max. 62 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 86 g/l (approx. 0.7 lb/gal) see information sheet 1411 min. 500 - 1000 m depending on system 2.0 m/l for 500 m 12 hours * min. 20 hours * max. 20 days * 5 days * (data for components) Shelf life (cool and dry place) at least 12 months
for immersion exposure: steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 50 - 100 m shop primed steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 50 - 100 m coated steel; hydrojetted to VIS WJ2/3 L (blasting prole 40 - 70 m) for atmospheric exposure conditions: steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 50 - 100 m coated steel; hydrojetted to VIS WJ2/3 L (blasting prole 40 - 70 m) substrate temperature should be above 5C and at least 3C above dew point
page 1/5
SIGMACOVER 1000
September 2009
mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 80 : 20 when mixing the temperature of the base and hardener should be at least 20C at lower temperature the viscosity will be too high for spray application no thinner should be added

AIRLESS SPRAY
heavy duty single feed airless spray equipment preferably 60:1 pump ratio and suitable high pressure hoses in-line heating or insulated hoses may be necessary to avoid cooling down of paint in hoses at low air temperature application with 45:1 airless spray equipment is possible provided in-line heated high pressure hoses are used in case of using 45:1 airless spray equipment the paint must be heated to approx. 30C in order to obtain the right application viscosity length of hoses should be as short as possible no thinner should be added approx. 0.53 mm (= 0.021 in) at 20C (paint temperature) min. 28 MPa (= approx. 280 bar; 4000 p.s.i.) at 30C (paint temperature) min. 22 MPa (= approx. 220 bar; 3000 p.s.i.) for stripe coating and spot repair only no thinner should be added Thinner 90-83 (preferred) or Thinner 90-53 all application equipment must be cleaned immediately after use paint inside the spraying equipment must be removed before the pot life time has been expired for paint and recommended thinners see safety sheets 1430, 1431 and relevant material safety data sheets although this is a solvent free paint, care should be taken to avoid inhalation of spray mist as well as contact between the wet paint and exposed skin or eyes no solvent present; however, spray mist is not harmless, a fresh air mask should be used during spraying ventilation should be provided in conned spaces to maintain good visibility
BRUSH Recommended thinner CLEANING SOLVENT
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 2/5
SIGMACOVER 1000
September 2009
ADDITIONAL DATA
Film thickness and spreading rate theoretical spreading rate m/l dft in m 2.0 500 1.0 1000 400 m 150 m
min. dft for closed lm with airless spray: max. dft when brushing:
measuring wet lm thickness a difference is often obtained between the measured apparent wft and the real applied wft this is due to the thixotropy and the surface tension of the paint which retards the release of air trapped in the paint lm for some time a practical recommendation is to apply a wft which is equal to the specied dft plus 60 m measuring dry lm thickness because of low initial hardness the dft cannot be measured within some days due to the penetration of the measuring device into the soft paint lm the dft should be measured using a calibration foil of known thickness placed in between the coating and the measuring device Overcoating table for SigmaCover 1000 for dft up to 1000 m (for spot repair and stripe coating only) substrate temperature minimum interval maximum interval 5C 3 days 28 days 10C 48 hours 28 days 20C 20 hours 20 days 30C 16 hours 14 days 40C 12 hours 7 days
page 3/5
SIGMACOVER 1000
September 2009
Curing table for dft up to 1000 m substrate temperature 5C 10C 20C 30C 40C touch dry 48 hours 24 hours 12 hours 8 hours 6 hours dry to handle 3 days 2 days 24 hours 16 hours 12 hours full cure 14 days 10 days 5 days 3 days 2 days
early exposure to sea water is permitted after the initial cure of 3 hours at 20C Pot life (at application viscosity) 20C 30C 60 min. 45 min.
due to exothermic reaction, temperature during and after mixing may increase Worldwide availability Whilst it is always the aim of PPG Protective & Marine Coatings to supply the same product on a worldwide basis, slight modication of the product is sometimes necessary to comply with local or national rules/circumstances. Under these circumstances an alternative product data sheet is used. Explanation to product data sheets Safety indications Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard Safe working in conned spaces Directives for ventilation practice see information sheet 1411 see information sheet 1430 see information sheet 1431 see information sheet 1433 see information sheet 1434
REFERENCES
page 4/5
SIGMACOVER 1000
September 2009
179640
PDS grey
7450 5000002200
page 5/5
SIGMACOVER 1500
DESCRIPTION
two component surface tolerant solvent free polyamine cured epoxy primer/ coating
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS general purpose primer/buildcoat for long term protection of steel structures excellent corrosion resistance compatible with various aged coating like aged alkyd, epoxy and polyurethane reduces explosion risk and re hazard in conned spaces good ow and wetting properties can be used from temperatures above 5C can be applied by roller COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20C Mass density Volume solids VOC (supplied) grey - gloss (1 g/cm = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.4 g/cm 99 1% max. 2 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 3 g/l (approx. 0.0 lb/gal) see information sheet 1411 125 m 7.9 m/l for 125 m 12 hours * max. see tables * min. see tables * 7 days * (data for components) Shelf life (cool and dry place) at least 12 months
steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2 for excellent corrosion protection steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2 or power tool cleaned to ISO-St2 for good corrosion protection steel with approved zinc silicate shop primer; sweep blasted to SPSS-Ss or power tool cleaned to SPSS-Pt3 stainless steel; degreased and blast cleaned to roughness of 40 - 70 m existing sound epoxy coating, polyurethane and most sound alkyd coating systems; sufciently roughened dry and cleaned substrate temperature should be above 5C and at least 3C above dew point during application and curing maximum relative humidity during application and curing is 80%
page 1/4
SIGMACOVER 1500
September 2009
mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 80 : 20 for airless application the temperature of base and hardener should be at least 20C lower temperatures possible for roller application no thinner should be added

AIRLESS SPRAY
Recommended thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure BRUSH/ROLLER Recommended thinner CLEANING SOLVENT
heavy duty single feed airless spray equipment preferably 60:1 pump ratio and suitable high pressure hoses in-line heating or insulated hoses may be necessary to avoid cooling down of paint in hoses at low air temperature no thinner should be added approx. 0.43 mm (= 0.017 in) at 20C (paint temperature) min. 15 MPa (= approx. 150 bar; 2130 p.s.i.) ROLLER: nylon suitable for 2 component epoxy with hair length 8 mm BRUSH: for stripe coating and spot repair only no thinner should be added Thinner 90-83 (preferred) or Thinner 90-53 all equipment used for application must be cleaned immediately after use paint inside the spraying equipment must be removed before the pot life time has been expired for paint and recommended thinners see safety sheets 1430, 1431 and relevant material safety data sheets although this is a solvent free paint, care should be taken to avoid inhalation of spray mist as well as contact between the wet paint and exposed skin or eyes spray mist is not harmless, a fresh air mask and gloves should be used during spraying ventilation should be provided in conned spaces to maintain good visibility
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
ADDITIONAL DATA
Film thickness and spreading rate max. dft when brushing: 100 m
measuring wet lm thickness a difference is often obtained between the measured apparent wft and the real applied wft, this is due to the thixotropy and the surface tension of the paint which retards the release of air trapped in the paint lm for some time
page 2/4
SIGMACOVER 1500
September 2009
measuring dry lm thickness because of low initial hardness the dft cannot be measured for some days (depending on ambient temperature) after application due to the penetration of the measuring device into the paint lm the dft should be measured using a calibration foil of known thickness placed in between the coating and the measuring device Overcoating table for dft up to 125 m substrate temperature SigmaCover 1500, SigmaCover 456, SigmaCover 435 and polyurethanes minimum interval maximum interval when not exposed to direct sunshine maximum interval when exposed to direct sunshine 5C 3 days 1 month 10C 48 hours 20C 24 hours 30C 16 hours 40C 12 hours
1 month
surface should be dry and free from any contamination best intercoat adhesion occurs when the subsequent coat is applied before the fully cured stage is reached if this time is exceeded the surface has to be roughened Curing table for dft up to 125 m substrate temperature 5C 10C 20C 30C 40C touch dry 48 hours 24 hours 12 hours 8 hours 6 hours dry to handle 3 days 2 days 24 hours 16 hours 12 hours full cure 21 days 14 days 7 days 3 days 2 days
page 3/4
SIGMACOVER 1500
September 2009
REFERENCES
231790 237619
PDS grey grey
7715 5000001400 5000002200
page 4/4
SIGMADUR CLEARCOAT
4 pages 25 November 2009 Revision of February 2009
DESCRIPTION
two component aliphatic clear acrylic polyurethane gloss nish recoatable clear acrylic polyurethane nish suitable for application over aluminium pigmented polyurethanes excellent resistance to atmospheric exposure conditions excellent gloss retention non-chalking, non-yellowing tough and abrasion resistant resistant to splash of mineral and vegetable oils, white spirit, parafns, aliphatic petroleum products and mild chemicals reduced sensitivity to early condensation and rain can be recoated even after long atmospheric exposure cures at temperatures down to -5C clear - gloss (1 g/cm = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.0 g/cm 50 2% max. 463 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 450 g/l (approx. 3.8 lb/gal) 35 - 50 m depending on system 14.3 m/l for 35 m 1 hour min. 12 hours * max. unlimited 7 days * (data for components)
COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20C Mass density Volume solids VOC (supplied) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Full cure after
at least 12 months previous coat; (polyurethane) dry and free from any contamination and sufciently roughened if necessary during application and curing a substrate temperature down to -5C is acceptable provided the substrate is dry and free from water or ice substrate temperature should be at least 3C above dew point maximum relative humidity during application and curing is 85%
page 1/4
SIGMADUR CLEARCOAT
25 November 2009

AIR SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure BRUSH Recommended thinner Volume of thinner CLEANING SOLVENT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Thinner 21-06 10 - 12%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 1 - 1.5 mm 0.3 - 0.4 MPa (= approx. 3 - 4 bar; 43 - 57 p.s.i.)
Thinner 21-06 0 - 5% Thinner 21-06 for paint and recommended thinners see safety sheets 1430, 1431 and relevant material safety data sheets this is a solvent borne paint and care should be taken to avoid inhalation of spray mist or vapour as well as contact between the wet paint and exposed skin or eyes contains a toxic polyisocyanate curing agent avoid at all times inhalation of aerosol spraymist
page 2/4
SIGMADUR CLEARCOAT
25 November 2009
ADDITIONAL DATA
Film thickness and spreading rate theoretical spreading rate m/l dft in m Overcoating table with itself substrate temperature minimum interval maximum interval -5C 48 hours unlimited 0C 30 hours 10C 16 hours 20C 9 hours 30C 6 hours 40C 4\ hours 14.3 35 10.0 50
surface should be dry and free from any contamination Curing table substrate temperature -5C 0C 10C 20C 30C 40C dry to handle 48 hours 24 hours 12 hours 6 hours 5 hours 3 hours full cure 20 days 16 days 10 days 7 days 5 days 3 days
Whilst it is always the aim of PPG Protective & Marine Coatings to supply the same product on a worldwide basis, slight modication of the product is sometimes necessary to comply with local or national rules/circumstances. Under these circumstances an alternative product data sheet is used. Explanation to product data sheets Safety indications see information sheet 1411 see information sheet 1430
REFERENCES
page 3/4
SIGMADUR CLEARCOAT
25 November 2009
Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard Safe working in conned spaces Directives for ventilation practice
see information sheet 1431 see information sheet 1433 see information sheet 1434
192494
PDS clear
7531 0000001400
page 4/4
SIGMADUR 520
(SIGMADUR HB FINISH)
DESCRIPTION
two component high build semigloss aliphatic acrylic polyurethane nish easy application by roller and airless spray unlimited recoatable excellent resistance to atmospheric exposure conditions good colour and gloss retention (aluminium version becomes grey) non-chalking, non-yellowing cures at temperatures down to -5C tough and abrasion resistant resistant to splash of mineral and vegetable oils, parafns, aliphatic petroleum products and mild chemicals can be recoated even after long atmospheric exposure full colour range and aluminium as RAL 9006 available - semigloss (1 g/cm = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.4 g/cm (white) 1.1 g/cm (aluminium) 58 2% (white), 48 2% (aluminium) max. 287 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) (white) max. 377 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) (RAL 9006) max. 383 g/l (approx. 3.2 lb/gal) (white) max. 405 g/l (approx. 3.4 lb/gal) (aluminium) 50 - 75 m depending on system 11.6 m/l for 50 m, 7.7 m/l for 75 m * 1 hour min. 6 hours * max. unlimited 4 days * (data for components) at least 24 months base 26C, hardener 42C
COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20C Mass density Volume solids VOC (supplied)
Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Full cure after Shelf life (cool and dry place) Flash point
previous coat; (epoxy or polyurethane) dry and free from any contamination and sufciently roughened if necessary during application and curing a substrate temperature down to -5C is acceptable provided the substrate is dry and free from ice substrate temperature should be at least 3C above dew point maximum relative humidity during application and curing is 85% premature exposure to early condensation and rain may cause colour and gloss change
page 1/4
SIGMADUR 520
March 2010

Thinner 21-06 0 - 5%, depending on required thickness and application conditions approx. 0.46 mm (= 0.018 in) 15 MPa (= approx. 150 bar; 2130 p.s.i.) Thinner 21-06 5 - 10%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 1 - 1.5 mm 0.3 - 0.4 MPa (= approx. 3 - 4 bar; 43 - 57 p.s.i.) Thinner 21-06 0 - 5% Thinner 90-53 for paint and recommended thinners see safety sheets 1430, 1431 and relevant material safety data sheets this is a solvent borne paint and care should be taken to avoid inhalation of spray mist or vapour as well as contact between the wet paint and exposed skin or eyes contains a toxic polyisocyanate curing agent avoid at all times inhalation of aerosol spraymist
ADDITIONAL DATA
Film thickness and spreading rate theoretical spreading rate m/l colours aluminium dft in m 11.6 9.6 50 7.7 6.4 75
page 2/4
SIGMADUR 520
March 2010
Overcoating table for SigmaDur products substrate temperature minimum interval maximum interval -5C 24 hours 0C 16 hours 10C 8 hours 20C 6 hours 30C 5 hours 40C 3 hours
unlimited when cleaned from any contamination
adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) premature exposure to early condensation and rain may cause colour and gloss change Pot life (at application viscosity) 10C 20C 30C 40C Worldwide availability 7 hours 5 hours 3 hours 2 hours
REFERENCES
page 3/4
SIGMADUR 520
March 2010
119852 183212
PDS white aluminium
7524 7000002200 9006262200
page 4/4
SIGMADUR 540
(SIGMACOVER HS NISO FINISH)

3 pages December 2010 Revision of September 2005
DESCRIPTION
two component high gloss VOC compliant epoxy acrylic nish non--isocyanate colour and gloss retention superior to standard epoxy coatings non-chalking, non-yellowing long pot life but quick drying
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20C Mass density Volume solids VOC (supplied) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Full cure after Shelf life (cool and dry place) Flash point RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE
wide colour range - highgloss (1 g/cm = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.3 g/cm 54 2% max. 324 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 411 g/l (approx. 3.4 lb/gal) 50 - 60 m 10.9 m/l for 50 m * 2 hours 7 days (data for components) at least 12 months base 29C, hardener 24C
previous epoxy coats; dry and free from any contamination and sufciently roughened if necessary substrate temperature should be above 5C and at least 3C above dew point during application and curing mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 90 : 10 the temperature of the mixed base and hardener should preferably be above 15C, otherwise extra solvent may be required to obtain application viscosity too much solvent results in reduced sag resistance if required, thinner should be added after mixing the components
Induction time Pot life AIRLESS SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure
none 6 hours at 20C Thinner 91-92 0 - 5%, depending on required thickness and application conditions approx. 0.38 - 0.46 mm (= 0.015 - 0.018 in) 15 MPa (= approx. 150 bar; 2130 p.s.i.)
page 1/3
SIGMADUR 540

December 2010
AIR SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure BRUSH/ROLLER Recommended thinner Volume of thinner CLEANING SOLVENT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Thinner 91-92 5 - 10%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 1 - 1.5 mm 0.3 - 0.4 MPa (= approx. 3 - 4 bar; 43 - 57 p.s.i.) Thinner 91-92 0 - 5% Thinner 91-92 for paint and recommended thinners see safety sheets 1430, 1431 and relevant material safety data sheets this is a solvent borne paint and care should be taken to avoid inhalation of spray mist or vapour as well as contact between the wet paint and exposed skin or eyes avoid at all times inhalation of aerosol spraymist
ADDITIONAL DATA
Film thickness and spreading rate theoretical spreading rate m/l dft in m Overcoating table substrate temperature minimum interval maximum interval 5C 24 hours 10C 16 hours 20C 8 hours 30C 6 hours 10.9 50 9.1 60
Curing table at 50 m for SigmaDur 540 substrate temperature 5C 10C 20C 30C dry to handle 22 hours 16 hours 10 hours 6 hours full cure 14 days 12 days 7 days 4 days
page 2/3
SIGMADUR 540

December 2010
Pot life (at application viscosity) 10C 20C 30C Worldwide availability 10 hours 6 hours 3 hours
Whilst it is always the aim of PPG Protective & Marine Coatings to supply the same product on a worldwide basis, slight modication of the product is sometimes necessary to comply with local or national rules/circumstances. Under these circumstances an alternative product data sheet is used. Explanation to product data sheets Safety indications Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard see information sheet 1411 see information sheet 1430 see information sheet 1431
REFERENCES
204030
PDS white
7740 7000001400
page 3/3
SIGMADUR 550
4 pages December 2010 Revision of November 2006
DESCRIPTION
two component aliphatic acrylic polyurethane nish unlimited recoatable excellent resistance to atmospheric exposure conditions excellent colour and gloss retention non-chalking, non-yellowing cures at temperatures down to -5C resistant to splash of mineral and vegetable oils, parafns, aliphatic petroleum products and mild chemicals can be recoated even after long atmospheric exposure good application properties white and various other colours (see also the SigmaCare Shade Card of PPG Protective & Marine Coatings) - gloss (1 g/cm = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.3 g/cm 55 2% max. 334 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 430 g/l (approx. 3.6 lb/gal) 50 - 60 m depending on system 11.0 m/l for 50 m * 1 hour min. 6 hours * max. unlimited 4 days * (data for components) at least 24 months
COLOURS AND GLOSS
BASIC DATA AT 20C Mass density Volume solids VOC (supplied) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Full cure after Shelf life (cool and dry place)
page 1/4
SIGMADUR 550
December 2010

Thinner 21-06 3 - 5%, depending on required thickness and application conditions approx. 0.44 - 0.49 mm (= 0.017 - 0.019 in) 20 MPa (= approx. 200 bar; 2800 p.s.i.) Thinner 21-06 3 - 5%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 1 - 1.5 mm 0.3 - 0.4 MPa (= approx. 3 - 4 bar; 43 - 57 p.s.i.) Thinner 21-06 0 - 5% Thinner 90-53 for paint and recommended thinners see safety sheets 1430, 1431 and relevant material safety data sheets this is a solvent borne paint and care should be taken to avoid inhalation of spray mist or vapour as well as contact between the wet paint and exposed skin or eyes contains a toxic polyisocyanate curing agent avoid at all times inhalation of aerosol spraymist
ADDITIONAL DATA
page 2/4
SIGMADUR 550
December 2010
Overcoating table for SigmaDur products substrate temperature minimum interval maximum interval -5C 24 hours unlimited 0C 16 hours 10C 8 hours 20C 6 hours 30C 5 hours 40C 3 hours
adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) premature exposure to early condensation and rain may cause colour and gloss change Pot life (at application viscosity) 10C 20C 30C 40C Worldwide availability 7 hours 5 hours 3 hours 2 hours
REFERENCES
page 3/4
SIGMADUR 550
December 2010
238761 238763
PDS white white
7537 7000001400 7000002200
page 4/4
SIGMADUR 580
(SIGMADUR HS SEMIGLOSS)
DESCRIPTION
two component high solids semigloss recoatable acrylic polyurethane nish excellent resistance against corrosion and sea water excellent colour and gloss retention non-chalking, non-yellowing cures at temperatures down to -5C tough and abrasion resistant resistant to splash of mineral and vegetable oils, parafns, aliphatic petroleum products and mild chemicals can be recoated even after long atmospheric exposure lead- and chromate free white (other colours on request) - semigloss (1 g/cm = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.4 g/cm 75 2% max. 191 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 269 g/l (approx. 2.2 lb/gal) 75 m depending on system 10 m/l for 75 m * 2 hours min. 12 hours * max. unlimited 7 days * (data for components) at least 12 months
COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20C Mass density Volume solids VOC (supplied) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Full cure after Shelf life (cool and dry place)
previous coat; (epoxy or polyurethane) dry and free from any contamination and sufciently roughened if necessary substrate temperature should be at least 3C above dew point maximum relative humidity during application and curing is 85% mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 82 : 18 the temperature of the mixed base and hardener should preferably be above 15C, otherwise extra solvent may be required to obtain application viscosity too much solvent results in reduced sag resistance thinner should be added after mixing the components
Pot life
5 hours at 20C *
page 1/4
SIGMADUR 580
September 2010
AIRLESS SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure BRUSH/ROLLER Recommended thinner Volume of thinner CLEANING SOLVENT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Thinner 21-06 5 - 10%, depending on required thickness and application conditions approx. 0.38 - 0.42 mm (= 0.015 - 0.016 in) 18 MPa (= approx. 180 bar; 2560 p.s.i.) Thinner 21-06 5 - 10% Thinner 90-53 for paint and recommended thinners see safety sheets 1430, 1431 and relevant material safety data sheets this is a solvent borne paint and care should be taken to avoid inhalation of spray mist or vapour as well as contact between the wet paint and exposed skin or eyes contains a toxic polyisocyanate curing agent avoid at all times inhalation of aerosol spraymist
ADDITIONAL DATA
Overcoating table for SigmaDur products substrate temperature minimum interval maximum interval -5C 60 hours 0C 44 hours 10C 24 hours 20C 12 hours 30C 8 hours 40C 5 hours
page 2/4
SIGMADUR 580
September 2010
Curing table substrate temperature -5C 0C 10C 20C 30C 40C touch dry 8 hours 5 hours 3 hours 2 hours 1 hour 0.5 hour full cure 22 days 18 days 10 days 7 days 4 days 3 days
adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) please note that should condensation occur during or soon after application this may result in a reduction of gloss Pot life (at application viscosity) 10C 20C 30C 40C Worldwide availability 7 hours 5 hours 3 hours 2 hours
REFERENCES
page 3/4
SIGMADUR 580
September 2010
180158
PDS white
7530 7000002200
page 4/4
SIGMADUR 590
4 pages May 2011 Revision of March 2011
DESCRIPTION
two component high solids aliphatic acrylic polyurethane nish excellent resistance to atmospheric exposure conditions excellent colour and gloss retention non-chalking, non-yellowing resistant to splash of mineral and vegetable oils, parafns, aliphatic petroleum products and mild chemicals good application properties white and various other colours (see also the SigmaCare Shade Card of PPG Protective & Marine Coatings) - gloss (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.3 g/cm 73 2% max. 207 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 280 g/l (approx. 2.4 lb/gal) max. 185 g/l (approx 1.5 lbs/gal )UK PG 6/23(92) appendix 3 100 - 125 m depending on system 7.3 m/l for 100 m * 2.5 hours min. 8 hours * max. 7 days 4 days * (data for components) at least 24 months
COLOURS AND GLOSS
BASIC DATA AT 20C Mass density Volume solids VOC (supplied) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Full cure after Shelf life (cool and dry place)
page 1/4
SIGMADUR 590
May 2011
none 2.5 hours at 20C *

Thinner 60-15 3 - 5%, depending on required thickness and application conditions approx. 0.44 - 0.49 mm (= 0.017 - 0.019 in) 20 MPa (= approx. 200 bar; 2800 p.s.i.) Thinner 60-15 3 - 5%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 1 - 1.5 mm 0.3 - 0.4 MPa (= approx. 3 - 4 bar; 43 - 57 p.s.i.) Thinner 60-15 0 - 5% Thinner 90-58 for paint and recommended thinners see safety sheets 1430, 1431 and relevant material safety data sheets this is a solvent borne paint and care should be taken to avoid inhalation of spray mist or vapour as well as contact between the wet paint and exposed skin or eyes contains a toxic polyisocyanate curing agent avoid at all times inhalation of aerosol spraymist
ADDITIONAL DATA
page 2/4
SIGMADUR 590
May 2011
Overcoating table for SigmaDur products substrate temperature minimum interval maximum interval 10C 48 hours 7 days 20C 8 hours 7 days 30C 4 hours 12 hours
adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) premature exposure to early condensation and rain may cause colour and gloss change Pot life (at application viscosity) 10C 20C 30C Worldwide availability 4 hours 2.5 hours 1 hour
REFERENCES
page 3/4
SIGMADUR 590
May 2011
PDS
7518
page 4/4
SIGMADUR 1800
4 pages May 2008 Revision of February 2006
DESCRIPTION
two component high solids polymeric urethane excellent resistance to atmospheric exposure conditions outstanding colour and gloss retention non-chalking, non-yellowing cures at temperatures down to -5C tough and abrasion resistant resistant to splash of mineral and vegetable oils, parafns, aliphatic petroleum products and mild chemicals can be recoated even after long atmospheric exposure white and various other colours (see also the SigmaCare Shade Card of PPG Protective & Marine Coatings) - gloss (1 g/cm = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.3 g/cm 68 2% max. 226 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 289 g/l (approx. 2.4 lb/gal) 75 m depending on system 9.1 m/l for 75 m 2 hours min. 12 hours * max. unlimited 7 days * (data for components)
COLOURS AND GLOSS
BASIC DATA AT 20C Mass density Volume solids VOC (supplied) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Full cure after
at least 12 months
previous coat; (epoxy or polyurethane) dry and free from any contamination and sufciently roughened if necessary substrate temperature should be at least 3C above dew point maximum relative humidity during application and curing is 85% mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 84 : 16 the temperature of the mixed base and hardener should preferably be above 15C, otherwise extra solvent may be required to obtain application viscosity too much solvent results in reduced sag resistance thinner should be added after mixing the components

page 1/4
SIGMADUR 1800
May 2008
Sigma thinner 21-06 3 - 5%, depending on required thickness and application conditions approx. 0.38 - 0.42 mm (= 0.015 - 0.016 in) 18 MPa (= approx. 180 bar; 2560 p.s.i.)
Sigma thinner 21-06 5 - 10%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 1 - 1.5 mm 0.3 - 0.4 MPa (= approx. 3 - 4 bar; 43 - 57 p.s.i.)
Sigma thinner 21-06 0 - 5% Sigma thinner 90-53 for paint and recommended thinners see safety sheets 1430, 1431 and relevant material safety data sheets this is a solvent borne paint and care should be taken to avoid inhalation of spray mist or vapour as well as contact between the wet paint and exposed skin or eyes contains a toxic polyisocyanate curing agent avoid at all times inhalation of aerosol spraymist
ADDITIONAL DATA
Overcoating table for SigmaDur 1800 substrate temperature minimum interval maximum interval -5C 3 days 0C 2 days 10C 1 day 20C 12 hours 30C 8 hours 40C 5 hours
page 2/4
SIGMADUR 1800
May 2008
Curing table substrate temperature -5C 0C 10C 20C 30C 40C touch dry 8 hours 5 hours 3 hours 2 hours 1 hour 0.5 hour full cure 22 days 18 days 10 days 7 days 4 days 3 days
adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheet 1433 and 1434) please note that should condensation occur during or soon after application this may result in a reduction of gloss Pot life (at application viscosity) 10C 20C 30C 40C Worldwide availability 7 hours 5 hours 4 hours 3 hours
REFERENCES
page 3/4
SIGMADUR 1800
May 2008
236077 236081
PDS white white
7529 7000001400 7000002200
page 4/4
SIGMAFAST 20
DESCRIPTION
high build zinc phosphate primer based on modied alkyd resin good anticorrosive properties under atmospheric conditions fast drying fast handling recoatable with most one and two component coatings suitable for atmospheric exposure conditions lead- and chromate free
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20C Mass density Volume solids VOC (supplied) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Shelf life (cool and dry place) RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES
redbrown, grey (other (RAL) colours on request) - at (1 g/cm = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) 1.5 g/cm 55 2% max. 258 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 382 g/l (approx. 3.2 lb/gal) 50 - 75 m per coat 11.0 m/l for 50 m, 7.3 m/l for 75 m 15 minutes min. 4 hours for 75 m dft * at higher dft's drying time will be longer at least 12 months
steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2 steel; power tool cleaned to min. ISO-St2 shop primed steel; sweep blasted or power tool cleaned to SPSS-Ss or SPSS-Pt2 substrate temperature should be above 5C and at least 3C above dew point stir well before use the temperature of the paint should preferably be above 15C, otherwise extra thinner may be required to obtain application viscosity too much solvent results in reduced sag resistance adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) Thinner 21-06 0 - 5%, depending on required thickness and application conditions approx. 0.38 - 0.48 mm (= 0.015 - 0.019 in) 12 - 16 MPa (= approx. 120 - 160 bar; 1700 - 2270 p.s.i.)
page 1/3
SIGMAFAST 20
March 2010
Thinner 21-06 5 - 10%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 1.8 - 2 mm 0.35 MPa (= approx. 3.5 bar; 50 p.s.i.) Thinner 20-05 0 - 2% Thinner 21-06 for paint and recommended thinners see safety sheets 1430, 1431 and relevant material safety data sheets this is a solvent borne paint and care should be taken to avoid inhalation of spray mist or vapour as well as contact between the wet paint and exposed skin or eyes
ADDITIONAL DATA with alkyd based products (e.g. SigmaFast 20 and 40)
Overcoating table for SigmaFast 20 for dft up to 75 m substrate temperature minimum interval maximum interval 10C 75 min. unlimited 15C 60 min. unlimited 20C 45 min. unlimited
surface should be dry and free from any contamination Overcoating table for SigmaFast 20 for dft up to 75 m with two component products: SigmaCover 456, SigmaCover 435, SigmaDur 520 substrate temperature minimum interval maximum interval 10C 15C 20C
12 hours unlimited
10 hours unlimited
8 hours unlimited
page 2/3
SIGMAFAST 20
March 2010
REFERENCES
178249 181056 179897 179898
PDS redbrown grey base L base Z
7155 2008002200 7035262200 0710002194 0070002158
page 3/3
SIGMAFAST 40
3 pages September 2009 Revision of June 2007
DESCRIPTION
high build nish coating, based on modied alkyd resin suitable for atmospheric exposure conditions fast drying fast handling good gloss and colour retention not suitable for immersion in water
RAL colours (other colours available on request) - semigloss (1 g/cm = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) 1.3 g/cm 45 2% max. 390 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 490 g/l (approx. 4.1 lb/gal) 50 m per coat 9.0 m/l for 50 m 45 min. min. 4 hours for 50 m dft max. unlimited at higher dft's drying time will be longer at least 24 months previous suitable coat; (e.g. SigmaFast 20) dry and free from any contamination old existing sound coating; sufciently roughened, dry and cleaned substrate temperature should be above 5C and at least 3C above dew point stir well before use the temperature of the paint should preferably be above 15C, otherwise extra thinner may be required to obtain application viscosity too much solvent results in reduced sag resistance adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434)
Thinner 21-06 0 - 5%, depending on required thickness and application conditions approx. 0.38 - 0.48 mm (= 0.015 - 0.019 in) 12 - 16 MPa (= approx. 120 - 160 bar; 1700 - 2270 p.s.i.)
page 1/3
SIGMAFAST 40
September 2009
Overcoating table for SigmaFast 40 for dft up to 50 m substrate temperature minimum interval maximum interval 10C 8 hours unlimited 15C 6 hours unlimited 20C 4 hours unlimited 30C 3 hours unlimited
surface should be dry and free from any contamination Worldwide availability Whilst it is always the aim of PPG Protective & Marine Coatings to supply the same product on a worldwide basis, slight modication of the product is sometimes necessary to comply with local or national rules/circumstances. Under these circumstances an alternative product data sheet is used. Explanation to product data sheets Safety indications Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard Safe working in conned spaces Directives for ventilation practice see information sheet 1411 see information sheet 1430 see information sheet 1431 see information sheet 1433 see information sheet 1434
REFERENCES
page 2/3
SIGMAFAST 40
September 2009
235941 235942 235289 235290
PDS base L base L base Z base Z
7234 0710002197 0710001492 0070002179 0070001448
page 3/3
SIGMAFAST 45
DESCRIPTION
fast drying nish, based on modied alkyd resin suitable for atmospheric exposure conditions good gloss and colour retention fast drying fast handling
RAL colours - gloss (1 g/cm = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) 1.1 g/cm 44 2% max. 468 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 506 g/l (approx. 4.2 lb/gal) 35 - 50 m per coat 12.6 m/l for 35 m, 8.8 m/l for 50 m 1.5 hour min. 8 hours for 35 m dft at higher dft's drying time will be longer at least 12 months previous suitable coat; (e.g. SigmaFast 20) dry and free from any contamination old existing sound coating; sufciently roughened, dry and cleaned substrate temperature must be above 5C and at least 3C above dew point during application and curing stir well before use the temperature of the paint should preferably be above 15C, otherwise extra thinner may be required to obtain application viscosity too much solvent results in reduced sag resistance adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434)
AIRLESS SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure AIR SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure
Thinner 21-06 approx. 10%, depending on required thickness and application conditions approx. 0.33 - 0.38 mm (= 0.013 - 0.015 in) 12 - 16 MPa (= approx. 120 - 160 bar; 1700 - 2270 p.s.i.)
Thinner 21-06 25%, depending on required thickness and application conditions approx. 1.4 - 2.0 mm 0.3 - 0.4 MPa (= approx. 3 - 4 bar; 43 - 57 p.s.i.)
page 1/3
SIGMAFAST 45
September 2009
BRUSH/ROLLER Recommended thinner CLEANING SOLVENT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
no thinner should be added Thinner 21-06 for paint and recommended thinners see safety sheets 1430, 1431 and relevant material safety data sheets this is a solvent borne paint and care should be taken to avoid inhalation of spray mist or vapour as well as contact between the wet paint and exposed skin or eyes
Overcoating table for SigmaFast 45 for dft up to 50 m substrate temperature minimum interval maximum interval 10C 8 hours unlimited 15C 6 hours unlimited 20C 4 hours unlimited 30C 3 hours unlimited
surface should be dry and free from any contamination Worldwide availability Whilst it is always the aim of PPG Protective & Marine Coatings to supply the same product on a worldwide basis, slight modication of the product is sometimes necessary to comply with local or national rules/circumstances. Under these circumstances an alternative product data sheet is used. Explanation to product data sheets Safety indications Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard Safe working in conned spaces Directives for ventilation practice see information sheet 1411 see information sheet 1430 see information sheet 1431 see information sheet 1433 see information sheet 1434
REFERENCES
page 2/3
SIGMAFAST 45
September 2009
165444 165794
PDS base L base Z
7236 0710002192 0070002179
page 3/3
SIGMAFAST 205
4 pages March 2011 Revision of November 2010
DESCRIPTION
two component high build polyamide cured zinc phosphate epoxy primer/ coating general purpose epoxy primer/coating for atmospheric conditions fast curing recoatable with most two component epoxy- and polyurethane coatings tough, with long term exibility easy application by airless spray
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20C Mass density Volume solids VOC (supplied) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Full cure after Shelf life (cool and dry place) RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE
grey (other (RAL) colours on request) - eggshell (1 g/cm = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.4 g/cm 70 2% max. 224 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 322 g/l (approx. 2.7 lb/gal) 80 - 150 m depending on system 8.8 m/l for 80 m, 4.7 m/l for 150 m 2 hours min. 4 hours for 150 m dft * max. 6 months * 4 days * (data for components) at least 12 months
steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 40 - 70 m substrate temperature should be above 5C and at least 3C above dew point during application and curing mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 75 : 25 the temperature of the mixed base and hardener should preferably be above 15C, otherwise extra solvent may be required to obtain application viscosity too much solvent results in reduced sag resistance and slower cure thinner should be added after mixing the components
Induction time Pot life AIRLESS SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice
none above 10C 10 minutes if applied at temperatures below 10C 6 hours at 20C * Thinner 91-92 0 - 5%, depending on required thickness and application conditions approx. 0.48 mm (= 0.019 in)
page 1/4
SIGMAFAST 205
March 2011
Nozzle pressure AIR SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure BRUSH/ROLLER Recommended thinner Volume of thinner CLEANING SOLVENT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
15 MPa (= approx. 150 bar; 2130 p.s.i.) Thinner 91-92 5 - 15%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 1.5 - 3 mm 0.3 - 0.4 MPa (= approx. 3 - 4 bar; 43 - 57 p.s.i.) Thinner 91-92 0 - 5% Thinner 90-53 for paint and recommended thinners see safety sheets 1430, 1431 and relevant material safety data sheets this is a solvent borne paint and care should be taken to avoid inhalation of spray mist or vapour as well as contact between the wet paint and exposed skin or eyes
ADDITIONAL DATA
Overcoating table for SigmaFast 205 for dft up to 150 m with SigmaFast 205, SigmaCover 435,SigmaCover 456 and various two component polyurethane coatings substrate temperature 5C 10C 20C 30C 40C
minimum interval maximum interval
10 hours 6 months
6 hours 6 months
4 hours 6 months
3 hours 6 months
2 hours 6 months
page 2/4
SIGMAFAST 205
March 2011
Curing table substrate temperature 5C 10C 20C 30C 40C dry to handle 18 hours 12 hours 6 hours 4 hours 3 hours full cure 8 days 6 days 4 days 3 days 2 days
adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) Pot life (at application viscosity) 10C 20C 30C Worldwide availability 10 hours 6 hours 3 hours
REFERENCES
page 3/4
SIGMAFAST 205
March 2011
225064
PDS grey
7802 5188052200
page 4/4
SIGMAFAST 210
DESCRIPTION
two component high build zinc phosphate polyurethane primer/nish fast curing specially designed for in-shop application easy application by airless spray unlimited recoatable good adhesion to steel and galvanised steel good resistance to atmospheric exposure good colour retention non-chalking, non-yellowing cures at temperatures down to -5C
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20C Mass density Volume solids VOC (supplied) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Full cure after Shelf life (cool and dry place) RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES
a wide range of colours available by PPG colornet tinting system - semigloss (1 g/cm = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for white, for mixed product) 1.4 g/cm 55 2% max. 270 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 383 g/l (approx. 3.2 lb/gal) 80 - 120 m depending on system 6.9 m/l for 80 m, 4.6 m/l for 120 m 1 hour min. 4 hours * max. unlimited 4 days * (data for components) at least 24 months
steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 40 - 70 m galvanised steel; dry and free from any contamination and roughened (e.g. sandpapering, sweepblasting) during application and curing a substrate temperature down to -5C is acceptable provided the substrate is dry and free from ice substrate temperature should be at least 3C above dew point maximum relative humidity during application and curing is 85% premature exposure to early condensation and rain may cause colour and gloss change
page 1/4
SIGMAFAST 210
March 2011

Thinner 21-06 0 - 5%, depending on required thickness and application conditions approx. 0.45 mm (= 0.018 in) 15 MPa (= approx. 150 bar; 2130 p.s.i.) Thinner 21-06 5 - 10%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 1 - 1.5 mm 0.3 - 0.4 MPa (= approx. 3 - 4 bar; 43 - 57 p.s.i.) Thinner 21-06 0 - 5% Thinner 90-53 for paint and recommended thinners see safety sheets 1430, 1431 and relevant material safety data sheets this is a solvent borne paint and care should be taken to avoid inhalation of spray mist or vapour as well as contact between the wet paint and exposed skin or eyes
ADDITIONAL DATA
page 2/4
SIGMAFAST 210
March 2011
Overcoating table for SigmaFast 210 for dft up to 120 m with itself and two component polyurethane nishes substrate temperature minimum interval maximum interval -5C 24 hours unlimited 0C 16 hours 10C 6 hours 20C 4 hours 30C 2 hours
surface should be dry and free from any contamination Curing table substrate temperature -5C 0C 10C 20C 30C dry to handle 24 hours 16 hours 4 hours 3 hours 2 hours full cure 15 days 11 days 5 days 4 days 3 days
adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) premature exposure to early condensation and rain may cause colour and gloss change to increase the curing speed of SigmaFast 210 the use of SigmaFast 210 accelerator is allowed to a maximum of 5% on volume (set) please note that by adding the SigmaFast 210 accelerator the potlife will be reduced, see table below Pot life (at application viscosity) 20C 20C 20C Worldwide availability 5 hours (no SigmaFast 210 accelerator) 2 hours (2.5% - volume/set) 1 hour (5.0% - volume/set)
page 3/4
SIGMAFAST 210
March 2011
REFERENCES
240785 240786 240787 240788
PDS black black white white
7541 8000002200 8000001400 7000002200 7000001400
page 4/4
SIGMAFAST 213
4 pages September 2009 Revision of January 2008
DESCRIPTION
two component high build polyamine cured vinyl epoxy primer
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS epoxy primer or build coat in protective coating systems for steel structures in atmospheric exposure tough, with long term exibility cures at temperatures down to -5C fast drying and handling COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20C Mass density Volume solids VOC (supplied) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval grey, yellow - at (1 g/cm = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.5 g/cm 60 2% max. 235 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 345 g/l (approx. 2.9 lb/gal) 80 - 180 m depending on system 7.5 m/l for 80 m, 3.3 m/l for 180 m * 50 minutes min. 1 hour * max. 1 year * (data for components) Shelf life (cool and dry place) Flash point at least 12 months <21C
steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 40 - 70 m during application and curing a substrate temperature down to -5C is acceptable provided the substrate is dry and free from ice substrate temperature should be at least 3C above dew point maximum relative humidity during application and curing is 85% mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 80 : 20 the temperature of the mixed base and hardener should preferably be above 15C, otherwise extra solvent may be required to obtain application viscosity too much solvent results in reduced sag resistance and slower cure thinner should be added after mixing the components
15 minutes at 20C 6 hours at 20C *

AIRLESS SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner
Thinner 21-06 20 - 30%, depending on required thickness and application conditions
page 1/4
SIGMAFAST 213
September 2009
Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure AIR SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure BRUSH Recommended thinner Volume of thinner CLEANING SOLVENT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
approx. 0.48 mm (= 0.019 in) 15 MPa (= approx. 150 bar; 2130 p.s.i.)
ADDITIONAL DATA
Film thickness and spreading rate theoretical spreading rate m/l dft in m Overcoating table for 80 m dft substrate temperature minimum interval maximum interval 0C 3 hours 12 months 10C 1.5 hour 12 months 20C 45 min. 12 months 30C 25 min. 12 months 7.5 80 6.0 100 3.3 180
page 2/4
SIGMAFAST 213
September 2009
Overcoating table for 150 m dft substrate temperature minimum interval maximum interval 0C 4.5 hours 12 months 10C 2.5 hours 12 months 20C 1 hour 12 months 30C 35 min. 12 months
surface should be dry and free from any contamination Worldwide availability Whilst it is always the aim of PPG Protective & Marine Coatings to supply the same product on a worldwide basis, slight modication of the product is sometimes necessary to comply with local or national rules/circumstances. Under these circumstances an alternative product data sheet is used. Explanation to product data sheets Safety indications Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard Safe working in conned spaces Directives for ventilation practice Cleaning of steel and removal of rust see information sheet 1411 see information sheet 1430 see information sheet 1431 see information sheet 1433 see information sheet 1434 see information sheet 1490
REFERENCES
page 3/4
SIGMAFAST 213
September 2009
219313 219315
PDS yellow grey
7705 3000002200 5000002200
page 4/4
SIGMAFAST 302
4 pages January 2011 Revision of April 2009
DESCRIPTION
two component silicate zinc epoxy primer good anticorrosive properties fast curing fast handling topcoats must be unsaponiable cures at temperatures down to -5C reduced risk of mudcracking ACQPA approval 21251
bluegreen, grey - at (1 g/cm = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 2.1 g/cm 63 2% max. 204 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 419 g/l (approx. 3.5 lb/gal) 50 - 80 m depending on system 12.6 m/l for 50 m * 10 min. at 20C min. 40 min. * max. 1 year * (data for components) at least 12 months
Shelf life (cool and dry place) RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE
steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 40 - 70 m substrate temperature must be at least 3C above dew point during application and curing a substrate temperature down to -5C is acceptable provided the substrate is dry and free from ice mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 80 : 20 the temperature of the mixed base and hardener should preferably be above 15C, otherwise extra solvent may be required to obtain application viscosity too much solvent results in reduced sag resistance and slower cure thinner should be added after mixing the components
10 minutes 4 hours at 20C
page 1/4
SIGMAFAST 302
January 2011
Thinner 21-06 5 - 15%, depending on required thickness and application conditions approx. 0.38 - 0.53 mm (= 0.015 - 0.021 in) 15 MPa (= approx. 150 bar; 2130 p.s.i.) Thinner 21-06 15 - 20%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 1.6 mm 0.3 - 0.6 MPa (= approx. 3 - 6 bar; 43 - 85 p.s.i.) Thinner 21-06 0 - 5% Thinner 90-53 for paint and recommended thinners see safety sheets 1430, 1431 and relevant material safety data sheets this is a solvent borne paint and care should be taken to avoid inhalation of spray mist or vapour as well as contact between the wet paint and exposed skin or eyes
ADDITIONAL DATA
Overcoating table for SigmaFast 302 for dft up to 50 m with SigmaFast 213, SigmaCover 456, SigmaCover 435, SigmaCover 410 substrate temperature minimum interval maximum interval 0C 10C 20C 30C
45 min. 12 months
30 min. 12 months
25 min. 12 months
20 min. 12 months
page 2/4
SIGMAFAST 302
January 2011
Overcoating table for SigmaFast 302 for dft up to 80 m substrate temperature minimum interval maximum interval 0C 60 min. 12 months 10C 50 min. 12 months 20C 40 min. 12 months 30C 35 min. 12 months
surface should be dry and free from any contamination zinc rich primers can form zinc salts on the surface; preferably they should not be weathered for long periods before overcoating an interval of several months can be allowed under clean interior exposure conditions before overcoating any visible surface contamination must be removed by high pressure water cleaning, sandwashing, sweep blasting or mechanical cleaning Worldwide availability Whilst it is always the aim of PPG Protective & Marine Coatings to supply the same product on a worldwide basis, slight modication of the product is sometimes necessary to comply with local or national rules/circumstances. Under these circumstances an alternative product data sheet is used. Explanation to product data sheets Safety indications Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard Safe working in conned spaces Directives for ventilation practice Cleaning of steel and removal of rust see information sheet 1411 see information sheet 1430 see information sheet 1431 see information sheet 1433 see information sheet 1434 see information sheet 1490
REFERENCES
page 3/4
SIGMAFAST 302
January 2011
216759 218818 267560
PDS bluegreen bluegreen grey
7704 1000002200 1000002100 5000002200
page 4/4
SIGMAFAST 370
3 pages March 2011 Revision of October 2009
DESCRIPTION
two component high build epoxy primer/coating general purpose epoxy primer/coating for atmospheric conditions fast curing recoatable with most two component epoxy- and polyurethane coatings tough, with long term exibility easy application by airless spray
grey (other (RAL) colours on request) - eggshell (1 g/cm = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.7 g/cm 66 2% max. 179 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 306 g/l (approx. 2.6 lb/gal) 100 - 150 m depending on system * 6.6 m/l for 100 m * 15 min. min. 2 hours for 100 m dft * max. 6 months * 4 days * (data for components) at least 12 months
steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 40 - 70 m substrate temperature should be above 5C and at least 3C above dew point during application and curing mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 80 : 20 the temperature of the mixed base and hardener should preferably be above 15C, otherwise extra solvent may be required to obtain application viscosity too much solvent results in reduced sag resistance and slower cure thinner should be added after mixing the components
Induction time Pot life AIRLESS SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure
none above 10C 10 minutes if applied at temperatures below 10C 4 hours at 20C * Thinner 21-06 0 - 5%, depending on required thickness and application conditions approx. 0.48 mm (= 0.019 in) 15 MPa (= approx. 150 bar; 2130 p.s.i.)
page 1/3
SIGMAFAST 370
March 2011
Thinner 21-06 5 - 15%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 1.5 - 3 mm 0.3 - 0.4 MPa (= approx. 3 - 4 bar; 43 - 57 p.s.i.) Thinner 21-06 0 - 5% Thinner 90-58 for paint and recommended thinners see safety sheets 1430, 1431 and relevant material safety data sheets this is a solvent borne paint and care should be taken to avoid inhalation of spray mist or vapour as well as contact between the wet paint and exposed skin or eyes
ADDITIONAL DATA
Overcoating table for SigmaFast 370 for dft up to 100 m with SigmaFast 370, SigmaCover 435 and SigmaDur 550 substrate temperature minimum interval maximum interval 5C 8 hours 6 months 10C 4 hours 6 months 20C 2 hours 6 months 30C 1 hour 6 months
surface should be dry and free from any contamination Curing table for dft up to 100 m substrate temperature 5C 10C 20C 30C dry to handle 16 hours 8 hours 5 hours 2 hours full cure 8 days 6 days 4 days 3 days
page 2/3
SIGMAFAST 370
March 2011
Pot life (at application viscosity) 10C 20C 30C Worldwide availability 5 hours 4 hours 3 hours
REFERENCES
PDS
7803
page 3/3
SIGMAFAST HS ENAMEL
3 pages November 2004 Revision of January 2000
DESCRIPTION
one component, modied acrylic based, air drying industrial enamel fast drying good exterior durability excellent gloss and colour retention VOC compliant as a nish
Wide range of colours, lead free: BS 4800, BS381C, RAL - gloss (1 g/cm = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) 1.1 - 1.3 g/cm ( depending on colour) 53 2% max. 420 g/l (approx. 3.5 lb/gal) 25 - 40 m ( can be achieved by a single coat application or using a "wet on wet" technique) 21.2 m/l for 25 m, 13.3 m/l for 40 m* 40 min. at 20C see overcoating table * at least 12 months can be applied on most sound clean paint systems or onto clean bare metal which has been primed with a suitable primer application temperature range 5 - 30 C substrate temperature should be at least 3C above dew point maximum relative humidity during application and curing is 85% stir well before use the temperature of the paint should preferably be above 15C, otherwise extra thinner may be required to obtain application viscosity too much solvent results in reduced sag resistance adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) addition of thinner may increase the VOC value of the product to greater than 420 g/litre no extra thinner should be required but if necessary Thinner 21-06 can be added to the mixed components 0 - 5%, depending on required thickness and application conditions approx. 0.33 - 0.43 mm (= 0.015 - 0.017 in) 15 - 28 MPa (= approx. 2100 - 3900 p.s.i.)
page 1/3
SIGMAFAST HS ENAMEL
November 2004
no extra thinner should be required but if necessary Thinner 21-06 can be added to the mixed components 0 - 5%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 1.5 - 2 mm 0.3 - 0.4 MPa (= approx. 3 - 4 bar; 43 - 57 p.s.i.) no extra thinner is required but if necessary Thinner 21-06 can be added if desired to mixed components 0 - 5% if required
Overcoating table for SigmaFast HS Enamel for dft up to 25 m substrate temperature Overcoat up to Then after 5C 8 hours 30 hours 20C 5 hours 24 hours 30C 2 hours 16 hours
wrinkling of the topcoat may occur if overcoating takes place between the times stated Drying table at substrate temperatures 5C 20C 30C Worldwide availability touch dry 75 min. 40 min. 30 min. tack free 120 min. 60 min. 50 min. hard dry 24 hours 24 hours 12 hours
page 2/3
SIGMAFAST HS ENAMEL
November 2004
REFERENCES
PDS
0672UK
page 3/3
SIGMAGUARD 260
DESCRIPTION
two component high build amine adduct cured novolac phenolic epoxy holding primer
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS holding primer for SigmaGuard CSF 650, Novaguard 840 and Novaguard 890 can be applied and cures at temperatures down to +5C good application properties, resulting in a smooth surface good abrasion resistance COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20C Mass density Volume solids VOC (supplied) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Full cure after Shelf life (cool and dry place) RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES pink - eggshell (1 g/cm = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.7 g/cm 68 2% max. 194 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 328 g/l (approx. 2.7 lb/gal) 75 m * 9.1 m/l for 75 m 2 - 3 hours at 20C, 14 - 16 hours at 5C min. 8 hours * max. 1 month * see curing table * (data for components) at least 12 months
steel; blast cleaned in situ to at least ISO-Sa2 and free from rust, scale, shop primer and any other contamination blasting prole 50 - 100 m the substrate must be perfectly dry before and during application of SigmaGuard 260 substrate temperature must be above 5C and at least 3C above dew point during application and curing
page 1/4
SIGMAGUARD 260
March 2011
Induction time
Pot life AIRLESS SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure AIR SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure BRUSH Recommended thinner Volume of thinner CLEANING SOLVENT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
ADDITIONAL DATA
page 2/4
SIGMAGUARD 260
March 2011
Overcoating table for SigmaGuard 260 for dft up to 75 m with SigmaGuard CSF 650, Novaguard 840 or Novaguard 890 substrate temperature minimum interval maximum interval when not exposed to sunshine 5C 24 hours 2 months 10C 20 hours 2 months 15C 14 hours 2 months 20C 8 hours 1 month 30C 5 hours 1 month
surface should be dry and free from any contamination Curing table for dft up to 75 m substrate temperature 5C 10C 20C 40C dry to handle 20 hours 10 hours 3 hours 1 hour full cure 10 days 7 days 5 days 3 days
adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) when used as a primer under solvent free tank-linings the dft must be limited to a maximum of 100 m Pot life (at application viscosity) 5C 10C 15C 20C 40C Worldwide availability 8 hours 6 hours 4 hours 2 hours 30 min.
page 3/4
SIGMAGUARD 260
March 2011
REFERENCES
241815
PDS pink
7944 6007002200
page 4/4
SIGMAGUARD 603
4 pages July 2011 Revision of February 2010
DESCRIPTION
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS one coat protection for maintenance or major refurbishment of ballast water tanks and crude oil tanks tolerant to marginal surface preparation good corrosion resistance can be applied by heavy duty single feed airless spray equipment (60:1) reduced explosion risk and re hazard good visibility due to light colour COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20C Mass density Volume solids VOC (supplied) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Full cure after Shelf life (cool and dry place) RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES light grey - gloss (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.3 g/cm 100% max. 111 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 144 g/l (approx. 1.2 lb/gal) see information sheet 1411 300 m 3.3 m/l for 300 m * 8 hours min. 24 hours * max. 20 days * 5 days * (data for components) at least 12 months
steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 50 - 100 m steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2 or power tool cleaned to ISO-St2 for good corrosion protection coated steel; hydrojetted to VIS WJ2/3 L (blasting prole 50 - 100 m) previous epoxy coat; in sound condition, dry and free from any contamination and sufciently roughened if necessary pitted steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2 is recommended suitable primer; SigmaCover 280 substrate temperature must be above 5C during application and curing There are no restrictions regarding dew point temperature and relative humidity. suitable for damp surfaces marine 1 x 300 m SigmaGuard 603
page 1/4
SIGMAGUARD 603
July 2011
mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 80 : 20 the temperature of the mixed base and hardener should preferably be at least 20C at lower temperature the viscosity will be too high for spray application no thinner should be added

use heavy duty single feed airless spray equipment preferably 60:1 pump ratio and suitable high pressure hoses in-line heating or insulated hoses may be necessary to avoid cooling down of paint in hoses at low air temperature application with 45:1 airless spray equipment is possible provided in-line heated high pressure hoses are used in case of using 45:1 airless spray equipment the paint must be heated to approx. 30C in order to obtain the right application viscosity length of hoses should be as short as possible no thinner should be added approx. 0.53 - 0.64 mm (= 0.021 - 0.025 in) at 20C (paint temperature) min. 28 MPa (= approx. 280 bar; 4000 p.s.i.) at 30C (paint temperature) min. 22 MPa (= approx. 220 bar; 3000 p.s.i.) for stripe coating and spot repair only no thinner should be added Thinner 90-83 (preferred) or Thinner 90-53 all equipment used for application must be cleaned immediately after use paint inside the spraying equipment must be removed before the pot life time has been expired for paint and recommended thinners see safety sheets 1430, 1431 and relevant material safety data sheets although this is a solvent free paint, care should be taken to avoid inhalation of spray mist as well as contact between the wet paint and exposed skin or eyes no solvent present; however, spray mist is not harmless, a fresh air mask should be used during spraying ventilation should be provided in conned spaces to maintain good visibility
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 2/4
SIGMAGUARD 603
July 2011
ADDITIONAL DATA
Film thickness and spreading rate theoretical spreading rate m/l dft in m max. dft when brushing: 3.3 300 2.5 400 150 - 200 m
measuring wet lm thickness a deviation is often obtained between the measured apparent wft and the real applied wft this is due to the thixotropy and the surface tension of the paint which retards the release of air trapped in the paint lm for some time recommendation is to apply a wft which is equal to the specied dft plus 60 m measuring dry lm thickness because of low initial hardness the dft cannot be measured within some days due to the penetration of the measuring device into the soft paint lm the dft should be measured using a calibration foil of known thickness placed in between the coating and the measuring device Overcoating with SigmaGuard 603 (spot repair and stripe coating) substrate temperature minimum interval maximum interval 5C 80 hours 20 days 10C 36 hours 20 days 20C 24 hours 20 days 30C 16 hours 14 days
surface should be dry and free from any contamination Curing table for dft up to 150 m substrate temperature dry to handle minimum curing time before exposure to sea water 10 days 5 days 4 days 2 days full cure
5C 10C 20C 30C
60 hours 30 hours 16 hours 10 hours
15 days 7 days 5 days 3 days
page 3/4
SIGMAGUARD 603
July 2011
due to exothermic reaction, temperature during and after mixing may increase Worldwide availability Whilst it is always the aim of PPG Protective & Marine Coatings to supply the same product on a worldwide basis, slight modication of the product is sometimes necessary to comply with local or national rules/circumstances. Under these circumstances an alternative product data sheet is used. Explanation to product data sheets Safety indications Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard Safe working in conned spaces Directives for ventilation practice Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Specication for mineral abrasives see information sheet 1411 see information sheet 1430 see information sheet 1431 see information sheet 1433 see information sheet 1434 see information sheet 1490 see information sheet 1491
REFERENCES
267450
PDS lightgrey
7985 5163052200
page 4/4
SIGMAGUARD 720
4 pages April 2009 Revision of January 2007
DESCRIPTION
two component reinforced high solids polyamine adduct cured epoxy coating
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS tank coating with good chemical resistance against a wide range of chemicals short curing periods good low temperature curing easy to clean Recognized corrosion control coating (Lloyd's register), see sheet 1886 COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20C Mass density Volume solids VOC (supplied) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Full cure after light green, grey - gloss (1 g/cm = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.4 g/cm 78 2% max. 163 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 233 g/l (approx. 1.9 lb/gal) 125 m * 6.2 m/l for 125 m * 7 - 8 hours at 5C, 5 - 6 hours at 10C, 2 - 3 hours at 20C min. 8 hours * max. 28 days * see curing table * (data for components) Shelf life (cool and dry place) at least 12 months
steel; blast cleaned to a minimum of ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 40 - 70 m previous coat; dry, free from any contamination and sufciently roughened if necessary substrate temperature must be above 5C and at least 3C above dew point during application and curing tankcoatings system sheet: 3320
page 1/4
SIGMAGUARD 720
April 2009
Induction time
allow induction time before use 15C - 15 min. 20C - 10 min. 25C - 5 min. 1.5 hour at 20C *
Pot life
AIRLESS SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure AIR SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure BRUSH CLEANING SOLVENT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Thinner 91-92 up to 10% for a one coat application of 125 m dft approx. 0.53 - 0.68 mm (= 0.021 - 0.027 in) 15 MPa (= approx. 150 bar; 2130 p.s.i.)
Thinner 91-92 5 - 15% for a one coat application of 125 m dft 1.8 - 2 mm 0.3 - 0.4 MPa (= approx. 3 - 4 bar; 43 - 57 p.s.i.) not recommended, only for spot repair and stripe coating Thinner 90-53 for paint and recommended thinners see safety sheets 1430, 1431 and relevant material safety data sheets this is a solvent borne paint and care should be taken to avoid inhalation of spray mist or vapour as well as contact between the wet paint and exposed skin or eyes
ADDITIONAL DATA
page 2/4
SIGMAGUARD 720
April 2009
Overcoating table for SigmaGuard 720 for dft up to 125 m substrate temperature minimum interval maximum interval 5C 32 hours 28 days 10C 24 hours 28 days 20C 8 hours 28 days 30C 4 hours 14 days 40C 3 hours 7 days
surface should be dry and free from any contamination Curing table for dft up to 125 m substrate temperature min. curing time of SigmaGuard 720 tankcoating system before transport of aliphatic petroleum products and ballast water and tanktest with sea water 10 days 7 days 5 days 3 days 2.5 days 1.5 day cargoes without note 4, 7, 8 or 11
5C 10C 15C 20C 30C 40C
17 days 14 days 8 days 5 days 4 days 3 days
minimum curing time of SigmaGuard 720 tankcoating system before transport of cargoes with note 4, 7, 8 or 11: 3 months for detailed information on resistance and resistance notes, please refer to the latest issue of the Cargo Resistance List adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) Pot life (at application viscosity) 15C 20C 25C 30C Worldwide availability 3 hours 1.5 hour 1 hour 30 min.
page 3/4
SIGMAGUARD 720
April 2009
REFERENCES
Explanation to product data sheets Safety indications Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard Safe working in conned spaces Directives for ventilation practice Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Specication for mineral abrasives
see information sheet 1411 see information sheet 1430 see information sheet 1431 see information sheet 1433 see information sheet 1434 see information sheet 1490 see information sheet 1491
179122 180730
PDS grey green
7433 5000002200 4000002200
page 4/4
SIGMAGUARD 730
DESCRIPTION
two component high solids polyamine cured phenolic epoxy coating
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS tank coating with good chemical resistance against a wide range of chemicals short curing periods good low temperature curing easy to clean can be used under insulation up to 150C COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20C Mass density Volume solids VOC (supplied) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Full cure after offwhite, cream - gloss (1 g/cm = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.4 g/cm 78 2% max. 169 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 242 g/l (approx. 2.0 lb/gal) 150 m * 5.2 m/l for 150 m * 3 hours at 20C min. 8 hours * max. 28 days * see curing table * (data for components) Shelf life (cool and dry place) at least 12 months
steel; blast cleaned to a minimum of ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 40 - 70 m previous coat; dry, free from any contamination and sufciently roughened if necessary substrate temperature must be above 5C and at least 3C above dew point during application and curing mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 75 : 25 the temperature of the mixed base and hardener should preferably be above 15C, otherwise extra solvent may be required to obtain application viscosity too much solvent results in reduced sag resistance and slower cure thinner should be added after mixing the components
Induction time
allow induction time before use 15C - 15 min. 20C - 10 min. 25C - 5 min. 1.5 hour at 20C *
Pot life
page 1/4
SIGMAGUARD 730
April 2009
AIRLESS SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure AIR SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure BRUSH CLEANING SOLVENT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Thinner 91-92 up to 10% for a one coat application of 150 m dft approx. 0.53 - 0.68 mm (= 0.021 - 0.027 in) 15 MPa (= approx. 150 bar; 2130 p.s.i.)
Thinner 91-92 5 - 15% for a one coat application of 150 m dft 1.8 - 2 mm 0.3 - 0.4 MPa (= approx. 3 - 4 bar; 43 - 57 p.s.i.) not recommended, only for spot repair and stripe coating Thinner 90-53 for paint and recommended thinners see safety sheets 1430, 1431 and relevant material safety data sheets this is a solvent borne paint and care should be taken to avoid inhalation of spray mist or vapour as well as contact between the wet paint and exposed skin or eyes
ADDITIONAL DATA
Film thickness and spreading rate theoretical spreading rate m/l dft in m max. dft when brushing: Overcoating table for SigmaGuard 730 for dft up to 150 m substrate temperature minimum interval maximum interval 5C 32 hours 28 days 10C 24 hours 28 days 20C 8 hours 28 days 30C 4 hours 14 days 40C 3 hours 7 days 6.2 125 5.2 150 100 m
page 2/4
SIGMAGUARD 730
April 2009
Curing table for dft up to 150 m substrate temperature min. curing time of SigmaGuard 730 tankcoating system before transport of aliphatic petroleum products and ballast water and tanktest with sea water 10 days 7 days 3 days 2.5 days 1.5 day cargoes without note 4, 7, 8 or 11
5C 10C 20C 30C 40C
17 days 14 days 5 days 4 days 3 days
minimum curing time of SigmaGuard 730 tankcoating system before transport of cargoes with note 4, 7, 8 or 11: 3 months for detailed information on resistance and resistance notes, please refer to the latest issue of the Cargo Resistance List adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) Pot life (at application viscosity) 15C 20C 25C 30C Worldwide availability 3 hours 1.5 hour 1 hour 30 min.
REFERENCES
page 3/4
SIGMAGUARD 730
April 2009
247818 247817
PDS offwhite cream
7459 7001002200 3000002200
page 4/4
SIGMAGUARD 750
6 pages April 2009 Revision of April 2007
DESCRIPTION
two component moisture curing zinc rich (ethyl) silicate coating
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS tankcoating with excellent solvent and chemical resistance to be used as tankcoating or as a system primer in various paint systems based on unsaponiable binders can withstand substrate temperatures from -90C up to +400C, under normal atmospheric exposure conditions high zinc content resulting in excellent corrosion protection good impact and abrasion resistance certicate for ASTM A-490 class 'B' for slip co-efcient Recognized corrosion control coating (Lloyd's register), see sheet 1886 must not be used for immersion in alkaline (more than pH 9) or acidic (less than pH 5.5) liquids COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20C Mass density Volume solids VOC (supplied) Recommended dry lm thickness grey - at (1 g/cm = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 2.7 g/cm 65 2% max. 167 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 452 g/l (approx. 3.8 lb/gal) average dft 75 m to 100 m with a minimum of 75 m on smooth non-pitted blast cleaned steel average dft 100 m with a minimum of 75 m on rough or light pitted, blast cleaned steel heavy pitted steel substrate is not acceptable 8.7 m/l for 75 m, 6.5 m/l for 100 m * 30 min. at 20C min. 12 hours * max. unlimited, zinc salts must be removed 12 hours * (data for components) Shelf life (cool and dry place) binder: at least 9 months pigment: at least 24 months (store pigment moisture free)
Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Curing time
page 1/6
SIGMAGUARD 750
April 2009
steel; blast cleaned in-situ to at least ISO-Sa2, completely free from rust, scale, shop primer and contaminations, blasting prole 40 - 70 m galvanised steel; sweep blasted to roughen the surface and to remove any zinc salts which might be present a heavy pitted steel substrate is not acceptable substrate temperatures ranging from -5C up to +40C during application are acceptable substrate temperature must be at least 3C above dew point during application and curing relative humidity during curing should be above 50% marine mixing ratio by volume: binder to zinc powder 74 : 26 Many of Sigma's zinc silicates are supplied as 2 pack materials consisting of a jerrycan with pigmented binder and a drum containing a bag of zinc powder. To ensure proper mixing of both components the instructions given below must be followed. To avoid lumps in the paint do not add the binder to the zinc powder. 1) Take the bag with zinc powder out of the drum. 2.) Shake the binder in the jerrycan a few times to reach a certain degree of homogenisation. 3.) Pour about 2/3 of the binder in the empty drum. 4.) With the jerrycan now reduced in weight and containing more free space, shake it vigorously to obtain a homogeneous mix with no deposits left on the bottom, and add this to the drum. 5.) Add the zinc powder gradually to the pigmented binder in the drum and at the same time continuously stir the mixture by using a mechanical mixer (keep the speed low). 6.) Stir the zinc dust powder thoroughly through the binder (high speed) and keep stirring till, a homogeneous mixture is obtained. 7.) Strain mixture through a 30 - 60 mesh screen. 8.) Agitate continuously during application (low speed). The use of a dedicated pump with a constant agitation for a zinc silicate coating is recommended. Note: At application temperature above 30C addition of max 10% by volume of Thinner 90-53 may be necessary. system sheet: 3323

page 2/6
SIGMAGUARD 750
April 2009
a dedicated pump for a zinc silicate coating with constant agitation must be used
AIR SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure
BRUSH Recommended thinner Volume of thinner
only for touch up and spot repair Thinner 90-53 5 - 15% apply a visible wet coat with a max. dft of 25 m same for subsequent coats in order to obtain the required dft Thinner 90-53 when for some reason the dft is below specication and an extra coat of SigmaGuard 750 has to be applied, SigmaGuard 750 should be thinned down with 25 - 50% Thinner 90-53, in order to obtain a visible wet coat that remains wet for some time this is only valid for spray application for paint and recommended thinners see safety sheets 1430, 1431 and relevant material safety data sheets this is a solvent borne paint and care should be taken to avoid inhalation of spray mist or vapour as well as contact between the wet paint and exposed skin or eyes
CLEANING SOLVENT UPGRADING DFT
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
ADDITIONAL DATA
very highly pigmented zinc silicate primers produce dry lms with void spaces in between the particles Film thickness and spreading rate theoretical spreading rate m/l dft in m 8.7 75 6.5 100
above 150 m dft mudcracking can occur max. dft when brushing:
35 m
page 3/6
SIGMAGUARD 750
April 2009
Overcoating table for SigmaGuard 750 for dft up to 75 m (50% RH and higher) substrate temperature minimum interval maximum interval -5C 24 hours 0C 24 hours 10C 18 hours 20C 12 hours 30C 6 hours 40C 4 hours
unlimited, provided the surface is dry and cleaned from contamination and zinc salts
a RH below 50% requires a much longer overcoating time if part of a coating system and in order to avoid possible popping effects (pinholes) SigmaGuard 750 should be sealed with approved coatings SigmaGuard 750 is a moisture curing zinc silicate, this means that it only cures after sufcient take up of water (from the atmosphere or immersion) during and after application; it is recommended that relative humidity and temperature are measured during the curing time before entering service or overcoating, a sufcient degree of cure should be obtained when curing conditions are unfavourable or when reduced overcoat times are desired, curing can be accelerated 4 hours after application by: wetting or soaking with water, keeping the surface wet for the next 2 hours, followed by drying wetting or soaking with a 0.5% ammonia solution, followed by drying before overcoating with topcoats, SigmaGuard 750 should always be visibly dry and checked on sufcient curing for measuring of the curing, the MEK rub test according to ASTM 4752 is a suitable method: after 50 double rubs with a cloth soaked in MEK (or alternatively Thinner 90-53) no dissolving of the coating should be observed
page 4/6
SIGMAGUARD 750
April 2009
Curing table for dft up to 75 m (50% RH and higher) substrate temperature curing time for non immersion service 24 hours 18 hours 12 hours 6 hours 4 hours curing time for full resistance according to resistance list 4 days 4 days 2 days 2 days 2 days
0C 10C 20C 30C 40C
SigmaGuard 750 is a moisture curing zinc silicate, this means that it only cures after sufcient take up of water (from the atmosphere or immersion) during and after application; it is recommended that relative humidity and temperature are measured during the curing time relative humidity during curing recommended to be above 50% adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) Pot life (at application viscosity) 0C 10C 20C 30C Worldwide availability 24 hours 16 hours 12 hours 6 hours
Whilst it is always the aim of PPG Protective & Marine Coatings to supply the same product on a worldwide basis, slight modication of the product is sometimes necessary to comply with local or national rules/circumstances. Under these circumstances an alternative product data sheet is used. Explanation to product data sheets Safety indications Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard Safe working in conned spaces Directives for ventilation practice Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Specication for mineral abrasives Relative humidity - substrate temperature air temperature see information sheet 1411 see information sheet 1430 see information sheet 1431 see information sheet 1433 see information sheet 1434 see information sheet 1490 see information sheet 1491 see information sheet 1650
REFERENCES
page 5/6
SIGMAGUARD 750
April 2009
295032
PDS grey
7551 0000002135
page 6/6
SIGMAGUARD CSF 575

DESCRIPTION
two component solvent free amine cured modied epoxy coating tankcoating for drinking water can be applied by single feed airless spray equipment reduced explosion risk and re hazard good visibility in conned spaces due to light colour approved for potable water by: National Institute of Public Health, Norway for other approvals see sheet 1882 Recognized corrosion control coating (Lloyd's register), see sheet 1886
cream - gloss (1 g/cm = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.3 g/cm 100% max. 33 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 44 g/l (approx. 0.4 lb/gal) see information sheet 1411 300 - 400 m depending on system 3.3 m/l for 300 m * 8 hours min. 24 hours * max. 20 days * 12 days * (data for components) at least 12 months
steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 40 - 70 m if a holding primer is required SigmaCover 280, SigmaGuard 215 (dft of 50 m) or SigmaPrime 200 (dft of 75 m) should be used concrete; blast cleaned to remove loose particles, laitance and contamination if a primer is required to withstand hydrostatic pressure, use SigmaShield 1090 prior to application of SigmaGuard CSF 575 substrate temperature must be above 10C and at least 3C above dew point during application and curing
page 1/6
SIGMAGUARD CSF 575

March 2010

use heavy duty single feed airless spray equipment preferably 60:1 pump ratio and suitable high pressure hoses in-line heating or insulated hoses may be necessary to avoid cooling down of paint in hoses at low air temperature application with 45:1 airless spray equipment is possible provided in-line heated high pressure hoses are used in case of using 45:1 airless spray equipment the paint must be heated to approx. 30C in order to obtain the right application viscosity length of hoses should be as short as possible no thinner should be added approx. 0.53 mm (= 0.021 in) at 20C (paint temperature) min. 28 MPa (= approx. 280 bar; 4000 p.s.i.) at 30C (paint temperature) min. 22 MPa (= approx. 220 bar; 3000 p.s.i.) for stripe coating and spot repair only no thinner should be added Thinner 90-83 (preferred) or Thinner 90-53 all equipment used for application must be cleaned immediately after use paint inside the spraying equipment must be removed before the pot life time has been expired for paint and recommended thinners see safety sheets 1430, 1431 and relevant material safety data sheets although this is a solvent free paint, care should be taken to avoid inhalation of spray mist as well as contact between the wet paint and exposed skin or eyes no solvent present; however, spray mist is not harmless, a fresh air mask should be used during spraying ventilation should be provided in conned spaces to maintain good visibility
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 2/6
SIGMAGUARD CSF 575

March 2010
ADDITIONAL DATA
measuring wet lm thickness a difference is often obtained between the measured apparent wft and the real applied wft this is due to the thixotropy and the surface tension of the paint which retards the release of air trapped in the paint lm for some time a practical recommendation is to apply a wft which is equal to the specied dft plus 60 m measuring dry lm thickness because of low initial hardness the dft cannot be measured for some days (depending on ambient temperature) after application due to the penetration of the measuring device into the paint lm the dft should be measured using a calibration foil of known thickness placed in between the coating and the measuring device Overcoating table for SigmaGuard CSF 575 for dft up to 300 m substrate temperature minimum interval maximum interval 10C 4 days 28 days 20C 24 hours 20 days 30C 16 hours 14 days 40C 10 hours 14 days
page 3/6
SIGMAGUARD CSF 575

March 2010
Curing table for dft up to 300 m substrate temperature 10C * 20C 30C 40C dry to handle 4 days 1 day 16 hours 10 hours full cure for drinking water 20 days 12 days 7 days 5 days
* for the rst 24 hours the maximum RH must be 50% or lower
adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) for drinking water tanks SigmaGuard CSF 575 must not be applied at temperatures below 10C for drinking water tanks, a tankwash should be carried out after full cure and before the tank goes into service for storage and transport of drinking water the recommended working procedure should be followed WASHING PROCEDURE all personnel should wear watertight suits, boots and gloves properly cleaned with a sodium hypochlorite solution (1% active chlorine per liter) all tank sides, bottom and deckheads etc. should be brush cleaned or highpressure spray cleaned with 1% active chlorine solution as above note: this can also be done by butterworth washing all parts should be high pressure cleaned with tap water and tanks drained concentrated active chlorine solution should be sprinkled on bottom; approx. 1 ltr/10 m tanks should be lled with tap water to a depth of approx. 20 cm and the water should remain in the tank for at least 2 hours (max. 24 hours) tanks should be thoroughly ushed out with tap water depending upon local regulations it may be necessary to take water samples, after lling tank completely, to check on bacteria after this procedure the tanks will be t to carry drinking water
page 4/6
SIGMAGUARD CSF 575

March 2010
due to exothermic reaction, temperature during and after mixing may increase DISCLAIMER SigmaGuard CSF 575 is especially developed for the storage and transport of drinking water and is approved for purpose in accordance with the requirements of the relevant certicate (See sheet 1882). In order to fulll the requirements it is important that the coating is well ventilated during application and curing and that the coating has received full curing. Furthermore the recommended washing procedure should be followed before exposure to drinking water, in line with our latest datasheet and working procedure. PPG Protective & Marine Coatings does not accept any responsibility or liability for any odour, taste or contamination imparted to the drinking water from the coatings or products retained in the coating. Worldwide availability Whilst it is always the aim of PPG Protective & Marine Coatings to supply the same product on a worldwide basis, slight modication of the product is sometimes necessary to comply with local or national rules/circumstances. Under these circumstances an alternative product data sheet is used. Explanation to product data sheets Safety indications Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard Safe working in conned spaces Directives for ventilation practice Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Specication for mineral abrasives see information sheet 1411 see information sheet 1430 see information sheet 1431 see information sheet 1433 see information sheet 1434 see information sheet 1490 see information sheet 1491
REFERENCES
page 5/6
SIGMAGUARD CSF 575

March 2010
179135
PDS cream
7475 3012002200
page 6/6
SIGMAGUARD CSF 585

6 pages May 2011 Revision of August 2009
DESCRIPTION
two component solvent free amine cured epoxy coating tankcoating for drinking water can be applied by single feed airless spray equipment reduced explosion risk and re hazard good visibility in conned spaces due to light colour approved for drinking water by: KIWA Holland for other approvals see sheet 1882
blue, white - gloss (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.3 g/cm 100% max. 5 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 6 g/l (approx. 0.1 lb/gal) see information sheet 1411 250 - 400 m depending on system 3.3 m/l for 300 m * 5 hours min. 24 hours * max. 20 days * 12 days * (data for components) at least 12 months
steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 50 - 100 m substrate temperature must be above 10C and at least 3C above dew point during application and curing if a holding primer is required SigmaGuard 215, SigmaCover 280 or SigmaPrime 200 can be used for KIWA only SigmaGuard 215 is approved as a holding primer
page 1/6
SIGMAGUARD CSF 585

May 2011
mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 77.5 : 22.5 the temperature of the mixed base and hardener should preferably be at least 20C at lower temperature the viscosity will be too high for spray application no thinner should be added for recommended application instructions: see working procedure
allow induction time before use 10C - 15 min. approx. 90 minutes at 20C *
use heavy duty single feed airless spray equipment preferably 60:1 pump ratio and suitable high pressure hoses in-line heating or insulated hoses may be necessary to avoid cooling down of paint in hoses at low air temperature application with 45:1 airless spray equipment is possible provided in-line heated high pressure hoses are used in case of using 45:1 airless spray equipment the paint must be heated to approx. 30C in order to obtain the right application viscosity length of hoses should be as short as possible no thinner should be added approx. 0.53 mm (= 0.021 in) at 20C (paint temperature) min. 28 MPa (= approx. 280 bar; 4000 p.s.i.) at 30C (paint temperature) min. 22 MPa (= approx. 220 bar; 3000 p.s.i.) for stripe coating and spot repair only no thinner should be added Thinner 90-83 (preferred) or Thinner 90-53 all application equipment must be cleaned immediately after use paint inside the spraying equipment must be removed before the pot life time has been expired for paint and recommended thinners see safety sheets 1430, 1431 and relevant material safety data sheets although this is a solvent free paint, care should be taken to avoid inhalation of spray mist as well as contact between the wet paint and exposed skin or eyes no solvent present; however, spray mist is not harmless, a fresh air mask should be used during spraying ventilation should be provided in conned spaces to maintain good visibility
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 2/6
SIGMAGUARD CSF 585

May 2011
ADDITIONAL DATA
measuring wet lm thickness a deviation is often obtained between the measured apparent wft and the real applied wft this is due to the thixotropy and the surface tension of the paint which retards the release of air trapped in the paint lm for some time a practical recommendation is to apply a wft which is equal to the specied dft plus 60 m measuring dry lm thickness because of low initial hardness the dft cannot be measured for some days (depending on ambient temperature) after application due to the penetration of the measuring device into the paint lm the dft should be measured using a calibration foil of known thickness placed in between the coating and the measuring device Overcoating table for SigmaGuard CSF 585 for dft up to 300 m (for spot repair and stripe coating only) substrate temperature minimum interval maximum interval 10C 4 days 28 days 20C 24 hours 20 days 30C 16 hours 14 days 40C 10 hours 14 days
page 3/6
SIGMAGUARD CSF 585

May 2011
Curing table for dft up to 300 m substrate temperature 10C * 20C 30C 40C dry to handle 4 days 1 day 16 hours 10 hours full cure for drinking water 20 days 12 days 7 days 5 days
* for the rst 24 hours the maximum RH must be 50% or lower
adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) SigmaGuard CSF 585 must not be applied at temperatures below 10C for drinking water tanks, a tankwash should be carried out after full cure and before the tank goes into service for storage and transport of drinking water the recommended working procedure should be followed WASHING PROCEDURE The recommended washing procedure must be applied after completion of the application. Sufcient time for full-curing and ventilation must be allowed in accordance with the recommendations as stated in the latest Product Data Sheets and working procedure. Always an adequate washing procedure should be followed. Several adequate washing procedures are available and may be used (see e.g. washing procedure described in relevant certicate). Example of adequate washing procedures: 1. after full curing of the system as per the latest PDS, the tank should be lled completely with fresh tap water the fresh tap water should remain in the tanks at least 4 full days afterwards all tank compartments such as inner hull sides, bottom and deckheads etc. should be thoroughly washed using high pressure water after washing, the tanks should be thoroughly drained after this procedure the tanks will be t to carry drinking water 2. all personnel should wear watertight suits, boots and gloves properly cleaned with a sodium hypochlorite solution (1% active chlorine per liter) all tank sides, bottom and deckheads etc. should be brush cleaned or highpressure spray cleaned with 1% active chlorine solution as above note: this can also be done by butterworth washing all parts should be high pressure cleaned with tap water and tanks drained concentrated active chlorine solution should be sprinkled on bottom; approx. 1 ltr/10 m
page 4/6
SIGMAGUARD CSF 585

May 2011
tanks should be lled with tap water to a depth of approx. 20 cm and the water should remain in the tank for at least 2 hours (max. 24 hours) tanks should be thoroughly ushed out with tap water depending upon local regulations it may be necessary to take water samples, after lling tank completely, to check on bacteria after this procedure the tanks will be t to carry drinking water Pot life (at application viscosity) 20C 30C 90 min. 60 min.
due to exothermic reaction, temperature during and after mixing may increase DISCLAIMER SigmaGuard CSF 585 is especially developed for the storage and transport of drinking water and is approved for purpose in accordance with the requirements of the relevant certicate (See sheet 1882). In order to fulll the requirements it is important that the coating is well ventilated during application and curing and that the coating has received full curing. Furthermore the recommended washing procedure should be followed before exposure to drinking water, in line with our latest datasheet and working procedure. After the washing procedure PPG Protective & Marine Coatings does not accept any responsibility or liability for any odour, taste or contamination imparted to the drinking water from the washing products retained in the coating. Worldwide availability Whilst it is always the aim of PPG Protective & Marine Coatings to supply the same product on a worldwide basis, slight modication of the product is sometimes necessary to comply with local or national rules/circumstances. Under these circumstances an alternative product data sheet is used. Explanation to product data sheets Safety indications Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard Safe working in conned spaces Directives for ventilation practice Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Specication for mineral abrasives see information sheet 1411 see information sheet 1430 see information sheet 1431 see information sheet 1433 see information sheet 1434 see information sheet 1490 see information sheet 1491
REFERENCES
page 5/6
SIGMAGUARD CSF 585

May 2011
219191 219190
PDS blue white
7785 1000002200 7000002200
page 6/6
SIGMAGUARD CSF 650

DESCRIPTION
two component solvent free amine cured epoxy coating tank coating for crude oil/ballast and aliphatic petroleum products also suitable as coating system for storage and transport of drinking water good resistance to various chemicals one coat protection for steel structures, ships and storage tanks with excellent corrosion resistance can be applied by heavy duty single feed airless spray equipment (60:1) reduced explosion risk and re hazard good visibility due to light colour also a conductive version is available, see sheet 7753 can be reinforced with chopped glassbre or mat clear version for glassmat reinforced solvent free tank bottom system (see system sheet 4144) meets the requirements of Mil-C-4556E concerning resistance against aircraft fuel and fuel degradation
green, offwhite, clear - gloss (1 g/cm = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.3 g/cm 100% max. 109 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 143 g/l (approx. 1.2 lb/gal) see information sheet 1411 300 - 600 m depending on system 3.3 m/l for 300 m * 8 hours min. 24 hours * max. 20 days * 5 days * (data for components)
at least 12 months
steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 50 - 100 m suitable primer; SigmaGuard 260, SigmaCover 280, SigmaPrime series or SigmaCover 522, depending on system requirements substrate temperature must be above 5C and at least 3C above dew point during application and curing marine or suitable primer (min. dft of 50 m) + 1 x 300 m SigmaGuard CSF 650 1 x 250 m SigmaGuard CSF 650
page 1/6
SIGMAGUARD CSF 650

April 2009
mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 80 : 20 the temperature of the mixed base and hardener should preferably be above 20C at lower temperature the viscosity will be too high for spray application no thinner should be added for recommended application instructions: see working procedure

AIRLESS SPRAY
use heavy duty single feed airless spray equipment preferably 60:1 pump ratio and suitable high pressure hoses in-line heating or insulated hoses may be necessary to avoid cooling down of paint in hoses at low air temperature application with 45:1 airless spray equipment is possible provided in-line heated high pressure hoses are used in case of using 45:1 airless spray equipment the paint must be heated to approx. 30C in order to obtain the right application viscosity length of hoses should be as short as possible no thinner should be added approx. 0.53 - 0.64 mm (= 0.021 - 0.025 in) at 20C (paint temperature) min. 28 MPa (= approx. 280 bar; 4000 p.s.i.) at 30C (paint temperature) min. 22 MPa (= approx. 220 bar; 3000 p.s.i.) for stripe coating and spot repair only no thinner should be added Thinner 90-83 (preferred) or Thinner 90-53 all equipment used for application must be cleaned immediately after use paint inside the spraying equipment must be removed before the pot life time has been expired for paint and recommended thinners see safety sheets 1430, 1431 and relevant material safety data sheets although this is a solvent free paint, care should be taken to avoid inhalation of spray mist as well as contact between the wet paint and exposed skin or eyes no solvent present; however, spray mist is not harmless, a fresh air mask should be used during spraying ventilation should be provided in conned spaces to maintain good visibility
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 2/6
SIGMAGUARD CSF 650

April 2009
ADDITIONAL DATA
Film thickness and spreading rate theoretical spreading rate m/l dft in m max. dft when brushing: 4.0 250 3.3 300 1.7 600 150 - 200 m
measuring wet lm thickness a deviation is often obtained between the measured apparent wft and the real applied wft this is due to the thixotropy and the surface tension of the paint which retards the release of air trapped in the paint lm for some time recommendation is to apply a wft which is equal to the specied dft plus 60 m measuring dry lm thickness because of low initial hardness the dft cannot be measured within some days due to the penetration of the measuring device into the soft paint lm the dft should be measured using a calibration foil of known thickness placed in between the coating and the measuring device Overcoating table for SigmaGuard CSF 650 for dft up to 300 m with itself substrate temperature minimum interval maximum interval 5C 80 hours 20 days 10C 36 hours 20 days 20C 24 hours 20 days 30C 16 hours 14 days 40C 12 hours 7 days
surface should be dry and free from any contamination Curing table for dft up to 300 m substrate temperature 5C 10C 20C 30C 40C dry to handle 60 hours 30 hours 16 hours 10 hours 8 hours full cure 15 days 7 days 5 days 3 days 2 days
adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) for drinking water tanks, a tankwash should be carried out after full cure and before the tank goes into service
page 3/6
SIGMAGUARD CSF 650

April 2009
when used as coating system for storage and transport of drinking water the recommended working and washing procedure should be followed WASHING PROCEDURE The recommended washing procedure must be applied after completion of the application. Sufcient time for full-curing and ventilation must be allowed in accordance with the recommendations as stated in the latest Product Data Sheets and working procedure. Always an adequate washing procedure should be followed. Several adequate washing procedures are available and may be used (see e.g. washing procedure described in relevant certicate). Example of adequate washing procedures: 1. after full curing of the system as per the latest PDS, the tank should be lled completely with fresh tap water the fresh tap water should remain in the tanks at least 4 full days afterwards all tank compartments such as inner hull sides, bottom and deckheads etc. should be thoroughly washed using high pressure water after washing, the tanks should be thoroughly drained after this procedure the tanks will be t to carry drinking water 2. all personnel should wear watertight suits, boots and gloves properly cleaned with a sodium hypochlorite solution (1% active chlorine per liter) all tank sides, bottom and deckheads etc. should be brush cleaned or highpressure spray cleaned with 1% active chlorine solution as above note: this can also be done by butterworth washing all parts should be high pressure cleaned with tap water and tanks drained concentrated active chlorine solution should be sprinkled on bottom; approx. 1 ltr/10 m tanks should be lled with tap water to a depth of approx. 20 cm and the water should remain in the tank for at least 2 hours (max. 24 hours) tanks should be thoroughly ushed out with tap water depending upon local regulations it may be necessary to take water samples, after lling tank completely, to check on bacteria after this procedure the tanks will be t to carry drinking water
page 4/6
SIGMAGUARD CSF 650

April 2009
Pot life (at application viscosity) 20C 30C 40C 60 min. 45 min. 25 min.
due to exothermic reaction, temperature during and after mixing may increase Disclaimer for storage and transport of drinking water: SigmaGuard CSF 650 is approved for purpose in accordance with the requirements of the relevant certicate (see sheet 1882) PPG Protective & Marine Coatings does not accept any responsibility or liability for any odour, taste or contamination imparted to the drinking water from the coatings or products retained in the coating. Worldwide availability Whilst it is always the aim of PPG Protective & Marine Coatings to supply the same product on a worldwide basis, slight modication of the product is sometimes necessary to comply with local or national rules/circumstances. Under these circumstances an alternative product data sheet is used. Explanation to product data sheets Safety indications Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard Safe working in conned spaces Directives for ventilation practice Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Specication for mineral abrasives see information sheet 1411 see information sheet 1430 see information sheet 1431 see information sheet 1433 see information sheet 1434 see information sheet 1490 see information sheet 1491
REFERENCES
page 5/6
SIGMAGUARD CSF 650

April 2009
179131 179511
PDS green clear
7443 4000002200 0000002200
page 6/6
SIGMAGUARD CSF 660

4 pages April 2009 Revision of February 2006
DESCRIPTION
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS solvent free coating for the protection of steel storage tanks against petroleum products can be applied by heavy duty single feed airless spray equipment (60:1) reduced explosion risk and re hazard good conductive properties (<1x108Ohm) COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20C Mass density Volume solids VOC (supplied) dark grey - gloss (1 g/cm = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.4 g/cm 100% max. 98 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 133 g/l (approx. 1.1 lb/gal) see information sheet 1411 300 - 400 m depending on system 3.3 m/l for 300 m * 8 hours min. 24 hours * max. 20 days * 5 days * (data for components) Shelf life (cool and dry place) at least 12 months
steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2 blasting prole 50 - 100 m substrate temperature must be above 5C and at least 3C above dew point during application and curing mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 75 : 25 when mixing the temperature of the base and hardener should be at least 20C at lower temperature the viscosity will be too high for spray application no thinner should be added

page 1/4
SIGMAGUARD CSF 660

April 2009
AIRLESS SPRAY
heavy duty single feed airless spray equipment preferably 60:1 pump ratio and suitable high pressure hoses in-line heating or insulated hoses may be necessary to avoid cooling down of paint in hoses at low air temperature application with 45:1 airless spray equipment is possible provided in-line heated high pressure hoses are used in case of using 45:1 airless spray equipment the paint must be heated to approx. 30C in order to obtain the right application viscosity length of hoses should be as short as possible no thinner should be added approx. 0.53 - 0.58 mm (= 0.021 - 0.023 in) at 20C (paint temperature) min. 20 MPa (= approx. 200 bar; 2800 p.s.i.) for stripe coating and spot repair only no thinner should be added Thinner 90-83 (preferred) or Thinner 90-53 all application equipment must be cleaned immediately after use paint inside the spraying equipment must be removed before the pot life time has been expired for paint and recommended thinners see safety sheets 1430, 1431 and relevant material safety data sheets although this is a solvent free paint, care should be taken to avoid inhalation of spray mist as well as contact between the wet paint and exposed skin or eyes no solvent present; however, spray mist is not harmless, a fresh air mask should be used during spraying ventilation should be provided in conned spaces to maintain good visibility
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
ADDITIONAL DATA
measuring wet lm thickness a deviation is often obtained between the measured apparent wft and the real applied wft this is due to the thixotropy and the surface tension of the paint which retards the release of air trapped in the paint lm for some time recommendation is to apply a wft which is equal to the specied dft plus 60 m
page 2/4
SIGMAGUARD CSF 660

April 2009
measuring dry lm thickness because of low initial hardness the dft cannot be measured within some days due to the penetration of the measuring device into the soft paint lm the dft should be measured using a calibration foil of known thickness placed in between the coating and the measuring device Overcoating table for SigmaGuard CSF 660 for dft up to 300 m (for spot repair and stripe coating only) substrate temperature minimum interval maximum interval 5C 80 hours 20 days 10C 36 hours 20 days 20C 24 hours 20 days 30C 16 hours 14 days
adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) Pot life (at application viscosity) 20C 30C 60 min. 45 min.
page 3/4
SIGMAGUARD CSF 660

April 2009
REFERENCES
220926
PDS darkgrey
7753 5004002200
page 4/4
SIGMALINE 445
DESCRIPTION
two component high build amine adduct cured phenolic epoxy in situ lining
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS provides excellent protection in severe chemical and high temperature service excellent resistance to blistering from the "cold wall effect" excellent for use in sweet and sour crude, brine and processed petroleum products resistant to produced water containing hydrogen sulde and carbon dioxide COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20C Mass density Volume solids VOC (supplied) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Overcoating interval Full cure after light green - at (1 g/cm = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.7 g/cm 70 2% max. 155 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 264 g/l (approx. 2.2 lb/gal) 50 - 100 m depending on system 14 m/l for 50 m * min. 12 hours * max. 5 days * 10 days * (data for components) Shelf life (cool and dry place) at least 12 months
steel; chemically cleaned according to sheet 1493 or/and sand jetted, dry and free from any contamination substrate temperature should be above 10C and at least 3C above dew point mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 90 : 10 (do not vary proportions) base and hardener should preferably be stored at a temperature of 15 20C power agitate base component to uniform consistency before adding hardener, then again after adding hardener add the hardener gradually to the base, using a mechanical mixer no thinners should be added when used as an in situ coating after mixing, commencement of the in situ application must be within 3 hours
15 minutes 6 hours at 20C *

page 1/4
SIGMALINE 445
April 2009
IN SITU APPLICATION
Recommended thinner Ventilation
application of this coating to internal pipe surfaces is accomplished by the use of pigs, pupjoints, compressors and other specialized equipment this application should be referred to contractors specializing and experienced in this type of work coating performance is dependent upon proper surface preparation, application and curing; these factors are not under the control of PPG Protective & Marine Coatings and therefore no warranty can be offered after the application of each coat, dry air has to be blown through the coated pipe until the next coat is applied (see table for minimum overcoating intervals) this will remove the solvents and accelerate the curing after the last coat is applied, fresh air blowing has to continue for a minimum of 24 hours depending on line length, it may be necessary to switch the direction of the fresh air Thinner 91-92 compressed air to be introduced into the line to remove all solvents during and after coating or drying procedures Thinner 90-53 for paint and recommended thinners see safety sheets 1430, 1431 and relevant material safety data sheets this is a solvent borne paint and care should be taken to avoid inhalation of spray mist or vapour as well as contact between the wet paint and exposed skin or eyes
ADDITIONAL DATA
page 2/4
SIGMALINE 445
April 2009
Overcoating table for SigmaLine 445 for dft up to 75 m substrate temperature minimum interval maximum interval 10C 24 hours 7 days 20C 12 hours 5 days 30C 6 hours 3 days 40C 3 hours 1 day
after the application of each coat, warm dry air can be applied after sufcient ambient curing to accelerate the curing it is benecial to post cure the total coating system to increase the chemical resistance Curing table for dft up to 75 m substrate temperature 10C 15C 20C 25C 30C 35C 40C curing time after nal coat 24 days 26 days 10 days 7 days 5 days 3 days 2 days
page 3/4
SIGMALINE 445
April 2009
REFERENCES
Explanation to product data sheets Safety indications Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard Safe working in conned spaces Directives for ventilation practice Internal chemical cleaning of steel pipes in-situ application
PDS lightgreen
7618
page 4/4
SIGMALINE 855
4 pages November 2010 Revision of April 2009
DESCRIPTION
two component solvent free polyurethane coating
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS solvent free coating for the protection of external of pipelines and underground storage tanks certied to GBE/CW6 Part 1, meets EN10290 excellent corrosion resistance fast curing good abrasion and impact resistance excellent adhesion good water resistance COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20C Mass density Volume solids VOC (supplied) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Full cure after Shelf life (cool and dry place) RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE blue, grey, redbrown - gloss (1 g/cm = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.7 g/cm 100% max. 1 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 2 g/l (approx. 0.0 lb/gal) see information sheet 1411 1500 m in one coat 0.7 m/l for 1500 m * 30 minutes 4 days * (data for components) at least 6 months
steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 40 - 70 m substrate temperature should be above 10C and at least 3C above dew point, lower temperatures will reduce ow properties for atmospheric exposure a top coat of SigmaDur 520 is recommended mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 80 : 20 application with twin feed hot airless spray equipment no thinner should be added
none 1 minute at 60C *

page 1/4
SIGMALINE 855
November 2010
AIRLESS SPRAY Recommended thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure CLEANING SOLVENT
twin feed hot airless spray pumping viscosity is achieved at 50C - 70C temperature in the mixing unit must be between 65C and 75C no thinner should be added approx. 0.58 - 0.81 mm (= 0.023 - 0.032 in) depending on required production speed and dft 15 MPa (= approx. 150 bar; 2130 p.s.i.)
Temperature at nozzle 60C
Thinner 91-88 Cleaning Procedures of the spray equipment: mixed material will become insoluble within a few minutes after mixing at 60C parts of the spraying equipment containing mixed base and hardener must be cleaned immediately after completion of the job or during any interruption for paint and recommended thinners see safety sheets 1430, 1431 and relevant material safety data sheets although this is a solvent free paint, care should be taken to avoid inhalation of spray mist as well as contact between the wet paint and exposed skin or eyes ventilation should be provided in conned spaces to maintain good visibility
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
ADDITIONAL DATA
Film thickness and spreading rate theoretical spreading rate m/l dft in m 0.7 1500 250 m
min. dft for closed lm with airless spray: Overcoating
for a good intercoat adhesion it is necessary that a coated surface which should be repaired or completely recoated is roughened up by means of sweep blasting or abrading for manual repaint of small damages special repair sets are available called: "SigmaLine 855 repair", product data sheet 7655 RP
page 2/4
SIGMALINE 855
November 2010
Curing table for dft up to 1500 m substrate temperature 0C 5C 10C 15C 20C 30C 40C 50C touch dry 3.5 hours 2 hours 1.5 hour 1 hour 30 min. 15 min. 6 min. 3 min. dry to handle 7 hours 4 hours 3 hours 1.5 hour 1 hour 30 min. 15 min. 6 min. full cure 12 days 10 days 8 days 6 days 4 days 2 days 24 hours 12 hours
adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) Pot life (at application viscosity) 20C 50C 60C 70C Worldwide availability 5 min. 2 min. 1 min. 0.5 min.
Whilst it is always the aim of PPG Protective & Marine Coatings to supply the same product on a worldwide basis, slight modication of the product is sometimes necessary to comply with local or national rules/circumstances. Under these circumstances an alternative product data sheet is used. SigmaLine 855 repair Explanation to product data sheets Safety indications Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard Cleaning of steel and removal of rust see product data sheet 7655 RP see information sheet 1411 see information sheet 1430 see information sheet 1431 see information sheet 1490
REFERENCES
page 3/4
SIGMALINE 855
November 2010
184960 235683 235693
PDS blue redbrown grey
7655 100000 (set 1000 ltr) 200800 (set 1000 ltr) 500000 (set 1000 ltr)
page 4/4
SIGMALINE 859
(SIGMALINING PURTAR SF 59)
4 pages January 2011 Revision of November 2005
DESCRIPTION
two component solvent free polyurethane tar coating
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS solvent free coating for the protection of external of pipelines and underground storage tanks excellent corrosion resistance fast curing excellent adhesion good abrasion resistance good water resistance COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20C Mass density Volume solids VOC (supplied) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Full cure after Shelf life (cool and dry place) Flash point black - gloss (1 g/cm = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.8 g/cm 100% max. 1 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 2 g/l (approx. 0.0 lb/gal) see information sheet 1411 1500 m in one coat 0.7 m/l for 1500 m * 1 hour * 4 days * (data for components) at least 6 months base and hardener above 65C
RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE
steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 40 - 70 m substrate temperature should be above 15C and at least 3C above dew point, lower temperatures will reduce ow properties mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 80 : 20 application with twin feed hot airless spray equipment no thinner should be added
none 1 minute at 60C *

page 1/4
SIGMALINE 859

January 2011
twin feed hot airless spray pumping viscosity is achieved at 50C - 70C temperature in the mixing unit must be between 65C and 75C no thinner should be added approx. 0.58 - 0.81 mm (= 0.023 - 0.032 in) depending on required production speed and dft 15 MPa (= approx. 150 bar; 2130 p.s.i.)
Temperature at nozzle 60C
CLEANING SOLVENT
Thinner 91-88 Cleaning Procedures of the spray equipment: mixed material will become insoluble within a few minutes after mixing at 60C parts of the spraying equipment containing mixed base and hardener must be cleaned immediately after completion of the job or during any interruption for paint and recommended thinners see safety sheets 1430, 1431 and relevant material safety data sheets although this is a solvent free paint, care should be taken to avoid inhalation of spray mist as well as contact between the wet paint and exposed skin or eyes ventilation should be provided in conned spaces to maintain good visibility if any symptoms arise immediately seek medical advice
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
ADDITIONAL DATA
Film thickness and spreading rate theoretical spreading rate m/l dft in m 0.7 1500 250 m
min. dft for closed lm with airless spray: Overcoating
for a good intercoat adhesion it is necessary that a coated surface which should be repaired or completely recoated is roughened up by means of sweep blasting or abrading for manual repaint of small damages special repair sets are available called: "SigmaLine 859 repair", product data sheet 7659 RP
page 2/4
SIGMALINE 859

January 2011
Curing table substrate temperature 15C 20C 30C 40C 50C touch dry 1 hour 30 min. 15 min. 6 min. 3 min. dry to handle 2 hours 1 hour 30 min. 15 min. 6 min. full cure 6 days 4 days 2 days 24 hours 12 hours
adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) Pot life (at application viscosity) 20C 50C 60C 70C Worldwide availability 5 min. 2 min. 1 min. 0.5 min.
REFERENCES
page 3/4
SIGMALINE 859

January 2011
155313 155314
PDS black transparent
7659 180 ltr base 200 ltr hardener
page 4/4
SIGMALINE 2000
4 pages April 2010 Revision of April 2009
DESCRIPTION
two component solvent free amine cured phenolic epoxy coating one coat system direct to metal for pipe externals suitable for e.g. bell holing jobs resistant to well designed cathodic protection glossy and smooth appearance can be applied by heavy duty twin feed hot airless spray equipment can be applied at a substrate temperature of 90C reduced explosion risk and re hazard approved to Saudi Aramco APCS 113A
redbrown - gloss (1 g/cm = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.4 g/cm 100% max. 108 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 146 g/l (approx. 1.2 lb/gal) see information sheet 1411 600 - 1500 m depending on system 1.7 m/l for 600 m * 6 hours min. 24 hours * max. 2 months * 5 days * (data for components) at least 12 months
steel; blast cleaned to a minimum of ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 50 - 100 m substrate temperature should be above 5C and at least 3C above dew point during application and curing mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 80 : 20 when mixing the temperature of the base and hardener should be at least 20C at lower temperature the viscosity will be too high for spray application no thinner should be added

page 1/4
SIGMALINE 2000
April 2010
AIRLESS SPRAY
heavy duty single feed airless spray equipment with a minimum of 60:1 pump ratio and suitable high pressure hoses in-line heating or insulated hoses may be necessary to avoid cooling down of paint in hoses at low air temperature length of hoses should be as short as possible no thinner should be added approx. 0.53 mm (= 0.021 in) at 20C (paint temperature) min. 28 MPa (= approx. 280 bar; 4000 p.s.i.) at 30C (paint temperature) min. 22 MPa (= approx. 220 bar; 3000 p.s.i.) for stripe coating and spot repair only no thinner should be added Thinner 90-83 (preferred) or Thinner 90-53 all application equipment must be cleaned immediately after use paint inside the spraying equipment must be removed before the pot life time has been expired for paint and recommended thinners see safety sheets 1430, 1431 and relevant material safety data sheets although this is a solvent free paint, care should be taken to avoid inhalation of spray mist as well as contact between the wet paint and exposed skin or eyes ventilation should be provided in conned spaces to maintain good visibility
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
ADDITIONAL DATA
measuring wet lm thickness a deviation is often obtained between the measured apparent wft and the real applied wft this is due to the thixotropy and the surface tension of the paint which retards the release of air trapped in the paint lm for some time recommendation is to apply a wft which is equal to the specied dft plus 60 m measuring dry lm thickness because of low initial hardness the dft cannot be measured for some days (depending on ambient temperature) after application due to the penetration of the measuring device into the paint lm the dft should be measured using a calibration foil of known thickness placed in between the coating and the measuring device
page 2/4
SIGMALINE 2000
April 2010
Overcoating table for SigmaLine 2000 for dft up to 600 m (for spot repair and stripe coating only) substrate temperature minimum interval maximum interval 5C 80 hours 3 months 10C 36 hours 3 months 20C 24 hours 2 months 30C 12 hours 1 month
although the paint is solvent free adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheet 1433 and 1434) Pot life (at application viscosity) 20C 30C 40C 60 min. 45 min. 20 min. *
* it is recommended to use plural airless equipment due to the short pot life
REFERENCES
page 3/4
SIGMALINE 2000
April 2010
189997
PDS redbrown
7497 2008002200
page 4/4
SIGMALINE 2500
4 pages April 2009 Revision of February 2006
DESCRIPTION
two component solvent free amine cured phenolic epoxy coating one coat system direct to metal for pipe externals excellent resistance to cathodic protection glossy and smooth appearance reduced explosion risk and re hazard fast curing especially when applied to preheated substrates can be applied to rotating pipes at a dry lm thickness (dft) up to 600 m at a substrate temperature up to 90C approved to Saudi Aramco APCS 113 dark brown - gloss (1 g/cm = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.5 g/cm 100% max. 83 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 125 g/l (approx. 1.0 lb/gal) see information sheet 1411 600 m depending on system 1.7 m/l for 600 m * 30 min. at 60C min. equal to dry to handle time (see curing table) max. 2 days (external exposure) or 1 month (in-shop exposure) 3 hours at 60C 4 - 6 min. at 50C (data for components)
Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Full cure after Gellation time
at least 6 months
steel; blast cleaned to a minimum of ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 50 - 100 m substrate temperature should be above 15C and at least 3C above dew point during application and curing the recommended substrate temperature should be preferably between 40C and 60C these recommended substrate temperatures ensure good curing and appearance mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 4 : 1 application with twin feed hot airless spray equipment
none 5 minutes at 50C *

page 1/4
SIGMALINE 2500
April 2009
AIRLESS SPRAY
twin feed hot airless spray pumping viscosity is achieved at 40C - 60C temperature in the mixing unit must be between 40C and 70C no thinner should be added approx. 0.48 - 0.78 mm (= 0.019 - 0.031 in) depending on required production speed and dft at 40C (paint temperature) min. 19 MPa (= approx. 190 bar; 2700 p.s.i.) at 60C (paint temperature) min. 15 MPa (= approx. 150 bar; 2130 p.s.i.) for touch up and spot repair only no thinner should be added Thinner 90-83 (preferred) or Thinner 90-53 Cleaning Procedures of the spray equipment: all equipment used for application must be cleaned immediately after use paint inside the spraying equipment must be removed before the pot life time has been expired
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
for paint and recommended thinners see safety sheets 1430, 1431 and relevant material safety data sheets although this is a solvent free paint, care should be taken to avoid inhalation of spray mist as well as contact between the wet paint and exposed skin or eyes ventilation should be provided in conned spaces to maintain good visibility
ADDITIONAL DATA
measuring wet lm thickness a deviation is often obtained between the measured apparent wft and the real applied wft this is due to the thixotropy and the surface tension of the paint which retards the release of air trapped in the paint lm for some time recommendation is to apply a wft which is equal to the specied dft plus 60 m measuring dry lm thickness because of low initial hardness the dft cannot be measured within some days due to the penetration of the measuring device into the soft paint lm the dft should be measured using a calibration foil of known thickness placed in between the coating and the measuring device
page 2/4
SIGMALINE 2500
April 2009
Overcoating table for SigmaLine 2500 for dft up to 600 m (for spot repair and stripe coating only) substrate temperature minimum interval maximum interval * 20C 3 hours 1 month 30C 1.5 hour 1 month 40C 1 hour 1 month
* when exposed to sunlight maximum interval is 2 days for all mentioned temperatures
surface should be dry and free from any contamination Curing table for dft up to 600 m substrate temperature 20C 30C 40C 50C 60C 70C 90C dry to handle 3 hours 90 min. 60 min. 40 min. 30 min. 20 min. 10 min. full cure 2 days 1 day 12 hours 6 hours 3 hours 2 hours 1 hour
although the paint is solvent free adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheet 1433 and 1434) Pot life (at application viscosity) 20C 50C 60C 70C 20 min. 5 min. 4 min. 3 min.
for touch up due to exothermic reaction, temperature during and after mixing may increase Worldwide availability Whilst it is always the aim of PPG Protective & Marine Coatings to supply the same product on a worldwide basis, slight modication of the product is sometimes necessary to comply with local or national rules/circumstances. Under these circumstances an alternative product data sheet is used.
page 3/4
SIGMALINE 2500
April 2009
REFERENCES
195814
PDS dark brown
7667 2058002200
page 4/4
SIGMAPRIME 200 SERIES

5 pages November 2010 Revision of May 2009
DESCRIPTION
two component multi purpose polyamide cured anticorrosive epoxy system
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS universal epoxy priming system suitable for all vessel areas excellent anticorrosive properties and water resistance surface tolerant, pure epoxy primer with good abrasion and chemical resistance excellent adhesion to steel, shop primer, galvanised steel and non ferrous metals excellent recoatability suitable for application and curing in a wide range of climatic conditions suitable for bulk supply and twin feed application suitable on wet blast cleaned substrates (damp or dry) COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20C Mass density Volume solids VOC (supplied) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Curing time Shelf life (cool and dry place) grey, yellow/green (redbrown for SigmaPrime 200 K) - eggshell (1 g/cm = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) SigmaPrime 200: 1.3 g/cm 57 2% max. 326 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 430 g/l (approx. 3.6 lb/gal) 75 - 200 m depending on system 7.6 m/l for 75 m, 2.9 m/l for 200 m * 1.5 hour min. see tables * max. see tables * 7 days * (data for components) at least 24 months
SigmaPrime 200 K: 1.4 g/cm 60 2% max. 287 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 392 g/l (approx. 3.3 lb/gal) 100 - 200 m depending on system 6 m/l for 100 m, 3 m/l for 200 m *
page 1/5

November 2010
for immersion exposure: steel or steel with not approved zinc silicate shop primer; blast cleaned (dry or wet) to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 30 - 75 m steel with approved zinc silicate shop primer; weld seams and areas of damaged shop primer or breakdown should be blast cleaned to ISOSa2, blasting prole 30 - 75 m or power tool cleaned to SPSS-Pt3 coated steel; hydrojetted to VIS WJ2 L (blasting prole 30 - 75 m) IMO-MSC.215(82) Requirements for Water Ballast Tanks: steel; ISO 8501-3:2006 grade P2, with all edges treated to a rounded radius of minimum 2 mm or subject to three pass grinding steel or steel with not approved zinc silicate shop primer; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 30 - 75 m steel with approved zinc silicate shop primer; weld seams and areas of damaged shop primer or breakdown should be blast cleaned to ISOSa2, blasting prole 30 - 75 m for shop primer with IMO type approval; no additional requirements for shop primer without IMO type approval; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2 removing at least 70% of intact shop primer, blasting prole 30 - 75 m dust quantity rating "1" for dust size class "3", "4" or "5", lower dust size classes to be removed if visible on the surface to be coated without magnication (ISO 8502-3:1992) for atmospheric exposure conditions: steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 30 - 75 m or according to ISO-St3 shop primed steel; pretreated to SPSS-Pt3 galvanised steel; cleaned from grease, salts, contamination and roughened up previous coat; (e.g. SigmaPrime 200) dry and free from any contamination substrate temperature should be above 5C and at least 3C above dew point during application and curing maximum relative humidity during application and curing is 85% marine system sheets: 3101, 3102, 3103, 3104, 3105, 3106 (spec. 2), 3107, 3108

page 2/5

November 2010
Thinner 91-92 0 - 15%, depending on required thickness and application conditions approx. 0.53 - 0.74 mm (= 0.021 - 0.029 in) 15 MPa (= approx. 150 bar; 2130 p.s.i.) Thinner 91-92 0 - 15%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 1.5 - 2 mm 0.3 - 0.4 MPa (= approx. 3 - 4 bar; 43 - 57 p.s.i.) no extra thinner needed but up to 5% Thinner 91-92 can be added if desired Thinner 90-53 for paint and recommended thinners see safety sheets 1430, 1431 and relevant material safety data sheets this is a solvent borne paint and care should be taken to avoid inhalation of spray mist or vapour as well as contact between the wet paint and exposed skin or eyes
ADDITIONAL DATA
Film thickness and spreading rate theoretical spreading rate m/l SigmaPrime 200 SigmaPrime 200 K dft in m 75 7.6 6.0 100 4.6 4.8 125 3.6 3.8 160 2.9 3.0 200
max. dft: Dry Film Thickness of 2000 m may occur occasionally (minor areas) where multiple overlapping is unavoidable (i.e. around scallops, corners, erection joint lines etc.). PPG must be consulted in case of DFT readings fall outside this recommendation.
page 3/5

November 2010
Overcoating table for SigmaPrime 200 or 200 K for dft up to 160 m substrate temperature with various two pack epoxy coatings minimum interval maximum interval when not exposed to sunshine maximum interval when exposed to direct sunshine 5C 13 hours 6 months 10C 6 hours 6 months 20C 2.5 hours 6 months 30C 1.5 hour 4 months 40C 1 hour 3 months
3 months
3 months
3 months
2 months
2 months
surface should be dry and free from any contamination Curing table for dft up to 160 m substrate temperature 5C 10C 20C 30C 40C touch dry 5 hours 3 hours 1.5 hour 45 min. 30 min. dry to handle 14 hours 8 hours 4 hours 2.5 hours 1.5 hour full cure 21 days 14 days 7 days 5 days 4 days
page 4/5

November 2010
REFERENCES
Explanation to product data sheets see information sheet 1411 Safety indications see information sheet 1430 Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard see information sheet 1431 Safe working in conned spaces see information sheet 1433 Directives for ventilation practice see information sheet 1434 Cleaning of steel and removal of rust see information sheet 1490 PPG Protective & Marine Coatings Ballast Tank Working Procedure New Building
202391 211291 244820 244832
PDS 7416 SigmaPrime 200 yellow/green 4009002200 (202390 base, 202389 hardener) SigmaPrime 200 grey 9515052200 (211282 base, 202389 hardener) SigmaPrime 200 K grey 9515052150 (243529 base, 240992 hardener) SigmaPrime 200 K redbrown 2008002150 (243540 base, 240992 hardener)
page 5/5
SIGMAPRIME 700
5 pages April 2011 Revision of December 2010
DESCRIPTION
two component multi purpose polyamide cured anticorrosive epoxy system
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS general purpose epoxy primer/coating in protective coating systems for steel and non ferrous metals good adhesion to steel and galvanised steel good adhesion to non ferrous metals good ow and wetting properties good water and corrosion resistance cures at temperatures down to +5C suitable for touching up of weld seams and damages of epoxy coatings during construction excellent recoatability can be overcoated with most alkyd-, chlorinated rubber-, vinyl-, epoxy- and two component polyurethane coatings compatible with well designed cathodic protection systems suitable on wet blast cleaned substrates (damp or dry) COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20C Mass density Volume solids VOC (supplied) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Full cure after Shelf life (cool and dry place) grey, redbrown, yellow/green, green - eggshell (1 g/cm = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.4 g/cm 70 2% max. 227 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 313 g/l (approx. 2.6 lb/gal) 100 - 200 m depending on system * 7.0 m/l for 100 m, 3.5 m/l for 200 m 2 hours * min. see tables * max. see tables * 7 days * (data for components) at least 12 months
page 1/5
SIGMAPRIME 700
April 2011
for immersion exposure: steel or steel with not approved zinc silicate shop primer; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 30 - 75 m steel with approved zinc silicate shop primer; weld seams and areas of damaged shop primer or breakdown should be blast cleaned to ISOSa2, blasting prole 30 - 75 m or power tool cleaned to SPSS-Pt3 coated steel; hydrojetted to VIS WJ2 L (blasting prole 30 - 75 m) IMO-MSC.215(82) Requirements for Water Ballast Tanks: steel; ISO 8501-3:2006 grade P2, with all edges treated to a rounded radius of minimum 2 mm or subject to three pass grinding or at least equivalent process before painting steel or steel with not approved zinc silicate shop primer; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 30 - 75 m steel with approved zinc silicate shop primer; weld seams and areas of damaged shop primer or breakdown should be blast cleaned to ISOSa2, blasting prole 30 - 75 m for shop primer with IMO type approval; no additional requirements for shop primer without IMO type approval; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2 removing at least 70% of intact shop primer, blasting prole 30 - 75 m dust quantity rating "1" for dust size class "3", "4" or "5", lower dust size classes to be removed if visible on the surface to be coated without magnication (ISO 8502-3:1992) for atmospheric exposure conditions: steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 30 - 75 m or according to ISO-St3 shop primed steel; pretreated to SPSS-Pt3 galvanised steel; cleaned from grease, salts, contamination and roughened up previous coat; (e.g. SigmaPrime 700) dry and free from any contamination substrate temperature should be above 5C and at least 3C above dew point during application and curing maximum relative humidity during application and curing is 85% marine system sheets: 3101, 3102, 3103, 3104, 3105, 3106 (spec. 1), 3107, 3108

page 2/5
SIGMAPRIME 700
April 2011
Thinner 91-92 0 - 15%, depending on required thickness and application conditions approx. 0.53 - 0.74 mm (= 0.021 - 0.029 in) 15 MPa (= approx. 150 bar; 2130 p.s.i.) Thinner 91-92 0 - 10%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 1.5 - 2 mm 0.3 - 0.4 MPa (= approx. 3 - 4 bar; 43 - 57 p.s.i.) no extra thinner is necessary, but up to 5% Thinner 91-92 can be added if desired Thinner 90-53 for paint and recommended thinners see safety sheets 1430, 1431 and relevant material safety data sheets this is a solvent borne paint and care should be taken to avoid inhalation of spray mist or vapour as well as contact between the wet paint and exposed skin or eyes
ADDITIONAL DATA
Film thickness and spreading rate theoretical spreading rate m/l dft in m 7.0 100 5.6 125 4.4 160 3.5 200
max. dft: Dry Film Thickness of 2000 m may occur occasionally (minor areas) where multiple overlapping is unavoidable (i.e. around scallops, corners, erection joint lines etc.). PPG must be consulted in case of DFT readings fall outside this recommendation.
page 3/5
SIGMAPRIME 700
April 2011
Overcoating table for SigmaPrime 700 for dft up to 160 m with various two pack epoxy coatings substrate temperature minimum interval maximum interval when not exposed to direct sunshine maximum interval when exposed to direct sunshine 5C 15 hours 6 months 10C 9 hours 6 months 20C 4 hours 6 months 30C 2.5 hours 4 months 40C 1.5 hour 3 months
3 months
3 months
2 months
2 months
2 months
surface should be dry and free from any contamination Curing table for dft up to 160 m substrate temperature 5C 10C 15C 20C 30C touch dry 6 hours 4 hours 3 hours 2 hours 1 hour dry to handle 18 hours 12 hours 9 hours 6 hours 3 hours full cure 21 days 14 days 7 days 5 days 5 days
page 4/5
SIGMAPRIME 700
April 2011
REFERENCES
Explanation to product data sheets see information sheet 1411 Safety indications see information sheet 1430 Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard see information sheet 1431 Safe working in conned spaces see information sheet 1433 Directives for ventilation practice see information sheet 1434 Cleaning of steel and removal of rust see information sheet 1490 PPG Protective & Marine Coatings Ballast Tank Working Procedure New Building
245825 245824 321760 267442 267441 269714
PDS redbrown grey green redbrown grey yellow/green
7930 2008002150 (245345 base, 245346 hardener) 9515052150 (245344 base, 245346 hardener) 4000002150 (321758 base, 245346 hardener ) 2008002200 (267439 base, 267440 hardener) 5000002200 (267438 base, 267440 hardener) 4009002200 (321758 base, 267440 hardener)
page 5/5
SIGMAPRIME 800
4 pages October 2009 Revision of May 2009
DESCRIPTION
two component high solids polyamine adduct cured pure epoxy coating universal epoxy system suitable for all vessel areas excellent anticorrosive properties and water resistance good abrasion and chemical resistance excellent crack resistance suitable for use on a wide range of substrates suitable for application and curing in a wide range of climatic conditions user friendly tting shipyard block stage practices suitable for bulk supply and twin feed application
grey, green - gloss (1 g/cm = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.3 g/cm 80 2% max. 181 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 257 g/l (approx. 2.1 lb/gal) 100 - 250 m depending on system * 8.0 m/l for 100 m, 3.2 m/l for 250 m 6 hours min. 5 hours * max. 14 days * (data for components)
at least 12 months
for immersion exposure: steel or steel with not approved zinc silicate shop primer; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 30 - 75 m steel with approved zinc silicate shop primer; weld seams and areas of damaged shop primer or breakdown should be blast cleaned to ISOSa2, blasting prole 30 - 75 m or power tool cleaned to SPSS-Pt3 IMO-MSC.215(82) Requirements for Water Ballast Tanks: steel; ISO 8501-3:2006 grade P2, with all edges treated to a rounded radius of minimum 2 mm or subject to three pass grinding steel or steel with not approved zinc silicate shop primer; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 30 - 75 m steel with approved zinc silicate shop primer; weld seams and areas of damaged shop primer or breakdown should be blast cleaned to ISOSa2, blasting prole 30 - 75 m for shop primer with IMO type approval; no additional requirements
page 1/4
SIGMAPRIME 800
October 2009
for shop primer without IMO type approval; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2 removing at least 70% of intact shop primer, blasting prole 30 - 75 m dust quantity rating "1" for dust size class "3", "4" or "5", lower dust size classes to be removed if visible on the surface to be coated without magnication (ISO 8502-3:1992) for atmospheric exposure conditions: steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 30 - 75 m or according to ISO-St3 shop primed steel; pretreated to SPSS-Pt3 galvanised steel; cleaned from grease, salts, contamination and roughened up previous coat; (e.g. SigmaPrime 800) dry and free from any contamination substrate temperature should be above 5C and at least 3C above dew point during application and curing maximum relative humidity during application and curing is 85% system sheet: 3106 (spec. 3)
marine mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 75 : 25
the temperature of the mixed base and hardener should preferably be above 10C, otherwise extra solvent may be required to obtain application viscosity too much solvent results in reduced sag resistance thinner should be added after mixing the components see also attached application instructions Pot life 2 hours at 20C *
AIRLESS SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure AIR SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure BRUSH/ROLLER Recommended thinner Volume of thinner CLEANING SOLVENT
Thinner 91-92 0 - 5% Thinner 90-53
page 2/4
SIGMAPRIME 800
October 2009
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
ADDITIONAL DATA
max. dft: Dry Film Thickness of 2000 m may occur occasionally (minor areas) where multiple overlapping is unavoidable (i.e. around scallops, corners, erection joint lines etc.). PPG must be consulted in case of DFT readings fall outside this recommendation. Overcoating table for SigmaPrime 800 for dft up to 160 m with itself substrate temperature minimum interval maximum interval 5C 14 hours 28 days 10C 11 hours 21 days 20C 5 hours 14 days 30C 2.5 hours 7 days
surface should be dry and free from any contamination Curing table for dft up to 160 m substrate temperature 5C 10C 20C 30C 40C touch dry 20 hours 14 hours 6 hours 4 hours 2 hours dry to handle 30 hours 20 hours 9 hours 5 hours 3 hours full cure 25 days 15 days 7 days 4 days 2 days
page 3/4
SIGMAPRIME 800
October 2009
Pot life (at application viscosity) 15C 20C 30C Worldwide availability 3 hours 2 hours 1 hour
REFERENCES
271141 271143 272740 272741
PDS green green grey grey
7938 4009002150 (271140 base, 271152 hardener) 4009002700 (271142 base, 271153 hardener) 9515052150 (272736 base, 271152 hardener) 9515052700 (272737 base, 271153 hardener)
page 4/4
SIGMARINE 24
3 pages July 2009 Revision of May 2008
DESCRIPTION
modied zinc phosphate alkyd primer
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS economic general purpose maintenance and newbuilding primer suitable for use on superstructures and on steel surfaces not normally exposed to water immersion the adhesion of subsequent coats is not affected by long weathering periods of the primer should not be used over zinc primers, except when exposed to dry interior conditions to be recoated with conventional paint systems a thickness of 75 m can be obtained by spray application in one operation by means of the crosscoat technique certicate for low ame spread: see sheet 1883 COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20C Mass density Volume solids VOC (supplied) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Shelf life (cool and dry place) RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES yellow, brown (offwhite only on request) - at (1 g/cm = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) 1.4 g/cm 56 2% max. 245 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 343 g/l (approx. 2.9 lb/gal) 35 - 75 m per coat 16 m/l for 35 m; 7.5 m/l for 75 m 3 hours at 5C, 2 hours at 20C min. 48 hours at 5C, 24 hours at 20C max. unlimited at least 12 months steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 40 - 70 m steel; power tool cleaned to min. ISO-St2 shop primed steel; sweep blasted or power tool cleaned to SPSS-Ss or SPSS-Pt2 previous coat; dry and free from any contamination substrate temperature should be at least 3C above dew point but not above 50C marine system sheets: 3102, 3103, 3104, 3105, 3107
stir well before use the temperature of the paint should preferably be above 15C, otherwise extra thinner may be required to obtain application viscosity too much solvent results in reduced sag resistance adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434)
page 1/3
SIGMARINE 24
July 2009
AIRLESS SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure BRUSH/ROLLER Recommended thinner Volume of thinner CLEANING SOLVENT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
REFERENCES
page 2/3
SIGMARINE 24
July 2009
136774 136775
PDS brown yellow
7135 2000002200 3000002200
page 3/3
SIGMARINE 35
2 pages June 2009 Revision of September 2005
DESCRIPTION
micaceous iron oxide (mio) alkyd topcoat
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS excellent resistance to atmospheric industrial exposure conditions high UV resistance mio effect COLOURS AND GLOSS according to the Micaceous Iron Oxide Colour card of PPG Protective & Marine Coatings - at (1 g/cm = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) 1.5 g/cm 51 2% max. 254 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 391 g/l (approx. 3.3 lb/gal) 50 - 75 m 10.2 m/l for 50 m, 6.8 m/l for 75 m 1 hour min. 16 hours max. unlimited at least 12 months suitable primer; (e.g. Sigmarine 24) dry and free from any contamination previous suitable coat; dry and free from any contamination and sufciently roughened if necessary substrate temperature should be at least 3C above dew point but not above 50C stir well before use the temperature of the paint should preferably be above 15C, otherwise extra thinner may be required to obtain application viscosity too much solvent results in reduced sag resistance adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434)
BASIC DATA AT 20C Mass density Volume solids VOC (supplied) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Shelf life (cool and dry place) RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES
Thinner 20-05 0 - 5%, depending on required thickness and application conditions approx. 0.46 mm (= 0.018 in) 12 - 15 MPa (= approx. 120 - 150 bar; 1700 - 2130 p.s.i.)
page 1/2
SIGMARINE 35
June 2009
BRUSH/ROLLER Recommended thinner Volume of thinner CLEANING SOLVENT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
REFERENCES
PDS 7244 various SAP codes
page 2/2
SIGMARINE 40
3 pages July 2009 Revision of April 2007
DESCRIPTION
alkyd undercoating suitable in alkyd paint systems recoatable with various one component products especially formulated for maintenance work by brush or roller good adhesion to anticorrosive primers and old paint systems easy application by brush with excellent ow, giving a smooth eggshell appearance good drying properties even at low temperatures white (other colours on request) - eggshell (1 g/cm = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) 1.2 g/cm 45 2% max. 339 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 412 g/l (approx. 3.4 lb/gal) 35 m 12.9 m/l for 35 m 6 hours at 10C, 2 hours at 20C min. 24 hours at 10C, 16 hours at 20C max. unlimited at least 12 months suitable primer; (e.g. Sigmarine 24) dry and free from any contamination previous suitable coat; dry and free from any contamination and sufciently roughened if necessary not suitable for zinc primed steel substrate temperature should be at least 3C above dew point but not above 50C marine system sheets: 3104, 3105
COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20C Mass density Volume solids VOC (supplied) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Shelf life (cool and dry place) RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES
page 1/3
SIGMARINE 40
July 2009
Thinner 20-05 15 - 20%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 1.8 - 2 mm 0.35 MPa (= approx. 3.5 bar; 50 p.s.i.)
REFERENCES
page 2/3
SIGMARINE 40
July 2009
136707
PDS white
7213 7000002200
page 3/3
SIGMARINE 41
2 pages July 2009 Revision of September 2005
DESCRIPTION
semi gloss nish based on alkyd resin for interior and exterior use good weather resistance high opacity good colour retention can be applied over most intact alkyd paints easy application by brush with excellent ow
white (other (RAL) colours on request) - semigloss (1 g/cm = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) 1.2 g/cm 56 2% max. 248 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 303 g/l (approx. 2.5 lb/gal) 35 m 16 m/l for 35 m 6 hours min. 18 hours max. unlimited at least 24 months previous suitable coat; (e.g. Sigmarine 40) dry and free from any contamination and sufciently roughened if necessary substrate temperature should be at least 3C above dew point but not above 50C stir well before use the temperature of the paint should preferably be above 15C, otherwise extra thinner may be required to obtain application viscosity too much solvent results in reduced sag resistance adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434)
Thinner 20-05 10 - 15%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 1.5 mm 0.2 - 0.3 MPa (= approx. 2 - 3 bar; 28 - 43 p.s.i.)
page 1/2
SIGMARINE 41
July 2009
BRUSH/ROLLER Recommended thinner Volume of thinner CLEANING SOLVENT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
REFERENCES
103393
PDS white
7256 7000002200
page 2/2
SIGMARINE 48
DESCRIPTION
general purpose gloss paint based on a modied alkyd resin
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS particularly suitable as a nish for boottop, topside, deck and deckequipment a quick drying, hard, tough, water- and weather resistant coating with moderate gloss retention can be applied over most intact alkyd paints this coating is particularly suitable for areas intermittently exposed to waterimmersion and atmospheric conditions also available with non-skid material (supplied separately) for use on deck surfaces certicate for low ame spread: see sheet 1883 COLOURS AND GLOSS white and various other colours (see also the SigmaCare Shade Card of PPG Protective & Marine Coatings) - gloss (1 g/cm = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) 1.2 g/cm 45 - 49 2% (colours) - 48 2% (white) max. 345 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 402 g/l (approx. 3.4 lb/gal) 35 m per coat 12.8 - 14.0 m/l (colours) - 13.7 m/l (white) for 35 m 1 hour at 20C, 3 hours at 5C min. 16 hours at 20C, 24 hours at 5C max. unlimited at least 24 months previous suitable coat; dry and free from any contamination and sufciently roughened if necessary substrate temperature should be at least 3C above dew point but not above 50C systems for boottop and topside systems for superstructure and deck tting system sheet: 3102 system sheet: 3104
BASIC DATA AT 20C Mass density Volume solids VOC (supplied) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Shelf life (cool and dry place) RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES
page 1/3
SIGMARINE 48
July 2009
Thinner 20-05 10 - 15%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 2 - 3 mm 0.3 - 0.4 MPa (= approx. 3 - 4 bar; 43 - 57 p.s.i.)
REFERENCES
page 2/3
SIGMARINE 48
July 2009
136828
PDS white
7238 7000002200
page 3/3
SIGMARINE 49
DESCRIPTION
high gloss alkyd nishing coat suitable for interior and exterior use easy application by brush with excellent ow good weather resistance high opacity good colour retention gas proof: no discolouration with sulphur dioxide not suitable for immersion in water or continuous splash of water can be applied over most intact alkyd paints certicate for low ame spread: see sheet 1883
white (other colours on request) - gloss (1 g/cm = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) 0.9 - 1.2 g/cm (colours) - 1.1 g/cm (white) 50 - 55 2% (colours) - 50 2% (white) max. 360 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) (white) max. 407 g/l (approx. 3.4 lb/gal) (white) 35 m per coat 14.3 - 15.7 m/l (colours) - 14.3 m/l (white) for 35 m 3 hours min. 16 hours max. unlimited at least 24 months previous suitable coat; (e.g. Sigmarine 40, Sigmarine 24) dry and free from any contamination and sufciently roughened if necessary substrate temperature should be at least 3C above dew point but not above 50C marine system sheets: 3104, 3105
page 1/3
SIGMARINE 49
July 2009
REFERENCES
page 2/3
SIGMARINE 49
July 2009
136845
PDS white
7240 7000002200
page 3/3
SIGMASHIELD 220
4 pages October 2009 Revision of January 2008
DESCRIPTION
two component reinforced high solids polyamine adduct cured epoxy primer general purpose primer for coating systems for steel good abrasion resistance outstanding sea water resistance excellent corrosion resistance good resistance against chemically polluted water resistant to well designed/controlled cathodic protection
yellow/green - gloss (1 g/cm = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.5 g/cm 78 2% max. 176 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 262 g/l (approx. 2.2 lb/gal) 125 m 6.2 m/l for 125 m * 4 hours min. 3.5 hours * max. 14 days * 5 days * (data for components) at least 12 months
for immersion exposure: steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 40 - 70 m steel with approved zinc silicate shop primer; sweep blasted to SPSS-Ss or power tool cleaned to SPSS-Pt3 for atmospheric exposure conditions: steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2 or ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 40 - 70 m steel; hydrojetted to VIS WJ2/3 L steel with approved shop primer; power tool cleaned to SPSS-Pt2 maximum relative humidity during application and curing is 85% substrate temperature should be at least 5C and at least 3C above dew point during application and curing marine system sheets: 3101, 3102, 3103, 3107
page 1/4
SIGMASHIELD 220
October 2009
Induction time Pot life AIRLESS SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure AIR SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure BRUSH Recommended thinner Volume of thinner CLEANING SOLVENT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

Thinner 91-92 0 - 10%, depending on required thickness and application conditions approx. 0.53 - 0.68 mm (= 0.021 - 0.027 in) 15 MPa (= approx. 150 bar; 2130 p.s.i.) Thinner 91-92 5 - 10%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 1.5 - 3 mm 0.2 - 0.4 MPa (= approx. 2 - 4 bar; 28 - 57 p.s.i.) only for touch up and spot repair Thinner 91-92 0 - 5% Thinner 90-53 for paint and recommended thinners see safety sheets 1430, 1431 and relevant material safety data sheets this is a solvent borne paint and care should be taken to avoid inhalation of spray mist or vapour as well as contact between the wet paint and exposed skin or eyes
ADDITIONAL DATA
page 2/4
SIGMASHIELD 220
October 2009
Overcoating table for SigmaShield 220 for dft up to 150 m substrate temperature with epoxy coatings with polyurethanes minimum interval minimum interval maximum interval 5C 14 hours 22 hours 28 days 10C 7 hours 14 hours 28 days 20C 3.5 hours 10 hours 14 days 30C 2 hours 6 hours 7 days 40C 1.5 hour 4 hours 4 days
surface should be dry and free from any contamination adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) Curing table for dft up to 150 m substrate temperature 5C 10C 20C 30C 40C dry to handle full cure for immersion in sea water 10 days 7 days 5 days 4 days 3 days full cure *
14 hours 7 hours 3.5 hours 2 hours 1.5 hour
adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) Pot life (at application viscosity) 10C 20C 30C Worldwide availability 3 hours 2 hours 1 hour
page 3/4
SIGMASHIELD 220
October 2009
REFERENCES
192274
PDS yellow/green
7922 4009002200
page 4/4
SIGMASHIELD 220 LT
DESCRIPTION
two component reinforced high solids polyamine adduct cured epoxy primer general purpose primer for coating systems for steel cures at temperatures down to -10C good abrasion resistance outstanding sea water resistance excellent corrosion resistance good resistance against chemically polluted water resistant to well designed/controlled cathodic protection
yellow/green - gloss (1 g/cm = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.5 g/cm 78 2% max. 161 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 240 g/l (approx. 2.0 lb/gal) 100 - 125 m 7.8 m/l for 100 m, 6.2 m/l for 125 m * 4 hours min. 10 hours * max. 14 days * 7 days * (data for components)
at least 12 months
for immersion exposure: steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 40 - 70 m steel with approved zinc silicate shop primer; sweep blasted to SPSS-Ss or power tool cleaned to SPSS-Pt3 for atmospheric exposure conditions: steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2 or ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 40 - 70 m steel with approved shop primer; power tool cleaned to SPSS-Pt2 substrate temperature should be between -10C up to 15C during application and curing and at least 3C above dew point and free from ice and any contamination during application and curing a substrate temperature down to -10C is possible, but curing to hardness takes longer and complete resistance will be reached when temperature increases maximum relative humidity during application and curing is 85% marine system sheets: 3101, 3102, 3103, 3107
page 1/4
SIGMASHIELD 220 LT
October 2009

AIRLESS SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure AIR SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure BRUSH Recommended thinner Volume of thinner CLEANING SOLVENT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Thinner 91-92 5 - 10%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 1.5 - 3 mm 0.2 - 0.4 MPa (= approx. 2 - 4 bar; 28 - 57 p.s.i.) only for touch up and spot repair Thinner 91-92 0 - 5% Thinner 90-53 for paint and recommended thinners see safety sheets 1430, 1431 and relevant material safety data sheets this is a solvent borne paint and care should be taken to avoid inhalation of spray mist or vapour as well as contact between the wet paint and exposed skin or eyes
ADDITIONAL DATA
page 2/4
SIGMASHIELD 220 LT
October 2009
Overcoating table for SigmaShield 220 LT for dft up to 150 m substrate temperature with epoxy coatings with polyurethanes minimum interval minimum interval maximum interval -10C 36 hours 72 hours 28 days 0C 22 hours 48 hours 28 days 5C 16 hours 36 hours 28 days 10C 10 hours 24 hours 14 days 15C 7 hours 16 hours 10 days
surface should be dry and free from any contamination adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) Curing table for dft up to 150 m substrate temperature -10C 0C 5C 10C 15C dry to handle full cure for immersion in sea water 18 days 10 days 7 days 5 days 4 days full cure
30 hours 15 hours 12 hours 6 hours 4 hours
-28 days 14 days 7 days 5 days
adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) Pot life (at application viscosity) 5C 10C Worldwide availability 2 hours 1 hour
page 3/4
SIGMASHIELD 220 LT
October 2009
REFERENCES
202660
PDS yellow/green
7926 4009002200
page 4/4
SIGMASHIELD 420
4 pages February 2011 Revision of October 2009
DESCRIPTION
two component reinforced high solids polyamine adduct cured epoxy coating coating for cargo tanks of bulk- or oil carriers and storage tanks build coat for underwater- and boottop systems excellent abrasion and impact resistance outstanding (sea)water resistance easy to clean
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20C Mass density Volume solids VOC (supplied) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Full cure after Shelf life (cool and dry place) RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES SYSTEM SPECIFICATION INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE
grey, redbrown (other colours on request) - gloss (1 g/cm = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.6 g/cm 81 2% max. 153 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 239 g/l (approx. 2.0 lb/gal) 125 - 200 m depending on system 5.4 m/l for 150 m, 4.1 m/l for 200 m * 3 hours min. 10 hours * max. 14 days * 5 days * (data for components) at least 12 months
previous coat; (e.g. SigmaCover 280 or SigmaShield 220) dry and free from any contamination substrate temperature should be at least 5C and at least 3C above dew point during application and curing marine system sheets: 3101, 3102, 3103, 3107
none 1.5 hour at 20C *

page 1/4
SIGMASHIELD 420
February 2011
Thinner 91-92 0 - 5% for 200 m dft, 10% for 100 m dft approx. 0.53 - 0.68 mm (= 0.021 - 0.027 in) 15 MPa (= approx. 150 bar; 2130 p.s.i.) Thinner 91-92 5 - 10%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 1.7 - 2 mm 0.3 - 0.4 MPa (= approx. 3 - 4 bar; 43 - 57 p.s.i.) Thinner 91-92 0 - 5% Thinner 90-53 for paint and recommended thinners see safety sheets 1430, 1431 and relevant material safety data sheets this is a solvent borne paint and care should be taken to avoid inhalation of spray mist or vapour as well as contact between the wet paint and exposed skin or eyes
ADDITIONAL DATA
Film thickness and spreading rate theoretical spreading rate m/l dft in m max. dft when brushing: Overcoating table for SigmaShield 420 for dft up to 150 m substrate temperature 5C 14 hours 22 hours 28 days 10C 7 hours 14 hours 28 days 20C 3.5 hours 10 hours 14 days 30C 2 hours 6 hours 7 days 40C 1.5 hour 4 hours 4 days 8.1 100 5.4 150 4.6 175 4.1 200 75 m
with epoxy coatings with polyurethanes
minimum interval minimum interval maximum interval
surface should be dry and free from chalking and contamination
page 2/4
SIGMASHIELD 420
February 2011
Curing table for dft up to 150 m substrate temperature 5C 10C 20C 30C 40C dry to handle full cure for immersion in sea water 10 days 7 days 5 days 4 days 3 days full cure
15 hours 8 hours 3.5 hours 2 hours 1.5 hour
for cargo hold application: for full cure for hard angular cargoes, please contact your nearest PPG Protective & Marine Coatings sales ofce adequate ventilation to remove solvent must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) should SigmaShield 420 or the total coating system (2 x 125 m) be applied in excess of the specied dry lm thickness, then the time necessary to reach full cure will be increased Pot life (at application viscosity) 10C 20C 30C Worldwide availability 3 hours 1.5 hour 45 min.
REFERENCES
page 3/4
SIGMASHIELD 420
February 2011
190960 192367
PDS grey redbrown
7951 5177052200 6179052200
page 4/4
SIGMASHIELD 420 LT
DESCRIPTION
two component reinforced high solids polyamine adduct cured epoxy coating coating for cargo tanks of bulk- or oil carriers and storage tanks build coat for underwater- and boottop systems cures at temperatures down to -10C excellent abrasion and impact resistance outstanding (sea)water resistance easy to clean
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 10C Mass density Volume solids VOC (supplied) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Overcoating interval Full cure after Shelf life (cool and dry place) RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES
grey, redbrown (other colours on request) - gloss (1 g/cm = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.6 g/cm 81 2% max. 123 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 191 g/l (approx. 1.6 lb/gal) 125 - 200 m depending on system 5.4 m/l for 150 m, 4.1 m/l for 200 m * min. 10 hours * max. 14 days * 7 days * (data for components) at least 12 months
previous coat; (e.g. SigmaCover 280 (LT) or SigmaShield 220 (LT)) dry and free from ice and any contamination substrate temperature should be between -10C up to 15C during application and curing and at least 3C above dew point and free from ice and any contamination during application and curing a substrate temperature down to -10C is possible, but curing to hardness takes longer and complete resistance will be reached when temperature increases maximum relative humidity during application and curing is 85%
page 1/4
SIGMASHIELD 420 LT
February 2011
marine
system sheets: 3101, 3102, 3103, 3107

Thinner 91-92 0 - 5% for 200 m dft, 10% for 100 m dft approx. 0.53 - 0.68 mm (= 0.021 - 0.027 in) 15 MPa (= approx. 150 bar; 2130 p.s.i.) Thinner 91-92 5 - 10%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 1.7 - 2 mm 0.3 - 0.4 MPa (= approx. 3 - 4 bar; 43 - 57 p.s.i.) Thinner 91-92 0 - 5% Thinner 90-53 for paint and recommended thinners see safety sheets 1430, 1431 and relevant material safety data sheets this is a solvent borne paint and care should be taken to avoid inhalation of spray mist or vapour as well as contact between the wet paint and exposed skin or eyes
ADDITIONAL DATA
Film thickness and spreading rate theoretical spreading rate m/l dft in m max. dft when brushing: 8.1 100 5.4 150 4.6 175 4.1 200 75 m
page 2/4
SIGMASHIELD 420 LT
February 2011
Overcoating table for SigmaShield 420 LT for dft up to 150 m substrate temperature with epoxy coatings with polyurethanes minimum interval minimum interval maximum interval -10C 48 hours 72 hours 28 days 0C 24 hours 48 hours 28 days 5C 10 hours 36 hours 28 days 10C 5 hours 24 hours 14 days 15C 4 hours 16 hours 10 days
surface should be dry and free from chalking and contamination Curing table for dft up to 150 m substrate temperature -10C 0C 5C 10C 15C dry to handle full cure for immersion in sea water 18 days 10 days 7 days 5 days 4 days full cure
-28 days 14 days 7 days 5 days
for cargo hold application: for full cure for hard angular cargoes, please contact your nearest PPG Protective & Marine Coatings sales ofce adequate ventilation to remove solvent must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) should SigmaShield 420 LT or the total coating system be applied in excess of the specied dry lm thickness, then the time necessary to reach full cure will be increased Pot life (at application viscosity) 5C 10C Worldwide availability 2 hours 1 hour
page 3/4
SIGMASHIELD 420 LT
February 2011
REFERENCES
202661 202662 202659
PDS grey grey redbrown
7955 5177052200 5163052200 6179052200
page 4/4
SIGMASHIELD 460
4 pages October 2009 Revision of November 2007
DESCRIPTION
two component high solids glassake reinforced polyamine adduct epoxy coating excellent abrasion and impact resistance suitable for use on ice-going vessels excellent resistance to corrosion long term protection at areas subject to heavy wear and tear resistant to splash and spillage of a wide range of chemicals very low water permeability, due to glassake barrier
black (other (light) colours on request) - gloss (1 g/cm = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.5 g/cm 81 2% max. 165 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 246 g/l (approx. 2.0 lb/gal) 250 - 400 m depending on system 3.2 m/l for 250 m, 2.0 m/l for 400 m * 3 hours min. 16 hours * max. 28 days * 5 days * (data for components)
at least 12 months
steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 40 - 70 m suitable primer; (e.g. SigmaShield 220 (LT), SigmaCover 280 (LT)) dry and free from any contamination substrate temperature should be at least 5C and at least 3C above dew point during application and curing marine system sheets: 3101, 3102
page 1/4
SIGMASHIELD 460
October 2009
mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 75 : 25 the temperature of the mixed base and hardener should preferably be above 15C, otherwise extra solvent may be required to obtain application viscosity too much solvent results in reduced sag resistance and slower cure very good mechanical mixing of base and hardener is essential thinner should be added after mixing the components lters should be removed from spray equipment
none 1.5 hour at 20C *

AIRLESS SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure AIR SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure BRUSH
Thinner 91-92 0 - 5% for dft of about 400 m approx. 0.53 - 0.79 mm (= 0.021 - 0.031 in) 19 - 22.5 MPa (= approx. 190 - 225 bar; 2700 - 3200 p.s.i.)
Thinner 91-92 5 - 10%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 1.5 - 2 mm 0.3 - 0.4 MPa (= approx. 3 - 4 bar; 43 - 57 p.s.i.) only for touch up and spot repair due to thixotropy it is difcult to obtain a smooth lm by brush although this does not affect performance Thinner 90-53 for paint and recommended thinners see safety sheets 1430, 1431 and relevant material safety data sheets this is a solvent borne paint and care should be taken to avoid inhalation of spray mist or vapour as well as contact between the wet paint and exposed skin or eyes
ADDITIONAL DATA
maximum recommended dft for complex structures is 250 m
max. dft when brushing:
80 m
page 2/4
SIGMASHIELD 460
October 2009
Overcoating table for SigmaShield 460 for dft up to 400 m substrate temperature minimum interval maximum interval 5C 48 hours 28 days 10C 32 hours 28 days 20C 16 hours 28 days 30C 12 hours 14 days 40C 8 hours 7 days
surface should be dry and free from chalking and contamination Curing table for dft up to 400 m substrate temperature 5C 10C 20C 30C 40C touch dry dry to handle full cure for immersion in sea water 14 days 10 days 5 days 4 days 3 days
16 hours 8 hours 3 hours 2 hours 1 hour
adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) Pot life (at application viscosity) 10C 20C 30C Worldwide availability 3 hours 1.5 hour 45 min.
REFERENCES
page 3/4
SIGMASHIELD 460
October 2009
191640
PDS black
7952 8000002200
page 4/4
SIGMASHIELD 460 LT
4 pages October 2009 Revision of December 2008
DESCRIPTION
two component high solids glassake reinforced polyamine adduct epoxy coating excellent abrasion and impact resistance cures at temperatures down to -10C long term protection at areas subject to heavy wear and tear excellent resistance to corrosion suitable for use on ice-going vessels very low water permeability, due to glassake barrier resistant to splash and spillage of a wide range of chemicals
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 10C Mass density Volume solids VOC (supplied) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Overcoating interval Full cure after
black (other (light) colours on request) - gloss (1 g/cm = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.5 g/cm 81 2% max. 150 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 224 g/l (approx. 1.9 lb/gal) 250 - 400 m depending on system 3.2 m/l for 250 m, 2.0 m/l for 400 m * min. 16 hours * max. 14 days * 7 days * (data for components)
at least 12 months
steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 40 - 70 m suitable primer; (e.g. SigmaShield 220 (LT), SigmaCover 280 (LT)) dry and free from any contamination substrate temperature should be between -10C up to 15C during application and curing and at least 3C above dew point and free from ice and any contamination during application and curing a substrate temperature down to -10C is possible, but curing to hardness takes longer and complete resistance will be reached when temperature increases maximum relative humidity during application and curing is 85% marine system sheets: 3101, 3102
page 1/4
SIGMASHIELD 460 LT
October 2009

AIRLESS SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure AIR SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure BRUSH/ROLLER
Thinner 91-92 5 - 10%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 1.5 - 2 mm 0.3 - 0.4 MPa (= approx. 3 - 4 bar; 43 - 57 p.s.i.) only for touch up and repair due to thixotropy it is difcult to obtain a smooth lm by brush although this does not affect performance Thinner 90-53 for paint and recommended thinners see safety sheets 1430, 1431 and relevant material safety data sheets this is a solvent borne paint and care should be taken to avoid inhalation of spray mist or vapour as well as contact between the wet paint and exposed skin or eyes
ADDITIONAL DATA
page 2/4
SIGMASHIELD 460 LT
October 2009
Overcoating table for SigmaShield 460 LT for dft up to 400 m substrate temperature minimum interval maximum interval -10C 72 hours 28 days 0C 36 hours 28 days 5C 28 hours 28 days 10C 16 hours 14 days 15C 12 hours 7 days
surface should be dry and free from chalking and contamination Curing table for dft up to 400 m substrate temperature dry to handle full cure for immersion in sea water -18 days 10 days 7 days 5 days
-10C 0C 5C 10C 15C
REFERENCES
page 3/4
SIGMASHIELD 460 LT
October 2009
220252
PDS black
7972 8000002200
page 4/4
SIGMASHIELD 825
(AMERLOCK 400 GFA)
DESCRIPTION
two component high solids glassake reinforced polyamine cured epoxy coating excellent abrasion and impact resistance high glassake level excellent resistance to corrosion long term protection at areas subject to heavy wear and tear very low water permeability, due to glassake barrier tar free resistant to splash and spillage of a wide range of chemicals application and curing at temperatures down to 10C suitable for immersion service compatible with cathodic protection systems up to 750 m in a single coat
black (other (light) colours on request) - gloss (1 g/cm = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.5 g/cm 91 2% max. 103 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 154 g/l (approx. 1.3 lb/gal) 200 - 750 m depending on system 4.6 m/l for 200 m * 6 hours * min. 24 hours * max. 3 months * 8 days (data for components)
at least 12 months
steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 50 - 100 m primed steel; (e.g. SigmaCover 280) dry and free from any contamination substrate temperature should be at least 5C and at least 3C above dew point during application and curing
page 1/4
SIGMASHIELD 825
(AMERLOCK 400 GFA)
October 2009
Pot life
2 hours at 20C *
ADDITIONAL DATA
page 2/4
SIGMASHIELD 825
(AMERLOCK 400 GFA)
October 2009
Overcoating table for SigmaShield 825 for dft up to 300 m substrate temperature with itself with polyurethane durable nishes minimum interval minimum interval maximum interval 10C 48 hours 72 hours 3 months 15C 32 hours 48 hours 3 months 20C 24 hours 36 hours 3 months 30C 12 hours 18 hours 2 months
surface should be dry and free from any contamination adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) Curing table for dft up to 300 m substrate temperature 10C 20C 30C touch dry 24 hours 6 hours 4 hours dry through 48 hours 24 hours 6 hours full cure 16 days 8 days 5 days
adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) Pot life (at application viscosity) 10C 20C 30C Worldwide availability 3 hours 2 hours 1 hour
REFERENCES
page 3/4
SIGMASHIELD 825
(AMERLOCK 400 GFA)
October 2009
242373
PDS black
7745 8000002200
page 4/4
SIGMASHIELD 825 LT
(AMERLOCK 2 GFA)
4 pages October 2009
DESCRIPTION
two component high solids glassake reinforced polyamine cured epoxy coating low temperature curing down to 0C excellent abrasion and impact resistance high glassake level excellent resistance to corrosion long term protection at areas subject to heavy wear and tear very low water permeability, due to glassake barrier tar free resistant to splash and spillage of a wide range of chemicals suitable for immersion service compatible with cathodic protection systems up to 750 m in a single coat
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 10C Mass density Volume solids VOC (supplied) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Overcoating interval Full cure after
black (other (light) colours on request) - gloss (1 g/cm = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.5 g/cm 91 2% max. 103 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 154 g/l (approx. 1.3 lb/gal) 200 - 750 m depending on system 4.6 m/l for 200 m * min. 16 hours * max. 3 months * 16 days (data for components)
at least 12 months
steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 50 - 100 m primed steel; (e.g. SigmaCover 280) dry and free from any contamination substrate temperature should be at least 5C and at least 3C above dew point during application and curing
page 1/4
SIGMASHIELD 825 LT
(AMERLOCK 2 GFA)
October 2009
Pot life
1 hour at 20C *
ADDITIONAL DATA
page 2/4
SIGMASHIELD 825 LT
(AMERLOCK 2 GFA)
October 2009
Overcoating table for SigmaShield 825 LT for dft up to 300 m substrate temperature with itself with polyurethane durable nishes minimum interval minimum interval maximum interval 10C 16 hours 24 hours 3 months 20C 8 hours 12 hours 3 months 30C 5 hours 8 hours 2 months
surface should be dry and free from any contamination adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) Curing table for dft up to 300 m substrate temperature 10C 20C 30C dry through 24 hours 8 hours 5 hours full cure 16 days 8 days 5 days
REFERENCES
page 3/4
SIGMASHIELD 825 LT
(AMERLOCK 2 GFA)
October 2009
PDS
7749
page 4/4
SIGMASHIELD 880
4 pages July 2011 Revision of June 2011
DESCRIPTION
two component high build polyamine adduct cured epoxy coating primarily designed for use in offshore splashzone maintenance outstanding sea water resistance excellent corrosion resistance good abrasion resistance continues to cure when immersed in water long term protection in a single coat application resistant to well designed cathodic protection suitable on wet blast or ultra high pressure water (UHPWW) cleaned substrates (damp or dry)
yellow, black (other colours on request) - gloss (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.45 g/cm 85 2% max. 122 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 207 g/l (approx. 1.7 lb/gal) 200 - 1000 m depending on system 4.3 m/l for 200 m * 3 hours * min. 3.5 hours * max. 14 days (data for components) at least 12 months
coating performance will depend upon the surface preparation degree blast cleaning steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2 or ISO-Sa2 blasting prole of 40 - 80 m is recommended hydrojetted to VIS WJ2/3 L coated steel existing sound adhering epoxy coating systems; sufciently roughened and free from any contamination substrate temperature should be at least 5C and at least 3C above dew point during application and curing
page 1/4
SIGMASHIELD 880
July 2011
mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 75 : 25 do not thin more than is required by appropriate application property too much solvent results in reduced sag resistance and slower cure thinner should be added after mixing the components

Thinner 91-92 0 - 8%, depending on required thickness and application conditions approx. 0.53 - 0.68 mm (= 0.021 - 0.027 in) 15 MPa (= approx. 150 bar; 2130 p.s.i.) Thinner 91-92 4 - 8%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 1.5 - 3 mm 0.2 - 0.4 MPa (= approx. 2 - 4 bar; 28 - 57 p.s.i.) only for touch up and spot repair Thinner 91-92 0 - 5% Thinner 90-53 for paint and recommended thinners see safety sheets 1430, 1431 and relevant material safety data sheets this is a solvent borne paint and care should be taken to avoid inhalation of spray mist or vapour as well as contact between the wet paint and exposed skin or eyes
ADDITIONAL DATA
page 2/4
SIGMASHIELD 880
July 2011
Overcoating table for SigmaShield 880 for dft up to 500 m substrate temperature with epoxy coatings with polyurethanes with itself with various epoxy- and polyurethane coatings minimum interval minimum interval maximum interval maximum interval 5C 14 hours 22 hours 40 days 28 days 10C 7 hours 14 hours 32 days 21 days 20C 3.5 hours 10 hours 28 days 14 days 30C 2 hours 6 hours 21 days 7 days 40C 1.5 hour 4 hours 14 days 4 days
surface should be dry and free from any contamination Curing table for dft up to 500 m substrate temperature 5C 10C 20C 30C 40C touch dry 10 hours 5 hours 3 hours 2 hours 1 hour dry to handle 28 hours 16 hours 8 hours 5 hours 3 hours
premature exposure to water will lead to whitening of dark colours when applied between tides on jetties, piling etc. this will not affect anticorrosive properties of the coating adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) Pot life (at application viscosity) 10C 20C 30C Worldwide availability 3 hours 2 hours 1 hour
page 3/4
SIGMASHIELD 880
July 2011
REFERENCES
PDS yellow black
7743 1018262200 8000002200
page 4/4
SIGMASHIELD 905
4 pages March 2011 Revision of October 2009
DESCRIPTION
two component glassake reinforced solvent free amine cured epoxy coating suitable for both marine and offshore use one coat protection for cargo holds with excellent corrosion resistance excellent abrasion and impact resistance, especially to hard angular cargoes good resistance to various chemicals good visibility due to light colour reduced explosion risk and re hazard can be applied by heavy duty single feed airless spray equipment (60:1) ideal for immersed, non immersed and partially immersed such as splash zones, decks etc.,
green - gloss (1 g/cm = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.3 g/cm 100% max. 107 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 141 g/l (approx. 1.2 lb/gal) see information sheet 1411 400 - 500 m 2.5 m/l for 400 m * 8 hours min. 24 hours * max. 20 days * 5 days * (data for components) at least 12 months
for cargo holds: steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 50 - 100 m for immersed areas: steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 50 - 100 m, dry and free from any contamination coated steel; hydrojetted to VIS WJ2/3 L (blasting prole 50 - 100 m) substrate temperature must be above 10C and at least 3C above dew point during application and curing cargo holds system sheet: 3107
page 1/4
SIGMASHIELD 905
March 2011

heavy duty single feed airless spray equipment preferably 60:1 pump ratio and suitable high pressure hoses in-line heating or insulated hoses may be necessary to avoid cooling down of paint in hoses at low air temperature application with 45:1 airless spray equipment is possible provided in-line heated high pressure hoses are used in case of using 45:1 airless spray equipment the paint must be heated to approx. 30C in order to obtain the right application viscosity length of hoses should be as short as possible no thinner should be added approx. 0.53 mm (= 0.021 in) at 20C (paint temperature) min. 28 MPa (= approx. 280 bar; 4000 p.s.i.) at 30C (paint temperature) min. 22 MPa (= approx. 220 bar; 3000 p.s.i.) for stripe coating and spot repair only no thinner should be added Thinner 90-83 (preferred) or Thinner 90-53 all application equipment must be cleaned immediately after use paint inside the spraying equipment must be removed before the pot life time has been expired for paint and recommended thinners see safety sheets 1430, 1431 and relevant material safety data sheets although this is a solvent free paint, care should be taken to avoid inhalation of spray mist as well as contact between the wet paint and exposed skin or eyes ventilation should be provided in conned spaces to maintain good visibility
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
page 2/4
SIGMASHIELD 905
March 2011
ADDITIONAL DATA
Film thickness and spreading rate theoretical spreading rate m/l dft in m max. dft when brushing: 2.5 400 2.0 500 150 - 200 m
measuring wet lm thickness a deviation is often obtained between the measured apparent wft and the real applied wft this is due to the thixotropy and the surface tension of the paint which retards the release of air trapped in the paint lm for some time recommendation is to apply a wft which is equal to the specied dft plus 60 m maximum dry lm thickness because of low initial hardness the dft cannot be measured for some days (depending on ambient temperature) after application due to the penetration of the measuring device into the paint lm the dft should be measured using a calibration foil of known thickness placed in between the coating and the measuring device Overcoating table for SigmaShield 905 for dft up to 500 m substrate temperature minimum interval maximum interval 10C 36 hours 20 days 20C 24 hours 20 days 30C 16 hours 14 days 40C 12 hours 7 days
surface should be dry and free from any contamination Curing table substrate temperature 5C 10C 20C 30C 40C dry to handle 60 hours 30 hours 16 hours 10 hours 8 hours full cure 15 days 7 days 5 days 3 days 2 days
page 3/4
SIGMASHIELD 905
March 2011
Pot life (at application viscosity) 20C 30C 40C 60 min. 45 min. 25 min.
REFERENCES
190476
PDS green
7954 4000002200
page 4/4
SIGMASHIELD 1090
(SigmaCover Armour Compund)
DESCRIPTION
two component ultra high build int reinforced solvent free polyamine cured, epoxy compound seamless water impermeable layer with excellent anticorrosive properties suitable for the protection of steel and concrete excellent resistance against impact and wear excellent adhesion under dry and wet exposure conditions resistant to water and splash of mild chemicals can be exposed to water within 30 minutes after application texture of surface is rough suitable for decks exposed to heavy impact and abrasion
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20C Mass density Volume solids VOC (supplied) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Curing time Shelf life (cool and dry place)
white (other colours on request) - at (1 g/cm = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 2.0 g/cm 100% max. 35 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 68 g/l (approx. 0.6 lb/gal) see information sheet 1411 3 - 5 mm 0.2 m/l for 5000 m (= approx. 10 kg/m) 0.3 m/l for 3000 m (= approx. 6 kg/m) 6 - 8 hours min. 4 days * max. 30 days * 7 days * (data for components) at least 6 months
steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 75 - 100 m concrete; free from laitance by blast cleaning moisture content of concrete should be max. 4% substrate temperature should be above 5C and at least 3C above dew point
mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 90.4 : 9.6 do not prepare more material than can be used within 30 minutes the temperature of base and hardener when mixing the components should be approx. 20C use always mechanical mixing equipment
page 1/5
SIGMASHIELD 1090

February 2010
add the hardener while stirring the base mix thoroughly and quickly until a homogeneous material is obtained Induction time Pot life none approx. 30 minutes at 20C *
APPLICATION
A sprayable polymer mortar is a heavy material which has to be transported from the container with mixed material to the mortar spray gun or airless spray gun. Care should be taken that hoses are of sufciently large diameter, are as short as possible and that no obstructions are present; otherwise the binder will be pressed out of the mortar leaving dry (untransportable) material behind. So preferably 3/4 - 1 inch hoses should be used (for the airless spraying, just before the spraygun 5/8 inch). equipment such as type 'Swinger Pump' Fizom A112 tech spray systems U.S.A. approx. 5.6 mm, preferably with internal mix atomisation 0.4 - 0.6 MPa (= approx. 4 - 6 bar; 57 - 85 p.s.i.) equipment such as Swinger Pump (11 : 1 ratio motor Air Tech spray equipment, Houston, TX) approx. 6.5 - 10 mm preferably with internal mix atomisation 0.4 - 0.6 MPa (= approx. 4 - 6 bar; 57 - 85 p.s.i.) pressure vessel with bottom outlet and pressure lid vessel should not contain more than 25 litres before use vessel and hoses have to be wetted with white spirit hoses (diameter 25 mm = approx. 1 inch) not longer than 7 metres, preferably in two lengths of 3.5 metres at low temperature hoses have to be insulated approx. 6.5 - 10 mm preferably with internal mix atomisation 0.4 - 0.6 MPa (= approx. 4 - 6 bar; 57 - 85 p.s.i.) equipment such as 'quick spray', carrousel pump and spraying equipment (Quickspray Inc., Port Clinton, Ohio, U.S.A.) approx. 4 - 5 mm 0.4 - 0.6 MPa (= approx. 4 - 6 bar; 57 - 85 p.s.i.) SigmaShield 1090 can be applied and compacted by trowels
APPLICATION WITH LOW PRESSURE PUMP Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure APPLICATION BY PRESSURE VESSEL
Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure APPLICATION BY DISPLACEMENT FEED PUMP Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure
APPLICATION BY TROWEL TOUCH UP
page 2/5
SIGMASHIELD 1090

February 2010
damaged areas should be reblasted and repaired with SigmaShield 1090 by means of lling knives porosity, blow holes and crevices in concrete should be lled with SigmaShield 1090 by hand (trowel/lling knife) larger areas can be resprayed with a beaker spray unit (e.g. Putzmeister) suitable for spraying materials like coarse lled mortars
other application methods may be possible, please contact the nearest PPG Protective & Marine Coatings sales ofce
CLEANING SOLVENT
Thinner 90-83 (preferred) or Thinner 90-53 all application equipment must be cleaned immediately after use insert a cellulose sponge into the hose inlet and force through with Thinner 90-53, repeat if necessary for paint and recommended thinners see safety sheets 1430, 1431 and relevant material safety data sheets although this is a solvent free paint, care should be taken to avoid inhalation of spray mist as well as contact between the wet paint and exposed skin or eyes ventilation should be provided in conned spaces to maintain good visibility
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
ADDITIONAL DATA
Overcoating table for SigmaShield 1090 for dft up to 4 mm 5C -30 days 10C 7 days 30 days 20C 4 days 30 days 30C 1 day 30 days 40C 1 day 30 days
with SigmaDur 520, SigmaDur 550 substrate temperature minimum interval maximum interval
surface should be dry and free from any contamination Overcoating table for SigmaShield 1090 for dft up to 4 mm with solventfree epoxies substrate temperature minimum interval maximum interval 10C 20C 30C 40C
1 day or immediately wet on wet 30 days 30 days 30 days 30 days
page 3/5
SIGMASHIELD 1090

February 2010
Curing table substrate temperature 10C 20C 30C 40C touch dry 10 - 12 hours 6 - 8 hours 4 - 6 hours 4 - 4 hours dry to handle 48 hours 24 hours 16 hours 12 hours full cure 12 days 7 days 4 days 3 days
adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) Pot life (at application viscosity) 20C 30C Worldwide availability 30 min. 15 min.
REFERENCES
page 4/5
SIGMASHIELD 1090

February 2010
140425
PDS white
7490 7001002120
page 5/5
SIGMASHIELD 1200
DESCRIPTION
two component abrasion resistant solvent free amine cured phenolic epoxy coating
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS single coat system designed for under water hull of ice going and ice breaking vessels recognised by Lloyd's register as an abrasion resistant ice coating excellent abrasion and impact resistance resistant to well designed cathodic protection low co-efcient of friction suitable for new construction or maintenance/repair also suitable for tanks and other structures requiring abrasion resistance excellent resistance to crude oil up to 90C excellent water resistance good chemical resistance against a wide range of chemicals and solvents can be applied by heavy duty single feed airless spray equipment (60:1) reduced explosion risk and re hazard COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20C Mass density Volume solids VOC (supplied) light grey, dark grey, brown (other colours on request) - gloss (1 g/cm = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.5 g/cm 100% max. 97 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 143 g/l (approx. 1.2 lb/gal) see information sheet 1411 400 - 500 m 2.5 m/l for 400 m, 2 m/l for 500 m * 6 hours min. 24 hours * max. 2 months * 5 days * (data for components) Shelf life (min. 10C dry place) at least 12 months
steel; blast cleaned to a minimum of ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 50 - 100 m substrate temperature should be above 10C and at least 3C above dew point during application and curing
page 1/4
SIGMASHIELD 1200
October 2009

heavy duty single feed airless spray equipment with a minimum of 60:1 pump ratio and suitable high pressure hoses no thinner should be added approx. 0.53 mm (= 0.021 in) at 20C (paint temperature) min. 28 MPa (= approx. 280 bar; 4000 p.s.i.) at 30C (paint temperature) min. 22 MPa (= approx. 220 bar; 3000 p.s.i.) for stripe coating and spot repair only no thinner should be added Thinner 90-83 (preferred) or Thinner 90-53 all application equipment must be cleaned immediately after use paint inside the spraying equipment must be removed before the pot life time has been expired for paint and recommended thinners see safety sheets 1430, 1431 and relevant material safety data sheets although this is a solvent free paint, care should be taken to avoid inhalation of spray mist as well as contact between the wet paint and exposed skin or eyes ventilation should be provided in conned spaces to maintain good visibility
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
ADDITIONAL DATA
page 2/4
SIGMASHIELD 1200
October 2009
Overcoating table for SigmaShield 1200 for dft up to 500 m substrate temperature minimum interval with itself maximum interval when not exposed to direct sunshine maximum interval when exposed to direct sunshine maximum interval when exposed to direct sunshine 10C 36 hours 3 months 20C 24 hours 2 months 30C 16 hours 1 month
with itself, SigmaCover 525 and SigmaCover 456
22 days
14 days
7 days
with SigmaDur 550
14 days
7 days
4 days
surface should be dry and free from any contamination Curing table for dft up to 500 m substrate temperature 10C 20C 30C dry to handle 30 hours 16 hours 10 hours full cure 7 days 5 days 3 days
although the paint is solvent free adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheet 1433 and 1434) Pot life (at application viscosity) 20C 30C 60 min. 45 min.
page 3/4
SIGMASHIELD 1200
October 2009
REFERENCES
195822
PDS lightgrey
7744 5177052200
page 4/4
SIGMASHIELD 1200 LT
DESCRIPTION
two component abrasion resistant solvent free amine cured phenolic epoxy coating
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS single coat system designed for under water hull of ice going and ice breaking vessels recognised by Lloyd's register as an abrasion resistant ice coating excellent abrasion and impact resistance resistant to well designed cathodic protection low co-efcient of friction suitable for new construction or maintenance/repair also suitable for tanks and other structures requiring abrasion resistance excellent resistance to crude oil up to 90C excellent water resistance good chemical resistance against a wide range of chemicals and solvents can be applied by heavy duty single feed airless spray equipment (60:1) cures at temperatures down to +5C reduced explosion risk and re hazard COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 10C Mass density Volume solids VOC (supplied) black - gloss (1 g/cm = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.5 g/cm 100% max. 92 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 136 g/l (approx. 1.1 lb/gal) see information sheet 1411 400 - 500 m 2.5 m/l for 400 m, 2 m/l for 500 m * 8 hours min. 24 hours * max. 22 days * 5 days * (data for components) Shelf life (cool and dry place) at least 12 months
steel; blast cleaned to a minimum of ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 50 - 100 m substrate temperature should be above 5C and at least 3C above dew point during application and curing dry and free from any contamination
page 1/4
SIGMASHIELD 1200 LT
October 2009
none 30 minutes at 20C *

AIRLESS SPRAY
twin feed hot airless spray heavy duty single feed airless spray equipment with a minimum of 60:1 pump ratio and suitable high pressure hoses in-line heating or insulated hoses may be necessary to avoid cooling down of paint in hoses at low air temperature length of hoses should be as short as possible no thinner should be added approx. 0.53 mm (= 0.021 in) at 20C (paint temperature) min. 28 MPa (= approx. 280 bar; 4000 p.s.i.) at 30C (paint temperature) min. 22 MPa (= approx. 220 bar; 3000 p.s.i.) for stripe coating and spot repair only no thinner should be added Thinner 90-83 (preferred) or Thinner 90-53 all application equipment must be cleaned immediately after use paint inside the spraying equipment must be removed before the pot life time has been expired for paint and recommended thinners see safety sheets 1430, 1431 and relevant material safety data sheets although this is a solvent free paint, care should be taken to avoid inhalation of spray mist as well as contact between the wet paint and exposed skin or eyes ventilation should be provided in conned spaces to maintain good visibility
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
ADDITIONAL DATA
page 2/4
SIGMASHIELD 1200 LT
October 2009
measuring wet lm thickness a deviation is often obtained between the measured apparent wft and the real applied wft this is due to the thixotropy and the surface tension of the paint which retards the release of air trapped in the paint lm for some time recommendation is to apply a wft which is equal to the specied dft plus 60 m measuring dry lm thickness because of low initial hardness the dft cannot be measured for some days (depending on ambient temperature) after application due to the penetration of the measuring device into the paint lm the dft should be measured using a calibration foil of known thickness placed in between the coating and the measuring device Overcoating table for SigmaShield 1200 LT for dft up to 500 m substrate temperature minimum interval with itself maximum interval when not exposed to direct sunshine maximum interval when exposed to direct sunshine 5C 36 hours 22 days 10C 24 hours 22 days 20C 12 hours 14 days 30C 6 hours 10 days
with itself, SigmaCover 525 and SigmaCover 456
14 days
14 days
7 days
5 days
although the paint is solvent free adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheet 1433 and 1434)
page 3/4
SIGMASHIELD 1200 LT
October 2009
REFERENCES
241652
PDS black
7746 8000002200
page 4/4
SIGMATHERM 175
2 pages October 2009 Revision of September 2005
DESCRIPTION
heat resistant modied alkyd aluminium nish heat resistant up to 175C high brilliancy spray application improves the appearance a minimum drying time of 3 days at 20C should be allowed before exposure to heat
COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20C Mass density Volume solids VOC (supplied) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Shelf life (cool and dry place)
aluminium - gloss (1 g/cm = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) 1.0 g/cm 47 2% max. 411 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 417 g/l (approx. 3.5 lb/gal) 25 m per coat 18.8 m/l for 25 m 3 hours at 5 - 10C, 1 hour at 20C min. 36 hours at 5 - 10C, 16 hours at 20C max. unlimited at least 12 months, longer storage period may affect the brilliancy previous coat; (e.g. Sigmarine 24) dry and free from any contamination substrate temperature should be at least 3C above dew point
RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES SYSTEM SPECIFICATION INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE
for heat resistant systems - see system sheet 3140 stir well before use the temperature of the paint should preferably be above 15C, otherwise extra thinner may be required to obtain application viscosity too much solvent results in reduced sag resistance adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434)
AIRLESS SPRAY Recommended thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure AIR SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure
no thinner should be added approx. 0.33 - 0.38 mm (= 0.013 - 0.015 in) 12 - 15 MPa (= approx. 120 - 150 bar; 1700 - 2130 p.s.i.)
page 1/2
SIGMATHERM 175
October 2009
REFERENCES
136663
PDS aluminium
7260 9000002200
page 2/2
SIGMATHERM 230
3 pages October 2009 Revision of February 2008
DESCRIPTION
two component high build heat resistant phenolic epoxy coating suitable as heat resistant system under insulation up to 230C good anticorrosive properties good application properties, resulting in a smooth layer no post curing is required to obtain mechanical strength
pink, grey - eggshell (1 g/cm = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.7 g/cm 68 2% max. 195 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 329 g/l (approx. 2.7 lb/gal) 150 m * 4.5 m/l for 150 m * 2 - 3 hours at 20C, 14 - 16 hours at 5C min. 8 hours * max. 14 days * see curing table * (data for components)
at least 12 months
steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 40 - 70 m the substrate must be perfectly dry before and during application of SigmaTherm 230 substrate temperature must be above 5C and at least 3C above dew point during application and curing mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 87 : 13 the temperature of the mixed base and hardener should preferably be above 15C, otherwise extra solvent may be required to obtain application viscosity too much solvent results in reduced sag resistance thinner should be added after mixing the components
Induction time
Pot life
page 1/3
SIGMATHERM 230
October 2009
Thinner 91-92 5 - 10%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 2 mm 0.3 MPa (= approx. 3 bar; 43 p.s.i.) only for spot repair and stripe coating Thinner 91-92 0 - 5% Thinner 90-53 for paint and recommended thinners see safety sheets 1430, 1431 and relevant material safety data sheets this is a solvent borne paint and care should be taken to avoid inhalation of spray mist or vapour as well as contact between the wet paint and exposed skin or eyes
Overcoating table for SigmaTherm 230 for dft up to 150 m substrate temperature minimum interval maximum interval 5C 24 hours 28 days 10C 20 hours 25 days 15C 14 hours 21 days 20C 8 hours 14 days 30C 6 hours 7 days
surface should be dry and free from any contamination Curing table for dft up to 150 m substrate temperature 5C 10C 15C 20C 30C full cure 7 days 5 days 4 days 3 days 2 days
page 2/3
SIGMATHERM 230
October 2009
Pot life (at application viscosity) 5C 10C 15C 20C 30C Worldwide availability 8 hours 6 hours 4 hours 2 hours 1 hour
REFERENCES
273020 273021 273022 273023
PDS pink pink grey grey
7445 6007001400 6007002200 5000001400 5000002200
page 3/3
SIGMATHERM 350
DESCRIPTION
heat resistant silicone/acrylic nish heat resistant up to 350C to be used for the internal and external protection of steel surfaces widely compatible with inorganic zinc primers excellent resistance against weathering a minimum drying time of 3 days at 20C should be allowed before exposure to heat
white, aluminium (other colours on request) - semigloss (1 g/cm = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) 1.2 g/cm (white) 1.1 g/cm (aluminium) 39 2% (white) 42 2% (aluminium) max. 492 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) (white) max. 491 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) (aluminium) max. 590 g/l (approx. 4.9 lb/gal) (white) max. 540 g/l (approx. 4.5 lb/gal) (aluminium) 25 - 30 m 15.6 m/l for 25 m (white) 16.8 m/l for 25 m (aluminium) 1 - 2 hours min. 18 hours max. unlimited at least 12 months thermal aluminium sprayed steel or thermal zinc sprayed steel; dry and free from any contamination suitable zinc silicate primer (e.g. SigmaZinc 158); dry and free from any contamination and zinc salts steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2 or ISO-Sa3, blasting prole 40 - 70 m substrate temperature should be at least 3C above dew point power agitate to uniform consistency by using a mistcoat technique it is possible to apply SigmaTherm 350 on top of a zinc silicate primer
Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Shelf life (cool and dry place) RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES
page 1/3
SIGMATHERM 350
October 2009
AIRLESS SPRAY Recommended thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure AIR SPRAY Recommended thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure BRUSH/ROLLER CLEANING SOLVENT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
no thinner should be added 1.5 - 2 mm 0.3 - 0.4 MPa (= approx. 3 - 4 bar; 43 - 57 p.s.i.) for touch up and spot repair only Thinner 21-06 for paint and recommended thinners see safety sheets 1430, 1431 and relevant material safety data sheets this is a solvent borne paint and care should be taken to avoid inhalation of spray mist or vapour as well as contact between the wet paint and exposed skin or eyes
REFERENCES
page 2/3
SIGMATHERM 350
October 2009
186132 168790
PDS white aluminium
7565 7000002200 9000002200
page 3/3
SIGMATHERM 450
DESCRIPTION
heat resistant silicone based nish heat resistant up to 450C to be used for the internal and external protection of steel surfaces good weather resistance after a drying time of 3 days at 20C a minimum temperature of 200C for 2 hours is necessary to obtain sufcient mechanical strength
aluminium - eggshell (1 g/cm = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) 1.0 g/cm 24 2% max. 612 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 639 g/l (approx. 5.3 lb/gal) 30 m 8 m/l for 30 m 30 min. at 20C, 45 min. at 10C min. 16 hours max. unlimited at least 6 months zinc silicate primer; (e.g. SigmaZinc 158) dry and free from any zinc salts previous suitable coat; dry and free from any contamination thermal aluminium sprayed steel or thermal zinc sprayed steel; dry and free from any contamination substrate temperature should be at least 3C above dew point power agitate to uniform consistency by using a mistcoat technique it is possible to apply SigmaTherm 450 on top of a zinc silicate primer
AIRLESS SPRAY Recommended thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure AIR SPRAY Recommended thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure BRUSH/ROLLER CLEANING SOLVENT
no thinner should be added 1.5 - 2 mm 0.3 - 0.4 MPa (= approx. 3 - 4 bar; 43 - 57 p.s.i.) for touch up and spot repair only Thinner 21-06
page 1/2
SIGMATHERM 450
October 2009
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Whilst it is always the aim of PPG Protective & Marine Coatings to supply the same product on a worldwide basis, slight modication of the product is sometimes necessary to comply with local or national rules/circumstances. Under these circumstances an alternative product data sheet is used. Explanation to product data sheets Safety indications Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard Cleaning of steel and removal of rust see information sheet 1411 see information sheet 1430 see information sheet 1431 see information sheet 1490
REFERENCES
186350
PDS aluminium
7563 9000002200
page 2/2
SIGMATHERM 500
DESCRIPTION
heat resistant modied alkyd aluminium coating
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS to be used for the internal and external protection of steel surfaces heat resistant up to 500C; a minimum of 200C is necessary to fuse the aluminium coating a minimum drying time of 3 days at 20C should be allowed before exposure to heat application by spray improves the appearance COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20C Mass density Volume solids VOC (supplied) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Shelf life (cool and dry place) aluminium - eggshell (1 g/cm = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) 1.1 g/cm 32 2% max. 561 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 600 g/l (approx. 5.0 lb/gal) 25 m 12.8 m/l for 25 m 3 hours at 5 - 10C, 1 hour at 20C min. 48 hours at 5 - 10C, 24 hours at 20C max. no limitations at least 12 months, longer storage period may affect the brilliancy steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2 or ISO-Sa3, blasting prole 40 - 70 m
RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES SYSTEM SPECIFICATION INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE
for heat resistant systems - see system sheet 3140 stir well before use the temperature of the paint should preferably be above 15C, otherwise extra thinner may be required to obtain application viscosity too much solvent results in reduced sag resistance adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434)
AIRLESS SPRAY Recommended thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure AIR SPRAY Recommended thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure
no thinner should be added approx. 0.38 mm (= 0.015 in) 8 - 12 MPa (= approx. 80 - 120 bar; 1140 - 1700 p.s.i.)
no thinner should be added 2 - 3 mm 0.3 - 0.4 MPa (= approx. 3 - 4 bar; 43 - 57 p.s.i.)
page 1/2
SIGMATHERM 500
October 2009
REFERENCES
136661
PDS aluminium
7261 9000002200
page 2/2
SIGMATHERM 520
DESCRIPTION
one component heat resistant moisture curing (ethyl) silicate nish to be used for the internal and external protection of steel surfaces up to 520C when applied on top of suitable zinc silicate primers minimizes the formation of zinc salts on atmospheric exposure cures at temperatures down to -5C no post curing is required to obtain mechanical strength
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20C Mass density Volume solids VOC (supplied) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Curing time Shelf life (cool and dry place) RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES
aluminium - at (1 g/cm = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) 1.2 g/cm 38 2% max. 494 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 588 g/l (approx. 4.9 lb/gal) 40 m * (25 m on top of the zinc silicate) 9.5 m/l for 40 m 60 min. at 20C min. 5 hours * max. unlimited, contamination must be removed 12 hours * at least 12 months suitable zinc silicate primer (e.g. SigmaZinc 158); dry and free from any contamination and zinc salts during application substrate temperatures ranging from -5C up to +50C are acceptable substrate temperature should be at least 3C above dew point relative humidity during curing should be above 50% stir thoroughly till homogeneous strain paint through a 30 - 60 mesh screen agitate continuously during application
Thinner 90-53 10 - 20%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 1.7 - 2 mm 0.3 MPa (= approx. 3 bar; 43 p.s.i.)
page 1/4
SIGMATHERM 520
October 2009
BRUSH CLEANING SOLVENT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
only for touch up and spot repair Thinner 90-53 for paint and recommended thinners see safety sheets 1430, 1431 and relevant material safety data sheets this is a solvent borne paint and care should be taken to avoid inhalation of spray mist or vapour as well as contact between the wet paint and exposed skin or eyes
ADDITIONAL DATA
Film thickness and spreading rate theoretical spreading rate m/l dft in m dft in m on top of zinc silicate approx. 9.5 40 25
it is not possible to measure the actual dft as the nish will soak partly into the porous zinc silicate primer immediately after spraying the nish should have a completely wet appearance excessive thickness in overlapping areas should be avoided otherwise cracking and aking may occur Overcoating table (relative humidity during curing should be above 50%) substrate temperature minimum interval maximum interval -5C 48 hours unlimited 0C 36 hours 10C 10 hours 20C 5 hours 30C 3 hours
curing can be accelerated by spraying water on to the coated surface 4 hours after application the surface should be (kept) wet for the next 4 hours relative humidity below 50% requires a much longer minimum overcoating interval
page 2/4
SIGMATHERM 520
October 2009
Curing table (relative humidity during curing should be above 50%) at substrate temperatures -5C 0C 10C 20C 30C 40C dry to handle 2 hours 2 hours 1 hour 30 min. 15 min. 10 min. full cure 48 hours 36 hours 24 hours 12 hours 6 hours 4 hours
adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) Worldwide availability Whilst it is always the aim of PPG Protective & Marine Coatings to supply the same product on a worldwide basis, slight modication of the product is sometimes necessary to comply with local or national rules/circumstances. Under these circumstances an alternative product data sheet is used. Explanation to product data sheets Safety indications Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard Safe working in conned spaces Directives for ventilation practice Relative humidity - substrate temperature air temperature see information sheet 1411 see information sheet 1430 see information sheet 1431 see information sheet 1433 see information sheet 1434 see information sheet 1650
REFERENCES
page 3/4
SIGMATHERM 520
October 2009
153167
PDS aluminium
7555 9000002180
page 4/4
SIGMATHERM 538
3 pages December 2009
DESCRIPTION
one component heat resistant moisture curing (ethyl) silicate nish
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS up to 520C when applied on top of heat resistant nish on top of suitable zinc silicate primers can withstand substrate temperatures up to +540C, under normal atmospheric exposure conditions minimizes the formation of zinc salts on atmospheric exposure no post curing is required to obtain mechanical strength COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20C Mass density Volume solids VOC (supplied) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Curing time Shelf life (cool and dry place) RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES white, grey - at (1 g/cm = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) 1.7 g/cm 62 2% max. 276 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 480 g/l (approx. 4.0 lb/gal) 125 m 5.0 m/l for 125 m 60 min. at 20C 12 hours * at least 12 months suitable zinc silicate primer (e.g. SigmaZinc 158); dry and free from any contamination and zinc salts substrate temperature should be at least 3C above dew point relative humidity during curing should be above 50% stir thoroughly till homogeneous strain paint through a 30 - 60 mesh screen agitate continuously during application
AIRLESS SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure AIR SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure BRUSH CLEANING SOLVENT
Thinner 21-06 10 - 20%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 1.7 - 2 mm 0.3 MPa (= approx. 3 bar; 43 p.s.i.) only for touch up and spot repair Thinner 21-06
page 1/3
SIGMATHERM 538
December 2009
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
ADDITIONAL DATA
it is not possible to measure the actual dft as the nish will soak partly into the porous zinc silicate primer immediately after spraying the nish should have a completely wet appearance excessive thickness in overlapping areas should be avoided otherwise cracking and aking may occur Curing table (relative humidity during curing should be above 50%) at substrate temperatures 10C 20C 30C 40C dry to handle 6 hours 4 hours 3 hours 2 hours full cure 48 hours 24 hours 12 hours 8 hours
adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) Worldwide availability Whilst it is always the aim of PPG Protective & Marine Coatings to supply the same product on a worldwide basis, slight modication of the product is sometimes necessary to comply with local or national rules/circumstances. Under these circumstances an alternative product data sheet is used. Explanation to product data sheets Safety indications Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard Safe working in conned spaces Directives for ventilation practice Relative humidity - substrate temperature air temperature see information sheet 1411 see information sheet 1430 see information sheet 1431 see information sheet 1433 see information sheet 1434 see information sheet 1650
REFERENCES
page 2/3
SIGMATHERM 538
December 2009
PDS aluminium
7592 9000002180
page 3/3
SIGMATHERM 540
2 pages April 2010 Revision of October 2009
DESCRIPTION
one component heat resistant moisture curing silicone aluminium heat resistant up to 540C on steel, grit blasted to ISO-Sa2 heat resistant up to 400C on rusted steel, power tool cleaned to ISO-St3 to be used for the internal and external protection of steel surfaces no heat cure necessary between coats excellent resistance against weathering also suitable on top of zinc silicate primer a minimum drying time of 3 days at 20C should be allowed before exposure to heat
aluminium - eggshell (1 g/cm = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) 1.1 g/cm 45 2% max. 427 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 478 g/l (approx. 4.0 lb/gal) 25 m 18 m/l for 25 m 45 min. min. 16 hours at least 6 months steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 40 - 70 m steel; pretreated according to ISO-St3 suitable zinc silicate primer (e.g. SigmaZinc 158); dry and free from any contamination and zinc salts substrate temperature should be at least 3C above dew point power agitate to uniform consistency no thinner should be added 1.5 - 2 mm 0.3 - 0.4 MPa (= approx. 3 - 4 bar; 43 - 57 p.s.i.) for roller application the best results will be obtained by using ne foam type rollers
INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE AIR SPRAY Recommended thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure BRUSH/ROLLER
page 1/2
SIGMATHERM 540
April 2010
REFERENCES
218773 218772
PDS aluminium aluminium
7564 9000002200 9000001500
page 2/2
SIGMAWELD 10
3 pages October 2009 Revision of April 2007
DESCRIPTION
fast drying one component water borne anticorrosive shop primer
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS suitable for automatic application on shot blasted steel plates good cutting and welding properties (electrodes) provides corrosion protection up to 6 months, when applied at a dft of 30 m (depending on exposure conditions and blasting prole) fast drying properties can be used as a rst coat in various paint systems for atmospheric exposure conditions only reduced explosion risk and re hazard COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20C Mass density Volume solids VOC (supplied) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval redbrown - at (1 g/cm = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) 1.4 g/cm 41 2% max. 12 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 17 g/l (approx. 0.1 lb/gal) 30 m 13.7 m/l 12 min. at substrate temperature of 20C 3 min. at substrate temperature of 40C + ventilation min. 12 hours max. 6 months longer overcoating intervals can be permitted when primer is still in sound condition at least 6 months steel; shot blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 40 - 70 m for automatic application a substrate temperature between 35 - 40C is recommended substrate temperature should be at least 3C above dew point adequate ventilation is required preferably relative humidity should not exceed 75% or the drying and performance of the coating will be adversely affected during storage and construction, contamination of the prefabrication primer should be limited after fabrication, surface defects should be treated according to the scheme below contamination weldseams burned areas damaged corroded areas to be removed SPSS-Pt2 SPSS-Ss (SPSS-Pt2) SPSS-Ss (SPSS-Pt2)
page 1/3
SIGMAWELD 10
October 2009
some addition of water might be necessary depending on routing, line speed and steel temperature stir well before use the temperature of the paint should be above 15C strain mixture through a 30 - 60 mesh screen agitate continuously during application must be protected from freezing at all times during storage and/or transport
AIRLESS SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure AIR SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure CLEANING SOLVENT
tap water 0 - 5%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 1 - 1.5 mm 0.2 - 0.3 MPa (= approx. 2 - 3 bar; 28 - 43 p.s.i.) tap water and Thinner 70-05 Cleaning Procedures of the spray equipment: pulsator lter and tip lter must be taken out of the equipment and cleaned properly following tables illustrate the cleaning procedure of the spray equipment when changing spraying from solvent borne paint to water borne paints (table 1) and from water borne paints to solvent borne paints (table 2)
CLEANING PROCEDURE
page 2/3
SIGMAWELD 10
October 2009
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
REFERENCES
168298
PDS redbrown
7179 2008002200
page 3/3
SIGMAWELD 15
DESCRIPTION
fast drying one component alkyd based anticorrosive prefabrication primer
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS suitable for automatic application on shot blasted steel plates good cutting and welding properties (electrodes) provides corrosion protection up to 6 months, when applied at a dft of 30 m (depending on exposure conditions and blasting prole) fast drying properties can be used as a rst coat in various paint systems for atmospheric exposure conditions only COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20C Mass density Volume solids VOC (supplied) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval redbrown - at (1 g/cm = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) 1.3 g/cm 40 2% max. 396 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 527 g/l (approx. 4.4 lb/gal) 30 m 13.3 m/l 10 min. at substrate temperature of 20C 3 min. at substrate temperature of 40C + ventilation min. 12 hours max. 6 months longer overcoating intervals can be permitted when primer is still in sound condition at least 6 months steel; shot blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 40 - 70 m for automatic application a substrate temperature between 35 - 40C is recommended substrate temperature should be at least 3C above dew point during storage and construction, contamination of the prefabrication primer should be limited after fabrication, surface defects should be treated according to the scheme below contamination weldseams burned areas damaged corroded areas to be removed SPSS-Pt2 SPSS-Ss (SPSS-Pt2) SPSS-Ss (SPSS-Pt2)
page 1/3
SIGMAWELD 15
October 2009
stir well before use the temperature of the paint should be above 15C strain mixture through a 30 - 60 mesh screen some addition of thinner might be necessary depending on routing, line speed and steel temperature agitate continuously during application
AIRLESS SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure AIR SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure CLEANING SOLVENT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Thinner 21-06 0 - 5%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 1 - 1.5 mm 0.15 - 0.2 MPa (= approx. 1.5 - 2 bar; 21 - 28 p.s.i.) Thinner 21-06 for paint and recommended thinners see safety sheets 1430, 1431 and relevant material safety data sheets this is a solvent borne paint and care should be taken to avoid inhalation of spray mist or vapour as well as contact between the wet paint and exposed skin or eyes
REFERENCES
page 2/3
SIGMAWELD 15
October 2009
171947
PDS redbrown
7112 0000002200
page 3/3
SIGMAWELD 120
DESCRIPTION
two component polyamide cured epoxy prefabrication primer
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS suitable for automatic application on shot blasted steel plates good cutting and welding properties, including MMA and gravity welding provides corrosion protection up to 6 months, when applied at a dft of 22 m (depending on exposure conditions and blasting prole) fast drying properties can be used as a rst coat in various paint systems for atmospheric exposure conditions only COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20C Mass density Volume solids VOC (supplied) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval redbrown - at (1 g/cm = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.1 g/cm 21 2% max. 593 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 653 g/l (approx. 5.4 lb/gal) 22 m 9.5 m/l for 22 m 6 min. at substrate temperature of 20C 4 min. at substrate temperature of 40C min. 12 hours max. 6 months longer overcoating intervals can be permitted when primer is still in sound condition (data for components) Shelf life (cool and dry place) RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES at least 12 months steel; shot blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 40 - 70 m for automatic application a substrate temperature between 35 - 40C is recommended substrate temperature should be at least 3C above dew point during storage and construction, contamination of the prefabrication primer should be limited after fabrication, surface defects should be treated according to the scheme below contamination weldseams burned areas damaged corroded areas to be removed SPSS-Pt2 SPSS-Ss (SPSS-Pt2) SPSS-Ss (SPSS-Pt2)
page 1/3
SIGMAWELD 120
October 2009
mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 75 : 25 the temperature of the mixed base and hardener should preferably be above 15C strain mixture through a 30 - 60 mesh screen mixed paint is ready for use some addition of thinner (Thinner 90-53) might be necessary depending on routing, line speed and steel temperature agitate continuously during application
Pot life AIRLESS SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure AIR SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure CLEANING SOLVENT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
24 hours at 20C
Thinner 90-53 0 - 5%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 1 - 1.5 mm 0.15 - 0.2 MPa (= approx. 1.5 - 2 bar; 21 - 28 p.s.i.) Thinner 90-53 for paint and recommended thinners see safety sheets 1430, 1431 and relevant material safety data sheets this is a solvent borne paint and care should be taken to avoid inhalation of spray mist or vapour as well as contact between the wet paint and exposed skin or eyes
REFERENCES
page 2/3
SIGMAWELD 120
October 2009
179591
PDS redbrown
7173 2008002200
page 3/3
SIGMAWELD 165
4 pages December 2009 Revision of September 2009
DESCRIPTION
two component moisture curing, zinc (ethyl) silicate prefabrication primer
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS suitable for automatic application on shot blasted steel plates fast drying properties good cutting and excellent welding properties, including MIG/MAG welding in various positions (either automatic or manual welding) provides corrosion protection up to 9 months, when applied at a dft of 13 m (depending on exposure conditions and blasting prole) can be used as a rst coat in various paint systems suitable for sea water immersion in combination with controlled cathodic protection systems excellent thermal stability minimizes heat damage during hot work procedures no adherence of weldspatter at surrounding primed surface approved by Lloyd's Register of Shipping for use as prefabrication primer (see sheet 1880) Health certicate from North of England Industrial Health Service (see sheet 1881) COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20C Mass density Volume solids VOC (supplied) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval grey, reddish grey - at (1 g/cm = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.4 g/cm 30 2% max. 428 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 645 g/l (approx. 5.4 lb/gal) 13 m - see further: "Recommended substrate conditions and temperatures" 20 m/l for 13 m 6 min. at substrate temperature of 20C 3 min. at substrate temperature of 40C min. 3 days max. 9 months longer overcoating intervals can be permitted when primer is still in sound condition (data for components) Shelf life (cool and dry place) binder: at least 9 months paste: at least 12 months
page 1/4
SIGMAWELD 165
December 2009
on steel blasted to above prole, the recommended dft, 13 m, corresponds to 15 m as measured on a smooth test panel minimum thickness for a closed lm is 13 m measured on a smooth test panel substrate temperature may be up to max. 50C for automatic application a substrate temperature of 30C is recommended Depending on exact substrate temperature and actual condition on side a different thinner may be required substrate temperature at least 3C above dew point relative humidity during curing should be above 50% and below 85% dust quantity rating "1" for dust size class "3", "4" or "5", lower dust size classes to be removed if visible on the surface to be coated without magnication (ISO 8502-3:1992) primers system sheet: 3015
SYSTEM SPECIFICATION SECONDARY SURFACE PREPARATION
during storage and construction, contamination of the prefabrication primer should be limited after fabrication, surface defects should be treated according to the scheme below where two possible surface treatments are indicated, the choice of treatment is dependent on the location and on the system to be applied (see system sheets) the preferred pretreatment for optimal results is shown; other possibilities are indicated in brackets areas contamination weldseams burned damaged corroded white rust immersed conditions to be removed or ISO 8501-3 grade P2 ISO-Sa2 (SPSS-Pt3) or ISO 8501-3 grade P2 ISO-Sa2 (SPSS-Pt3) or ISO 8501-3 grade P2 ISO-Sa2 (SPSS-Pt3) or ISO 8501-3 grade P2 SPSS-ID Pt2 (SCAP *) or ISO 8501-3 grade P2 atmospheric conditions to be removed SPSS-Pt2 SPSS-Ss (SPSS-Pt2) SPSS-Ss (SPSS-Pt2) SPSS-ID Pt1 (SCAP *)
Dust quantity rating "1" for dust size class "3", "4" or "5", lower dust size classes to be removed if visible on the surface to be coated without magnication (ISO 8502-3). Note that the back of welded plate may show discoloration (especially on plate where llets have been welded on), this is not to be confused with burned areas and does not require special treatment.
page 2/4
SIGMAWELD 165
December 2009
Burned through areas may be present (this happens especially when welding thin steel) and these should then be treated as per 'burned areas' above. INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE mixing ratio by volume: binder to paste 55 : 45 the temperature of the mixture of binder and paste should preferably be above 15C stir the paste thoroughly before adding the binder add gradually one third of the binder to the pigment paste stir thoroughly till homogeneous add remaining binder and continue stirring until the mixture is homogeneous strain mixture through a 30 - 60 mesh screen mixed paint is ready for use some addition of thinner (Thinner 90-53) might be necessary depending on routing, line speed and steel temperature agitate continuously during application Pot life AIRLESS SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure 24 hours at 20C
Note: Depending on exact application conditions a different thinner may be required to ensure optimal application properties. Consult the PPG Protective & Marine Coatings representative in your area when required.
AIR SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure CLEANING SOLVENT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Thinner 90-53 0 - 35%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 1 - 1.5 mm 0.3 MPa (= approx. 3 bar; 43 p.s.i.) recommended Thinner 90-53 for paint and recommended thinners see safety sheets 1430, 1431 and relevant material safety data sheets this is a solvent borne paint and care should be taken to avoid inhalation of spray mist or vapour as well as contact between the wet paint and exposed skin or eyes
page 3/4
SIGMAWELD 165
December 2009
REFERENCES
Explanation to product data sheets Safety indications Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Relative humidity - substrate temperature air temperature
179169 244462
PDS reddish grey grey
7171 5010002180 0000002180
page 4/4
SIGMAWELD 190
DESCRIPTION
two component moisture curing, low zinc (ethyl) silicate prefabrication primer
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS suitable for automatic application on shot blasted steel plates fast drying properties good cutting and excellent welding properties, including MIG/MAG welding in various positions (either automatic or manual welding) provides regular, smooth weld seams low fume release during welding and cutting no adherence of weldspatter at surrounding primed surface excellent thermal stability minimizes heat damage during hot work procedures can be used as a rst coat in various paint systems suitable for sea water immersion in combination with controlled cathodic protection systems approved by Lloyd's Register of Shipping for use as prefabrication primer (see sheet 1880) Health certicate from North of England Industrial Health Service (see sheet 1881) COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20C Mass density Volume solids VOC (supplied) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval redbrown (grey on request) - at (1 g/cm = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.2 g/cm 25 2% max. 552 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 680 g/l (approx. 5.7 lb/gal) 18 m - see further: "Recommended substrate conditions and temperatures" 11.4 m/l for 18 m 6 min. at substrate temperature of 20C 3 min. at substrate temperature of 40C min. 3 days max. 6 months longer overcoating intervals can be permitted when primer is still in sound condition (data for components) Shelf life (cool and dry place) binder: at least 9 months paste: at least 12 months
page 1/4
SIGMAWELD 190
October 2009
steel; shot blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 30 - 75 m on steel blasted to above prole, the recommended dft, 18 m, corresponds to 22 m as measured on a smooth test panel minimum thickness for a closed lm is 15 m measured on a smooth test panel substrate temperature may be up to max. 35C for automatic application a substrate temperature of 30C is recommended substrate temperature should be at least 3C above dew point relative humidity during curing should be above 50% and below 85% dust quantity rating "1" for dust size class "3", "4" or "5", lower dust size classes to be removed if visible on the surface to be coated without magnication (ISO 8502-3:1992) primers system sheet: 3015
Dust quantity rating "1" for dust size class "3", "4" or "5", lower dust size classes to be removed if visible on the surface to be coated without magnication (ISO 8502-3). Note that the back of welded plate may show discoloration (especially on plate where llets have been welded on), this is not to be confused with burned areas and does not require special treatment. Burned through areas may be present (this happens especially when welding thin steel) and these should then be treated as per 'burned areas' above.
page 2/4
SIGMAWELD 190
October 2009
mixing ratio by volume: binder to paste 66.7 : 33.3 the temperature of the mixture of binder and paste should preferably be above 15C stir the paste thoroughly before adding the binder add gradually one third of the binder to the pigment paste stir thoroughly till homogeneous add remaining binder and continue stirring until the mixture is homogeneous strain mixture through a 30 - 60 mesh screen mixed paint is ready for use some addition of thinner (Thinner 90-53) might be necessary depending on routing, line speed and steel temperature agitate continuously during application
Pot life AIRLESS SPRAY Recommended thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure AIR SPRAY Recommended thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure CLEANING SOLVENT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
24 hours at 20C
no thinner should be added 1 - 1.5 mm 0.3 MPa (= approx. 3 bar; 43 p.s.i.) recommended Thinner 90-53 for paint and recommended thinners see safety sheets 1430, 1431 and relevant material safety data sheets this is a solvent borne paint and care should be taken to avoid inhalation of spray mist or vapour as well as contact between the wet paint and exposed skin or eyes
REFERENCES
page 3/4
SIGMAWELD 190
October 2009
179171 179172
PDS redbrown grey
7167 2008002180 5000002180
page 4/4
SIGMAWELD 199
DESCRIPTION
two component moisture curing, low zinc (ethyl) silicate prefabrication primer
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS suitable for automatic application on shot blasted steel plates fast drying properties good cutting and excellent welding properties, including MIG/MAG welding in various positions (either automatic or manual welding) provides regular, smooth weld seams low fume release during welding and cutting no adherence of weldspatter at surrounding primed surface excellent thermal stability minimizes heat damage during hot work procedures can be used as a rst coat in various paint systems suitable for sea water immersion in combination with controlled cathodic protection systems approved by Lloyd's Register of Shipping for use as prefabrication primer (see sheet 1880) Health certicate from North of England Industrial Health Service (see sheet 1881) COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20C Mass density Volume solids VOC (supplied) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval redbrown (grey on request) - at (1 g/cm = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.3 g/cm 25 2% max. 521 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 676 g/l (approx. 5.6 lb/gal) 18 m - see further: "Recommended substrate conditions and temperatures" 11.4 m/l for 18 m 6 min. at substrate temperature of 20C 3 min. at substrate temperature of 40C min. 3 days max. 6 months longer overcoating intervals can be permitted when primer is still in sound condition (data for components) Shelf life (cool and dry place) binder: at least 9 months paste: at least 12 months
page 1/4
SIGMAWELD 199
October 2009
steel; shot blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 30 - 75 m on steel blasted to above prole, the recommended dft, 18 m, corresponds to 22 m as measured on a smooth test panel minimum thickness for a closed lm is 15 m measured on a smooth test panel substrate temperature may be up to max. 35C for automatic application a substrate temperature of 30C is recommended substrate temperature should be at least 3C above dew point relative humidity during curing should be above 50% and below 85% dust quantity rating "1" for dust size class "3", "4" or "5", lower dust size classes to be removed if visible on the surface to be coated without magnication (ISO 8502-3:1992) primers system sheet: 3015
Dust quantity rating "1" for dust size class "3", "4" or "5", lower dust size classes to be removed if visible on the surface to be coated without magnication (ISO 8502-3). Note that the back of welded plate may show discoloration (especially on plate where llets have been welded on), this is not to be confused with burned areas and does not require special treatment. Burned through areas may be present (this happens especially when welding thin steel) and these should then be treated as per 'burned areas' above.
page 2/4
SIGMAWELD 199
October 2009
mixing ratio by volume: binder to paste 66.7 : 33.3 the temperature of the mixture of binder and paste should preferably be above 15C stir the paste thoroughly before adding the binder add gradually one third of the binder to the pigment paste stir thoroughly till homogeneous add remaining binder and continue stirring until the mixture is homogeneous strain mixture through a 30 - 60 mesh screen mixed paint is ready for use some addition of thinner (Thinner 90-53) might be necessary depending on routing, line speed and steel temperature agitate continuously during application
Pot life AIRLESS SPRAY Recommended thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure AIR SPRAY Recommended thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure CLEANING SOLVENT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
24 hours at 20C
no thinner should be added 1 - 1.5 mm 0.3 MPa (= approx. 3 bar; 43 p.s.i.) recommended Thinner 90-53 for paint and recommended thinners see safety sheets 1430, 1431 and relevant material safety data sheets this is a solvent borne paint and care should be taken to avoid inhalation of spray mist or vapour as well as contact between the wet paint and exposed skin or eyes
REFERENCES
page 3/4
SIGMAWELD 199
October 2009
179165 179167
PDS redbrown grey
7177 2008002180 5000002180
page 4/4
SIGMAZINC 19
DESCRIPTION
one component zinc rich epoxy primer
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS good anticorrosive properties, the dry lm contains 90% zinc by weight designed for repair of two component zinc epoxy primers and zinc silicate primers can be used as a reconditioner for aged derusted galvanised steel dries at temperatures down to -10C dry heat resistance 125C with peaks up to 175C the superimposed system must be unsaponiable quick drying, can be overcoated after a short interval COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20C Mass density Volume solids VOC (supplied) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Shelf life (cool and dry place) grey - at (1 g/cm = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) 2.4 g/cm 38 2% max. 246 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 584 g/l (approx. 4.9 lb/gal) 35 m 10.9 m/l for 35 m 30 min. at 10C, 5 min. at 15C, 4 min. at 20C min. 2 hours at 20C * max. several months at least 12 months
steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 40 - 70 m aged hot-dip galvanised steel with rusty spots; thoroughly derusted to ISOSt3 or ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 40 - 70 m zinc rich epoxies and zinc silicates; dry and free from any contamination substrate temperature should be at least 3C above dew point can be applied down to -10C provided the surface is free from moisture and ice stir well before use the temperature of the paint should preferably be above 15C, otherwise extra thinner may be required to obtain application viscosity too much solvent results in reduced sag resistance adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434)
page 1/3
SIGMAZINC 19
October 2009
ADDITIONAL DATA
Overcoating table for SigmaZinc 19 for dft up to 35 m substrate temperature -10C 6 hours 5C 4 hours 10C 3 hours 20C 2 hours
with SigmaCover 522, SigmaCover minimum 435, SigmaCover 456 interval maximum interval
several months when free from zinc salts and contamination
zinc rich primers can form zinc salts on the surface; preferably they should not be weathered for long periods before overcoating an interval of several months can be allowed under clean interior exposure conditions in clean exterior conditions, a maximum interval of 14 days can be tolerated, but in industrial or marine conditions this interval should be reduced to the practical minimum before overcoating visible surface contamination must be removed by high pressure water cleaning, sweep blasting or mechanical cleaning when a long overcoating interval is required, it is recommended to overcoat SigmaZinc 19 as soon as possible with a suitable sealer coat Worldwide availability Whilst it is always the aim of PPG Protective & Marine Coatings to supply the same product on a worldwide basis, slight modication of the product is sometimes necessary to comply with local or national rules/circumstances. Under these circumstances an alternative product data sheet is used. Explanation to product data sheets see information sheet 1411
REFERENCES
page 2/3
SIGMAZINC 19
October 2009
Safety indications Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard Safe working in conned spaces Directives for ventilation practice Cleaning of steel and removal of rust
136782
PDS grey
7370 0000001800
page 3/3
SIGMAZINC 102
4 pages October 2009 Revision of March 2007
DESCRIPTION
two component polyamide cured zinc epoxy primer economical zinc epoxy primer for various paint systems good corrosion prevention properties quick drying, can be overcoated after a short interval can serve as a holding primer for various maintenance systems for a total repair the superimposed system must be unsaponiable complies with SSPC-Paint 20 grey - at (1 g/cm = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 2.1 g/cm 55 2% max. 193 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 410 g/l (approx. 3.4 lb/gal) 25 - 50 m depending on blasting prole; dfts of more then 50 m are not recommended 22 m/l for 25 m * 15 min. at 20C * min. 6 hours * max. several months * 7 days (data for components)
COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20C Mass density Volume solids VOC (supplied) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Curing time
Shelf life (cool and dry place) RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE
at least 12 months steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 40 - 70 m substrate temperature should be above 10C and at least 3C above dew point mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 78 : 22 the temperature of the mixed base and hardener should preferably be above 15C, otherwise extra solvent may be required to obtain application viscosity too much solvent results in reduced sag resistance and slower cure thinner should be added after mixing the components
none 24 hours at 20C, 6 hours at 35C
page 1/4
SIGMAZINC 102
October 2009
Thinner 91-92 0 - 20%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 1.8 - 2.2 mm 0.3 - 0.6 MPa (= approx. 3 - 6 bar; 43 - 85 p.s.i.)
ADDITIONAL DATA
page 2/4
SIGMAZINC 102
October 2009
Overcoating table for dft 25 - 50 m substrate temperature minimum interval maximum interval interior maximum interval exterior 5C 24 hours 10C 8 hours 20C 6 hours 30C 4 hours 40C 3 hours
several months when free from zinc salts and contamination 14 days in clean conditions
zinc rich primers can form zinc salts on the surface; preferably they should not be weathered for long periods before overcoating an interval of several months can be allowed under clean interior exposure conditions in industrial or marine conditions or if a long recoat interval is required, it is recommended to apply a suitable sealer direct after the minimum recoating interval before overcoating visible surface contamination must be removed by high pressure water cleaning, sweep blasting or mechanical cleaning Curing table substrate temperature 10C 15C 20C 30C touch dry 40 min. 30 min. 15 min. 10 min. dry to handle 4 hours 2 hours 2 hours 1 hour full cure 20 days 10 days 7 days 5 days
SigmaZinc 102 can be applied at temperatures down to 5C, but the curing rate will be very low for such applications alternative zinc rich primers are recommended: SigmaZinc 19, SigmaZinc 158 and SigmaZinc 160 for systems exposed to atmospheric conditions, SigmaGuard 750 for systems exposed to immersed conditions adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) Worldwide availability Whilst it is always the aim of PPG Protective & Marine Coatings to supply the same product on a worldwide basis, slight modication of the product is sometimes necessary to comply with local or national rules/circumstances. Under these circumstances an alternative product data sheet is used.
page 3/4
SIGMAZINC 102
October 2009
REFERENCES
179384
PDS grey
7402 0000001800
page 4/4
SIGMAZINC 102 HS
DESCRIPTION
two component high solids polyamide cured zinc epoxy primer very good primer for systems with high solids epoxy buildcoats can also be used as a system primer for various other paint systems good anticorrosive properties quick drying, can be overcoated after a short interval complies with SSPC-Paint 20
grey, redbrown - at (1 g/cm = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 2.4 g/cm 66 2% max. 120 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 286 g/l (approx. 2.4 lb/gal) 60 - 150 m depending on system 11.0 m/l for 60 m * 2 hours min. 6 hours * max. several months * 7 days (data for components)
at least 12 months
for immersion exposure: steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 40 - 70 m steel with approved zinc silicate shop primer; pretreated according to SPSS-Ss for atmospheric exposure conditions: steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 40 - 70 m steel with approved zinc silicate shop primer; pretreated according to SPSS or powertool cleaned to SPSS-Pt3 substrate temperature should be above 5C and at least 3C above dew point
page 1/4
SIGMAZINC 102 HS
September 2009
none 8 hours at 20C
ADDITIONAL DATA
page 2/4
SIGMAZINC 102 HS
September 2009
Overcoating table for SigmaZinc 102 HS for dft up to 100 m substrate temperature minimum interval maximum interval 10C 10 hours 20C 6 hours 30C 4 hours 40C 3 hours
several months when free from zinc salts and contamination
zinc rich primers can form zinc salts on the surface; preferably they should not be weathered for long periods before overcoating an interval of several months can be allowed under clean interior exposure conditions in industrial or marine conditions or if a long recoat interval is required, it is recommended to apply a suitable sealer direct after the minimum recoating interval before overcoating any visible surface contamination must be removed by high pressure water cleaning, sandwashing, sweep blasting or mechanical cleaning Curing table for dft up to 100 m substrate temperature 10C 15C 20C 30C touch dry 5 hours 3 hours 2 hours 1 hour dry to handle 6 hours 4 hours 3 hours 1.5 hour full cure 20 days 10 days 7 days 5 days
SigmaZinc 102 HS can be applied at temperatures between 5C and 10C, but the curing rate will be very low for such applications alternative zinc rich primers are recommended: SigmaZinc 19 or SigmaFast 302 adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) Worldwide availability Whilst it is always the aim of PPG Protective & Marine Coatings to supply the same product on a worldwide basis, slight modication of the product is sometimes necessary to comply with local or national rules/circumstances. Under these circumstances an alternative product data sheet is used.
page 3/4
SIGMAZINC 102 HS
September 2009
REFERENCES
Explanation to product data sheets Safe working in conned spaces Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard Safe working in conned spaces Directives for ventilation practice Cleaning of steel and removal of rust
202554 284208
PDS redbrown grey
7702 2008001800 5000001800
page 4/4
SIGMAZINC 109
4 pages September 2009 Revision of March 2007
DESCRIPTION
two component zinc rich polyamide cured epoxy primer designed as a system primer for various paint systems good corrosion prevention properties quick drying, can be overcoated after a short interval can also serve as a holding primer for various maintenance systems when a short overcoating interval is required topcoats must be unsaponiable certicate for welding: see sheet 1880 complies with SSPC-Paint 20 and ISO 12944.5 grey - at (1 g/cm = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 2.7 g/cm 46 2% max. 174 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 469 g/l (approx. 3.9 lb/gal) 25 - 40 m depending on blasting prole 11.5 m/l for 40 m * 10 min. * min. 6 hours * max. several months * 7 days * (data for components)
COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20C Mass density Volume solids VOC (supplied) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Curing time
at least 12 months
steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 40 - 70 m SigmaZinc 109 must not be applied at a temperature below 5C substrate temperature must be above 5C and at least 3C above dew point during application and curing mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener 75 : 25 the temperature of the mixed base and hardener should preferably be above 15C, otherwise extra solvent may be required to obtain application viscosity too much solvent results in reduced sag resistance and slower cure thinner should be added after mixing the components
none 48 hours at 20C, 6 hours at 35C
page 1/4
SIGMAZINC 109
September 2009
ADDITIONAL DATA
Overcoating table for Sigmazinc 109 for dft up to 40 m substrate temperature with SigmaCover 522, SigmaCover minimum 435, SigmaCover 456 interval 10C 8 hours 20C 6 hours 30C 4 hours
maximum interval on surface free from zinc salts; several months zinc rich primers can form zinc salts on the surface; preferably they should not be weathered for long periods before overcoating an interval of several months can be allowed under clean interior exposure conditions in clean exterior conditions, a maximum interval of 14 days can be tolerated, but in industrial or marine conditions this interval should be reduced to the practical minimum
page 2/4
SIGMAZINC 109
September 2009
before overcoating any visible surface contamination must be removed by sandwashing, sweep blasting or mechanical cleaning when a longer overcoating interval is required, it is recommended to overcoat SigmaZinc 109 as soon as possible with SigmaCover 522 Curing table for dft up to 40 m substrate temperature 10C 15C 20C 30C touch dry 30 min. 20 min. 10 min. 8 min. full cure 20 days 10 days 7 days 5 days
SigmaZinc 109 can be applied at temperatures down to 5C, but the curing rate will be very low for such applications alternative zinc rich primers are recommended: SigmaZinc 19, SigmaZinc 158 and SigmaZinc 160 for systems exposed to atmospheric conditions, SigmaGuard 750 for systems exposed to immersed conditions adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) Worldwide availability Whilst it is always the aim of PPG Protective & Marine Coatings to supply the same product on a worldwide basis, slight modication of the product is sometimes necessary to comply with local or national rules/circumstances. Under these circumstances an alternative product data sheet is used. Explanation to product data sheets Safety indications Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard Safe working in conned spaces Directives for ventilation practice Cleaning of steel and removal of rust see information sheet 1411 see information sheet 1430 see information sheet 1431 see information sheet 1433 see information sheet 1434 see information sheet 1490
REFERENCES
page 3/4
SIGMAZINC 109
September 2009
179500
PDS grey
7401 0000001800
page 4/4
SIGMAZINC 109 HS
4 pages July 2011 Revision of December 2009
DESCRIPTION
two component high solids polyamide adduct cured zinc rich epoxy primer designed as a system primer for various paint systems excellent anticorrosive properties quick drying, can be overcoated after a short interval can serve as a holding primer for various maintenance systems for a total repair very good primer for systems with high solids epoxy buildcoats complies with SSPC-Paint 20 and ISO 12944.5 grey, reddish grey - at (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 2.8 g/cm 66 2% max. 106 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 299 g/l (approx. 2.5 lb/gal) 60 - 150 m depending on system 11.0 m/l for 60 m * 2.5 hours * min. 4 hours * max. several months * 7 days (data for components) at least 12 months
COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20C Mass density Volume solids VOC (supplied) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Full cure after Shelf life (cool and dry place) RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES
page 1/4
SIGMAZINC 109 HS
July 2011
none 8 hours at 20C Thinner 91-92 0 - 15%, depending on required thickness and application conditions approx. 0.43 - 0.48 mm (= 0.017 - 0.019 in) 15 MPa (= approx. 150 bar; 2130 p.s.i.) Thinner 91-92 0 - 15%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 1.8 - 2.2 mm 0.3 - 0.6 MPa (= approx. 3 - 6 bar; 43 - 85 p.s.i.) Thinner 91-92 0 - 10% Thinner 90-53 for paint and recommended thinners see safety sheets 1430, 1431 and relevant material safety data sheets this is a solvent borne paint and care should be taken to avoid inhalation of spray mist or vapour as well as contact between the wet paint and exposed skin or eyes
ADDITIONAL DATA
page 2/4
SIGMAZINC 109 HS
July 2011
Overcoating table for dft 100 m substrate temperature minimum interval maximum interval 10C 8 hours 20C 4 hours 30C 3 hours 40C 2 hours
3 months when free from zinc salts and contamination
zinc rich primers can form zinc salts on the surface; preferably they should not be weathered for long periods before overcoating an interval of several months can be allowed under clean interior exposure conditions in clean exterior conditions, a maximum interval of 3 months can be tolerated, but in industrial or marine conditions this interval should be reduced to the practical minimum before overcoating visible surface contamination must be removed by high pressure water cleaning, sweep blasting or mechanical cleaning Curing table for dft up to 100 m substrate temperature 10C 15C 20C 30C touch dry 5 hours 3 hours 2.5 hours 1 hour dry to handle 6 hours 4 hours 3 hours 1.5 hour full cure 20 days 10 days 7 days 5 days
SigmaZinc 109 HS can be applied at temperatures between 5C and 10C, but the curing rate will be very low for such applications alternative zinc rich primers are recommended: SigmaZinc 19, SigmaZinc 158 and SigmaZinc 160 for systems exposed to atmospheric conditions, SigmaGuard 750 for systems exposed to immersed conditions adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) Worldwide availability Whilst it is always the aim of PPG Protective & Marine Coatings to supply the same product on a worldwide basis, slight modication of the product is sometimes necessary to comply with local or national rules/circumstances. Under these circumstances an alternative product data sheet is used.
page 3/4
SIGMAZINC 109 HS
July 2011
REFERENCES
284209 218766
grey reddish grey PDS
5000001800 5010001800 7701
page 4/4
SIGMAZINC 158
6 pages May 2011 Revision of October 2009
DESCRIPTION
two component moisture curing zinc (ethyl) silicate primer
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS anticorrosive primer for structural steel suitable as a system primer in various paint systems based on unsaponiable binders galvanic action eliminates sub lm corrosion can withstand substrate temperatures from -90C up to +400C, under normal atmospheric exposure conditions when suitably topcoated provides excellent corrosion protection for steel substrates up to +520C good low temperature curing good impact and abrasion resistance must not be exposed to alkaline (more than pH 9) or acidic (less than pH 5.5) liquids certicate for ASTM A-490 class 'B' for slip co-efcient complies with SSPC-Paint 20 COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20C Mass density Volume solids VOC (supplied) Recommended dry lm thickness grey, greenish grey - at (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 2.3 g/cm 65 2% max. 219 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 507 g/l (approx. 4.2 lb/gal) average dft 75 m with a minimum of 60 m on smooth non pitted, blast cleaned steel average dft 100 m with a minimum of 75 m on rough or pitted, blast cleaned steel 8.7 m/l for 75 m * 30 min. at 20C min. 12 hours * max. unlimited, zinc salts must be removed 12 hours * (data for components) Shelf life (cool and dry place) binder: at least 9 months pigment: at least 24 months (store pigment moisture free)
page 1/6
SIGMAZINC 158
May 2011
for immersion exposure: steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 40 - 70 m steel with approved zinc silicate shop primer; sweep blasted to SPSS-Ss, welds, rusty and damaged areas blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2 for atmospheric exposure conditions: steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 40 - 70 m steel with approved zinc silicate shop primer; pretreated to SPSS-Pt3 weathered galvanised steel; blast cleaned to remove rust, to roughen the surface and to remove any zinc salts which might be present substrate temperatures from -5C up to +50C during application are acceptable substrate temperature should be at least 3C above dew point relative humidity during curing should be above 50% mixing ratio by volume: binder to zinc powder 81 : 19 Many of Sigma's zinc silicates are supplied as 2 pack materials consisting of a jerrycan with pigmented binder and a drum containing a bag of zinc powder. To ensure proper mixing of both components the instructions given below must be followed. To avoid lumps in the paint do not add the binder to the zinc powder. 1) Take the bag with zinc powder out of the drum. 2.) Shake the binder in the jerrycan a few times to reach a certain degree of homogenisation. 3.) Pour about 2/3 of the binder in the empty drum. 4.) With the jerrycan now reduced in weight and containing more free space, shake it vigorously to obtain a homogeneous mix with no deposits left on the bottom, and add this to the drum. 5.) Add the zinc powder gradually to the pigmented binder in the drum and at the same time continuously stir the mixture by using a mechanical mixer (keep the speed low). 6.) Stir the zinc dust powder thoroughly through the binder (high speed) and keep stirring till, a homogeneous mixture is obtained. 7.) Strain mixture through a 30 - 60 mesh screen. 8.) Agitate continuously during application (low speed). The use of a dedicated pump with a constant agitation for a zinc silicate coating is recommended. Note: At application temperature above 30C addition of max 10% by volume of Thinner 90-53 may be necessary.

page 2/6
SIGMAZINC 158
May 2011
only for touch up and spot repair Thinner 90-53 5 - 15% apply a visible wet coat with a max. dft of 25 m same for subsequent coats in order to obtain the required dft Thinner 90-53 only valid for spray application if the dft is below specication and an extra coat of SigmaZinc 158 has to be applied, SigmaZinc 158 should be thinned down with 25 - 50% Thinner 90-53, in order to obtain a visible wet coat that remains wet for some time for paint and recommended thinners see safety sheets 1430, 1431 and relevant material safety data sheets this is a solvent borne paint and care should be taken to avoid inhalation of spray mist or vapour as well as contact between the wet paint and exposed skin or eyes
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
ADDITIONAL DATA
highly pigmented zinc silicate primers produce dry lms with void spaces in between the particles Film thickness and spreading rate theoretical spreading rate m/l dft in m 8.7 75 6.5 100
35 m
page 3/6
SIGMAZINC 158
May 2011
Overcoating table (relative humidity during curing should be above 50%) substrate temperature minimum interval maximum interval -5C 24 hours 0C 24 hours 10C 18 hours 20C 12 hours 30C 6 hours 40C 4 hours
unlimited, provided the surface is cleaned from contamination and zinc salts
a relative humidity below 50% requires a much longer overcoating time if part of a coating system and in order to avoid possible popping effects (pinholes) SigmaZinc 158 should be sealed with approved coatings SigmaZinc 158 is a moisture curing zinc silicate, this means that it only cures after sufcient take up of water (from the atmosphere or immersion) during and after application; it is recommended that relative humidity and temperature are measured during the curing time before entering service or overcoating, a sufcient degree of cure should be obtained when curing conditions are unfavourable or when reduced overcoat times are desired, curing can be accelerated 4 hours after application by: wetting or soaking with water, keeping the surface wet for the next 2 hours, followed by drying wetting or soaking with a 0.5% ammonia solution, followed by drying before overcoating with topcoats, SigmaZinc 158 should always be visibly dry and checked on sufcient curing for measuring of the curing, the MEK rub test according to ASTM 4752 is a suitable method: after 50 double rubs with a cloth soaked in MEK (or alternatively Thinner 90-53) no dissolving of the coating should be observed
page 4/6
SIGMAZINC 158
May 2011
Curing table (relative humidity during curing should be above 50%) substrate temperature -5C 0C 10C 20C 30C 40C dry to handle 2 hours 2 hours 1 hour 30 min. 30 min. 30 min. full cure 24 hours 24 hours 18 hours 12 hours 6 hours 4 hours
SigmaZinc 158 is a moisture curing zinc silicate, this means that it only cures after sufcient take up of water, (from the atmosphere) during and after application; it is recommended that relative humidity and temperature are measured during the curing time adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) Pot life (at application viscosity) 0C 10C 20C 30C Worldwide availability 24 hours 16 hours 12 hours 6 hours
Whilst it is always the aim of PPG Protective & Marine Coatings to supply the same product on a worldwide basis, slight modication of the product is sometimes necessary to comply with local or national rules/circumstances. Under these circumstances an alternative product data sheet is used. Explanation to product data sheets Safety indications Safety in conned spaces and health safety Explosion hazard - toxic hazard Safe working in conned spaces Directives for ventilation practice Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Relative humidity - substrate temperature air temperature see information sheet 1411 see information sheet 1430 see information sheet 1431 see information sheet 1433 see information sheet 1434 see information sheet 1490 see information sheet 1650
REFERENCES
page 5/6
SIGMAZINC 158
May 2011
179568
PDS greenish grey
7558 0000002185
page 6/6
SIGMAZINC 160
5 pages October 2009 Revision of March 2007
DESCRIPTION
two component moisture curing inorganic zinc (ethyl) silicate primer
PRINCIPAL CHARACTERISTICS anticorrosive primer for structural steel two component product consisting of clear binder and zinc paste suitable as a system primer in various paint systems based on unsaponiable binders galvanic action eliminates sub lm corrosion can withstand substrate temperatures from -90C up to +400C, under normal atmospheric exposure conditions when suitably topcoated provides excellent corrosion protection for steel substrates up to +500C good low temperature curing good impact and abrasion resistance complies with SSPC-Paint 20 COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20C Mass density Volume solids VOC (supplied) Recommended dry lm thickness greenish grey - at (1 g/cm = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 2.3 g/cm 65 2% max. 218 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 503 g/l (approx. 4.2 lb/gal) when used as a system primer with dft 60 m on smooth, non pitted, blast cleaned steel average dft 100 m with a minimum of 75 m on rough or pitted, blast cleaned steel 8.7 m/l for 75 m * 30 min. at 20C min. 12 hours * max. unlimited, zinc salts must be removed 12 hours * (data for components) Shelf life (cool and dry place) at least 6 months
for water immersion exposure: steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 40 - 70 m steel with approved zinc silicate shop primer; sweep blasted to SPSS-Ss, welds, rusty and damaged areas blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2 for atmospheric exposure conditions: steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 40 - 70 m steel with approved zinc silicate shop primer; pretreated to SPSS-Pt3 weathered galvanised steel; blast cleaned to remove rust, to roughen the surface and to remove any zinc salts which might be present
page 1/5
SIGMAZINC 160
October 2009
substrate temperatures from -5C up to +50C during application are acceptable substrate temperature should be at least 3C above dew point a relative humidity of > 50% is recommended INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE mixing ratio by volume: paste to binder 64.5 : 35.5 use a mechanical mixer stir the paste thoroughly before adding the binder add the binder gradually to the paste stir thoroughly till homogeneous do not mix in reverse order strain mixture through a 30 - 60 mesh screen agitate continuously during application agitate continuously during application (low speed) The use of a dedicated pump with a constant agitation for a zinc silicate coating is recommended.
Note: At application temperature above 30C addition of max 10% by volume of Thinner 90-53 may be necessary. Pot life 12 hours at 20C *
AIR SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure BRUSH Recommended thinner Volume of thinner
Thinner 90-53 0 - 10%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 2 mm 0.3 MPa (= approx. 3 bar; 43 p.s.i.) only for touch up and spot repair Thinner 90-53 5 - 15% apply a visible wet coat with a max. dft of 25 m same for subsequent coats in order to obtain the required dft Thinner 90-53
CLEANING SOLVENT
page 2/5
SIGMAZINC 160
October 2009
UPGRADING DFT
only valid for spray application if the dft is below specication and an extra coat of SigmaZinc 160 has to be applied, SigmaZinc 160 should be thinned down with 25 - 50% Thinner 90-53, in order to obtain a visible wet coat that remains wet for some time for paint and recommended thinners see safety sheets 1430, 1431 and relevant material safety data sheets this is a solvent borne paint and care should be taken to avoid inhalation of spray mist or vapour as well as contact between the wet paint and exposed skin or eyes
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
ADDITIONAL DATA
highly pigmented zinc silicate primers produce dry lms with void spaces in between the particles Film thickness and spreading rate theoretical spreading rate m/l dft in m 10.8 60 8.7 75 6.5 100 5.2 125
Overcoating table (relative humidity during curing should be above 50%) substrate temperature minimum interval maximum interval -5C 24 hours 0C 24 hours 10C 18 hours 20C 12 hours 30C 6 hours 40C 4 hours
a relative humidity below 50% requires a much longer overcoating time if part of a coating system and in order to avoid possible popping effects (pinholes) SigmaZinc 160 should be sealed with approved coatings before entering service or overcoating, a sufcient degree of cure should be obtained when curing conditions are unfavourable or when reduced overcoat times are desired, curing can be accelerated 4 hours after application by: wetting or soaking with water, keeping the surface wet for the next 2 hours, followed by drying wetting or soaking with a 0.5% ammonia solution, followed by drying before overcoating with topcoats, SigmaZinc 160 should always be visibly dry and checked on sufcient curing for measuring of the curing, the MEK rub test according to ASTM 4752 is a suitable method: after 50 double rubs with a cloth soaked in MEK (or alternatively Thinner 90-53) no dissolving of the coating should be observed
page 3/5
SIGMAZINC 160
October 2009
SigmaZinc 160 is a moisture curing zinc silicate, this means that it only cures after sufcient take up of water (from the atmosphere) during and after application; it is recommended that relative humidity and temperature are measured during the curing time relative humidity during curing recommended to be above 50% adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) Pot life (at application viscosity) 0C 10C 20C 30C Worldwide availability 24 hours 16 hours 12 hours 6 hours
REFERENCES
page 4/5
SIGMAZINC 160
October 2009
179322
PDS greenish grey
7560 0000002180
page 5/5
SIGMAZINC 170
DESCRIPTION
two component moisture curing zinc (ethyl) silicate coating anticorrosive primer for structural steel high zinc content resulting in excellent corrosion protection complies with SSPC-Paint 20 suitable as a system primer in various paint systems based on unsaponiable binders galvanic action eliminates sub lm corrosion good low temperature curing good impact and abrasion resistance must not be exposed to alkaline (more than pH 9) or acidic (less than pH 5.5) liquids
COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20C Mass density Volume solids VOC (supplied) Recommended dry lm thickness
grey - at (1 g/cm = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 2.4 g/cm 65 2% max. 221 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 480 g/l (approx. 4.0 lb/gal) average dft 75 m with a minimum of 60 m on smooth non pitted, blast cleaned steel average dft 100 m with a minimum of 75 m on rough or pitted, blast cleaned steel 8.7 m/l for 75 m * 15 min. at 20C min. 16 hours * max. unlimited, zinc salts must be removed 12 hours * (data for components) binder: at least 9 months pigment: at least 24 months (store pigment moisture free)
Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Curing time Shelf life (cool and dry place)
page 1/6
SIGMAZINC 170
March 2011
for immersion exposure: steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 40 - 70 m steel with approved zinc silicate shop primer; sweep blasted to SPSS-Ss, welds, rusty and damaged areas blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2 for atmospheric exposure conditions: steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting prole 40 - 70 m steel with approved zinc silicate shop primer; pretreated to SPSS-Pt3 weathered galvanised steel; blast cleaned to remove rust, to roughen the surface and to remove any zinc salts which might be present substrate temperatures from -5C up to +50C during application are acceptable substrate temperature should be at least 3C above dew point relative humidity should be above 50% mixing ratio by volume: binder to zinc powder 78 : 22 Many of Sigma's zinc silicates are supplied as 2 pack materials consisting of a jerrycan with pigmented binder and a drum containing a bag of zinc powder. To ensure proper mixing of both components the instructions given below must be followed. To avoid lumps in the paint do not add the binder to the zinc powder. 1) Take the bag with zinc powder out of the drum. 2.) Shake the binder in the jerrycan a few times to reach a certain degree of homogenisation. 3.) Pour about 2/3 of the binder in the empty drum. 4.) With the jerrycan now reduced in weight and containing more free space, shake it vigorously to obtain a homogeneous mix with no deposits left on the bottom, and add this to the drum. 5.) Add the zinc powder gradually to the pigmented binder in the drum and at the same time continuously stir the mixture by using a mechanical mixer (keep the speed low). 6.) Stir the zinc dust powder thoroughly through the binder (high speed) and keep stirring till, a homogeneous mixture is obtained. 7.) Strain mixture through a 30 - 60 mesh screen. 8.) Agitate continuously during application (low speed). The use of a dedicated pump with a constant agitation for a zinc silicate coating is recommended. Note: At application temperature above 30C addition of max 10% by volume of Thinner 90-53 may be necessary.

page 2/6
SIGMAZINC 170
March 2011
only for touch up and spot repair Thinner 90-53 5 - 15% apply a visible wet coat with a max. dft of 25 m same for subsequent coats in order to obtain the required dft Thinner 90-53 only valid for spray application if the dft is below specication and an extra coat of SigmaZinc 170 has to be applied, SigmaZinc 170 should be thinned down with 25 - 50% Thinner 90-53, in order to obtain a visible wet coat that remains wet for some time for paint and recommended thinners see safety sheets 1430, 1431 and relevant material safety data sheets this is a solvent borne paint and care should be taken to avoid inhalation of spray mist or vapour as well as contact between the wet paint and exposed skin or eyes
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
ADDITIONAL DATA
highly pigmented zinc silicate primers produce dry lms with void spaces in between the particles Film thickness and spreading rate theoretical spreading rate m/l dft in m 8.7 75 6.5 100 5.2 125
35 m
page 3/6
SIGMAZINC 170
March 2011
Overcoating table (relative humidity during curing should be minimum 50%) substrate temperature minimum interval maximum interval -5C 48 hours 0C 48 hours 10C 48 hours 20C 32 hours 30C 24 hours 40C 12 hours
Overcoating table (relative humidity during curing should be above 70%) substrate temperature minimum interval maximum interval -5C 24 hours 0C 24 hours 10C 24 hours 20C 16 hours 30C * 12 hours 40C 6 hours
a relative humidity below 50% requires a much longer overcoating time if part of a coating system and in order to avoid possible popping effects (pinholes) SigmaZinc 170 should be sealed with approved coatings SigmaZinc 170 is a moisture curing zinc silicate, this means that it only cures after sufcient take up of water from the atmosphere during and after application; it is recommended that relative humidity and temperature are measured during the curing time before entering service or overcoating, a sufcient degree of cure should be obtained when curing conditions are unfavourable or when reduced overcoat times are desired, curing can be accelerated 4 hours after application by: wetting or soaking with water, keeping the surface wet for the next 2 hours, followed by drying wetting or soaking with a 0.5% ammonia solution, followed by drying before overcoating with topcoats, SigmaZinc 170 should always be visibly dry and checked on sufcient curing for measuring of the curing, the MEK rub test according to ASTM 4752 is a suitable method: after 50 double rubs with a cloth soaked in MEK (or alternatively Thinner 90-53) no dissolving of the coating should be observed
page 4/6
SIGMAZINC 170
March 2011
SigmaZinc 170 is a moisture curing zinc silicate, this means that it only cures after sufcient take up of water from the atmosphere during and after application; it is recommended that relative humidity and temperature are measured during the curing time relative humidity during curing recommended to be above 50% adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) Pot life (at application viscosity) 0C 10C 20C 30C Worldwide availability 16 hours 12 hours 8 hours 4 hours
REFERENCES
page 5/6
SIGMAZINC 170
March 2011
PDS
7570
page 6/6
SIGMAZINC 68 HS
DESCRIPTION
three component high solids polyamide adduct cured zinc epoxy primer designed as a system primer for various paint systems excellent anticorrosive properties quick drying, can be overcoated after a short interval can serve as a holding primer for various maintenance systems for a total repair very good primer for systems with high solids epoxy buildcoats complies with SSPC-Paint 20 and ISO 12944.5 meets RSRC specication for structural joints using ADTM325/ A490 bolts, Class B grey, reddish grey - at (1 g/cm = 8.35 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 2.8 g/cm 70 2% max. 288 g/l 75 m depending on system 9.3 m/l for 75 m * 2 hours * min. 2 hours * max. several months * 7 days (data for components) at least 12 months
COLOURS AND GLOSS BASIC DATA AT 20C Mass density Volume solids VOC (supplied) Recommended dry lm thickness Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Full cure after Shelf life (cool and dry place) RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES
page 1/4
SIGMAZINC 68 HS
September 2011
mixing ratio by volume: base to hardener to powder: 47:20:33 the temperature of the mixed base and hardener should preferably be above 15C, otherwise extra solvent may be required to obtain application viscosity too much solvent results in reduced sag resistance and slower cure thinner should be added after mixing the components
none 16 hours at 20C Thinner 91-92 0 - 15%, depending on required thickness and application conditions approx. 0.43 - 0.48 mm (= 0.017 - 0.019 in) 15 MPa (= approx. 150 bar; 2130 p.s.i.) Thinner 91-92 0 - 15%, depending on required thickness and application conditions 1.8 - 2.2 mm 0.3 - 0.6 MPa (= approx. 3 - 6 bar; 43 - 85 p.s.i.) Thinner 91-92 0 - 10% Thinner 90-53 for paint and recommended thinners see safety sheets 1430, 1431 and relevant material safety data sheets this is a solvent borne paint and care should be taken to avoid inhalation of spray mist or vapour as well as contact between the wet paint and exposed skin or eyes
ADDITIONAL DATA
page 2/4
SIGMAZINC 68 HS
September 2011
Overcoating table for dft 100 m substrate temperature minimum interval maximum interval 10C 6 hours 20C 2 hours 30C 1 hour 40C 1 hour
3 months when free from zinc salts and contamination
zinc rich primers can form zinc salts on the surface; preferably they should not be weathered for long periods before overcoating an interval of several months can be allowed under clean interior exposure conditions in clean exterior conditions, a maximum interval of 3 months can be tolerated, but in industrial or marine conditions this interval should be reduced to the practical minimum before overcoating visible surface contamination must be removed by high pressure water cleaning, sweep blasting or mechanical cleaning Curing table for dft up to 100 m substrate temperature 10C 20C 30C touch dry 3 hours 2 hours 1 hour dry to handle 36 hours 8 hours 4 hours full cure 20 days 7 days 5 days
SigmaZinc 68 HS can be applied at temperatures between 5C and 10C, but the curing rate will be very low for such applications alternative zinc rich primers are recommended: SigmaZinc 19, SigmaZinc 158 and SigmaZinc 160 for systems exposed to atmospheric conditions, SigmaGuard 750 for systems exposed to immersed conditions adequate ventilation must be maintained during application and curing (please refer to sheets 1433 and 1434) Worldwide availability Whilst it is always the aim of PPG Protective & Marine Coatings to supply the same product on a worldwide basis, slight modication of the product is sometimes necessary to comply with local or national rules/circumstances. Under these circumstances an alternative product data sheet is used.
page 3/4
SIGMAZINC 68 HS
September 2011
REFERENCES
PDS
7403
page 4/4
PASSIVE FIRE PROTECTION

PROTECTION OF STEEL FROM CELLULOSIC FIRES
STEELGUARD 551
3 pages 15 July 2009
DESCRIPTION
one component thin-lm solvent borne intumescent coating for re protection of structural steelwork provides up to 60 minutes protection from cellulosic res off-site or on-site application up to 1500 m dft in a single coat suitable for C1 to C4 internal and external environments (ISO 12944); for dry internal (C1) environments no topcoat is required weather resistant up to 12 months without topcoat provided the coating has been applied in accordance with Information Sheet 1222 and is not subject to running or pooling water, hot high humidity or immersion tested to BS 476 and certied with various national requirements white - matt (1 g/cm = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.35 g/cm 75 3% max. 257 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 330 g/l (UK PG6/23(92) Appendix 3) normally 200 - 1500 m applied in one coat note: the required dry lm thickness must be in accordance with the approval certication 1.07 m/l for 700 m * 30 minutes * min. 6 hours with itself * min. 48 hours with suitable topcoat * max. unlimited * at least 12 months
Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval
approved primer, dry, sound and free from contamination substrate temperature should be at least 3C above dew point during application and drying should not be applied under 5C and above 50C relative humidity during application must be lower than 85% stir thoroughly till homogeneous and free of lumps too much solvent results in reduced sag resistance
page 1/3

STEELGUARD 551
15 July 2009
when needed up to 5% Thinner 21-06 may be used 20 - 50, depending on shape of steel parts approx. 0.48 - 0.63 mm (= 0.019 - 0.025 in) 20 MPa (= approx. 200 bar; 2800 p.s.i.)
note: a 30 mesh / 500 m internal lter is recommended
BRUSH Recommended thinner CLEANING SOLVENT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
for small areas only (touch up and repair) no thinner should be added Thinner 21-06 for paint and recommended thinners see safety sheets 1430, 1431 and relevant material safety data sheets this is a solvent borne paint and care should be taken to avoid inhalation of spray mist or vapour as well as contact between the wet paint and exposed skin or eyes
ADDITIONAL DATA
Film thickness and spreading rate theoretical spreading rate m/l dft in m max. dft when brushing: Overcoating table for Steelguard 551 for dft up to 700 m 3.75 200 1.88 400 1.07 700 0.75 1000 0.50 1500 300 m
with itself
substrate temperature minimum interval maximum interval
5C 12 hours unlimited
Overcoating table for Steelguard 551 for dft up to 1000 m with Steelguard 2458 substrate temperature minimum interval maximum interval 5C 4 hours unlimited 10C 2 hours unlimited 15C 90 min. unlimited 20C 60 min. unlimited 30C 45 min. unlimited
page 2/3

STEELGUARD 551
15 July 2009
Overcoating table for Steelguard 551 for dft up to 1000 m with other approved top coats substrate temperature minimum interval maximum interval 5C 10C 15C 60 hours unlimited 20C 48 hours unlimited 30C 36 hours unlimited
120 hours 72 hours unlimited unlimited
Drying table for dft up to 700 m substrate temperature 5C 10C 15C 20C 30C touch dry 120 min. 90 min. 60 min. 30 min. 20 min.
drying times may vary considerable depending on ambient conditions, A/V m-1 (Hp/A) of section and applied lm thickness
LIMITATION OF LIABILITY The information in this data sheet is based upon laboratory tests we believe to be accurate and is intended for guidance only. All recommendations or suggestions relating to the use of the coating products made by PPG Protective & Marine Coatings, whether in technical documentation, or in response to a specic enquiry, or otherwise, are based on data which to the best of our knowledge are reliable. The products and information are designed for users having the requisite knowledge and industrial skills and it is the end-user's responsibility to determine the suitability of the product for its intended use. PPG Protective & Marine Coatings has no control over either the quality or condition of the substrate, or the many factors affecting the use and application of the product. PPG Protective & Marine Coatings does therefore not accept any liability arising from loss, injury or damage resulting from such use or the contents of this data sheet (unless there are written agreements stating otherwise). The data contained herein are liable to modication as a result of practical experience and continuous product development. This data sheet replaces and annuls all previous issues and it is therefore the user's responsibility to ensure that this sheet is current prior to using the product. The English text of this document shall prevail over any translation thereof.
287680
PDS white
7761 3000AM2200
page 3/3

STEELGUARD 552
DESCRIPTION
one component thin-lm solvent borne intumescent coating for re protection of structural steelwork provides up to 60 minutes protection from cellulosic res off-site or on-site application up to 1500 m dft in a single coat suitable for C1 to C4 internal and external environments (ISO 12944); for dry internal (C1) environments no topcoat is required weather resistant up to 12 months without topcoat provided the coating has been applied in accordance with Information Sheet 1222 and is not subject to running or pooling water, hot high humidity or immersion tested to national and international standards such as ENV 13381-4 and BS 476 and certied with various national requirements
white - matt (1 g/cm = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.35 g/cm 75 3% max. 257 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 330 g/l (UK PG6/23(92) Appendix 3) normally 200 - 1500 m applied in one coat note: the required dry lm thickness must be in accordance with the approval certication 1.07 m/l for 700 m * 30 minutes * min. 6 hours with itself * min. 48 hours with suitable topcoat * max. unlimited * at least 12 months
page 1/3

STEELGUARD 552
15 July 2009
AIRLESS SPRAY Recommended thinner Nozzle angle Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure
ADDITIONAL DATA
with itself
page 2/3

STEELGUARD 552
15 July 2009
299480
PDS white
7762 3000AM2200
page 3/3

STEELGUARD 553
DESCRIPTION
one component thin-lm solvent borne intumescent coating for re protection of structural steelwork provides 90 minutes protection from cellulosic res off-site or on-site application up to 1500 m dft in a single coat suitable for C1 to C4 internal and external environments (ISO 12944); for dry internal (C1) environments no topcoat is required weather resistant up to 12 months without topcoat provided the coating has been applied in accordance with Information Sheet 1222 and is not subject to running or pooling water, hot high humidity or immersion tested to BS 476 and certied with the national requirements white - matt (1 g/cm = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.35 g/cm 75 3% max. 257 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 330 g/l (UK PG6/23(92) Appendix 3) normally 200 - 1500 m applied in one coat note: the required dry lm thickness must be in accordance with the approval certication 1.07 m/l for 700 m * 30 minutes * min. 6 hours with itself * min. 48 hours with suitable topcoat * max. unlimited * at least 12 months
page 1/3

STEELGUARD 553
15 July 2009
ADDITIONAL DATA
with itself
page 2/3

STEELGUARD 553
15 July 2009
299481
PDS white
7763 3000AM2200
page 3/3

STEELGUARD 554
DESCRIPTION
one component thin-lm solvent borne intumescent coating for re protection of structural steelwork provides 120 minutes protection from cellulosic res off-site or on-site application up to 1500 m dft in a single coat suitable for C1 to C4 internal and external environments (ISO 12944); for dry internal (C1) environments no topcoat is required weather resistant up to 12 months without topcoat provided the coating has been applied in accordance with Information Sheet 1222 and is not subject to running or pooling water, hot high humidity or immersion tested to BS 476 and certied with the national requirements white - matt (1 g/cm = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.35 g/cm 75 3% max. 257 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 330 g/l (UK PG6/23(92) Appendix 3) normally 200 - 1500 m applied in one coat note: the required dry lm thickness must be in accordance with the approval certication 1.07 m/l for 700 m * 30 minutes * min. 6 hours with itself * min. 48 hours with suitable topcoat * max. unlimited * at least 12 months
page 1/3

STEELGUARD 554
15 July 2009
ADDITIONAL DATA
with itself
page 2/3

STEELGUARD 554
15 July 2009
299482
PDS white
7764 3000AM2200
page 3/3

STEELGUARD 561
3 pages December 2010 Revision of July 2009
DESCRIPTION
one component thin-lm solvent borne intumescent coating for re protection of structural steelwork provides up to 90 minutes protection from cellulosic res fast drying, providing short handling times off-site or on-site application up to 1000 m dft in a single coat suitable for C1 to C4 internal and external environments (ISO 12944); for dry internal (C1) environments no topcoat is required weather resistant up to 12 months without topcoat provided the coating has been applied in accordance with Information Sheet 1222 and is not subject to running or pooling water, hot high humidity or immersion tested to BS 476 and certied with various national requirements white - matt (1 g/cm = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.35 g/cm 75 3% max. 255 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 327 g/l (UK PG6/23(92) Appendix 3) normally 200 - 1000 m applied in one coat note:the required dry lm thickness must be in accordance with the approval certication 1.07 m/l for 700 m * 20 minutes * min. 4 hours with itself * min. 24 hours with suitable topcoat * max. unlimited * at least 12 months
page 1/3

STEELGUARD 561
December 2010
AIRLESS SPRAY Recommended thinner Nozzle angle Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure BRUSH Recommended thinner CLEANING SOLVENT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
ADDITIONAL DATA
with itself
Overcoating table for Steelguard 561 for dft up to 1000 m with Steelguard 2458 substrate temperature minimum interval maximum interval 5C 2 hours unlimited 10C 1.5 hour unlimited 15C 1 hour unlimited 20C 30 min. unlimited 30C 20 min. unlimited
page 2/3

STEELGUARD 561
December 2010
Overcoating table for Steelguard 561 for dft up to 1000 m with other approved top coats substrate temperature minimum interval maximum interval 5C 72 hours unlimited 10C 60 hours unlimited 15C 48 hours unlimited 20C 24 hours unlimited 30C 16 hours unlimited
287680
PDS white
7765 3000AM2200
page 3/3

STEELGUARD 562
DESCRIPTION
one component thin-lm solvent borne intumescent coating for re protection of structural steelwork provides 60 minutes protection from cellulosic res 60 minutes SCI assesment of beams with circular web openings fast drying, providing short handling times off-site or on-site application up to 1000 m dft in a single coat suitable for C1 to C4 internal and external environments (ISO 12944); for dry internal (C1) environments no topcoat is required weather resistant up to 12 months without topcoat provided the coating has been applied in accordance with Information Sheet 1222 and is not subject to running or pooling water, hot high humidity or immersion tested to national and international standards such as ENV 13381-4 and BS 476 and certied with various national requirements
page 1/3

STEELGUARD 562
15 July 2009
ADDITIONAL DATA
with itself
page 2/3

STEELGUARD 562
15 July 2009
PDS white
7766 3000AM2200
page 3/3

STEELGUARD 563
3 pages April 2010 Revision of July 2009
DESCRIPTION
one component thin-lm solvent borne intumescent coating for re protection of structural steelwork provides 90 minutes protection from cellulosic res fast drying, providing short handling times off-site or on-site application up to 1000 m dft in a single coat suitable for C1 to C4 internal and external environments (ISO 12944); for dry internal (C1) environments no topcoat is required weather resistant up to 12 months without topcoat provided the coating has been applied in accordance with Information Sheet 1222 and is not subject to running or pooling water, hot high humidity or immersion tested to national and international standards such as ENV 13381-4 and BS 476 and certied with various national requirements
Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Shelf life (cool and dry place) RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES
page 1/3

STEELGUARD 563
April 2010
AIRLESS SPRAY Recommended thinner Nozzle angle Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure BRUSH Recommended thinner CLEANING SOLVENT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
ADDITIONAL DATA
with itself
page 2/3

STEELGUARD 563
April 2010
PDS white
7767 3000AM2200
page 3/3

STEELGUARD 564
3 pages April 2010 Revision of July 2009
DESCRIPTION
one component thin-lm solvent borne intumescent coating for re protection of structural steelwork provides 120 minutes protection from cellulosic res fast drying, providing short handling times off-site or on-site application up to 1000 m dft in a single coat suitable for C1 to C4 internal and external environments (ISO 12944); for dry internal (C1) environments no topcoat is required weather resistant up to 12 months without topcoat provided the coating has been applied in accordance with Information Sheet 1222 and is not subject to running or pooling water, hot high humidity or immersion tested to national and international standards such as ENV 13381-4 and BS 476 and certied with various national requirements
Theoretical spreading rate Touch dry after Overcoating interval Shelf life (cool and dry place) RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES
approved primer, dry, sound and free from contamination substrate temperature should be at least 3C above dew point during application and drying should not be applied under 5C and above 40C relative humidity during application must be lower than 85% stir thoroughly till homogeneous and free of lumps too much solvent results in reduced sag resistance when needed up to 5% Thinner 21-06 may be used 20 - 50, depending on shape of steel parts
INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE AIRLESS SPRAY Recommended thinner Nozzle angle
page 1/3

STEELGUARD 564
April 2010
Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure BRUSH Recommended thinner CLEANING SOLVENT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
approx. 0.48 - 0.63 mm (= 0.019 - 0.025 in) 20 MPa (= approx. 200 bar; 2800 p.s.i.)
ADDITIONAL DATA
with itself
page 2/3

STEELGUARD 564
April 2010
PDS white
7768 3000AM2200
page 3/3

STEELGUARD 581
DESCRIPTION
one component thin-lm water borne intumescent coating for re protection of structural steelwork provides up to 90 minutes protection from cellulosic res 60 minutes SCI assesment of beams with circular web openings on-site application up to 700 m dft in a single coat suitable for C1 and C2 internal environments (ISO 12944); for dry internal (C1) environments no topcoat is required tested to BS 476 and certied with the national requirements white - matt (1 g/cm = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.43 g/cm 70 3% max. 20 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 30 g/l (UK PG6/23(92) Appendix 3) normally 200 - 700 m applied in one coat note:the required dry lm thickness must be in accordance with the approval certication 1.0 m/l for 700 m * 2 hours * min. 16 hours with itself * min. 18 hours with suitable topcoat * max. unlimited * at least 12 months
approved primer, dry, sound and free from contamination substrate temperature should be at least 3C above dew point during application and drying should not be applied under 10C and above 40C relative humidity during application and drying must be lower than 80% stir thoroughly till homogeneous and free of lumps too much solvent results in reduced sag resistance must be protected from freezing at all times during storage and/or transport when needed up to 5% tap water may be used 20 - 50, depending on shape of steel parts approx. 0.43 - 0.53 mm (= 0.017 - 0.021 in) 20 MPa (= approx. 200 bar; 2800 p.s.i.)
page 1/3

STEELGUARD 581
December 2010
for small areas only (touch up and repair) no thinner should be added tap water for paint and recommended thinners see safety sheets 1430, 1431 and relevant material safety data sheets although this is a water borne paint, care should be taken to avoid inhalation of spray mist or vapour as well as contact between the wet paint and exposed skin or eyes
ADDITIONAL DATA
Film thickness and spreading rate theoretical spreading rate m/l dft in m max. dft when brushing: Overcoating table for Steelguard 581 for dft up to 700 m 3.50 200 1.75 400 1.40 500 1.00 700 300 m
with itself
Overcoating table for Steelguard 581 for dft up to 700 m with approved top coats substrate temperature minimum interval maximum interval 10C 24 hours unlimited 15C 20 hours unlimited 20C 18 hours unlimited 30C 14 hours unlimited
page 2/3

STEELGUARD 581
December 2010
Drying table for dft up to 700 m substrate temperature 10C 15C 20C 30C touch dry 4 hours 3 hours 2 hours 1 hour
291802
PDS white
7769 3000AM2200
page 3/3

STEELGUARD FM 549
DESCRIPTION
one component thin-lm solvent borne intumescent coating for re protection of structural steelwork provides up to 120 minutes protection from cellulosic res off-site or on-site application up to 1500 m dft in a single coat suitable for C1 and C2 internal environments (ISO 12944); for dry internal (C1) environments no topcoat is required tested to national and international standards such as ENV 13381-4 and BS 476 and certied with various national requirements
page 1/3

STEELGUARD FM 549
15 July 2009
ADDITIONAL DATA
Film thickness and spreading rate theoretical spreading rate m/l dft in m max. dft when brushing: Overcoating table for Steelguard FM 549 for dft up to 700 m 3.40 200 1.70 400 0.97 700 0.68 1000 0.45 1500 300 m
with itself
Overcoating table for Steelguard FM 549 for dft up to 1000 m with Steelguard 2458 substrate temperature minimum interval maximum interval 5C 4 hours unlimited 10C 2 hours unlimited 15C 90 min. unlimited 20C 60 min. unlimited 30C 45 min. unlimited
page 2/3

STEELGUARD FM 549
15 July 2009
Overcoating table for Steelguard FM 549 for dft up to 1000 m with other approved top coats substrate temperature minimum interval maximum interval 5C 10C 15C 60 hours unlimited 20C 48 hours unlimited 30C 36 hours unlimited
287671
PDS white
7731 3000AM2200
page 3/3

STEELGUARD FM 550
DESCRIPTION
one component thin-lm solvent borne intumescent coating for re protection of structural steelwork provides up to 120 minutes protection from cellulosic res off-site or on-site application up to 1500 m dft in a single coat suitable for C1 to C4 internal and external environments (ISO 12944); for dry internal (C1) environments no topcoat is required weather resistant up to 12 months without topcoat provided the coating has been applied in accordance with Information Sheet 1222 and is not subject to running or pooling water, hot high humidity or immersion tested to national and international standards such as BS 476, ENV 13381-4, UL 263 and certied with various national requirements
white - matt (1 g/cm = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.3 g/cm 68 3% max. 293 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 325 g/l (UK PG6/23(92) Appendix 3) normally 200 - 1500 m applied in one coat note:the required dry lm thickness must be in accordance with the approval certication 0.97 m/l for 700 m * 30 minutes * min. 6 hours with itself * min. 48 hours with suitable topcoat * max. unlimited * at least 12 months
page 1/4

STEELGUARD FM 550
December 2010
Notes:- all lters including surge bottle and gun lters to be removed - a 30 mesh / 500 m internal lter is recommended
ADDITIONAL DATA
with itself
page 2/4

STEELGUARD FM 550
December 2010
Overcoating table for Steelguard FM 550 for dft up to 1000 m with Steelguard 2458 substrate temperature minimum interval maximum interval 5C 4 hours unlimited 10C 2 hours unlimited 15C 90 min. unlimited 20C 60 min. unlimited 30C 45 min. unlimited
Overcoating table for Steelguard FM 550 for dft up to 1000 m with other approved top coats substrate temperature minimum interval maximum interval 5C 10C 15C 60 hours unlimited 20C 48 hours unlimited 30C 36 hours unlimited
page 3/4

STEELGUARD FM 550
December 2010
287673
PDS white
7732 3000AM2200
page 4/4

STEELGUARD FM 560
DESCRIPTION
one component thin-lm solvent borne intumescent coating for re protection of structural steelwork provides up to 120 minutes protection from cellulosic res fast drying, providing short handling times off-site or on-site application up to 1000 m dft in a single coat suitable for C1 to C4 internal and external environments (ISO 12944); for dry internal (C1) environments no topcoat is required weather resistant up to 12 months without topcoat provided the coating has been applied in accordance with Information Sheet 1222 and is not subject to running or pooling water, hot high humidity or immersion tested to national and international standards such as ENV 13381-4 and BS 476 and certied with various national requirements
white, grey - matt (1 g/cm = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.3 g/cm 68 3% max. 294 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 325 g/l (UK PG6/23(92) Appendix 3) normally 200 - 1000 m applied in one coat note: the required dry lm thickness must be in accordance with the approval certication 0.97 m/l for 700 m * 20 minutes * min. 4 hours with itself * min. 24 hours with suitable topcoat * max. unlimited * at least 12 months
page 1/3

STEELGUARD FM 560
15 July 2009
ADDITIONAL DATA
with itself
Overcoating table for Steelguard FM 560 for dft up to 1000 m with Steelguard 2458 substrate temperature minimum interval maximum interval 5C 120 min. unlimited 10C 90 min. unlimited 15C 60 min. unlimited 20C 30 min. unlimited 30C 20 min. unlimited
page 2/3

STEELGUARD FM 560
15 July 2009
Overcoating table for Steelguard FM 560 for dft up to 1000 m with other approved top coats substrate temperature minimum interval maximum interval 5C 72 hours unlimited 10C 60 hours unlimited 15C 48 hours unlimited 20C 24 hours unlimited 30C 16 hours unlimited
289363
PDS white
7733 3000AM2200
page 3/3

STEELGUARD FM 585
3 pages December 2010 Revision of November 2009
DESCRIPTION
one component thin-lm water borne intumescent coating for re protection of structural steelwork provides up to 90 minutes protection from cellulosic res on-site application up to 700 m dft in a single coat suitable for C1 and C2 internal environments (ISO 12944); for dry internal (C1) environments no topcoat is required tested to national and international standards such as BS 476, NT Fire 021, ENV 13381-4 and certied with various national requirements
white - matt (1 g/cm = 8.25 lb/US gal; 1 m/l = 40.7 ft/US gal) (data for mixed product) 1.43 g/cm 70 3% max. 20 g/kg (Directive 1999/13/EC, SED) max. 30 g/l (UK PG6/23(92) Appendix 3) normally 200 - 700 m applied in one coat note:the required dry lm thickness must be in accordance with the approval certication 1.0 m/l for 700 m * 2 hours * min. 16 hours with itself * min. 18 hours with suitable topcoat * max. unlimited * at least 12 months
approved primer, dry, sound and free from contamination substrate temperature should be at least 3C above dew point during application and drying should not be applied under 10C and above 40C relative humidity during application and drying must be lower than 80% stir thoroughly till homogeneous and free of lumps too much solvent results in reduced sag resistance must be protected from freezing at all times during storage and/or transport when needed up to 5% tap water may be used 20 - 50, depending on shape of steel parts approx. 0.43 - 0.53 mm (= 0.017 - 0.021 in) 20 MPa (= approx. 200 bar; 2800 p.s.i.)
page 1/3

STEELGUARD FM 585
December 2010
for small areas only (touch up and repair) no thinner should be added tap water for paint and recommended thinners see safety sheets 1430, 1431 and relevant material safety data sheets although this is a water borne paint, care should be taken to avoid inhalation of spray mist or vapour as well as contact between the wet paint and exposed skin or eyes
ADDITIONAL DATA
Film thickness and spreading rate theoretical spreading rate m/l dft in m max. dft when brushing: Overcoating table for Steelguard FM 585 for dft up to 700 m 3.50 200 1.75 400 1.40 500 1.00 700 300 m
with itself
Overcoating table for Steelguard FM 585 for dft up to 700 m with approved top coats substrate temperature minimum interval maximum interval 10C 24 hours unlimited 15C 20 hours unlimited 20C 18 hours unlimited 30C 14 hours unlimited
page 2/3

STEELGUARD FM 585
December 2010
Drying table for dft up to 700 m substrate temperature 10C 15C 20C 30C touch dry 4 hours 3 hours 2 hours 1 hour
289315
PDS white
7735 3000AM2200
page 3/3
STEEL PROTECTION Atmospheric corrosivity category C5I

a two page issue
SYSTEM
2411
September 2010
EXPOSURE CONDITIONS: Conditions of high humidity, ultraviolet radiation and chemical pollution accelerate the corrosion process and require consideration regarding increased acidic fall out. The principal effect is corrosion due to sulphur dioxide attack and this environment is characterized by an average sulphur dioxide content of more than 10 g per m air.
SPECIFICATION 1: suitable for pretreatment paint system
Zinc rich epoxy/ polyurethane system suitable for new construction and maintenance steel steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting profile (Rz) 40-70 m/1,6-2.8 mils SigmaZinc 109HS SigmaFast 370 SigmaDur 550 60 m/ 2.4 mils 160 m/6.4 mils 60 m/ 2.4 mils
page 1/2
2411
September 2010
GENERAL APPLICATION ASPECTS: The life of any protective system is determined by the dry film thickness of the anticorrosive coating system present on weldseams, sharp edges, bolts and nuts, these being the critical 20% of the surface area where breakdown begins. All critical areas should be given extra stripe coats with the same material as the consecutive coat of the system to achieve the specified dry film thickness. Giving more attention to these areas will extend the life of the maintenance system. The following parameters can be used. For hand laid welds: Beads with a surface irregularity exceeding 3 mm or with sharp crests having a radius under 2 mm should be ground. For sharp edges: All edges to be rounded off with a grinder to a radius of 2 mm or more. For pitting: Pitting in excess of 2 mm in depth and under 5 mm in diameter should be filled by welding or by use of an epoxy filler. REFERENCES SigmaZinc 109 HS SigmaFast 370 SigmaDur 550 Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Tools for maintenance management see product data see product data see product data see information sheet 1490 see information sheet 4007
Limitation of Liability - The information in this data sheet is based upon laboratory tests we believe to be accurate and is
intended for guidance only. All recommendations or suggestions relating to the use of the Sigma Coatings products made by PPG Protective & Marine Coatings, whether in technical documentation, or in response to a specific enquiry, or otherwise, are based on data which to the best of our knowledge are reliable. The products and information are designed for users having the requisite knowledge and industrial skills and it is the end-user's responsibility to determine the suitability of the product for its intended use. PPG Protective & Marine Coatings has no control over either the quality or condition of the substrate, or the many factors affecting the use and application of the product. PPG Protective & Marine Coatings does therefore not accept any liability arising from loss, injury or damage resulting from such use or the contents of this data sheet (unless there are written agreements stating otherwise). The data contained herein are liable to modification as a result of practical experience and continuous product development. This data sheet replaces and annuls all previous issues and it is therefore the users responsibility to ensure that this sheet is current prior to using the product.
page 2/2
STEEL PROTECTION Atmospheric corrosivity category C5M

a two page issue
SYSTEM
2412
September 2010
EXPOSURE CONDITIONS:
Conditions of high humidity, ultraviolet radiation and saltspray will accelerate the corrosion process, aggravated by wind borne particles. This environment is characterized by a salt content in rain water of more than 12 mg per litre.
A (zinc rich) epoxy/ polyurethane system suitable for new construction and maintenance steel steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting profile (Rz) 40-70 m/1,6-2.8 mils SigmaZinc 109HS SigmaFast 370 SigmaDur 550 60 m/ 2.4 mils 160 m/6.4 mils 60 m/ 2.4 mils
page 1/2
2412
September 2010
page 2/2

a two page issue
SYSTEM
2413
September 2010
page 1/2
2413
September 2010
page 2/2

a two page issue
SYSTEM
2414
September 2010
Conditions of high humidity, ultraviolet radiation and salt spray will accelerate the corrosion process, aggravated by wind borne particles. This environment is characterized by a salt content in rain water of more than 12 mg per litre.
A (zinc rich) epoxy/ polysiloxane system suitable for new construction and maintenance steel steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting profile (Rz) 40-70 m/1,6-2.8 mils SigmaZinc 109HS PSX 700 75 m/ 3.0 mils 125 m/ 5.0 mils
page 1/2
2414
September 2010
GENERAL APPLICATION ASPECTS: The life of any protective system is determined by the dry film thickness of the anticorrosive coating system present on weldseams, sharp edges, bolts and nuts, these being the critical 20% of the surface area where breakdown begins. All critical areas should be given extra stripe coats with the same material as the consecutive coat of the system to achieve the specified dry film thickness. Giving more attention to these areas will extend the life of the maintenance system. The following parameters can be used. For hand laid welds: Beads with a surface irregularity exceeding 3 mm or with sharp crests having a radius under 2 mm should be ground. For sharp edges: All edges to be rounded off with a grinder to a radius of 2 mm or more. For pitting: Pitting in excess of 2 mm in depth and under 5 mm in diameter should be filled by welding or by use of an epoxy filler. REFERENCES SigmaZinc 109 HS PSX 700 Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Tools for maintenance management see product data see product data see information sheet 1490 see information sheet 4007
page 2/2
STEEL PROTECTION Atmospheric corrosivity category C4

a two page issue
SYSTEM
2415
September 2010
EXPOSURE CONDITIONS: Industrial and coastal areas with moderate salinity.
A (zinc rich) epoxy/ polyurethane system suitable for new construction and maintenance steel steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting profile (Rz) 40-70 m/1,6-2.8 mils SigmaZinc 109HS SigmaFast 370 SigmaDur 520 50 m/ 2.0 mils 130m/5.2 mils 60 m/ 2.4 mils
page 1/2
2415
September 2010
page 2/2

a two page issue
SYSTEM
2416
September 2010
EXPOSURE CONDITIONS: Industrial and coastal areas with moderate salinity.
A (zinc rich) epoxy/ polyurethane system suitable for new construction and maintenance steel steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting profile (Rz) 40-70 m/1,6-2.8 mils SigmaZinc 109HS SigmaFast 370 SigmaDur 550 50 m/ 2.0 mils 130m/5.2 mils 60 m/ 2.4 mils
page 1/2
2416
September 2010
page 2/2

a two page issue
SYSTEM
2417
September 2010
EXPOSURE CONDITIONS: This environment usually covers areas away from the cost and separate from industrial or urban activity. Corrosive attack is governed mostly by humidity, rainfall and ultraviolet radiation, but is normally less aggressive than an industrial or coastal environment.
A (zinc rich) epoxy/ high solid polyurethane system suitable for new construction and maintenance steel steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting profile (Rz) 40-70 m/1,6-2.8 mils SigmaZinc 109HS SigmaDur 590 50 m/ 2.0 mils 100 m/ 4.0 mils
page 1/2
2417
September 2010
GENERAL APPLICATION ASPECTS: The life of any protective system is determined by the dry film thickness of the anticorrosive coating system present on weldseams, sharp edges, bolts and nuts, these being the critical 20% of the surface area where breakdown begins. All critical areas should be given extra stripe coats with the same material as the consecutive coat of the system to achieve the specified dry film thickness. Giving more attention to these areas will extend the life of the maintenance system. The following parameters can be used. For hand laid welds: Beads with a surface irregularity exceeding 3 mm or with sharp crests having a radius under 2 mm should be ground. For sharp edges: All edges to be rounded off with a grinder to a radius of 2 mm or more. For pitting: Pitting in excess of 2 mm in depth and under 5 mm in diameter should be filled by welding or by use of an epoxy filler. REFERENCES SigmaZinc 109 HS SigmaDur 590 Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Tools for maintenance management see product data see product data see information sheet 1490 see information sheet 4007
page 2/2

a two page issue
SYSTEM
2418
September 2010
An epoxy/ polyurethane system suitable for new construction and maintenance steel steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting profile (Rz) 40-70 m/1,6-2.8 mils SigmaFast 370 SigmaDur 520 150 m/ 6.0 mils 50 m/ 2.0 mils
page 1/2
2418
September 2010
GENERAL APPLICATION ASPECTS: The life of any protective system is determined by the dry film thickness of the anticorrosive coating system present on weldseams, sharp edges, bolts and nuts, these being the critical 20% of the surface area where breakdown begins. All critical areas should be given extra stripe coats with the same material as the consecutive coat of the system to achieve the specified dry film thickness. Giving more attention to these areas will extend the life of the maintenance system. The following parameters can be used. For hand laid welds: Beads with a surface irregularity exceeding 3 mm or with sharp crests having a radius under 2 mm should be ground. For sharp edges: All edges to be rounded off with a grinder to a radius of 2 mm or more. For pitting: Pitting in excess of 2 mm in depth and under 5 mm in diameter should be filled by welding or by use of an epoxy filler. REFERENCES SigmaFast 370 SigmaDur 520 Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Tools for maintenance management see product data see product data see information sheet 1490 see information sheet 4007
page 2/2

a two page issue
SYSTEM
2419
September 2010
An epoxy/ polyurethane system suitable for new construction and maintenance steel steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting profile (Rz) 40-70 m/1,6-2.8 mils SigmaFast 370 SigmaDur 550 150 m/ 6.0 mils 50 m/ 2.0 mils
page 1/2
2419
September 2010
GENERAL APPLICATION ASPECTS: The life of any protective system is determined by the dry film thickness of the anticorrosive coating system present on weldseams, sharp edges, bolts and nuts, these being the critical 20% of the surface area where breakdown begins. All critical areas should be given extra stripe coats with the same material as the consecutive coat of the system to achieve the specified dry film thickness. Giving more attention to these areas will extend the life of the maintenance system. The following parameters can be used. For hand laid welds: Beads with a surface irregularity exceeding 3 mm or with sharp crests having a radius under 2 mm should be ground. For sharp edges: All edges to be rounded off with a grinder to a radius of 2 mm or more. For pitting: Pitting in excess of 2 mm in depth and under 5 mm in diameter should be filled by welding or by use of an epoxy filler. REFERENCES SigmaFast 370 SigmaDur 550 Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Tools for maintenance management see product data see product data see information sheet 1490 see information sheet 4007
page 2/2

a two page issue
SYSTEM
2420
September 2010
EXPOSURE CONDITIONS INTERIOR: Chemical plants, wind towers
A (zinc rich) epoxy/ epoxy build coat system suitable for new construction and maintenance steel steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting profile (Rz) 40-70 m/1,6-2.8 mils SigmaZinc 109HS SigmaFast 370 50 m/ 2.0 mils 150 m/ 6.0 mils
page 1/2
2420
September 2010
GENERAL APPLICATION ASPECTS: The life of any protective system is determined by the dry film thickness of the anticorrosive coating system present on weldseams, sharp edges, bolts and nuts, these being the critical 20% of the surface area where breakdown begins. All critical areas should be given extra stripe coats with the same material as the consecutive coat of the system to achieve the specified dry film thickness. Giving more attention to these areas will extend the life of the maintenance system. The following parameters can be used. For hand laid welds: Beads with a surface irregularity exceeding 3 mm or with sharp crests having a radius under 2 mm should be ground. For sharp edges: All edges to be rounded off with a grinder to a radius of 2 mm or more. For pitting: Pitting in excess of 2 mm in depth and under 5 mm in diameter should be filled by welding or by use of an epoxy filler. REFERENCES SigmaZinc 109 HS SigmaFast 370 Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Tools for maintenance management see product data see product data see information sheet 1490 see information sheet 4007
page 2/2

a two page issue
SYSTEM
2421
September 2010
EXPOSURE CONDITIONS INTERIOR: Chemical plants, wind towers
An epoxy system suitable for new construction and maintenance steel steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting profile (Rz) 40-70 m/1,6-2.8 mils SigmaFast 370 SigmaFast 370 140 m/ 5.6 mils 140 m/ 5.6 mils
page 1/2
2421
September 2010
GENERAL APPLICATION ASPECTS: The life of any protective system is determined by the dry film thickness of the anticorrosive coating system present on weldseams, sharp edges, bolts and nuts, these being the critical 20% of the surface area where breakdown begins. All critical areas should be given extra stripe coats with the same material as the consecutive coat of the system to achieve the specified dry film thickness. Giving more attention to these areas will extend the life of the maintenance system. The following parameters can be used. For hand laid welds: Beads with a surface irregularity exceeding 3 mm or with sharp crests having a radius under 2 mm should be ground. For sharp edges: All edges to be rounded off with a grinder to a radius of 2 mm or more. For pitting: Pitting in excess of 2 mm in depth and under 5 mm in diameter should be filled by welding or by use of an epoxy filler. REFERENCES SigmaFast 370 Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Tools for maintenance management see product data see information sheet 1490 see information sheet 4007
page 2/2

a two page issue
SYSTEM
2422
September 2010
EXPOSURE CONDITIONS INTERIOR: Production rooms, wind towers
An epoxy system suitable for new construction and maintenance steel steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting profile (Rz) 40-70 m/1,6-2.8 mils SigmaFast 370 SigmaFast 370 100 m/ 4.0 mils 100 m/ 4.0 mils
page 1/2
2422
September 2010
GENERAL APPLICATION ASPECTS: The life of any protective system is determined by the dry film thickness of the anticorrosive coating system present on weldseams, sharp edges, bolts and nuts, these being the critical 20% of the surface area where breakdown begins. All critical areas should be given extra stripe coats with the same material as the consecutive coat of the system to achieve the specified dry film thickness. Giving more attention to these areas will extend the life of the maintenance system. The following parameters can be used. For hand laid welds: Beads with a surface irregularity exceeding 3 mm or with sharp crests having a radius under 2 mm should be ground. For sharp edges: All edges to be rounded off with a grinder to a radius of 2 mm or more. For pitting: Pitting in excess of 2 mm in depth and under 5 mm in diameter should be filled by welding or by use of an epoxy filler. REFERENCES SigmaFast 370 Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Tools for maintenance management see product data see information sheet 1490 see information sheet 4007
page 2/2

a two page issue
SYSTEM
2423
September 2010
EXPOSURE CONDITIONS INTERIOR: Production rooms, wind towers
A (zinc rich) epoxy / epoxy build coat system suitable for new construction and maintenance steel steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting profile (Rz) 40-70 m/1,6-2.8 mils SigmaZinc 109HS SigmaFast 370 50 m/ 2.0 mils 100 m/ 4.0 mils
page 1/2
2423
September 2010
GENERAL APPLICATION ASPECTS: The life of any protective system is determined by the dry film thickness of the anticorrosive coating system present on weldseams, sharp edges, bolts and nuts, these being the critical 20% of the surface area where breakdown begins. All critical areas should be given extra stripe coats with the same material as the consecutive coat of the system to achieve the specified dry film thickness. Giving more attention to these areas will extend the life of the maintenance system. The following parameters can be used. For hand laid welds: Beads with a surface irregularity exceeding 3 mm or with sharp crests having a radius under 2 mm should be ground. For sharp edges: All edges to be rounded off with a grinder to a radius of 2 mm or more. For pitting: Pitting in excess of 2 mm in depth and under 5 mm in diameter should be filled by welding or by use of an epoxy filler. REFERENCES SigmaZinc 109 HS SigmaFast 370 Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Tools for maintenance management see product data see product data see information sheet 1490 see information sheet 4007
page 2/2

a two page issue
SYSTEM
2424
September 2010
A (zinc rich) epoxy/ high solid polyurethane system suitable for new construction and maintenance steel steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting profile (Rz) 40-70 m/1,6-2.8 mils SigmaZinc 109HS SigmaDur 590 75 m/ 3.0 mils 125 m/ 5.0 mils
page 1/2
2424
September 2010
GENERAL APPLICATION ASPECTS: The life of any protective system is determined by the dry film thickness of the anticorrosive coating system present on weldseams, sharp edges, bolts and nuts, these being the critical 20% of the surface area where breakdown begins. All critical areas should be given extra stripe coats with the same material as the consecutive coat of the system to achieve the specified dry film thickness. Giving more attention to these areas will extend the life of the maintenance system. The following parameters can be used. For hand laid welds: Beads with a surface irregularity exceeding 3 mm or with sharp crests having a radius under 2 mm should be ground. For sharp edges: All edges to be rounded off with a grinder to a radius of 2 mm or more. For pitting: Pitting in excess of 2 mm in depth and under 5 mm in diameter should be filled by welding or by use of an epoxy filler. REFERENCES SigmaZinc 109 HS SigmaDur 590 Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Tools for maintenance management see product data see product data see information sheet 1490 see information sheet 4007
page 2/2

a two page issue
SYSTEM
2425
September 2010
EXPOSURE CONDITIONS: Conditions of high humidity, ultraviolet radiation and chemical pollution accelerate the corrosion process and require consideration regarding increased acidic fall out. The principal effect is corrosion due to sulphur dioxide attack and this environment is characterized by an average sulphur dioxide content of more than 10 g per m air.
page 1/2
2425
September 2010
page 2/2
STEEL PROTECTION Internal dry exposure Alkyd paint system

a two page issue EXPOSURE CONDITIONS: SPECIFICATION 1: compatible with not on top of suitable for pretreatment Inside buildings with neutral atmosphere. Relative humidity below 60%.
SYSTEM
4010
September 2005 revision of October 2004
alkyd maintenance system for intact areas and spot repair alkyd, epoxy, polyurethane, and dispersion paint chlorinated rubber, vinyl, bitumen, and epoxy tar paint steel, galvanised steel and aluminium intact areas, to be roughened damaged and rusty areas; galvanised steel and aluminium; free from any contamination and roughened by sandpapering and primed with Sigmarine 24 in a dft of 35 m/1.4 mils steel; after removal of loose paint, free from any contamination, derusted to min. SPSS-Pt2 and primed with Sigmarine 24 in a dft of 35 m/1.4 mils Sigmarine 40 Sigmarine 49 35 m/1.4 mils 35 m/1.4 mils
paint system note
if a semigloss finish is required, Sigmarine 49 can be replaced by Sigmarine 41
SPECIFICATION 2: pretreatment
alkyd system for a total repair or new construction, suitable for steel, galvanised steel and aluminium complete removal of old paint system (if applicable), derusting of steel to min. SPSS-Pt2 and roughening of galvanised steel and aluminium by sand papering Sigmarine 24 Sigmarine 49 50 m/2.0 mils 35 m/1.4 mils
paint system note
SPECIFICATION 3: pretreatment paint system
fast drying alkyd new construction system steel; derusted to ISO-St3 - SPSS - Pt2 SigmaFast 20 SigmaFast 40 60 m/2.4 mils 50 m/2.0 mils
page 1/2
STEEL PROTECTION Internal dry exposure Alkyd paint system
SYSTEM
4010
September 2005
REFERENCES SigmaFast 20 SigmaFast 40 Sigmarine 24 Sigmarine 40 Sigmarine 41 Sigmarine 49 Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Tools for maintenance management see product data sheet 7155 see product data sheet 7234 see product data sheet 7135 see product data sheet 7240 see product data sheet 7256 see product data sheet 7213 see information sheet 1490 see information sheet 4007
intended for guidance only. All recommendations or suggestions relating to the use of the products made by Sigma Coatings, whether in technical documentation, or in response to a specific enquiry, or otherwise, are based on data which to the best of our knowledge are reliable. The products and information are designed for users having the requisite knowledge and industrial skills and it is the end-user's responsibility to determine the suitability of the product for its intended use. Sigma Coatings has no control over either the quality or condition of the substrate, or the many factors affecting the use and application of the product. Sigma Coatings does therefore not accept any liability arising from loss, injury or damage resulting from such use or the contents of this data sheet (unless there are written agreements stating otherwise). The data contained herein are liable to modification as a result of practical experience and continuous product development. This data sheet replaces and annuls all previous issues and it is therefore the users responsibility to ensure that this sheet is current prior to using the product.
page 2/2
STEEL PROTECTION Internal dry exposure Recoatable epoxy/polyurethane system

a two page issue
SYSTEM
4011
Inside buildings with neutral atmosphere Relative humidity below 60%. recoatable epoxy/polyurethane maintenance system for intact areas and spot repair alkyd, epoxy, polyurethane, chlorinated rubber, vinyl and dispersion paint bitumen and epoxy tar paint steel, galvanised steel and aluminium intact areas, to be roughened damaged and rusty areas; galvanised steel and aluminium; free from any contamination and roughened by sandpapering and primed with SigmaCover 256 in a dft of 50 m/2 mils steel; after removal of loose paint, free from any contamination, derusted to min. SPSS-Pt2 and primed with SigmaCover 256 in a dft of 50 m/2 mils SigmaDur 550 50 m/2.0 mils
SPECIFICATION 1: compatible with not on top of suitable for pretreatment
paint system note
if a semigloss finish is required, SigmaDur 550 can be replaced by SigmaDur 520 or SigmaDur 580
recoatable epoxy/polyurethane system for a total repair or new construction, suitable for steel, galvanised steel and aluminium complete removal of old paint system (if applicable), derusting of steel to min. SPSS-Pt2 and roughening of galvanised steel and aluminium by sand papering SigmaCover 256 SigmaDur 550 50 m/2.0 mils 50 m/2.0 mils
paint system note
page 1/2
STEEL PROTECTION Internal dry exposure Recoatable epoxy/polyurethane system
SYSTEM
4011
September 2005
epoxy polyurethane system for new construction especially suitable for inshop application steel; derusted to ISO-St3 or SPSS-Pt2 galvanised steel: free from any contamination and roughened by sandpapering SigmaFast 205 SigmaDur 550 50 m/2.0 mils 50 m/2.0 mils
paint system note
REFERENCES SigmaCover 256 SigmaDur 520 SigmaDur 550 SigmaDur 580 SigmaFast 205 Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Tools for maintenance management see product data sheet 7412 see product data sheet 7524 see product data sheet 7537 see product data sheet 7530 see product data sheet 7802 see information sheet 1490 see information sheet 4007
page 2/2
STEEL PROTECTION Internal dry exposure Acrylic dispersion system

a two page issue
SYSTEM
4012
June 2004 revision of 7-2003
Inside buildings with neutral atmosphere. Relative humidity below 60%. Complies with ISO 12944, Part 2, corrosivity category C1. acrylic dispersion maintenance system for intact areas and spot repair alkyd, epoxy, polyurethane, chlorinated rubber, vinyl, dispersion and epoxy tar paint steel, galvanised steel and aluminium intact areas, to be roughened damaged and rusty areas; galvanised steel and aluminium; free from any contamination and roughened by sandpapering and primed with Sigma Aquacover 22 in a dft of 50 m/2 mils steel; after removal of loose paint, free from any contamination, derusted to min. ISO-Sa2 and primed with Sigma Aquacover 20 in a dft of 75 m/3 mils Sigma Aquacover 40 50 m/2.0 mils
SPECIFICATION 1: compatible with suitable for pretreatment
paint system note
acrylic dispersion paints require adequate ventilation to obtain sufficient drying conditions
acrylic dispersion system for a total repair or new construction, suitable for steel, galvanised steel and aluminium complete removal of old paint system (if applicable), derusting of steel to min. ISO-Sa2 and roughening of galvanised steel and aluminium by sand papering Sigma Aquacover 20 Sigma Aquacover 40 75 m/3.0 mils 50 m/2.0 mils
paint system note
acrylic dispersion paints require adequate ventilation to obtain sufficient drying conditions on galvanised steel or aluminium Sigma Aquacover 22 should be used instead of Sigma Aquacover 20
page 1/2
STEEL PROTECTION Internal dry exposure Acrylic dispersion system
SYSTEM
4012
July 2003
SPECIFICATION 3: pretreatment paint system note
acrylic dispersion system for new construction derusting of steel to min. ISO-Sa2 or SPSS-Pt3 Sigma Aquacover 20 Sigma Aquacover 40 75 m/3.0 mils 50 m/2.0 mils
REFERENCES Sigma Aquacover 22 Sigma Aquacover 20 Sigma Aquacover 40 Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Tools for maintenance management see product data sheet 7145 see product data sheet 7149 see product data sheet 7251 see information sheet 1490 see information sheet 4007
page 2/2
SYSTEM
INTERNAL DRY EXPOSURE WATERBORNE EPOXY SYSTEM

a one page issue
4016
Inside buildings with neutral atmosphere. Relative humidity below 60%. Complies with ISO 12944, part 2, corrosivity category C1. waterborne epoxy system, suitable for steel, galvanised steel and aluminium steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2 galvanised steel and aluminium; degreased and roughened by suitable means (e.g. sand papering) Sigma Aquacover 400 low should preferably be carried out according to this specification 75 m/3.0 mils
SPECIFICATION 1 pretreatment
coating system expected durability (ISO-12944 part 5) maintenance REFERENCES
Sigma Aquacover 400 Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Specification for mineral abrasives
see product data sheet 7871 see information sheet 1490 see information sheet 1491
page 1/1
STEEL PROTECTION Internal wet exposure Alkyd paint system

a two page issue
SYSTEM
4020
Inside buildings where condensation may occur. Atmospheres with low pollution and dry climate. RH up to 80%. alkyd maintenance system for intact areas and spot repair alkyd, epoxy, polyurethane and dispersion paint chlorinated rubber, vinyl, bitumen and epoxy tar paint galvanised steel and aluminium intact areas; free from any contamination and roughened by sandpapering damaged and rusty areas; after removal of loose paint, free from any contamination, derusted to min. SPSS-Pt2 and primed with Sigmarine 24 in a dft of 50 m/2 mils Sigmarine 40 Sigmarine 49 35 m/1.4 mils 35 m/1.4 mils
SPECIFICATION 1: compatible with not on top of not suitable for pretreatment
paint system note
SPECIFICATION 2: not suitable for pretreatment paint system
alkyd system for a total repair or new construction galvanised steel and aluminium complete removal of old paint system (if applicable) and derusting of steel to min. ISO-Sa2 or SPSS-Pt2 Sigmarine 24 Sigmarine 40 Sigmarine 49 50 m/2.0 mils 35 m/1.4 mils 35 m/1.4 mils
note
page 1/2
STEEL PROTECTION Internal wet exposure Alkyd paint system
SYSTEM
4020
September 2005
fast drying alkyd new construction system steel derusted to ISO-Sa2 or SPSS-Pt2 SigmaFast 20 SigmaFast 20 SigmaFast 40 60 m/2.4 mils 50 m/2.0 mils 50 m/2.0 mils
REFERENCES SigmaFast 20 SigmaFast 40 Sigmarine 24 Sigmarine 40 Sigmarine 41 Sigmarine 49 Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Tools for maintenance management see product data sheet 7155 see product data sheet 7234 see product data sheet 7135 see product data sheet 7213 see product data sheet 7256 see product data sheet 7240 see information sheet 1490 see information sheet 4007
page 2/2
STEEL PROTECTION Internal wet exposure Recoatable epoxy/polyurethane system

a two page issue
SYSTEM
4021
Inside buildings where condensation may occur Atmospheres with low pollution and dry climate. RH up to 80%. recoatable epoxy/polyurethane maintenance system for intact areas and spot repair alkyd, epoxy, polyurethane, chlorinated rubber, vinyl and dispersion paint bitumen and epoxy tar paint steel, galvanised steel and aluminium intact areas, to be roughened damaged and rusty areas; galvanised steel and aluminium; free from any contamination and roughened by sandpapering and primed with SigmaCover 280 in a dft of 60 m/2.4 mils steel; after removal of loose paint, free from any contamination, derusted to min. SPSS-Pt2 and primed with SigmaCover 256 in a dft of 60 m/2.4 mils SigmaCover 456 SigmaDur 550 50 m/2.0 mils 50 m/2.0 mils
paint system note
if a semigloss finish is required, SigmaDur 550 can be replaced by SigmaDur 520
SPECIFICATION 2: suitable for pretreatment
recoatable epoxy/polyurethane system for a total repair, or new construction steel, galvanised steel and aluminium complete removal of old paint system (if applicable), derusting of steel to min. ISO-Sa2 or SPSS-Pt2 and roughening of galvanised steel and aluminium by sand papering SigmaCover 280 SigmaCover 456 SigmaDur 550 60 m/2.4 mils 50 m/2.0 mils 50 m/2.0 mils
paint system
note
page 1/2
STEEL PROTECTION Internal wet exposure Recoatable epoxy/polyurethane system
SYSTEM
4021
September 2005
epoxy/polyurethane system for new construction especially suitable for in-shop application steel; derusted to ISO Sa2 or SPSS-Pt2 SigmaFast 205 SigmaDur 550 100 m/4.0 mils 50 m/2.0 mils
REFERENCES SigmaCover 256 SigmaCover 280 SigmaCover 456 SigmaDur 520 SigmaDur 550 SigmaFast 205 Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Tools for maintenance management
see product data sheet 7412 see product data sheet 7417 see product data sheet 7466 see product data sheet 7524 see product data sheet 7537 see product data sheet 7802 see information sheet 1490 see information sheet 4007
page 2/2
STEEL PROTECTION Internal wet exposure Acrylic dispersion system

a two page issue EXPOSURE CONDITIONS:
SYSTEM
4022
Inside buildings where condensation may occur. Atmospheres with low pollution and dry climate. RH up to 80%. acrylic dispersion maintenance system for intact areas and spot repair alkyd, epoxy, polyurethane, chlorinated rubber, vinyl, dispersion and epoxy tar paint steel, galvanised steel and aluminium intact areas, to be roughened damaged and rusty areas; galvanised steel and aluminium; free from any contamination and roughened by sandpapering and primed with Sigma Aquacover 22 in a dft of 50 m/2 mils steel; after removal of loose paint, free from any contamination, derusted to min. ISO-Sa2 and primed with Sigm Aquacover 20 in a dft of 75 m/3 mils Sigma Aquacover 40 Sigma Aquacover 40 50 m/2.0 mils 50 m/2.0 mils
SPECIFICATION 1: compatible with suitable for pretreatment
paint system note
acrylic dispersion paints require adequate ventilation to obtain sufficient drying conditions
acrylic dispersion system for a total repair or new construction steel, galvanised steel and aluminium complete removal of old paint system (if applicable), derusting of steel to min. ISO-Sa2 and roughening of galvanised steel and aluminium by sand papering Sigma Aquacover 20 Sigma Aquacover 40 Sigma Aquacover 40 75 m/3.0 mils 50 m/2.0 mils 50 m/2.0 mils
paint system
note
page 1/2
STEEL PROTECTION Internal wet exposure Acrylic dispersion system
SYSTEM
4022
June 2004
acrylic dispersion system for new construction steel; derusted to ISO Sa2 or SPSS-Pt3 Sigma Aquacover 20 Sigma Aquacover 40 Sigma Aquacover 40 75 m/3.0 mils 50 m/2.0 mils 50 m/2.0 mils
REFERENCES Sigma Aquacover 22 Sigma Aquacover 20 Sigma Aquacover 40 Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Tools for maintenance management see product data sheet 7145 see product data sheet 7149 see product data sheet 7251 see information sheet 1490 see information sheet 4007
page 2/2
STEEL PROTECTION Internal wet exposure High solids epoxy/polyurethane system

a two page issue
SYSTEM
4024
October 2004 revision of 7-2003
Inside buildings where condensation may occur. Atmospheres with low pollution and dry climate. RH up to 80%. surface tolerant high solids epoxy/polyurethane maintenance system for intact areas and spot repair alkyd, epoxy and polyurethane paint chlorinated rubber and vinyl paint steel, galvanised steel and aluminium high pressure water cleaning to remove loose paint and contamination damaged and corroded areas; steel; derusted to ISO-Sa2 or SPSS-Pt2 and primed with SigmaCover 630 in a dft of 60 m/2.4 mils galvanised steel and aluminium; to be roughened,dry and free from any contamination and primed with SigmaCover 280 in a dft of 60 m/2.4 mils SigmaCover 630 SigmaDur 580 60 m/2.4 mils 75 m/3.0 mils
paint system
surface tolerant high solids epoxy/polyurethane system for total repair or new construction steel, galvanised steel and aluminium after high pressure water cleaning, complete removal of old paint system (if applicable), derusting of steel to min. ISO-Sa2 and roughening of galvanised steel and aluminium by sand papering or sweep blasting SigmaCover 630 SigmaDur 580 100 m/4.0 mils 75 m/3.0 mils
paint system notes
a galvanised steel or aluminium substrate should be primed with SigmaCover 280 instead of SigmaCover 630
page 1/2
STEEL PROTECTION Internal wet exposure High solids epoxy/polyurethane system
SYSTEM
4024
October 2004
high solids epoxy/polyurethane system for new construction steel; derusted to ISO Sa2 or SPSS-Pt3 SigmaCover 805 SigmaDur 580 125 m/5.0 mils 75 m/3.0 mils
REFERENCES SigmaCover 280 SigmaCover 630 SigmaCover 805 SigmaDur 580 Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Tools for maintenance management see product data sheet 7417 see product data sheet 7430 see product data sheet 7726 see product data sheet 7530 see information sheet 1490 see information sheet 4007
page 2/2
SYSTEM
INTERNAL WET EXPOSURE WATERBORNE EPOXY SYSTEM

a one page issue
4026
June 2004 Revision 12-2003
Inside buildings where condensation may occur. Atmospheres with low pollution and dry climate. RH up to 80%. Complies with ISO 12944, part 2, corrosivity category C2. waterborne epoxy system, suitable for steel, galvanised steel and aluminium steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2 galvanised steel and aluminium; degreased and roughened by suitable means (e.g. sand papering) Sigma aquacover 400 medium should preferably be carried out according to this specification 100 m/4.0 mils
SPECIFICATION 1 pretreatment
coating system expected durability (ISO-12944 part 5) maintenance REFERENCES
Sigma aquacover 400 Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Specification for mineral abrasives
see product data sheet 7871 see information sheet 1490 see information sheet 1491
page 1/1
STEEL PROTECTION Rural atmospheric exposure Alkyd paint system

a two page issue
SYSTEM
4030
This environment usually covers areas away from the coast and separate from industrial or urban activity. Corrosive attack is governed mostly by humidity, rainfall and ultraviolet radiation, but is normally less aggressive than an industrial or coastal environment. Average sulphur dioxide contents is lower than 10 g per m air. Salt content in rain water is lower than 12 mg per litre rain. alkyd maintenance system for intact areas and spot repair alkyd, epoxy and polyurethane paint chlorinated rubber, vinyl, bitumen and epoxy tar paint galvanised steel and aluminium high pressure water cleaning to remove loose paint and contamination intact areas; to be roughened damaged and rusty areas; derusted to min. ISO-Sa2 or SPSS-Pt2 and primed with Sigmarine 24 in a dft of 50 m/2 mils Sigmarine 40 Sigmarine 49 35 m/1.4 mils 35 m/1.4 mils
paint system note
if a semigloss finish is required Sigmarine 49 can be replaced by Sigmarine 41
alkyd system for a total repair or new construction galvanised steel and aluminium after high pressure water cleaning, complete removal of old paint system (if applicable) and derusting of steel to min.ISO-Sa2 or SPSS-Pt2 Sigmarine 24 Sigmarine 40 Sigmarine 49 50 m/2.0 mils 35 m/1.4 mils 35 m/1.4 mils
note
if a semigloss finish is required Sigmarine 49 can be replaced by Sigmarine 41
page 1/2
STEEL PROTECTION Rural atmospheric exposure Alkyd paint system
SYSTEM
4030
September 2005
fast drying alkyd new construction system steel; derusted to ISO-Sa2 or SPSS-Pt2 SigmaFast 20 SigmaFast 20 SigmaFast 40 60 m/2.4 mils 50 m/2.0 mils 50 m/2.0 mils
GENERAL APPLICATION ASPECTS: The life of any protective system is determined by the dry film thickness of the anticorrosive coating system present on weldseams, sharp edges, bolts and nuts, these being the critical 20% of the surface area where breakdown begins. All critical areas should be given extra stripe coats with the same material as the consecutive coat of the system to achieve the specified dry film thickness. Giving more attention to these areas will extend the life of the maintenance system. The following parameters can be used. For hand laid welds: Beads with a surface irregularity exceeding 3 mm or with sharp crests having a radius under 2 mm should be ground. For sharp edges: All edges to be rounded off with a grinder to a radius of 2 mm or more. For pitting: Pitting in excess of 2 mm in depth and under 5 mm in diameter should be filled by welding or by use of an epoxy filler. REFERENCES SigmaFast 20 SigmaFast 40 Sigmarine 24 Sigmarine 40 Sigmarine 41 Sigmarine 49 Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Tools for maintenance management see product data sheet 7155 see product data sheet 7234 see product data sheet 7135 see product data sheet 7213 see product data sheet 7256 see product data sheet 7240 see information sheet 1490 see information sheet 4007
page 2/2
STEEL PROTECTION Rural atmospheric exposure Recoatable epoxy/polyurethane system

a two page issue
SYSTEM
4031
This environment usually covers areas away from the coast and separate from industrial or urban activity. Corrosive attack is governed mostly by humidity, rainfall and ultraviolet radiation, but is normally less aggressive than an industrial or coastal environment. Average sulphur dioxide contents is lower than 10 g per m air. Salt content in rain water is lower than 12 mg per litre rain. recoatable epoxy/polyurethane maintenance system for intact areas and spot repair alkyd, epoxy, chlorinated rubber, vinyl and polyurethane paint bitumen and epoxy tar paint steel, galvanised steel and aluminium high pressure water cleaning to remove loose paint and contamination intact areas; to be roughened damaged and corroded areas; steel; derusted to ISO-Sa2 or SPSS-Pt2 and primed with SigmaCover 630 in a dft of75 m/3.0 mils galvanised steel and aluminium; to be roughened, dry and free from any contamination and primed with SigmaCover 280 in a dft of 75 m/3.0 mils SigmaCover 456 SigmaDur 550 50 m/2.0 mils 50 m/2.0 mils
paint system note
recoatable epoxy/polyurethane system for a total repair or new construction steel, galvanised steel and aluminium after high pressure water cleaning, complete removal of old paint system (if applicable), derusting of steel to min. ISO-Sa2 or SPSS-Pt2 and roughening of galvanised steel and aluminium by sand papering SigmaCover 630 (aluminium) SigmaCover 456 SigmaDur 550 75 m/3.0 mils 50 m/2.0 mils 50 m/2.0 mils
paint system
Notes
if a semigloss finish is required, SigmaDur 550 can be replaced by SigmaDur 520 a galvanised steel or aluminium substrate should be primed with SigmaCover 280 instead of SigmaCover 630
page 1/2
STEEL PROTECTION Rural atmospheric exposure Recoatable epoxy/polyurethane system
SYSTEM
4031
September 2005
SPECIFICATION 3: pretreatment paint system Notes
recoatable epoxy/polyurethane system for new construction steel; derusted to ISO-Sa2 or SPSS-Pt2 SigmaFast 205 SigmaDur 550 100 m/4.0 mils 50 m/2.0 mils
GENERAL APPLICATION ASPECTS: The life of any protective system is determined by the dry film thickness of the anticorrosive coating system present on weldseams, sharp edges, bolts and nuts, these being the critical 20% of the surface area where breakdown begins. All critical areas should be given extra stripe coats with the same material as the consecutive coat of the system to achieve the specified dry film thickness. Giving more attention to these areas will extend the life of the maintenance system. The following parameters can be used. For hand laid welds: Beads with a surface irregularity exceeding 3 mm or with sharp crests having a radius under 2 mm should be ground. For sharp edges: All edges to be rounded off with a grinder to a radius of 2 mm or more. For pitting: Pitting in excess of 2 mm in depth and under 5 mm in diameter should be filled by welding or by use of an epoxy filler. REFERENCES SigmaCover 456 SigmaCover 630 SigmaDur 520 SigmaDur 550 SigmaFast 205 Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Tools for maintenance management see product data sheet 7466 see product data sheet 7430 see product data sheet 7524 see product data sheet 7537 see product data sheet 7802 see information sheet 1490 see information sheet 4007
page 2/2
STEEL PROTECTION Rural atmospheric exposure Acrylic dispersion system

a two page issue
SYSTEM
4032
This environment usually covers areas away from the coast and separate from industrial or urban activity. Corrosive attack is governed mostly by humidity, rainfall and ultraviolet radiation, but is normally less aggressive than an industrial or coastal environment. Average sulphur dioxide contents is lower than 10 g per m air. Salt content in rain water is lower than 12 mg per litre rain. Complies with ISO 12944, part 2, corrosivity category C3. acrylic dispersion maintenance system for intact areas and spot repair alkyd, epoxy, polyurethane, chlorinated rubber and vinyl paint bitumen and epoxy tar paint steel, galvanised steel and aluminium high pressure water cleaning to remove loose paint and contamination intact areas; to be roughened damaged and corroded areas; steel; derusted to min. ISO-Sa2 and primed with Sigma Aquacover 20 in a dft of 75 m/3 mils galvanised steel and aluminium; to be roughened and primed Sigma Aquacover 22 in a dft of 50 m/2 mils Sigma Aquacover 40 Sigma Aquacover 40 50 m/2.0 mils 50 m/2.0 mils
paint system
acrylic dispersion system for a total repair steel, galvanised steel and aluminium after high pressure water cleaning, complete removal of old paint system, derusting of steel to min. ISO-Sa2 and roughening of galvanised steel and aluminium by sand papering Sigma Aquacover 20 Sigma Aquacover 40 Sigma Aquacover 40 75 m/3.0 mils 50 m/2.0 mils 50 m/2.0 mils
paint system
note
for galvanised steel and aluminium Sigma Aquacover 20 should be replaced by Sigma Aquacover 22
page 1/2
STEEL PROTECTION Rural atmospheric exposure Acrylic dispersion system
SYSTEM
4032
June 2004
acrylic dispersion system for new construction steel; derusted to ISO Sa2 or SPSS-Pt3 Sigma Aquacover 20 Sigma Aquacover 40 Sigma Aquacover 40 75 m/3.0 mils 50 m/2.0 mils 50 m/2.0 mils
GENERAL APPLICATION ASPECTS: Because of the waterborn character of this type of paint, good weather conditions are essential to obtain maximum performance The life of any protective system is determined by the dry film thickness of the anticorrosive coating system present on weldseams, sharp edges, bolts and nuts, these being the critical 20% of the surface area where breakdown begins. All critical areas should be given extra stripe coats with the same material as the consecutive coat of the system to achieve the specified dry film thickness. Giving more attention to these areas will extend the life of the maintenance system. The following parameters can be used. For hand laid welds: Beads with a surface irregularity exceeding 3 mm or with sharp crests having a radius under 2 mm should be ground. For sharp edges: All edges to be rounded off with a grinder to a radius of 2 mm or more. For pitting: Pitting in excess of 2 mm in depth and under 5 mm in diameter should be filled by welding or by use of an epoxy filler. REFERENCES Sigma Aquacover 20 Sigma Aquacover 22 Sigma Aquacover 40 Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Tools for maintenance management see product data sheet 7149 see product data sheet 7145 see product data sheet 7251 see information sheet 1490 see information sheet 4007
page 2/2
STEEL PROTECTION Rural atmospheric exposure High solids epoxy/polyurethane system

a two page issue
SYSTEM
4034
This environment usually covers areas away from the coast and separate from industrial or urban activity. Corrosive attack is governed mostly by humidity, rainfall and ultraviolet radiation, but is normally less aggressive than an industrial or coastal environment. Average sulphur dioxide contents is lower than 10 g per m air. Salt content in rain water is lower than 12 mg per litre rain. surface tolerant high solids epoxy/polyurethane maintenance system for intact areas and spot repair alkyd, epoxy and polyurethane paint chlorinated rubber and vinyl paint steel, galvanised steel and aluminium high pressure water cleaning to remove loose paint and contamination damaged and corroded areas; steel; derusted to ISO-Sa2 or SPSS-Pt2 and primed with SigmaCover 630 in a dft of 60 m/2.4 mils galvanised steel and aluminium; to be roughened, dry and free from any contamination and primed with SigmaCover 280 in a dft of 60 m/2.4 mils SigmaCover 630 SigmaDur 580 60 m/2.4 mils 75 m/3.0 mils
paint system
surface tolerant high solids epoxy/polyurethane system for total repair or new construction steel, galvanised steel and aluminium after high pressure water cleaning, complete removal of old paint system (if applicable), derusting of steel to min. ISO-Sa2 and roughening of galvanised steel and aluminium by sand papering or sweep blasting SigmaCover 630 SigmaCover 630 SigmaDur 580 60 m/2.4 mils 60 m/2.4 mils 75 m/3.0 mils
paint system
notes
a galvanised steel or aluminium substrate should be primed with SigmaCover 280 instead of SigmaCover 630 2 primer coats applied by roller may be replaced by 1 coat of 125 m/5 mils dft when applied by airless spray
page 1/2
STEEL PROTECTION Rural atmospheric exposure High solids epoxy/polyurethane system
SYSTEM
4034
October 2004
high solids epoxy/polyurethane system for new construction steel; derusted to ISO Sa2 or SPSS-Pt3 SigmaCover 805 SigmaDur 580 125 m/5.0 mils 75 m/3.0 mils
GENERAL APPLICATION ASPECTS: The life of any protective system is determined by the dry film thickness of the anticorrosive coating system present on weldseams, sharp edges, bolts and nuts, these being the critical 20% of the surface area where breakdown begins. All critical areas should be given extra stripe coats with the same material as the consecutive coat of the system to achieve the specified dry film thickness. Giving more attention to these areas will extend the life of the maintenance system. The following parameters can be used. For hand laid welds: Beads with a surface irregularity exceeding 3 mm or with sharp crests having a radius under 2 mm should be ground. For sharp edges: All edges to be rounded off with a grinder to a radius of 2 mm or more. For pitting: Pitting in excess of 2 mm in depth and under 5 mm in diameter should be filled by welding or by use of an epoxy filler. REFERENCES SigmaCover 280 SigmaCover 630 SigmaCover 805 SigmaDur 580 Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Tools for maintenance management see product data sheet 7417 see product data sheet 7430 see product data sheet 7726 see product data sheet 7530 see information sheet 1490 see information sheet 4007
page 2/2
SYSTEM
RURAL ATMOSPHERIC EXPOSURE WATERBORNE EPOXY SYSTEM

a two page issue
4036
This environment usually covers areas away from the coast and separate from industrial or urban activity. Corrosive attack is governed mostly by humidity, rainfall and ultraviolet radiation, but is normally less aggressive than an industrial or coastal environment. Average sulphur dioxide contents is lower than 10 g per m air. Salt content in rain water is lower than 12 mg per litre rain. Complies with ISO 12944, part 2, corrosivity category C3. waterborne epoxy system, suitable for steel steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2 Sigma aquacover 200 Sigma aquacover 400 medium should preferably be carried out according to this specification 75 m/3.0 mils 75 m/3.0 mils
SPECIFICATION 1 pretreatment coating system expected durability (ISO-12944 part 5) maintenance
GENERAL APPLICATION ASPECTS: The life of any protective system is determined by the dry film thickness of the anticorrosive coating system present on weldseams, sharp edges, bolts and nuts, these being the critical 20% of the surface area where breakdown begins. All critical areas should be given extra stripe coats with the same material as the consecutive coat of the system to achieve the specified dry film thickness. Giving more attention to these areas will extend the life of the maintenance system. The following parameters can be used. For hand laid welds: Beads with a surface irregularity exceeding 3 mm or with sharp crests having a radius under 2 mm should be ground. For sharp edges: All edges to be rounded off with a grinder to a radius of 2 mm or more.
page 1/2
SYSTEM
RURAL ATMOSPHERIC EXPOSURE WATERBORNE EPOXY SYSTEM
4036
June 2004
REFERENCES Sigma aquacover 200 Sigma aquacover 400 Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Specification for mineral abrasives see product data sheet 7870 see product data sheet 7871 see information sheet 1490 see information sheet 1491
page 2/2
STEEL PROTECTION Industrial and coastal atmospheric exposure Alkyd paint system
SYSTEM
4040
INDUSTRIAL: Conditions of high humidity, ultraviolet radiation and chemical pollution will accelerate the corrosion process and require consideration regarding increased acidic fall out. The principal effect is corrosion due to sulphur dioxide attack and this environment is characterised by an average sulphur dioxide content of more than 10 g per m air. COASTAL: Conditions of high humidity, ultraviolet radiation and salt spray will accelerate the corrosion process, aggravated by wind borne particles. This environment is characterised by a salt content in rain water of more than 12 mg per litre rain.
alkyd maintenance system for intact areas and spotrepair alkyd, epoxy and polyurethane paint chlorinated rubber, vinyl, bitumen and epoxy tar paint galvanised steel and aluminium high pressure water cleaning to remove loose paint and contamination intact areas; to be roughened damaged and rusty areas; derusted to min. ISO-Sa2 or SPSS-Pt2 and primed with 2 coats Sigmarine 24 in a dft of 2 x 40 m (1.6 mils) Sigmarine 40 Sigmarine 49 35 m/1.4 mils 35 m/1.4 mils
paint system note
if a semigloss finish is required, Sigmarine 49 can be replaced by Sigmarine 41 finishes in, mio or aluminium are available on request
alkyd system for a total repair or new construction galvanised steel and aluminium after high pressure water cleaning, complete removal of old paint system (if applicable) and derusting of steel to min.ISO-Sa2 or SPSS-Pt2 Sigmarine 24 Sigmarine 24 Sigmarine 40 Sigmarine 49 40 m/1.6 mils 40 m/1.6 mils 35 m/1.4 mils 35 m/1.4 mils
note
if a semigloss finish is required, Sigmarine 49 can be replaced by Sigmarine 41 finishes in, mio or aluminium are available on request
page 1/2
STEEL PROTECTION Industrial and coastal atmospheric exposure Alkyd paint system
SYSTEM
4040
September 2005
fast drying alkyd system for new construction, especially suitable for in-shop application steel; blast cleaned to ISO Sa2 or power tool cleaned to ISO St3 shop primed steel; sweep blasted to SPSS-Ss or power tool cleaned to SPSS-Pt2 SigmaFast 20 SigmaFast 20 SigmaFast 40 SigmaFast 40 75 m/3.0 mils 75 m/3.0 mils 50 m/2.0 mils 50 m/2.0 mils
paint system
GENERAL APPLICATION ASPECTS: The life of any protective system is determined by the dry film thickness of the anticorrosive coating system present on weldseams, sharp edges, bolts and nuts, these being the critical 20% of the surface area where breakdown begins. All critical areas should be given extra stripe coats with the same material as the consecutive coat of the system to achieve the specified dry film thickness. Giving more attention to these areas will extend the life of the maintenance system. The following parameters can be used. For hand laid welds: Beads with a surface irregularity exceeding 3 mm or with sharp crests having a radius under 2 mm should be ground. For sharp edges: All edges to be rounded off with a grinder to a radius of 2 mm or more. For pitting: Pitting in excess of 2 mm in depth and under 5 mm in diameter should be filled by welding or by use of an epoxy filler. REFERENCES SigmaFast 20 SigmaFast 40 Sigmarine 24 Sigmarine 40 Sigmarine 41 Sigmarine 49 Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Tools for maintenance management see product data sheet 7155 see product data sheet 7234 see product data sheet 7135 see product data sheet 7213 see product data sheet 7256 see product data sheet 7240 see information sheet 1490 see information sheet 4007
page 2/2
STEEL PROTECTION Industrial and coastal atmospheric exposure Recoatable epoxy/polyurethane system
a three page issue EXPOSURE CONDITIONS:
SYSTEM
4041
recoatable epoxy polyurethane maintenance system for intact areas and spot repair alkyd, epoxy, polyurethane, chlorinated rubber and vinyl paint bitumen and epoxy tar paint steel, galvanised steel and aluminium high pressure water cleaning to remove loose paint and contamination intact areas; to be roughened damaged and corroded areas; steel; derusted to ISO-Sa2 or SPSS-Pt2 and primed with SigmaCover 630 (aluminium) in a dft of 75 m/3 mils galvanised steel and aluminium; to be roughened, dry and free from any contamination and primed with SigmaCover 280 in a dft of 75 m/3 mils SigmaCover 456 SigmaDur 520 SigmaDur 520 can be replaced by SigmaDur 550 75 m/3.0 mils 50 m/2.0 mils
paint system note
page 1/3
SYSTEM
4041
September 2005
recoatable epoxy/polyurethane system for total repair or new construction steel, galvanised steel and aluminium after high pressure water cleaning, complete removal of old paint system (if applicable), derusting of steel to min. ISO-Sa2 or SPSS-Pt2 and roughening of galvanised steel and aluminium by sand papering SigmaCover 630 (aluminium) SigmaCover 456 SigmaDur 520 75 m/3.0 mils 75 m/3.0 mils 50 m/2.0 mils
paint system
notes
a galvanised steel or aluminium substrate should be primed with SigmaCover 280 instead of SigmaCover 630 (aluminium) SigmaDur 520 can be replaced by SigmaDur 550
recoatable epoxy/polyurethane system for new construction, especially suitable for in-shop application Steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2 or power tool cleaned to ISO-St3 Shop primed steel; sweep blasted to SPSS-Ss or power tool cleaned to SPSS-Pt2 SigmaFast 205 SigmaFast 205 SigmaDur 550 SigmaDur 550 can be replaced by SigmaDur 520 75 m/3.0 mils 75 m/3.0 mils 50 m/2.0 mils
paint system
notes
GENERAL APPLICATION ASPECTS: The life of any protective system is determined by the dry film thickness of the anticorrosive coating system present on weldseams, sharp edges, bolts and nuts, these being the critical 20% of the surface area where breakdown begins. All critical areas should be given extra stripe coats with the same material as the consecutive coat of the system to achieve the specified dry film thickness. Giving more attention to these areas will extend the life of the maintenance system. The following parameters can be used. For hand laid welds: Beads with a surface irregularity exceeding 3 mm or with sharp crests having a radius under 2 mm should be ground. For sharp edges: All edges to be rounded off with a grinder to a radius of 2 mm or more. For pitting: Pitting in excess of 2 mm in depth and under 5 mm in diameter should be filled by welding or by use of an epoxy filler.
page 2/3
SYSTEM
4041
September 2005
REFERENCES SigmaCover 280 SigmaCover 456 SigmaCover 630 SigmaDur 520 SigmaDur 550 SigmaFast 205 Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Tools for maintenance management see product data sheet 7417 see product data sheet 7466 see product data sheet 7430 see product data sheet 7524 see product data sheet 7537 see product data sheet 7802 see information sheet 1490 see information sheet 4007
page 3/3
STEEL PROTECTION Industrial and coastal atmospheric exposure High solids epoxy/polyurethane system
a three page issue
SYSTEM
4042
INDUSTRIAL: Conditions of high humidity, ultraviolet radiation and chemical pollution accelerate the corrosion process and require consideration regarding increased acidic fall out. The principal effect is corrosion due to sulphur dioxide attack and this environment is characterised by an average sulphur dioxide content of more than 10 g per m air. COASTAL: Conditions of high humidity, ultraviolet radiation and salt spray will accelerate the corrosion process, aggravated by wind borne particles. This environment is characterised by a salt content in rain water of more than 12 mg per litre rain.
surface tolerant high solids epoxy/polyurethane maintenance system for intact areas and spot repair alkyd, epoxy and polyurethane paint chlorinated rubber and vinyl paint steel, galvanised steel and aluminium high pressure water cleaning to remove loose paint and contamination damaged and corroded areas; steel; derusted to ISO-Sa2 or SPSS-Pt2 and primed with SigmaCover 630 in a dft of 75 m/3 mils galvanised steel and aluminium; to be roughened, dry and free from any contamination and primed with SigmaCover 280 in a dft of 75 m/3 mils SigmaCover 630 SigmaDur 580 75 m/3.0 mils 75 m/3.0 mils
paint system
page 1/3
SYSTEM
4042
October 2004
surface tolerant high solids epoxy/polyurethane system for total repair or new construction, suitable for steel, galvanised steel and aluminium after high pressure water cleaning, complete removalof old paint system (if applicable), derusting of steel to min. ISO-Sa2 and roughening of galvanised steel and aluminium by sand papering or sweep blasting SigmaCover 630 SigmaCover 630 SigmaDur 580 75 m/3.0 mils 75 m/3.0 mils 75 m/3.0 mils
paint system
notes
galvanised steel or aluminium substrate should be primed with SigmaCover 280 instead of SigmaCover 630 2 primer coats applied by roller may be replaced by 1 coat of 150 m/6 mils dft when applied by airless spray
High solids epoxy/polyurethane system for new construction steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2 or power tool cleaned to ISO-St3 shop primed steel; sweep blasted to SPSS-Ss or power tool cleaned to SPSS-Pt2 SigmaCover 805 SigmaDur 580 150 m/6.0 mils 75 m/3.0 mils
paint system
page 2/3
SYSTEM
4042
October 2004
REFERENCES SigmaCover 280 SigmaCover 630 SigmaCover 805 SigmaDur 580 Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Tools for maintenance management see product data sheet 7417 see product data sheet 7430 see product data sheet 7726 see product data sheet 7530 see information sheet 1490 see information sheet 4007
page 3/3
STEEL PROTECTION Industrial and coastal atmospheric exposure Solvent free epoxy/polyurethane system
a three page issue
SYSTEM
4045
September 2005 revision of December 2003
surface tolerant solvent free epoxy/polyurethane maintenance system for intact areas and spot repair alkyd, epoxy and polyurethane paint chlorinated rubber and vinyl paint steel, galvanised steel and aluminium high pressure water cleaning to remove loose paint and contamination damaged and corroded areas; steel; derusted to ISO-Sa2 or SPSS-Pt2 and primed with SigmaCover 1500 in a dft of 125 m/5 mils galvanised steel and aluminium; to be roughened, dry and free from any contamination and primed with SigmaCover 1500 in a dft of 125 m/5 mils SigmaCover 1500 SigmaDur 580 125 m/5.0 mils 75 m/3.0 mils
paint system note
SigmaDur 580 can be replaced by SigmaDur 520 or SigmaDur 550
page 1/3
SYSTEM
4045
September 2005
surface tolerant solvent free epoxy/polyurethane system for total repair or new construction, suitable for steel, galvanised steel and aluminium after high pressure water cleaning, complete removal of old paint system (if applicable), derusting of steel to min. ISO-Sa2 and roughening of galvanised steel and aluminium by sand papering or sweep blasting SigmaCover 1500 SigmaDur 580 125 m/5.0 mils 75 m/3.0 mils
paint system notes
Solvent free epoxy/polyurethane system for new construction steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2 or power tool cleaned to ISO-St3 shop primed steel; sweep blasted to SPSS-Ss or power tool cleaned to SPSS-Pt2 SigmaCover 1500 SigmaDur 580 125 m/5.0 mils 75 m/3.0 mils
paint system notes
page 2/3
SYSTEM
4045
September 2005
REFERENCES SigmaCover 1500 SigmaDur 520 SigmaDur 550 SigmaDur 580 Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Tools for maintenance management see product data sheet 7715 see product data sheet 7524 see product data sheet 7537 see product data sheet 7530 see information sheet 1490 see information sheet 4007
page 3/3
SYSTEM
INDUSTRIAL AND COASTAL ATMOSPHERIC EXPOSURE

WATERBORNE EPOXY/HIGH SOLIDS POLYURETHANE SYSTEM
4046
June 2004
INDUSTRIAL: Conditions of high humidity, ultra violet radiation and chemical pollution will accelerate the corrosion process and require consideration regarding increased acidic fall out. The principal effect is corrosion due to sulphur dioxide attack and this environment is characterised by an average sulphur dioxide content of more than 10 g per m air. COASTAL: Conditions of high humidity, ultra violet radiation and salt spray will accelerate the corrosion process, aggravated by wind borne particles. This environment is characterised by a salt content in rain water of more than 12 mg per litre. Complies with ISO 12944, part 2, corrosivity category C4.
SPECIFICATION 1 pretreatment coating system
waterborne high solids epoxy/polyurethane system with a fair resistance to splash and spillage of chemicals steel, weldseams and rusty areas; derusted to ISO-Sa2 shop primed steel; pretreated to SPSS-Ss or SPSS-Pt2 Sigma aquacover 200 Sigma aquacover 400 Sigmadur 580 high should preferably be carried out according to this specification 100 m/4.0 mils 100 m/4.0 mils 75 m/3.0 mils
expected durability (ISO-12944 part 5) maintenance
GENERAL APPLICATION ASPECTS: The life time of any protective system is determined by the dry film thickness of the anticorrosive system present on weldseams, sharp edges, bolts and nuts, these being the critical 20% of the actual surface area. All critical areas should be given extra stripe coats with the same material as the consecutive coat of the system to achieve the specified dry film thickness. By giving more attention to these areas, the life time of the protective system will be extended. The following parameters can be used. For hand laid welds: a bead with a surface irregularity exceeding 3 mm or with a sharp crest having a radius under 2 mm a grinder should be applied. For sharp edges: All edges to be rounded off with a grinder to a radius of 2 mm or more.
page 1/2
SYSTEM
INDUSTRIAL AND COASTAL ATMOSPHERIC EXPOSURE

WATERBORNE EPOXY/HIGH SOLIDS POLYURETHANE SYSTEM
4046
June 2004
REFERENCES Sigma aquacover 400 Sigma aquacover 200 Sigmadur 580 Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Specification for mineral abrasives see product data sheet 7871 see product data sheet 7870 see product data sheet 7530 see information sheet 1490 see information sheet 1491
page 2/2
STEEL PROTECTION Industrial and coastal atmospheric exposure Solvent free epoxy/polymeric urethane system
a three page issue EXPOSURE CONDITIONS:
4047
March 2004
surface tolerant solvent free epoxy/polymeric urethane maintenance system for intact areas and spot repair alkyd, epoxy and polyurethane paint chlorinated rubber and vinyl paint steel, galvanised steel and aluminium high pressure water cleaning to remove loose paint and contamination damaged and corroded areas; steel; derusted to ISO-Sa2 or SPSS-Pt2 and primed with SigmaCover 1500 in a dft of 125 m/5 mils galvanised steel and aluminium; to be roughened, dry and free from any contamination and primed with SigmaCover 1500 in a dft of 125 m/5 mils SigmaCover 1500 SigmaDur 1800 125 m/5.0 mils 75 m/3.0 mils
paint system
page 1/3
4047
March 2004
SPECIFICATION 2:
surface tolerant solvent free epoxy/polymeric urethane system for total repair or new construction, suitable for steel, galvanised steel and aluminium after high pressure water cleaning, complete removal of old paint system (if applicable), derusting of steel to min. ISO-Sa2 and roughening of galvanised steel and aluminium by sand papering or sweep blasting SigmaCover 1500 SigmaDur 1800 125 m/5.0 mils 75 m/3.0 mils
pretreatment
paint system
Solvent free epoxy/polymeric urethane system for new construction steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2 or power tool cleaned to ISO-St3 shop primed steel; sweep blasted to SPSS-Ss or power tool cleaned to SPSS-Pt2 SigmaCover 1500 SigmaDur 1800 125 m/5.0 mils 75 m/3.0 mils
paint system
page 2/3
4047
March 2004
REFERENCES SigmaCover 1500 SigmaDur 1800 Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Tools for maintenance management see product data sheet 7715 see product data sheet 7725 see information sheet 1490 see information sheet 4007
page 3/3
STEEL PROTECTION Atmospheric exposure with abrasion/impact Solvent free flint reinforced epoxy system
a two page issue
SYSTEM
4050
September 2005 revision of July 2003
INDUSTRIAL: Conditions of high humidity, ultraviolet radiation and chemical pollution accelerate the corrosion process and require consideration regarding increased acidic fall-out. The principal effect is corrosion due to sulphur dioxide attack and this environment is characterised by an average sulphur dioxide content of more than 10 g per m air. Additional abrasion and impact exposure is expected. COASTAL: Conditions of high humidity, ultraviolet radiation and salt spray will accelarate the corrosion process, aggravated by wind borne particles. This environment is characterised by a salt content in rain water of more than 12 mg per litre rain. Additional abrasion and impact exposure is expected.
GENERAL ASPECTS: To obtain good performance it is essential that the old paint system should be completely removed. For maximum performance the surface should be abrasive blast cleaned to a suitable anchor pattern. SPECIFICATION 1: suitable for pretreatment paint system notes solvent free, flint reinforced epoxy system with an excellent resistance to impact and abrasion suitable for total repair and new construction steel (galvanised steel) steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting profile (Rz) 75-100 m/3-4 mils SigmaShield 1090 3000 m/120 mils SigmaShield 1090 can be applied on galvanised steel, but this will occur only occasionally galvanised steel has to be sweepblasted with inert grit to obtain the required blasting profile
page 1/2
STEEL PROTECTION Atmospheric exposure with abrasion/impact Solvent free flint reinforced epoxy system
SYSTEM
4050
September 2005
GENERAL APPLICATION ASPECTS: The life of any protective system is determined by the dry film thickness of the anticorrosive coating system present on weldseams, sharp edges, bolts and nuts, these being the critical 20% of the surface area where breakdown begins. All critical areas should be given extra stripe coats with the same material as the consecutive coat of the system to achieve the specified dry film thickness. Giving more attention to these areas will extend the life of the maintenance system. The following parameters can be used. For hand laid welds: Beads with a surface irregularity exceeding 3 mm or with sharp crests having a radius under 2 mm should be ground. For sharp edges: All edges to be rounded off with a grinder to a radius of 2 mm or more. For pitting: Pitting in excess of 2 mm in depth and under 5 mm in diameter should be filled by welding or by SigmaShield 1090. REFERENCES SigmaShield 1090 Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Tools for maintenance management see product data sheet 7490 see information sheet 1490 see information sheet 4007
page 2/2
STEEL PROTECTION
SYSTEM
Atmospheric exposure with abrasion/impact High solids glassflake reinforced epoxy system
a two page issue
4051
INDUSTRIAL: Conditions of high humidity, ultraviolet radiation and chemical pollution accelerate the corrosion process and require consideration regarding increased acidic fall out. The principal effect is corrosion due to sulphur dioxide attack and this environment is characterised by an average sulphur dioxide content of more than 10 g per m air. Additional abrasion and impact exposure is expected. COASTAL: Conditions of high humidity, ultraviolet radiation and salt spray will accelerate the corrosion process, aggravated by wind borne particles. This environment is characterised by a salt content in rain water of more than 12 mg per litre rain. Additional abrasion and impact exposure is expected.
GENERAL ASPECTS: To obtain a good performance it is essential that the old paint system should be removed completely. For maximum performance the surface should be blast cleaned to a suitable anchor pattern. SPECIFICATION 1: high solids glassflake reinforced epoxy system with an improved resistance to abrasion and impact suitable for total repair or new construction steel (galvanised steel and aluminium) steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting profile (Rz) 40-70 m/1,6-2.8 mils SigmaCover 280 SigmaShield 460 75 m/ 3.0 mils 400 m/16.0 mils
suitable for pretreatment paint system note
in case of a complex structure we recommend to apply a dft of 2 x 200 m (8 mils) galvanised steel has to be sweepblasted with inert grit to obtain the required blasting profile
page 1/2
STEEL PROTECTION Atmospheric exposure with abrasion/impact High solids glassflake reinforced epoxy system
SYSTEM
4051
September 2005
GENERAL APPLICATION ASPECTS: The life of any protective system is determined by the dry film thickness of the anticorrosive coating system present on weldseams, sharp edges, bolts and nuts, these being the critical 20% of the surface area where breakdown begins. All critical areas should be given extra stripe coats with the same material as the consecutive coat of the system to achieve the specified dry film thickness. Giving more attention to these areas will extend the life of the maintenance system. The following parameters can be used. For hand laid welds: Beads with a surface irregularity exceeding 3 mm or with sharp crests having a radius under 2 mm should be ground. For sharp edges: All edges to be rounded off with a grinder to a radius of 2 mm or more. For pitting: Pitting in excess of 2 mm in depth and under 5 mm in diameter should be filled by welding or by use of an epoxy filler. REFERENCES SigmaCover 280 SigmaShield 460 Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Tools for maintenance management see product data sheet 7417 see product data sheet 7952 see information sheet 1490 see information sheet 4007
page 2/2
STEEL PROTECTION
SYSTEM
High temperature resistant alkyd paint system Temperature up to 175C / 350F

a two page issue
4060
High temperature surfaces: The surface temperature has more influence on coating performance than surrounding atmospheric conditions. Thermal shock may be a consideration.
GENERAL ASPECTS: To obtain a good performance it is essential to remove the old paint system from defective areas and to blast clean or to obtain a profile by disc sanding using discs with rough abrasive. SPECIFICATION 1: compatible with not on top of suitable for not suitable for pretreatment paint system alkyd system for temperatures up to 175C/350F suitable for total repair or new construction alkyd, epoxy and polyurethane paint silicone and silicate paint steel galvanised steel, aluminium sprayed steel and zinc sprayed steel removal of damaged paint (if applicable) and derusting by blast cleaning to ISO-Sa2 or disc sanding to SPSS-Pt3 Sigmarine 24 SigmaTherm 175 SigmaTherm 175 SigmaTherm 175 35 m/1.4 mils 25 m/1.0 mils 25 m/1.0 mils 25 m/1.0 mils
GENERAL APPLICATION ASPECTS: In many cases some parts of the surface will not have been exposed to a really high temperature, because a temperature gradient across the surface existed. These parts may be in relatively good condition and can be recoated for cosmetic reasons with the last coat of the system, provided that contamination is removed and that the surface is sufficiently roughened. If the existing coats prove to be in a brittle condition, then they should be considered as damaged and removed completely.
page 1/2
STEEL PROTECTION High temperature resistant alkyd paint system Temperature up to 175C / 350F
SYSTEM
4060
September 2005
REFERENCES Sigmarine 24 SigmaTherm 175 Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Tools for maintenance management see product data sheet 7135 see product data sheet 7260 see information sheet 1490 see information sheet 4007
page 2/2
STEEL PROTECTION
SYSTEM
High temperature resistant silicate/acrylic paint system Temperature up to 350C / 662F

a two page issue
4061
High temperature surfaces: The temperature aspect is usually of greater importance than the general atmosphere. Thermal shock may need to be considered.
GENERAL ASPECTS: To obtain a good performance it is essential to remove the old paint system from defective areas and to blast clean or to obtain a profile by disc sanding using discs with rough abrasive. SPECIFICATION 1: compatible with not on top of suitable for not suitable for pretreatment zinc silicate/silicone-acrylic system for temperatures up to 350C / 662 F suitable for total repair or new construction silicate paint alkyd, epoxy, silicone and polyurethane paint steel galvanised steel, aluminium sprayed steel and zinc sprayed steel removal of damaged paint (if applicable) and derusting of steel by blast cleaning to ISO-Sa2 or disc sanding to SPSS-Pt3 using discs with rough abrasive SigmaZinc 158 SigmaTherm 350 75 m/3.0 mils 30 m/1.2 mils
paint system
page 1/2
STEEL PROTECTION
SYSTEM
High temperature resistant silicate/acrylic paint system Temperature up to 350C / 662F
4061
September 2005
REFERENCES SigmaTherm 350 SigmaZinc 158 Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Tools for maintenance management see product data sheet 7565 see product data sheet 7558 see information sheet 1490 see information sheet 4007
page 2/2
STEEL PROTECTION High temperature resistant epoxy system Temperature up to 200C / 390F
a two page issue
SYSTEM
4062
GENERAL ASPECTS: To obtain a good performance it is essential to remove the old paint system from defective areas and to blast clean or to obtain a profile by disc sanding using discs with rough abrasive. SPECIFICATION 1: compatible with not on top of suitable for pretreatment epoxy system resistant to industrial pollution and temperatures up to 200C/390F suitable for total repair or new construction alkyd, epoxy, polyurethane and silicate paint silicone paint steel, galvanised steel, aluminium sprayed steel and zinc sprayed steel removal of damaged paint (if applicable) and derusting of steel or roughening of galvanised steel by blast cleaning to ISO-Sa2 or disc sanding to SPSS-Pt3 to prevent contamination, aluminium sprayed steel and zinc sprayed steel should be painted as soon as possible, preferably within some hours of the metal spraying contaminated metal sprayed steel should be high pressure water cleaned to remove contamination the surface must be dry before painting SigmaCover 435 SigmaCover 435 SigmaCover 435 light shades may discolour above 130C 60 m/2.4 mils 60 m/2.4 mils 60 m/2.4 mils
paint system
note
page 1/2
STEEL PROTECTION High temperature resistant epoxy system Temperature up to 200C / 390F
SYSTEM
4062
October 2004
REFERENCES SigmaCover 435 Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Tools for maintenance management see product data sheet 7465 see information sheet 1490 see information sheet 4007
page 2/2
STEEL PROTECTION High temperature resistant silicate system Temperature up to 400C / 750F
a two page issue
SYSTEM
4064
GENERAL ASPECTS: To obtain a good performance it is essential to remove the old paint system from defective areas and to blast clean or to obtain a profile by disc sanding using discs with rough abrasive. SPECIFICATION 1: compatible with not on top of suitable for not suitable for pretreatment full silicate system for temperatures up to 400C/750F suitable for total repair or new construction suitable silicate paint alkyd, epoxy, silicone and polyurethane paint steel galvanised steel, aluminium sprayed steel and zinc sprayed steel removal of damaged paint (if applicable) and derusting of steel by blast cleaning to ISO-Sa2 or disc sanding to SPSS-Pt3 using discs with rough abrasive SigmaZinc 158 SigmaTherm 520 75 m/3.0 mils 40 m/1.6 mils
paint system
page 1/2
STEEL PROTECTION High temperature resistant silicate system Temperature up to 400C / 750F
SYSTEM
4064
September 2005
REFERENCES SigmaTherm 520 SigmaZinc 158 Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Tools for maintenance management see product data sheet 7555 see product data sheet 7558 see information sheet 1490 see information sheet 4007
page 2/2
STEEL PROTECTION Immersion in water or subsoil conditions Epoxy tar system

a two page issue
SYSTEM
4070
Immersion in water in conjunction with or without cathodic protection. Subsoil and splashzone are also considered as immersion condition. epoxy tar maintenance system for intact areas and spot repair, resistant to cathodic protection or temperatures up to 70C/160F epoxy, epoxy tar and polyurethane paint chlorinated rubber, vinyl and bitumen paint high pressure water cleaning to remove loose paint and contamination intact areas; to be roughened damaged and rusty areas; derusted to min. ISO-Sa2 or SPSS-Pt2 and primed with SigmaCover 280 in a dft of 75 m/3 mils SigmaCover 300 brown SigmaCover 300 black 125 m/5.0 mils 125 m/5.0 mils
SPECIFICATION 1: compatible with not on top of pretreatment
paint system notes
for health reasons this system should not be used for the storage of potable water for consumption when cathodic protection or high temperatures are applied the pretreatment must be improved to ISO-Sa2 or SSPS-Pt3 locally
epoxy tar system for a total repair or new construction, resistant to cathodic protection or temperatures up to 70C/160F after high pressure water cleaning, complete removal of old paint system and derusting of steel to ISO-Sa2 or SPSS-Pt3 locally SigmaCover 300 brown SigmaCover 300 black 150 m/6.0 mils 150 m/6.0 mils
if a holding primer is required SigmaCover 280 in a dft of 75 m/3 mils may be used when cathodic protection or high temperatures are applied the pretreatment must be improved to ISO-Sa2 or SSPS-Pt3 locally
page 1/2
STEEL PROTECTION Immersion in water or subsoil conditions Epoxy tar system
SYSTEM
4070
October 2004
epoxy tar system for new construction steel; derusted to ISO-Sa2 steel with approved zinc silicate shopprimer; power tool cleaned to SPSS-Pt3 or sweep blasted to SPSS-Ss weldseams, burned and rusty areas blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2 or power tool cleaned to SPSS-Pt3 SigmaCover 300 brown SigmaCover 300 black 150 m/6.0 mils 150 m/6.0 mils
paint system note
if a holding primer is required SigmaCover 280 in a dft of 75 m/3 mils may be used when cathodic protection or high temperatures are applied the pretreatment must be improved to ISO-Sa2 or SSPS-Pt3 locally
GENERAL APPLICATION ASPECTS: The life of any protective system is determined by the dry film thickness of the anticorrosive coating system present on weldseams, sharp edges, bolts and nuts, these being the critical 20% of the surface area where breakdown begins. All critical areas should be given extra stripe coats with the same material as the consecutive coat of the system to achieve the specified dry film thickness. Giving more attention to these areas will extend the life of the maintenance system. The following parameters can be used. For hand laid welds: Beads with a surface irregularity exceeding 3 mm or with sharp crests having a radius under 2 mm should be ground. For sharp edges: All edges to be rounded off with a grinder to a radius of 2 mm or more. For pitting: Pitting in excess of 2 mm in depth and under 5 mm in diameter should be filled by welding or by use of an epoxy filler. REFERENCES SigmaCover 280 SigmaCover 300 Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Tools for maintenance manual see product data sheet 7417 see product data sheet 7472 see information sheet 1490 see information sheet 4007
page 2/2
STEEL PROTECTION Immersion in water or subsoil conditions Solvent free epoxy system
a two page issue
SYSTEM
4071
April 2009 revision of September 2005
Immersion in water in conjunction with or without cathodic protection. Subsoil and splashzone are also considered as immersion condition. solvent free epoxy maintenance system for intact areas and spot repair, resistant to cathodic protection epoxy-, polyurethane-, epoxy tar paint chlorinated rubber-, vinyl-, bitumen paint high pressure water cleaning to remove loose paint and contamination intact areas; to be roughened damaged and rusty areas; derusted to ISO-Sa2 or SPSS-Pt3 locally if a holding primer is required SigmaCover 280 can be used in a dft of 75 m/3 mils 300 m/12.0 mils
paint system notes
SigmaGuard CSF 650
if cathodic protection is applied SigmaCover 280 should be used for the storage of potable water SigmaGuard CSF 585 should be used instead of SigmaGuard CSF 650 (see information sheet 1882) for the storage of potable water local health regulations must also be observed with respect to primer and coating
solvent free epoxy system for a total repair or new construction, resistant to cathodic protection or temperatures up to 50C/120F after high pressure water cleaning, complete removal of old paint system (if applicable) and derusting of steel to ISO-Sa2 or SPSS-Pt3 (locally) if a holding primer is required SigmaCover 280 may be used in a dft of 75 m/3 mils SigmaGuard CSF 650 300 m/12.0 mils
paint system notes
if cathodic protection is applied SigmaCover 280 should be used for the storage of potable water SigmaGuard CSF 585 should be used instead of SigmaGuard CSF 650 (see information sheet 1882) for the storage of potable water local health regulations must also be observed with respect to primer and coating
page 1/2
STEEL PROTECTION Immersion in water or subsoil conditions Solvent free epoxy system
SYSTEM
4071
April 2009
SPECIFICATION 3:
solvent free phenolic epoxy system with improved resistance against abrasion for new construction, resistant to cathodic protection or temperatures up to 60C/ 140 F steel; blast cleaned to ISO-Sa2, blasting profile (Rz) 50-100 m/2-4 mils Novaguard 840 500 m/20.0 mils if abrasion resistance is required Novaguard 840 can be replaced by SigmaShield 1200
pretreatment paint system note
GENERAL APPLICATION ASPECTS: The life time of any protective system is determined by the dry film thickness of the anticorrosive system present on weldseams, sharp edges, bolts and nuts, these being the critical 20% of the actual surface area. All critical areas should be given extra stripe coats with the same material as the consecutive coat of the system to achieve the specified dry film thickness. By giving more attention to these areas, the life time of the maintenance system will be extended. The following parameters can be used. For hand laid welds: Beads with a surface irregularity exceeding 3 mm or with sharp crests having a radius under 2 mm a grinder should be applied. For sharp edges: All edges to be rounded off with a grinder to a radius of 2 mm or more. For pitting: Pitting in excess of 2 mm in depth and under 5 mm in diameter should be filled by welding or by use of an epoxy filler. REFERENCES Novaguard 840 SigmaCover 280 SigmaGuard CSF 650 SigmaGuard CSF 585 SigmaShield 1200 Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Certificates for potable water Tools for maintenance manual see product data sheet 7768 see product data sheet 7417 see product data sheet 7443 see product data sheet 7785 see product data sheet 7744 see information sheet 1490 see information sheet 1882 see information sheet 4007
page 2/2
STEEL PROTECTION Immersion in water or subsoil conditions High solids tar free epoxy system
a two page issue
SYSTEM
4072
Immersion in water (in conjunction with or) without cathodic protection. Subsoil and splashzone are also considered as immersion condition. high solids tar free epoxy maintenance system for intact areas and spot repair, resistant to cathodic protection or temperatures up to 60C/140F epoxy, epoxy tar and polyurethane paint chlorinated rubber, vinyl and bitumen paint high pressure water cleaning to remove loose paintand contamination intact areas; to be roughened damaged and rusty areas; derusted to min. ISO-Sa2 or SPSS-Pt3 and primed with SigmaCover 630 (aluminium) in a dft of 125 m/5 mils SigmaCover 805 the individual coats may not exceed 2 x the specified dft 150 m/6.0 mils
paint system note
high solids tar free epoxy system for total repair, resistant to cathodic protection or temperatures up to 60C/140F after high pressure water cleaning, complete removal of old paint system and derusting of steel to ISO-Sa2 SigmaCover 805 (aluminium) SigmaCover 805 150 m/6.0 mils 150 m/6.0 mils
the individual coats may not exceed 2 x the specified dft if a holding primer is required SigmaCover 280 in a dft of 75 m/3 mils can be used
high solids tar free epoxy system for new construction, resistant to cathodic protection or temperatures up to 60C/140F steel; derusted to ISO-Sa2 SigmaCover 805 (aluminium) SigmaCover 805 150 m/6.0 mils 150 m/6.0 mils
the individual coats may not exceed 2 x the specified dft if a holding primer is required SigmaCover 280 in a dft of 75 m/3 mils can be used
page 1/2
STEEL PROTECTION Immersion in water or subsoil conditions High solids tar free epoxy system
SYSTEM
4072
October 2004
GENERAL APPLICATION ASPECTS: The life of any protective system is determined by the dry film thickness of the anticorrosive coating system present on weldseams, sharp edges, bolts and nuts, these being the critical 20% of the surface area where breakdown begins. All critical areas should be given extra stripe coats with the same material as the consecutive coat of the system to achieve the specified dry film thickness. Giving more attention to these areas will extend the life of the maintenance system. The following parameters can be used. For hand laid welds: Beads with a surface irregularity exceeding 3 mm or with sharp crests having a radius under 2 mm should be ground. For sharp edges: All edges to be rounded off with a grinder to a radius of 2 mm or more. For pitting: Pitting in excess of 2 mm in depth and under 5 mm in diameter should be filled by welding or by use of an epoxy filler. REFERENCES SigmaCover 280 SigmaCover 630 SigmaCover 805 Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Tools for maintenance manual see product data sheet 7417 see product data sheet 7430 see product data sheet 7726 see information sheet 1490 see information sheet 4007
page 2/2
STEEL PROTECTION Immersion in hot water Phenolic epoxy system - Mio epoxy system
a three page issue
SYSTEM
4076
Non-saline water: Sea water:
hot water applicable to e.g. water tanks, storage tanks and domestic water systems. hot sea and other saline waters.
GENERAL ASPECTS: Protection against hot water by a coating system is in fact very critical. Only the combination of very good pretreatment, correct film thicknesses, good curing and optimal ventilation after application of the coating will give the desired protection against the influence of hot water. Good surface preparation is essential if good performance of hot water resistant systems is to be achieved. A pitted corroded surface, impurities in the protective coating or bad workmanship will result in failures. In service the steel substrate should have about the same temperature as the hot water itself in order to avoid blistering (as a result of the cold wall effect). Equipment, tank or vessel must therefore be sheltered against cold wind and/or insulated adequately to reduce heat transfer through the steel wall plus coating system. Application of the paints must be done very carefully, avoiding excess thickness, avoiding solvent trapping and maintaining good ventilation and curing conditions throughout the application process. (See sheet 1434). Forced curing by means of hot water of 60C or by means of hot air will give definitely better results and is strongly recommended. SPECIFICATION 1: pretreatment phenolic epoxy system for a total repair or new construction resistant to hot water (100C/210F) after high pressure water cleaning complete removal of old paint system (if applicable) and derusting of steel to min. ISO-Sa2, blasting profile (Rz) 50-100 m/2-4 mils Phenguard 930 Phenguard 935 Phenguard 940 100 m/4.0 mils 100 m/4.0 mils 100 m/4.0 mils
paint system
notes
to ensure optimal performance it is essential to check, prior to application, the cleaned surface on soluable salts the maximum acceptable level is 60 mg/m2 (12 s/cm) spot repair can be made using same system existing coating around damages should be carefully feathered the individual coats may not exceed 1,5 x the specified dft
page 1/3
SYSTEM
4076
April 2009
mio epoxy system for a total repair or new construction resistant to hot water (100C/210F) after high pressure water cleaning, complete removalof old paint system (if applicable) and derusting of steel by means of blast cleaning to min. ISO-Sa2, blasting profile (Rz) 40-75 m/1.6-3.0 mils SigmaCover 522 SigmaCover 522 SigmaCover 522 80 m/3.2 mils 80 m/3.2 mils 80 m/3.2 mils
paint system
notes
to ensure optimal performance it is essential to check, prior to application, the cleaned surface on soluable salts the maximum acceptable level is 60 mg/m2 (12 s/cm) spot repairs can be made using same system existing coating around damages should be carefully feathered the individual coats may not exceed 2 x the specified dft
GENERAL APPLICATION ASPECTS: The life of any protective system is determined by the dry film thickness of the anticorrosive coating system present on weldseams, sharp edges, bolts and nuts, these being the critical 20% of the surface area where breakdown begins. All critical areas should be given extra stripe coats with the same material as the consecutive coat of the system to achieve the specified dry film thickness. Giving more attention to these areas will extend the life of the maintenance system. The following parameters can be used. For hand laid welds: Beads with a surface irregularity exceeding 3 mm or with sharp crests having a radius under 2 mm should be ground. For sharp edges: All edges to be rounded off with a grinder to a radius of 2 mm or more. For pitting: Pitting in excess of 2 mm in depth and under 5 mm in diameter should be filled by welding.
page 2/3
SYSTEM
4076
April 2009
REFERENCES Phenguard 930 Phenguard 935 Phenguard 940 SigmaCover 522 Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Tools for maintenance manual see product data sheet 7409 see product data sheet 7435 see product data sheet 7436 see product data sheet 7420 see information sheet 1490 see information sheet 4007
page 3/3
STEEL PROTECTION Immersion in chemicals Phenolic epoxy system

a two page issue
SYSTEM
4081
Immersion in or splash of chemicals, acids and alkalies Application areas: transport tanks, storage tanks and equipment continuously or intermittently exposed to a wide range of solvents, fatty acids, chemicals, monomers and water, including fresh water, hot water and foodstuffs. A full resistance list is available.
GENERAL ASPECTS: To obtain an optimal result it is essential to remove the old paint system and to blast clean the steel surface. Spot repairs can be made using this system (see 4005). Existing coating around damages should be feather edged carefully. The chemical resistance will be determined by the existing coating system and the spot repair. SPECIFICATION 1: phenolic epoxy system for a total repair or new construction, resistant to immersion and splash of chemicals according to the tankcoating resistance list; for indications see also sheet 4009 after high pressure water cleaning complete removal of old paint system (if applicable) and derusting of steel to at least ISO-Sa2, blasting profile (Rz) 50-100 m/2-4 mils Phenguard 930 Phenguard 935 Phenguard 940 100 m/4.0 mils 100 m/4.0 mils 100 m/4.0 mils
pretreatment
paint system
note
the individual coats may not exceed 1,5 x the specified dft
page 1/2
STEEL PROTECTION Immersion in chemicals Phenolic epoxy system
SYSTEM
4081
April 2009
REFERENCES Phenguard 930 Phenguard 935 Phenguard 940 Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Tools for maintenance management see product data sheet 7409 see product data sheet 7435 see product data sheet 7436 see information sheet 1490 see information sheet 4007
page 2/2
STEEL PROTECTION Immersion in chemicals Solvent free epoxy system

a two page issue
SYSTEM
4082
Immersion in or splash of chemicals, acids and alkalies. Application areas: storage tanks and equipment continuously or intermittently exposed to aliphatic and aromatic hydrocarbons and water.
GENERAL ASPECTS: To obtain an optimal result it is essential to remove the old paint system and to blast clean the steel surface. Spot repairs can be made using this system (see 4005). Existing coating around damages should be feather edged carefully. The chemical resistance will be determined by the existing coating system and the spotrepair. SPECIFICATION 1: solvent free phenolic epoxy system for new construction or total repair, resistant to immersion and splash of chemicals as indicated by data in sheet 4009 if an old paint system is present, high pressure water cleaning and complete removal steel; derusted to ISO-Sa2, blasting profile (Rz) 50-100 m/2-4 mils Novaguard 840 400 m/16.0 mils if a holding primer is required a suitable epoxy primer should be applied in a dft of 75 m/3mils
pretreatment
paint system note
solvent free epoxy system for a total repair or new construction, resistant to immersion and splash of chemicals as indicated by data in sheet 4009 after high pressure water cleaning complete removal of old paint system (if applicable) and derusting of steel to ISO-Sa2, blasting profile (Rz) 50-100 m/2-4 mils Sigmaguard CSF 650 400 m/16.0 mils
paint system note
if a holding primer is required a suitable epoxy primer should be applied in a dft of 75m/3mils
page 1/2
STEEL PROTECTION Immersion in chemicals Solvent free epoxy system
SYSTEM
4082
April 2009
GENERAL APPLICATION ASPECTS: The life of any protective system is determined by the dry film thickness of the anticorrosive coating system present on weldseams, sharp edges, bolts and nuts, these being the critical 20% of the surface area where breakdown begins. All critical areas should be given extra stripe coats with the same material as the consecutive coat of the system to achieve the specified dry film thickness. Giving more attention to these areas will extend the life of the maintenance system. The following parameters can be used. For hand laid welds: Beads with a surface irregularity exceeding 3 mm or with sharp crests having a radius under 2 mm should be ground. For sharp edges: All edges to be rounded off with a grinder to a radius of 2 mm or more. For pitting: Pitting in excess of 2 mm in depth and under 5 mm in diameter should be filled by welding. REFERENCES Novaguard 840 Sigmaguard CSF 650 Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Tools for maintenance management see product data sheet 7468 see product data sheet 7443 see information sheet 1490 see information sheet 4007
page 2/2
STEEL PROTECTION Immersion in chemicals Zinc ethyl silicate system

a two page issue
SYSTEM
4083
Immersion in or splash of chemicals, specifically solvents. Application areas: for storage tanks for aggressive solvents. The resistance to acidic or alkaline chemicals is limited due to the zinc pigment. A full resistance list is available.
GENERAL ASPECTS: To obtain an optimal result it is essential to remove the old paint system and to blast clean the steel surface. Spot repairs can be made using this system (see 4005). Existing coating around damages should be feather edged SPECIFICATION 1: zinc ethyl silicate system for a total repair or new construction; resistant to immersion and splash of chemicals according to the tankcoating resistance list, for indications see also sheet 4009 after high pressure water cleaning complete removal of old paint system (if applicable) and derusting of steel to ISO-Sa2, blasting profile (Rz) 40-70 m/1.6-2.8 mils SigmaGuard 750 75 m/3.0 mils
pretreatment
paint system
page 1/2
STEEL PROTECTION Immersion in chemicals Zinc ethyl silicate system
SYSTEM
4083
September 2005
REFERENCES SigmaGuard 750 Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Tools for maintenance management see product data sheet 7551 see information sheet 1490 see information sheet 4007
page 2/2
STEEL PROTECTION
SYSTEM
Immersion in refined petroleum products and crude oil High solids epoxy system
a two page issue
4090
January 2008 revision of September 2005
Immersion in or splash of refined petroleum products and crude oil. Application areas: storage tanks and equipment continuously exposed to aliphatic and aromatic hydrocarbons and a limited range of solvents and chemicals. A full resistance list is available.
GENERAL ASPECTS: To obtain an optimal result it is essential to remove the old paint system and to blast clean the steel surface. Spot repairs can be made using this system (see 4005). Existing coating around damages should be feather edged carefully. SPECIFICATION 1: high solids epoxy system for a total repair or new construction, suitable for refined petroleum products and crude oil, resistant to crude oil temperatures up to 70C/160F complete removal of old paint system (if applicable) and derusting of steel to ISO-Sa2 SigmaGuard 720 SigmaGuard 720 125 m/5.0 mils 125 m/5.0 mils
if a holding primer is required, a suitable primer (e.g. SigmaCover 522) should be applied in a dft of 50 m/2 mils
SPECIFICATION 2:
high solids epoxy system for a total repair or new construction, suitable for refined petroleum products and crude oil, resistant to crude oil temperatures up to 70C/160F complete removal of old paint system (if applicable) and derusting of steel to ISO-Sa2 SigmaGuard 730 SigmaGuard 730 150 m/6.0 mils 150 m/6.0 mils
if a holding primer is required, a suitable primer (e.g. SigmaCover 522) should be applied in a dft of 50 m/2 mils
page 1/2
STEEL PROTECTION
SYSTEM
Immersion in refined petroleum products and crude oil High solids epoxy system
4090
January 2008
GENERAL APPLICATION ASPECTS: The life of any protective system is determined by the dry film thickness of the anticorrosive coating system present on weldseams, sharp edges, bolts and nuts, these being the critical 20% of the surface area where breakdown begins. All critical areas should be given extra stripe coats with the same material as the consecutive coat of the system to achieve the specified dry film thickness. Giving more attention to these areas will extend the life of the maintenance system. The following parameters can be used. For hand laid welds: Beads with a surface irregularity exceeding 3 mm or with sharp crests having a radius under 2 mm should be ground. For sharp edges: All edges to be rounded off with a grinder to a radius of 2 mm or more. For pitting: Pitting in excess of 2 mm in depth and under 5 mm in diameter should be filled by welding or by use of an epoxy filler. REFERENCES SigmaCover 522 SigmaGuard 720 SigmaGuard 730 Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Tools for maintenance management see product data sheet 7420 see product data sheet 7433 see product data sheet 7459 see information sheet 1490 see information sheet 4007
intended for guidance only. All recommendations or suggestions relating to the use of the Sigma Coatings products made by SigmaKalon Marine & Protective Coatings, whether in technical documentation, or in response to a specific enquiry, or otherwise, are based on data which to the best of our knowledge are reliable. The products and information are designed for users having the requisite knowledge and industrial skills and it is the end-user's responsibility to determine the suitability of the product for its intended use. SigmaKalon Marine & Protective Coatings has no control over either the quality or condition of the substrate, or the many factors affecting the use and application of the product. SigmaKalon Marine & Protective Coatings does therefore not accept any liability arising from loss, injury or damage resulting from such use or the contents of this data sheet (unless there are written agreements stating otherwise). The data contained herein are liable to modification as a result of practical experience and continuous product development. This data sheet replaces and annuls all previous issues and it is therefore the users responsibility to ensure that this sheet is current prior to using the product.
page 2/2
STEEL PROTECTION
SYSTEM
Immersion in refined petroleum products and crude oil Epoxy tar system
a two page issue
4091
Immersion in crude oil or splash of crude oil or refined petroleum products. Application areas: storage tanks and equipment continuously or intermittently exposed to crude oil and (waste) water.
GENERAL ASPECTS: To obtain a good performance it is essential to remove the old paint system and to blast clean the steel surface. Spot repairs can be made using this system. (see 4005) Existing coatings around damages should be feather edged carefully. SPECIFICATION 1: pretreatment epoxy tar system for a total repair or new construction, suitable for crude oil, resistant to temperatures up to 70C/160F complete removal of old paint system (if applicable) and derusting of steel to ISO-Sa2 if a holding primer is required SigmaCover 280 can be applied in a dft of 75 m/3 mils SigmaCover 300 brown SigmaCover 300 black 125 m/5.0 mils 125 m/5.0 mils
paint system note
in contact with refined petroleum products leaching of coal tar can be expected
page 1/2
STEEL PROTECTION
SYSTEM
Immersion in refined petroleum products and crude oil Epoxy tar system
4091
October 2004
REFERENCES SigmaCover 280 SigmaCover 300 Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Tools for maintenance management see product data sheet 7417 see product data sheet 7472 see information sheet 1490 see information sheet 4007
page 2/2
STEEL PROTECTION
SYSTEM
Immersion in refined petroleum products and crude oil Solvent free epoxy system
a two page issue
4092
Immersion in crude oil or splash of crude oil or refined petroleum products. Application areas: storage tanks and equipment continuously or intermittently exposed to aliphatic and aromatic hydrocarbons and a limited range of solvents and chemicals. A full resistance list is available.
GENERAL ASPECTS: To obtain a good performance it is essential to remove the old paint system and to blast clean the steel surface. Spot repairs can be made using this system. (see 4005) Existing coatings around damages should be feather edged carefully. SPECIFICATION 1: solvent free phenolic epoxy system for new construction or total repair, suitable for refined petroleum products and crude oil, resistant to crude oil temperatures up to 90C/194F if an old paint system is present complete removal of the system is required after high pressure water cleaning steel; derusted to ISO-Sa2, blasting profile (Rz) 50-100 m/2-4 mils Novaguard 840 400 m/16.0 mils
pretreatment
paint system notes
quality of the applied coating should be checked on pinholes and holidays and repaired according to this specification to fill pittings a scrapelayer of Novaguard 840 could be applied more detailed information with regards to protection of tank bottoms can be found in separate manual
SPECIFICATION 2:
solvent free epoxy system for a total repair or new construction, suitable for refined petroleum products and crude oil, resistant to crude oil temperatures up to 60C/140F after high pressure water cleaning complete removal of old paint system (if applicable) and derusting of steel to ISO-Sa2, blasting profile (Rz) 50-100 m/2-4 mils SigmaCover 522 Sigmaguard CSF 650 50 m/ 2.0 mils 400 m/16.0 mils
pretreatment
paint system notes
quality of the applied coating should be checked on pinholes and holidays and repaired according to this specification to fill pittings a scrapelayer of Sigmaguard CSF 650 could be applied
page 1/2
STEEL PROTECTION
SYSTEM
Immersion in refined petroleum products and crude oil Solvent free epoxy system
4092
April 2009
GENERAL APPLICATION ASPECTS: The life of any protective system is determined by the dry film thickness of the anticorrosive coating system present on weldseams, sharp edges, bolts and nuts, these being the critical 20% of the surface area where breakdown begins. All critical areas should be given extra stripe coats with the same material as the consecutive coat of the system to achieve the specified dry film thickness. Giving more attention to these areas will extend the life of the maintenance system. The following parameters can be used. For hand laid welds: Beads with a surface irregularity exceeding 3 mm or with sharp crests having a radius under 2 mm should be ground. For sharp edges: All edges to be rounded off with a grinder to a radius of 2 mm or more. For pitting: Pitting in excess of 2 mm in depth and under 5 mm in diameter should be filled by welding or by a scrapelayer of the solvent free epoxy of the coating system (Novaguard 840 or Sigmaguard CSF 650). REFERENCES Novaguard 840 SigmaCover 522 Sigmaguard CSF 650 Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Tools for maintenance management see product data sheet 7468 see product data sheet 7420 see product data sheet 7443 see information sheet 1490 see information sheet 4007
page 2/2
STEEL PROTECTION Immersion in waste water and slurry Epoxy tar system
a two page issue
SYSTEM
4101
Applicable to river installations, sewage-treatment tanks, water tanks and domestic water systems, and where abrasion can be expected.
GENERAL ASPECTS: To obtain a good performance it is essential to remove the old paint system and to blast clean the steel surface. Spot repairs can be made using this system. (see 4005) Existing coating around damages should be feather edged carefully. SPECIFICATION 1: pretreatment epoxy tar system for a total repair or new construction, suitable for waste water and mud complete removal of old paint system (if applicable) and derusting of steel to ISO-Sa2 if a holding primer is required SigmaCover 280 can be applied in a dft of 50 m/2 mils SigmaCover 300 brown SigmaCover 300 black 150 m/6.0 mils 150 m/6.0 mils
paint system note
to prevent severe pitting when exposed to acidic water the quality of the coating system should be checked on pinholes and holidays and repaired according to this specification
page 1/2
STEEL PROTECTION Immersion in waste water and slurry Epoxy tar system
SYSTEM
4101
October 2004
page 2/2
STEEL PROTECTION Immersion in waste water and slurry High solids tar free epoxy system
a two page issue
SYSTEM
4102
GENERAL ASPECTS: To obtain a good performance it is essential to remove the old paint system and to blast clean the steel surface. Spot repairs can be made using this system. (see 4005) Existing coating around damages should be feather edged carefully. SPECIFICATION 1: pretreatment paint system note high solids epoxy tar free system for a total repair or new construction, suitable for waste water and mud complete removal of old paint system (if applicable) and derusting of steel to ISO-Sa2 SigmaCover 805 SigmaCover 805 150 m/6.0 mils 150 m/6.0 mils
the individual coats may not exceed 2 x the specified dft if a holding primer is required SigmaCover 280 75 m/3.0 mils can be used
page 1/2
STEEL PROTECTION Immersion in waste water and slurry High solids tar free epoxy system
SYSTEM
4102
October 2004
page 2/2
STEEL PROTECTION Immersion in waste water and slurry Solvent free phenolic epoxy system
a two page issue
SYSTEM
4103
GENERAL ASPECTS: To obtain a good performance it is essential to remove the old paint system and to blast clean the steel surface. Spot repairs can be made using this system. (see 4005) Existing coating around damages should be feather edged carefully. SPECIFICATION 1: Solvent free phenolic epoxy system with improved resistance against abrasion for a total repair or new construction, suitable for waste water and mud complete removal of old paint system (if applicable) and derusting of steel to ISO-Sa2, blasting profile (Rz) 50-100 m/2-4 mils SigmaShield 1200 500 m/20.0 mils
pretreatment paint system
page 1/2
STEEL PROTECTION Immersion in waste water and slurry Solvent free phenolic epoxy system
SYSTEM
4103
September 2005
REFERENCES SigmaShield 1200 Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Tools for maintenance management see product data sheet 7744 see information sheet 1490 see information sheet 4007
page 2/2
STEEL PROTECTION System for special conditions Zinc epoxy primed steel
a two page issue
SYSTEM
4113
GENERAL ASPECTS: Due to its good anticorrosive properties, zinc epoxy primers are often specified for new fabrication. However, in maintenance coating systems zinc epoxy primers cannot be applied on top of existing organic coatings, because of lack of adhesion. Nevertheless as a result of the good experience with the new fabrication coating system it is often decided to start the maintenance coating system again with a zinc epoxy primer. In that case a full reblast of the substrate is necessary. If a full reblast is impossible other recommendations for maintenance are given in sheets 4041-4042. SPECIFICATION 1: pretreatment high solids system for a total repair or new construction, using a zinc epoxy primer, followed by an epoxy build coat after high pressure water cleaning complete removal of old paint system (if applicable) and derusting of steel to ISO-Sa2, blasting profile (Rz) 40-70 m/1.6-2.8 mils SigmaZinc 102 HS SigmaCover 805 if gloss retention is required, see specification 2 60 m/2.4 mils 150 m/6.0 mils
paint system note
SPECIFICATION 2:
high solids system for a total repair or new construction, using a zinc epoxy primer, followed by an epoxy build coat and finished with a recoatable polyurethane finish after high pressure water cleaning complete removal of old paint system (if applicable) and derusting of steel to ISO-Sa2, blasting profile (Rz) 40-70 m/1.6-2.8 mils SigmaZinc 102 HS SigmaCover 805 SigmaDur 580 60 m/2.4 mils 150 m/6.0 mils 75 m/3.0 mils
pretreatment
paint system
page 1/2
STEEL PROTECTION System for special conditions Zinc epoxy primed steel
SYSTEM
4113
September 2005
GENERAL APPLICATION ASPECTS: The life of any protective system is determined by the dry film thickness of the anticorrosive coating system present on weldseams, sharp edges, bolts and nuts, these being the critical 20% of the surface area where breakdown begins. All critical areas should be given extra stripe coats with the same material as the consecutive coat of the system to achieve the specified dry film thickness. Giving more attention to these areas will extend the life of the maintenance system. The following parameters can be used. For hand laid welds: Beads with a surface irregularity exceeding 3 mm or with sharp crests having a radius under 2 mm should be ground. For sharp edges: All edges to be rounded off with a grinder to a radius of 2 mm or more. For pitting: Pitting in excess of 2 mm in depth and under 5 mm in diameter should be filled by welding. REFERENCES SigmaCover 805 SigmaDur 580 SigmaZinc 102 HS Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Tools for maintenance management see product data sheet 7726 see product data sheet 7530 see product data sheet 7702 see information sheet 1490 see information sheet 4007
page 2/2
INFORMATION
CONVERSION TABLES
a four page issue
1410
June 2002 revision of 10-1999 PRESSURE
GENERAL 1 atmosphere 1 foot 1 Imp. gallon 1 litre 1 litre 1 metre 1 sq. foot 1 sq. metre 1 US gallon 1 yard 1 metre degree C degree F = = = = = = = = = = = = = 14.223 lb/sq.in. 0.305 metre 4.546 litres 0.220 Imp. gallon 0.264 US gallon 3.281 feet 0.093 sq. metre 10.765 sq. feet 3.785 litres 0.915 metre 1.0936 yard 5/9 x (degree F - 32) 9/5 x degree C + 32
(kg/cm) atmosphere (bar) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
(p.s.i.) lb/sq.in.
14.2 28.4 42.7 56.9 71.1 85.3 99.6 113.8 128.0 142.2
(kg/cm) atmosphere (bar) 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180 190 200
(p.s.i.) lb/sq.in. 1420 1560 1710 1850 1990 2130 2280 2420 2560 2700 2840
VOLUME 1 Imperial gallon = = 1 litre = = 1 US gallon = = litres 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 15 20 50 100 4.55 litre 1.2 US gallons 0.22 Imperial gallon 0.26 US gallon 3.79 litre 0.83 Imperial gallon US gallons 0.26 0.53 0.79 1.06 1.32 1.58 1.85 2.11 2.38 2.64 3.96 5.28 13.21 26.42
DRY FILM THICKNESS microns (m) mils 8 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 0.3 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 3.0 3.2 3.4 3.6 3.8 4.0 microns (m) mils 105 110 115 120 125 130 135 140 145 150 155 160 165 170 175 180 185 190 195 200 4.2 4.4 4.6 4.8 5.0 5.2 5.4 5.6 5.8 6.0 6.2 6.4 6.6 6.8 7.0 7.2 7.4 7.6 7.8 8.0 microns (m) mils 205 210 215 220 225 230 235 240 245 250 255 260 265 270 275 280 285 290 295 300 8.2 8.4 8.6 8.8 9.0 9.2 9.4 9.6 9.8 10.0 10.2 10.4 10.6 10.8 11.0 11.2 11.4 11.6 11.8 12.0 microns (m) mils 305 310 315 320 325 330 335 340 345 350 355 360 365 370 375 380 385 390 395 400 12.2 12.4 12.6 12.8 13.0 13.2 13.4 13.6 13.8 14.0 14.2 14.4 14.6 14.8 15.0 15.2 15.4 15.6 15.8 16.0
Imperial gallons 0.22 0.44 0.66 0.88 1.10 1.32 1.54 1.76 1.98 2.20 3.30 4.40 11.00 22.00
page 1/4
INFORMATION
CONVERSION TABLES
1410
June 2002
SPREADING RATE Sq.m./l 1.0 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 2.0 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7 2.8 2.9 3.0 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.6 3.7 3.8 3.9 4.0 4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 4.6 4.7 4.8 4.9 Sq.ft./ Imp.gal 49 54 59 64 68 73 78 83 88 93 98 103 108 112 117 122 127 132 137 142 147 152 156 161 166 171 176 181 186 191 196 200 205 210 215 220 225 230 235 240 sq.ft./ US gal 41 45 49 53 57 61 65 69 73 77 81 85 89 94 98 102 106 110 114 118 122 126 130 134 138 142 146 151 155 159 163 167 171 175 179 183 187 191 195 199 Sq.m./l 5.0 5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4 5.5 5.6 5.7 5.8 5.9 6.0 6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4 6.5 6.6 6.7 6.8 6.9 7.0 7.1 7.2 7.3 7.4 7.5 7.6 7.7 7.8 7.9 8.0 8.1 8.2 8.3 8.4 8.5 8.6 8.7 8.8 8.9 Sq.ft./ Imp.gal 244 249 254 259 264 269 274 279 284 288 293 298 303 308 313 318 323 328 332 337 342 347 352 357 362 367 372 376 381 386 391 396 401 406 411 416 420 425 430 435 sq.ft./ US gal 203 208 212 216 220 224 228 232 236 240 244 248 252 256 260 265 269 273 277 281 285 289 293 297 301 305 309 313 317 321 325 330 334 338 342 346 350 354 358 362 Sq.m./l 9.0 9.1 9.2 9.3 9.4 9.5 9.6 9.7 9.8 9.9 10.0 10.5 11.0 11.5 12.0 12.5 13.0 13.5 14.0 14.5 15.0 15.5 16.0 16.5 17.0 17.5 18.0 18.5 19.0 19.5 20.0 20.5 21.0 21.5 22.0 22.5 23.0 23.5 24.0 24.5 Sq.ft./ Imp.gal 440 445 450 455 460 464 469 474 479 484 490 515 540 560 585 610 635 660 685 710 735 760 780 805 830 855 880 905 930 955 980 1000 1025 1050 1075 1100 1125 1150 1175 1200 sq.ft./ US gal 366 370 374 378 383 387 391 395 399 403 405 425 450 470 490 510 530 550 570 590 610 630 650 670 690 710 735 755 775 795 815 835 855 875 895 915 935 955 975 995
page 2/4
INFORMATION
CONVERSION TABLES
1410
June 2002
VISCOSITY IN SECONDS DIN cup 4 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 Ford cup 4 15 17 18 19 21 22 23 25 26 28 29 30 31 33 34 35 38 40 43 45 48 51 Afnor coupe 4 17 18 20 21 23 24 25 27 28 30 31 32 34 35 36 38 40 43 46 48 51 54 B.S. cup 4 19 20 22 23 25 26 28 29 31 32 33 34 36 37 38 40 43 46 49 52 54 57 DIN cup 4 44 46 48 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180 Ford cup 4 53 55 58 60 67 73 79 86 92 98 104 111 117 123 136 148 160 173 185 198 210 223 Afnor coupe 4 56 59 62 64 71 78 84 91 97 104 110 117 124 130 144 157 171 184 197 210 224 237 B.S. cup 4 60 63 66 69 75 82 89 96 105 109 116 123 130 138 152 166 180 194 207 221 235 249
page 3/4
INFORMATION
CONVERSION TABLES
1410
June 2002
TEMPERATURE C 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 F 14.0 15.8 17.6 19.4 21.2 23.0 24.8 26.6 28.4 30.2 32.0 33.8 35.6 37.4 39.2 41.0 42.8 44.6
C = ( F - 32 ) x 5/9 C 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 22 24 26 28 30 F 46.4 48.2 50.0 51.8 53.6 55.4 57.2 59.0 60.8 62.6 64.4 66.2 68.0 72.0 75.0 79.0 82.0 86.0 C 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 F 90 93 97 100 104 108 111 115 118 122 131 140 149 158 167 176 185 194 C 95 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180 190 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 F 203 212 230 248 266 284 302 320 338 356 374 392 482 572 662 752 842 932
page 4/4
INFORMATION
EXPLANATION TO PRODUCT DATA SHEETS

an nine page issue
1411
October 2010 revision of April 2010
GENERAL For ease of reference figures are usually stated in one unit only. Equivalents are given in the conversion tables. See sheets 1410 Conversion tables, 1412 Nomograph conversion from english units to metric units and 1413 S.I. units. All values are given for temperature of 20C (68F) and relative humidity of 70%, unless stated otherwise. GLOSS With a Lange gloss gauge 5 ranges of gloss have been determined, compared with a standard sheet of black polished glass. The gloss values are determined on Lange gloss gauge (angle 60) according to ISO 2813 (= ASTM D-523). The expressions used in the data sheets are: Flat corresponds with 0- 15% Eggshell corresponds with 15- 30% Semi-gloss corresponds with 30- 60% Gloss corresponds with 60- 80% High-gloss corresponds with 80-100% (at 20 angle above 70%) In practice, the level of gloss and surface finish will be dependent upon a number of factors, including application and the condition of the surface to be overcoated. COLOUR For products supplied in different colours three colour quality levels exist: 1. Good For finishes in general, especially based on polyurethane, this quality matches the colour standard 2. Approximate For undercoats and low gloss topcoats in general, this quality level is close to the colour standard 3. Best Match For primers in general, this quality level is near to the colour standard MICACEOUS IRON OXIDE AND/OR ALUMINIUM CONTAINING PAINTS Micaceous iron oxide and/or aluminium containing paints show different appearance and colour impression depending on thickness and application method. A touch-up by brushing may be visible on a sprayed area. SHELF LIFE The period from the date of manufacture during which the paint can be transported and stored in undamaged and unopened packing at temperatures between 5-35C, without any influence on the application or performance of the paint. After exceeding this period the paint is subject to reinspection. Water-borne products must be protected from freezing at all times during storage and/or transport.
page 1/9
INFORMATION

SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS & TEMPERATURES
1411
In order to achieve optimal application results, the technical requirements as stated in the relevant product data sheets should be followed. It is recommended that during the application and initial curing, the substrate temperature does not exceed 40 C, unless otherwise stated in the relevant PDS. However, maintaining the required conditions in practice might prove difficult, and the substrate temperature may occasionally exceed the recommended limits. In such cases special care must be taken to ensure proper substrate wetting and film formation, avoid excessive over spray, dry spray, sagging and other application related coating defects. Precautions such as additional thinning of the coating, providing suitable sun/heat protection and/or forced ventilation might be adequate. However, maintaining the recommended application conditions will facilitate optimal application results. For further details regarding substrate conditions and temperatures refer to: Information Sheet 1490 Cleaning of steel and removal of rust Information Sheet 1650 Relative Humidity / Substrate Temperature / Air Temperature
page 2/9
INFORMATION
1411
October 2010
FULL CURE Full cure means, that the properties of a paint as described in the product data sheet are achieved (suitable for service). However, in case of dry bulk carriage an extra curing time may be required before the coating has reached its full mechanical strength and is suitable for carriage of hard angular cargoes FLASH POINT For paints the flash point is determined according to ISO 1523 (= ASTM D-3278, corresponding to Sigma method SM 311-41) or calculated. For thinners the flash point is determined according to DIN 51755 (corresponding to Sigma method SM 311-42) or calculated. Please always refer to the latest Material Safety Data Sheet for the paint and thinners. OVERCOATING TABLE The data given is a fair indication for normal conditions, longer drying times are necessary at lower temperatures and under unfavourable weather and/or ventilation conditions and higher dry film thicknesses. For epoxy coatings the minimum curing time for the recommended dft is given in the data sheets. For average dfts 50% higher, the minimum overcoating time should be multiplied by 1,5 and for average dfts 100% higher the multiplication factor is 2,5. Recoating data are based on atmospheric exposure, for other exposure conditions contact your nearest sales office. TOUCH DRY The touch dry time corresponds with the tack free time measured in accordance with ASTM D-1640 (corresponding with Sigma method SM 315-01). The touch dry time will be influenced by dft, ventilation conditions and substrate temperature. DRY TO HANDLE The dry to handle time corresponds with the dry-through time measured in accordance with ASTM D-1640 (corresponding with Sigma method SM 315-01) and indicates the time when walking over is possible. The dry-to-handle time will be influenced by dft, ventilation conditions and substrate temperature and should not be necessarily interpreted as ready for transportation due to the likelihood of excessive damage. DRY FILM THICKNESS (dft) / WET FILM THICKNESS (wft) The dry film thickness can be calculated from the applied wet film thickness: dft x 100 dft = wft x % volume solids wft = 100 % volume solids Recommended dft The dry film thickness for a paint system indicated in our system sheets is the recommended dft for the specific exposure conditions and based on airless spray application. Dft specifications referred to herein are valid for the coatings and coating systems in this manual unless mentioned otherwise in the respective product and system sheets.
page 3/9
INFORMATION
1411
October 2010
Minimum dft for application The minimum dft of a paint system (also a one coat system) should follow the 90/10 rule (e.g. 90% of the recommended dft is acceptable for up to 10% of the readings only), whilst for individual coats the minimum dft should not be lower than 80% of the recommended dft, and must form a closed film. Maximum dft for application - General Application of a paint at thicknesses in excess of the dft recommended on the product data sheet may result in performance problems. Such problems include solvent retention and a reduction in cohesive strength in association with certain types of topcoat. In a coating system, the dft of a primer is of the utmost importance. In general, Sigma Coatings would restrict the dft of any primer to 1.5 times that specified on the product data sheet. For a coating system, including the individual coats (except the primer), the maximum dft is 2 times the recommended dft, whereas for the critical areas of a painted structure, 10% of the readings can be between 2 and 2.2 times the recommended dft. Critical areas are e.g. weld seams, edges, bolts, corners, nuts and areas of difficult access. For coating specifications requiring coating thicknesses which exceed the recommended dfts as mentioned in the product and system sheets, the maximum dft allowed should be established per project prior to startup. Over-application and its consequences is a complex subject and is dependent on the generic type of system, recommended dft and number of coats, as well as the intended exposure. Please refer to your local Sigma Coatings office if you should have any questions on this important issue. The life time of any protective coating system is also determined by the dry film thickness applied to critical areas. The dft of all of these critical areas should be closely monitored and controlled by the application of stripe coats with the same material as the consecutive coat of the system (or as recommended otherwise by Sigma Coatings). Please note that if a solvented coating has been applied over the specified dft then the minimum overcoating time must be increased to ensure that sufficient time is given for solvent evaporation. Care must also be taken to avoid over-application on critical areas during the progress of the job. Overapplication does not lead to enhanced performance life time of the coating system. Maximum dft for application - Linings For linings for severe exposure conditions or reinforced solvent free systems, the dft of the primer and the subsequent coatings can be more critical. Dft limitations are detailed in the respective system / product data sheets.
page 4/9
INFORMATION
1411
October 2010
VOC Until further notice, the heavy duty Marine and PC coatings industries in Europe must comply with the VOC Directive 1999/13/EC (SED). VOC values (in g/kg) to assist with the annual calculation of the solvent limits related to the SED requirements, are mentioned on each Product Datasheet as well as on the label of all products. For decorative, functional and protective coatings used in buildings, the VOC Directive 2004/42/EC applies. This is based on compliant coatings. Label Example: 1999/13/EC : 320 g/kg 2004/42/IIa (i) 600 (2007) 360 Explanation Label Example: 1999/13/EC : 320 g/kg 2004/42/IIa (i) 600 (2007) 360 Max VOC according to Directive 1999/13/EC for material in the can. Reference to the sub-category according to Directive 2004/42/IIa Threshold limit for sub-category according to Directive 2004/42/IIa from 1.1.2007 till 1.1.2010 The max content of VOC in g/l of the product in a ready to use condition (including maximum amount of thinner according to Product Datasheet).
SOLIDS CONTENT BY VOLUME This value is given in the product data sheet. It can be determined by a laboratory test, Sigma Method 31410 corresponding to ISO method 3233 or calculated from the formulation. The calculated theoretical solids content by volume is in general lower than the determined solids content by volume. The latter approximates best to practice, assuming that the table for spreading rate losses is used correctly. Diluents with a high boiling point and low vapour pressure are widely used in solvent free coatings, they will remain in the cured film under normal ambient conditions and will therefore have negligible effect on the volume solids of these specific products. Furthermore, due to the relative high boiling point and rather low vapor pressure of these diluents, the ventilation requirements when using solvent free coatings in confined spaces to maintain the internal atmosphere at 10% of the Lower Explosion Limit, will be unchanged. TOLERANCES Values given for specific gravity, theoretical spreading rate and solids content are averages from standard production batches; these values can vary slightly, also for colours of one product.
page 5/9
INFORMATION
1411
October 2010
VENTILATION Adequate ventilation during application and curing of the coating is not only required for health and safety reasons but also to ensure that the coating gives optimal performance. Stagnant air/high vapour concentrations in confined spaces must be avoided. Forced ventilation will help to avoid high vapour concentrations and possible solvent entrapment in the coating which may produce a temporary plasticising effect. Ventilation with cold, humid air in the drying stage should be avoided. Also avoid ventilation with heated air during the wet film forming stage as this approach may give skinning and increased solvent entrapment. For more information, see the following data sheets: 1430 Safety indications 1431 Safety in confined spaces and health safety, explosion hazard - toxic hazard 1434 Directives for ventilation practice THEORETICAL SPREADING RATE The theoretical spreading rate m/l for a given dry film thickness can be calculated from: m/l = % volume solids x 10 dry film thickness (in m) PRACTICAL SPREADING RATE The practical spreading rate depends on a number of factors: surface condition and profile, application method, normal, high build or solvent-free paint, skill of labour and weather conditions. It is often estimated at about 70 % of the theoretical spreading rate but under many conditions this is still far too high. For calculation purposes the following table has been composed in which spreading rate LOSSES are compiled. Substrates like wood and concrete are not included because they present too many other variable factors, especially in the preparation, the filling of pores, etc. RECOMMENDED THINNERS This product must only be thinned using the recommended Sigma thinners. The use of alternative thinners, particularly these containing alcohols, can severely inhibit the curing mechanism of certain coating types and will influence the performance. In case of the use of other thinners than advised, Sigma Coatings will not accept any responsibility.
page 6/9
INFORMATION
1411
October 2010
ESTIMATED LOSSES IN PERCENTAGES ALL FIGURES 10 DEPENDING ON CIRCUMSTANCES (AS GUIDE ONLY) BARE STEEL/FIRST COAT 4) Type of surface and application method NEW blast-cleaned A-B-C ISO-Sa2 inside LARGE 1) airless spray air-spray roller airless spray air-spray roller-brush airless spray brush
: : : :
COATED STEEL/NEXT COAT NEW including shop primer OLD due for maintenance outside 45 55 40 60 60 30 85 30
OLD derusted C St 3 / D ISO-Sa2
outside inside 40 50 35 55 60 25 85 20 40 50 40 55 65 25 85 20
outside inside 50 60 40 65 65 30 85 20 25 35 30 40 45 20 85 20
outside inside 35 45 30 50 55 20 85 20 35 45 40 50 60 30 85 30
30 40 35 45 50 25 85 20
SMALL 2)
FRAMEWORK 3)
1) 2) 3) 4)
LARGE SURFACES SMALL SURFACES FRAMEWORK PRIMERS
hull, decks, deckhouses, tanks, holds masts, water ways, machinery, structural steel and complex structures ladders, piping and railings consumption of first coat is always higher than for subsequent coats because of the steel profile
Estimation of volume of paint necessary for a paint job can be calculated from: 10 x A x DFT = Q VS x (100-W) EXAMPLE Q A DFT VS W = = = = = quantity in litre area in m dry film thickness % volume solids (see data sheet) estimated losses (see table) Q A DFT VS W Q = = = = = to be calculated 1000 m 100 m 50% 40% 333 ltr.
= 10 x 1000 x 100 = 50 x (100-40)
page 7/9
INFORMATION
1411
october 2010
NOZZLE ORIFICE AND SPRAY ANGLE In the product data sheets only the recommended orifice is stated. The choice of the spray angle depends very much on the practical situation. The table below compares orifice and angle with the corresponding codes of various manufacturers. Please consult other manufacturers for their corresponding codes.
ORIFICE Inches 0,007 0,009 0,009 0,011 0,011 0,011 0,013 0,013 0,013 0,013 0,015 0,015 0,015 0,018 0,018 0,021 0,021 0,026 0,026 0,026 0,036 0,036
1) In
WIWA - Spray Tips 1) Angle 40 40 65 25 40 65 25 50 65 80 40 65 80 65 80 65 80 40 65 95 40 80 018/40 023/40 -028/25 028/40 028/65 033/25 033/50 033/65 033/80 038/40 038/65 -046/65 -053/65 -066/40 066/65 -091/40 091/80
GRACO - Spray Tips 2) Contractor ---269-211 269-411 -269-213 269-513 269-613 -Finish 163-407 163-409 163-609 163-211 163-411 163-611 163-213 163-513 163-613 163-813
mm's 0.18 0.23 0.23 0.28 0.28 0.28 0.33 0.33 0.33 0.33 0.38 0.38 0.38 0.46 0.46 0.53 0.53 0.66 0.66 0.66 0.91 0.91
269-415
269-615 269-815 --269-621 269-821 ------
163-415
163-615 163-815 163-618 163-818 163-621 163-821 163-426 163-626 163-926 ---
the WIWA number the relation between orifice and angle is clear
2) Orifice
Size determines how many liters per minute can be atomized through the airless spray tip. The last two digits of the part number tell the Orifice Size in thousandths of an inch. In this example, the orifice is 0.381 mm (015"). For ordering use the complete number.
Orifice Orifice
Tip No. 163-415

Spray Width
or
Tip No. 269-415

Spray Width
Spray Width is based on spraying distance 305 mm (12") from the surface. Double the fourth digit of the tip part number to determine the approximate minimum Spray Width in inches. Add two inches to that number for maximum width. In this example, this tip size produces a 203-254 mm (8-10") spray pattern (width) at 305 mm (12") distance from the surface.
page 8/9
INFORMATION
1411
October 2010
MIXING RATIO - twin-feed products The mix ratios in volume for twin-feed applied products should be retrieved from specific data sheets. It is very important that right ratios are maintained but deviations up to max. 3% are acceptable unless otherwise stated on specific data sheets. These products are generally supplied ready for use after mixing of components as extra diluting is not allowed. INDUCTION TIME If mentioned on the product data sheet the coating should be thoroughly mixed and left for the recommended time for the particular temperature conditions at application. This induction time or precuring of the product ensures that the coating will give the required performance and application properties. POT LIFE This gives the time interval after mixing of the components of the coating during which the material can be applied, without change of application and performance properties of the coating. For solvent containing coatings an extra addition of thinner up to 5% is allowed. For solvent free coatings addition of thinner is not permitted. For solvent free and high solid coatings an exothermic reaction occurs, resulting in gelation shortly after reaching the end of the pot life. It is important to clean equipment with the recommended cleaning thinner before the pot life has expired and/or directly after completion of application of the paint.
page 9/9
INFORMATION
SAFETY INDICATIONS
a three page issue
1430
Most paints contain flammable solvents and some contain materials which can harm the skin, or damage the health if swallowed or inhaled. Whilst most countries have developed regulations to control labelling, storage and use of toxic or hazardous material as yet there is no agreed international code or system. Sigma Coatings will adopt the local requirements in any country where their products are sold, but since it is quite impossible and even confusing to apply all the marks which could be required for every country, a Sigma Coatings system has been developed which is standard for our products throughout the world. We will then add local regulation markings in addition, if required. Two major classes of risk must be controlled and precautions defined which will reduce the risk to acceptable levels: A) Health risks, these include: 1. Gases or vapours. These could include solvent evaporation during the drying period, or perhaps formed during heating of the painted object. 2. Liquids in the paint. These might be solvents, or perhaps binders, which may be toxic if swallowed or inhaled as spray droplets, or dermatitic or toxic in contact with the skin. 3. Powders or dusts. These can be formed during heating painted objects (e.g. flame cutting or welding painted steel), or be present in powder formed during sanding operations, or in spray mist. B) Fire or explosion risks, these include: 1. Fire risk during storage or transport. Most paints other than water based products can be ignited and will support flame. 2. Explosion hazard during application. Flammable solvents in mixture with oxygen in air can explode within certain concentration limits if ignited or detonated. The following sentences are used to define the classes of hazard and this data sheet gives details of precautions which should be taken in each case.
page 1/3
INFORMATION
SAFETY INDICATIONS
1430
October 1999
Relatively harmless paint
Normal measures which are always applicable are: Wash hands regularly and thoroughly with warm water/soap. Immediately cover any wound or cut. Do not roll cigarettes, smoke, or eat with dirty hands. Beware of possible dust or fumes resulting from sand papering or burning. Check carefully that there is no possible fire or explosion risk. Check whether extra ventilation is required. Flash point of paints and solvents is stated in all our product data sheets. This is the lowest temperature at which a mixture of the material with air can ignite or explode. If the temperature of the air is near, or above, the flash point it is essential that sufficient ventilation air is provided to reduce the concentration of solvent well below the lower explosive limit (L.E.L.). Mixtures of solvent and air can only explode when the concentration lies between the lower and upper explosive limits. These limits vary from one solvent to another but the LEL is usually about 50 g per 1 m of air. This is described in detail in sheet 1431. In brief 200 m ventilation air is required per kilo of solvent to maintain an atmosphere below 10% of LEL. Such a mixture is safe even at temperatures above the flash point. Solvents and other components in some paints can irritate the skin, and although in normal paints this may only be a minor and temporary irritation, dermatitis of sensitive skins can be caused by solvents or chemicals in some paints. These are indicated by this glove sentence. Barrier creams together with gloves, goggles and possibly face masks should be used. In all cases, however, the habit of using solvents to clean the skin after painting should be discouraged. Contact of paint with the skin should be avoided by use of barrier creams and protective gloves. Any paint on the skin should be removed at once with skin cleaning liquids or jellies and then washed with water. Dust, smoke and spray mist can be filtered by face masks containing a dust filter cartridge. Cartridges are also available which absorb both dust and solvents. These are only effective whilst there is no apparent smell of solvent. The filter is exhausted when the odour of solvent can be detected and the filter should then be changed. It is most important that the correct filter for the class of work should be used. These are described by the manufacturers of the face mask and filter.
Highly flammable paint. Flash point up to and including 23C (DIN 53213).
Gloves recommended Paint which irritates or affects skin or mucous membranes.
Mask recommended Inhalation of dust and spraymist is harmful.
page 2/3
INFORMATION
SAFETY INDICATIONS
1430
October 1999
Fresh Air Mask recommended Toxic substances in paints usually enter the body by inhalation of gases, vapours, fumes, dusts or spray mists. An indication of the level of hazard is Inhalation of vapour and the Threshold Limits Value (T.L.V.), at one time called Maximum Allowable dust is harmful. Concentration (M.A.C.). This is the concentration which can be tolerated by a healthy worker for 8 hours a day without adverse effects. The lower the figure, the more toxic the substance. The concentrations are given either as parts per million (ppm), i.e. cm of vapour per m of air, or for solid dusts as mg per m. The minimum volume for air required to achieve this safe level of concentration will be given in our data sheets. This volume may in some cases be as much as 20 times that required to reach 10% of LEL and in some classes of work it may be impractical to supply the volume of air required to allow the required rate of usage of paint in the compartment. In such cases it is essential that operators are supplied with, and required to use, fresh air masks or respirators fed with clean air at positive pressure. It is important that the mask has a good facial fit. See also sheet 1431. Paint contains heavy toxic Keep skin covered as far as possible, wear gloves and protect the eyes. substances and is dangerous. Avoid contamination of the skin. Provide very good ventilation and wear fresh air mask. Change all overclothes and shoes immediately after finishing the work. Keep dirty cloths and other objects separate, destroy or clean contaminated clothes with care. Wash the hands very thoroughly. Handle empty containers with care and avoid contamination of the environment with any poisonous paint or waste. THE SIGMA WARNING SYSTEM will show one, or a combination of more than one, of the described sentences. The safety code required in each country will be added to drums used in that country.
page 3/3
INFORMATION
SAFETY IN CONFINED SPACES AND HEALTH SAFETY EXPLOSION HAZARD - TOXIC HAZARD
a five page issue
1431
When paints containing solvents are applied in enclosed or confined spaces, two hazards can exist, explosion and toxicity and precautions must be taken to eliminate them. General aspects of explosion hazards The nature of this hazard is explained in detail below. The essential precaution to be taken is that sufficient ventilation air must be provided to maintain the ratio of vapour/air at no more than 10% of the lower explosive limit. The method for calculation is given below and data on minimum ventilation air quantity is given in product data sheets. If the flash point of the solvent is above the working temperature, then an explosion cannot occur. However, it may still be necessary to ventilate to provide a clean working atmosphere or to eliminate toxic hazard. An explosion is simply very rapid burning of a flammable mixture (in the case of paint, it is the burning of solvent vapour in oxygen contained in the air). The speed of combustion is so great that there is extremely rapid development of heat and pressure (6 to 9 times the original pressure). This can lead to destruction of the compartment and injury to work people. Three factors must be present to create an explosion. a. The mixture of vapour and air must be between the lower explosive limit (LEL) and the upper explosive limit. b. The mixture must be at a temperature above the flash point temperature of the vapour. c. A source of ignition with high enough temperature and energy must be present to initiate the explosion reaction. These three factors explain the reasons for the safety precautions. Ventilation to provide an atmosphere below LEL It is usual to specify that ventilation should be provided to reduce vapour concentration to less than 10% of LEL. This large safety margin is required to allow for variations in ventilation in all parts of a compartment. (P x A) + (Q x B) The minimum ventilation air in m per minute may be calculated from the formula: t Calculation P Q A B t = = = = = volume of paint applied in the compartment in litres during time t minutes. volume of added solvent used in the paint applied in the compartment in litres in time t minutes. ventilation air quantity for 1 litre of paint to reach 10% LEL. ventilation air quantity for 1 litre of solvent to reach 10% LEL. time of application in minutes of volume P of paint.
page 1/5
INFORMATION
1431
October 1999
Example 100 litres of paint (P) plus 5 litres of thinner (Q) are used within 45 minutes (t). Value A is e.g. 60 m (given in product data sheet). Value B is e.g. 130 m (given in product data sheet). Ventilation air quantity m per minute to reach 10% LEL is: (100 x 60) + (5 x 130) = 147.7 m per minute. 45 Remarks This quantity of ventilation air must be maintained throughout the application of the paint and also during the period of evaporation of solvent. The ventilation must be arranged so that all parts of the compartment are properly ventilated. It is necessary for the applicator or the contractor to check vapour concentrations (in varying positions) regularly with an explosion meter. If the concentration rises above 10% LEL, painting must stop until the vapour concentration is reduced to a safe level again. Flash point If possible paints with flash points above the ambient temperature should be used. This often is not possible, particularly in compartments heated up by strong sunlight in summer. In such cases it is even more essential that ventilation below 10% LEL is maintained. Sources of ignition Sparks, hot surfaces, flames and all other sources of ignition must be absolutely prevented. Flame proof lighting and electrical equipment must be used, spark proof tools and clothing should be used and all work must be prohibited in adjacent compartments. All equipment, whether electrical or not electrical (e.g. pneumatic pumps, spray tips, etc.) must be adequately earthed to ensure no accumulation of static electrical charge.
TOXIC HAZARD
page 2/5
INFORMATION
1431
October 1999
General aspects of toxic hazard Many solvents used in paint have some degree of toxicity and it is necessary to provide sufficient ventilation air to maintain safe atmosphere below the threshold limit value (TLV). With many common solvents this may be impractical when applying large volumes of paint in a short time. In such cases ventilation to give a clear visibility and safety from explosion will still be necessary. It will also be necessary to provide operators in the compartment with fresh air masks or hoods. Barrier creams and protective clothing may also be necessary. Full details are given below and data for calculation of RAQ (required air quantity) are also provided. It is necessary to keep certain rules when using any paint since all can be harmful (even ordinary emulsion paints are dangerous if swallowed!). The following are basic safety precautions: Inhalation of dust and fumes This must be avoided by the use of ventilation or extraction. products should be used in well ventilated areas forced ventilation or fresh air masks should be used in confined spaces a face mask should be worn when spraying, sanding or blast cleaning Skin contact Some substances used in paint may cause irritation after repeated or prolonged contact with the skin and in susceptible cases there is a risk of dermatitis. operatives with a history of skin sensitivity should not be employed in processes where skin contact can occur prolonged or repeated contact of paint with the skin should be avoided barrier cream should be supplied and used gloves should be worn do not wash hands with solvent use a proprietary hand cleanser Ingestion The ingestion (swallowing) of paint must always be avoided. food should not be brought into or consumed in the work area where coatings are stored or used thorough washing of hands and face is essential after applying paint, particularly before eating or smoking if paint or thinners should accidently be swallowed, seek medical attention immediately
page 3/5
INFORMATION
1431
October 1999
Eye protection Steps should be taken to prevent material entering the eyes. goggles should be worn whenever necessary if the eyes become contaminated they should be irrigated with water; seek medical attention immediately Theoretical ventilation requirements In the product data sheets, data are given for the minimum required ventilation air quantity (RAQ) in cubic metres when 1 litre of paint is applied or when 1 litre of thinner is used. The TLV (=threshold limit value) for the mixture of components and solvents in the paint or for the mixture of solvents used in thinners has been calculated. Calculation The quantity of ventilation air required in m per minute during application and drying can be calculated from the formula: (P x M) + (Q x N) t P Q M N t = = = = = quantity of paint consumed in litres. quantity of thinner consumed in litres. min. ventilation air quantity needed to reach TLV of 1 litre of paint. min. ventilation air quantity needed to reach TLV of 1 litre of thinner. application time in minutes.
Example 100 litres of paint (P) are consumed in 45 minutes (t). 5 Litres of thinner (Q) were added to thin down the paint to the prescribed application viscosity. Value M is e.g. 780 m (see product data sheet). Value N is e.g. 2170 m (see product data sheet). The ventilation air quantity required during application and drying to reach TLV is: (100 x 780) + (5 x 2170) = 1974 m per minute 45 Remarks In semi-confined areas such as rooms with open doors and windows or the super structure of a ship, natural ventilation will be about 2 to 5 times the content of the room or space per hour, depending on weather conditions. The amount of fresh air necessary to reach TLV will be approximately 10 to 20 times the amount of fresh air necessary to reach 10% of LEL. When it is impractical to ventilate in such a way that TLV is not reached then fresh air masks must be used.
page 4/5
INFORMATION
1431
October 1999
Emergency procedure It may be necessary to enter an atmosphere which is unsafe. (You may have to rescue somebody). Before entering a confined space or tank ensure that: you wear breathing apparatus you wear a lifeline the lifeline is properly tended a watch is kept on you a means of communication exists a system of signals is agreed you and everybody else involved understand the signals You must also make sure that: a back-up or rescue squad is equipped to render assistance resuscitation equipment is on hand If you have to keep watch or tend a lifeline: keep a careful watch on your men below If you cannot see them: call out to them from time to time make sure they answer If they do not answer repeated calls or if they show signs of drunkenness or unusual behaviour: RAISE THE ALARM IMMEDIATELY DO NOT ATTEMPT TO RESCUE THE VICTIM BY YOURSELF DO NOT BECOME A VICTIM
page 5/5
INFORMATION
SAFE WORKING IN CONFINED SPACES

a two page issue
1433
Safe working is always of the greatest importance, but particularly during application of tankcoatings. The illustrations on this sheet indicate the quite simple principal measures that will ensure safe working.
page 1/2
INFORMATION
SAFE WORKING IN CONFINED SPACES
1433
October 1999
page 2/2
INFORMATION
DIRECTIVES FOR VENTILATION PRACTICE

a two page issue
1434
Ventilation is required for reasons of health and safety. In addition for solvent containing coatings the quality of a coating system is greatly affected by the amount and type of residual solvent in the layer when the coating dries or cures. Adhesion, water resistance, mechanical and chemical properties can all be adversely affected when solvents remain trapped in the paint film. Very slow evaporation of trapped solvents can also develop internal stresses due to shrinkage. The ventilation must be maintained throughout the application process at a minimum level of 10% of LEL value and for a period after application is completed when the paint cures or dries. As a guide line for good ventilation after application the confined space should be ventilated 4 to 5 times its contents per hour. Product data sheets indicate when any special ventilation requirements are required. Hot ventilation: Ventilating air with too high temperature can cause surface curing of epoxy coatings and although it may be necessary to produce a dry substrate before painting, the steel and air temperature should be such that when the application starts, the temperature of the ventilation (dehumidifier/heater) should be dropped so that the conditions stay stable. Hot ventilation air should be replaced by cool dry ventilation air as soon as possible after application of any coat is completed. Good ventilation consists of at least extraction at the lowest areas, but in most cases when controlled conditions are needed, also of air input (dry and/or heated). The combination of in and output must be correctly balanced. The opening of the extraction hose should be close to the bottom of the tank (approx 30-60 cm). Ventilation air should be directed to the bottom of the tank or compartment and should be extracted by exhaust fans of correctly balanced capacity. For complex structures the ventilation should be distributed over all compartments and confined spaces in order to facilitate good ventilation in all areas. BALLAST TANKS AND OTHER CONFINED SPACES. Due to regulations of the shipbuilding industry ballast tanks and double skin tanks count for many square meters confined spaces. Therefore it is necessary to pay good attention to the ventilation conditions during application, drying and curing of the coating on these areas. Depending on the structure of the ballast tanks, forced ventilation or natural ventilation is used during coating of the new building blocks. However, natural ventilation in many cases is not sufficient due to half open box conditions and can cause serious drawbacks related to health and safety as well as curing and performance of the coating. When ventilation is not sufficient solvents will not be removed, but will drift to the lower part of the section. As normally first the upperparts of a section will be painted, the solvents evaporating from the applied coating will drift to the lower part where it will attack the earlier applied coating (not yet fully cured) and this coating will absorb part of the solvents and swell. This coating will then be overcoated and problems related to bad adhesion, curing, water resistance etc. will result. In case of waterborne paints, this advice is not valid. Water vapour rises to the upper areas of the tank and may give condensation. Therefore it is recommended to position an extra exhaust outlet at the top of the tank.
page 1/2
INFORMATION
DIRECTIVES FOR VENTILATION PRACTICE
1434
October 1999
Also in this case ventilation is of utmost importance as drying under insufficient ventilation will prevent paint film formation. Practices recommended
page 2/2
INFORMATION
CLEANING OF STEEL AND REMOVAL OF RUST

an eight page issue
1490
June 2007 revision of January 2007
DERUSTING METHODS
The effective life time of a coating applied onto a steel surface is dependent to a very large extent on how thoroughly the surface has been prepared prior to painting. Surface preparation consists of primary surface preparation which aims to remove mill scale, rust and foreign matter from a steel surface prior to the application of a shop primer (prefabrication primer) or primer. Secondary surface preparation aims to remove rust and foreign matter, if any, from a steel surface coated with a shop primer (prefabrication primer) or primer prior to application of the anticorrosive paint system. A steel surface can be derusted in the following ways.
Wire brushing
Wire brushing, usually done with rotating wire brushes, is a conventional method, not suitable for the removal of mill scale, but suitable for the preparation of weld seams. The main disadvantage is, that treated surfaces are often not completely free of corrosion products and tend to become polished and contaminated with oil. This decreases the adhesion of priming paints and the performance of a paint system. Chipping or mechanical chipping is usually done in combination with wirebrushing. It is sometimes suitable for local repairs with conventional or special formulated paint systems. It is not suitable for general preparation of surfaces to be coated with epoxy or chlorinated rubber paints. It can be used for the removal of thick rust scale and economises in later blasting operations. To remove rust, paint etc. from corners and angles in order to achieve a cleaned surface with a profile. Flame cleaning involves derusting by thermal treatment making use of burning equipment (acetylene or propane and oxygen). It removes almost all mill scale, but rust to a lesser extent. Therefore this method cannot meet the requirements of modern paint systems. Disc sanding involves use of rotating discs covered with abrasive material. It is used for local repairs. The quality of these discs has been very much improved, and these can give good standards of preparation.
Chipping
Needle hammer
Flame cleaning
Disc sanding
page 1/8
INFORMATION
1490
June 2007
Sweep blasting
A hand operated form of superficial blast cleaning in which a primed or coated steel surface is roughened and is free of almost all visible contamination. (except oil contamination or traces of rust) A: light sweep, purpose: roughening of intact coating and improving the adhesion of subsequent coats Abrasive: fine (0,2-0,5 mm) is most suitable when the paint surface under treatment is not to be destroyed B: heavy sweep (approx ISO-Sa1), purpose: removing of not sound coating areas - layers Abrasive: small to medium (0,2-0,5/0,2-1,5 mm) Reference: Repainting of old metallic structures, limited blast cleaning scale Technical Guide, November 1993 Laboratoire Central des Ponts et Chausses 58, bd Lefebvre, F 75732 Paris Cedex 15
Dry blast cleaning
The impingement of a high kinetic energy stream of abrasive onto the surface to be prepared. It is either hand operated by jet or automatically by impeller and is the most thorough method of derusting. Centrifugal blast cleaning, compressed air blast cleaning and vacuum blast cleaning are well known types. The particles are as far as practical spherical and solid and should not contain more than the minimum practical amount of tails and irregular shapes. Primers to be used for shot blasted steel should be checked on performance. The particles show good angularity form with sharp cutting edges and should be substantially free from half-rounds (i.e. shot split in half). Unless otherwise stated in the specifications a mineral grit should be used.
Shot
Grit
page 2/8
INFORMATION
1490
June 2007
Water (abrasive) cleaning/jetting (Terminology NACE) Water (abrasive) blast cleaning
Different types of water (abrasive) cleaning/jetting are in use Below you will find the most commonly used ones For more info see also information sheet 1498 (Hydrojetting) Some examples of these techniques are given below, not pretending to be complete. New developments with wet blasting methods are presented regularly, improving the efficiency and reducing the amount of water or grit. LOW PRESSURE WATER ABRASIVE BLAST CLEANING Pressure = 6-8 bar Water consumption = 90-300 l/hour Cleaning speed = 10-16 m/hour, depending on material to be removed Result: a surface cleanliness and blasting profile as required can be obtained. LOW PRESSURE HUMIDIFIED ABRASIVE BLAST CLEANING Pressure = 6-8 bar Water consumption = 5-60 l/hour Cleaning speed = 10-16 m/hour, depending on material to be removed Result: a surface cleanliness and blasting profile as required can be obtained. ULTRA HIGH PRESSURE WATER JETTING (UHPWJ) Pressure - more than 1700 bar Use: Complete removal of all coatings and rust. The result can be compared with dry abrasive blast cleaning, but with flash rust after drying. The original blasting profile will be maintained. HIGH PRESSURE WATER JETTING (HPWJ) Pressure - from 700 to 1700 bar Use: Most paints and corrosion products will be removed, Magnetite and hard tightly adherent coating may be left but can be removed with difficulty. The original blasting profile will be maintained.
page 3/8
INFORMATION
1490
June 2007
Water cleaning
LOW PRESSURE WATER CLEANING (LPWC) Pressure - lower than 350 bar Use: Removal of salt, dirt and poorly adherent surface contamination. Mainly washing of surface HIGH PRESSURE WATER CLEANING (HPWC) Pressure - from 350 to 700 bar Use: Loose paint, rust, debris and material in pits will be removed, but black iron oxide (Magnetite) will remain. A uniform matte finish cannot be achieved. STEAM CLEANING Pressure = 100-120 bar Use: Removal of water soluble or water emulsified contamination; the substrate dries quicker compared to a water rinsed substrate.
ISO STANDARDS
When specifying a precise degree of derusting and cleaning of a steel surface prior to painting, Sigma uses the ISO standard ISO 8501-1-1988 and ISO 8504-1992. This indicates the following rust grades: A = steel surface largely covered with adherent mill scale but little, if any, rust. B = steel surface which has begun to rust and from which the mill scale has begun to flake. C = steel surface on which the mill scale has rusted away or from which it can be scraped, but with slight pitting visible when viewed normally. D = steel surface on which the mill scale has rusted away and on which general pitting is visible when viewed normally.
ISO 8501-1 Applicable to bare mill-scaled or rusty steel
page 4/8
INFORMATION
1490
June 2007
DEGREES OF PRIMARY SURFACE PREPARATION ISO-St Hand and power tool cleaning
The ISO standard indicates six preparation degrees. The following standards are often used in specifications: Surface preparation by hand and power tool cleaning, such as scraping, wire-brushing, machine-brushing and grinding, is designated by the letters St. Prior to hand and power tool cleaning, any heavy layers of rust shall be removed by chipping. Visible oil, grease and dirt shall also be removed. After hand and power tool cleaning, the surface shall be cleaned from loose dust and debris.
ISO-St2 Thorough hand and power tool cleaning ISO-St3 Very thorough hand and power tool cleaning ISO-Sa Blast cleaning
When viewed without magnification, the surface shall be free from visible oil, grease and dirt, and from poorly adhering mill scale, rust, paint coatings and foreign matter. As for St2, but the surface shall be treated much more thoroughly to give a metallicsheen arising from the metallic substrate.
Surface preparation by blast cleaning is designated by the letters Sa. Prior to blast cleaning, any heavy layers of rust shall be removed by chipping. Visible oil, grease and dirt shall also be removed. After blast cleaning, the surface shall be cleaned from loose dust and debris.
ISO-Sa1 Light blast cleaning
When viewed without magnification, the surface shall be free from visible oil, grease and dirt, and from poorly adhering mill scale, rust, paint coatings and foreign matter. When viewed without magnification, the surface shall be free from visible oil, grease and dirt and from most of the mill scale, rust, paint coatings and foreign matter. Any residual contamination shall be firmly adhering. When viewed without magnification, the surface shall be free from visible oil, grease and dirt and from mill scale, rust, paint coatings and foreign matter. Any remaining traces of contamination shall show only as slight stains in the form of spots or stripes. When viewed without magnification, the surface shall be free from visible oil, grease and dirt and shall be free from mill scale, rust, paint coatings and foreign matter. It shall have a uniform metallic colour.
ISO-Sa2 Thorough blast cleaning
ISO-Sa2 Very thorough blast cleaning
ISO-Sa3 blast cleaning to visually clean steel
page 5/8
INFORMATION
1490
June 2007
Remark
The photographs in the ISO Standard publication are given as illustration only. They do not represent the complete preparation degree, which also includes a cleaning operation which is not visible in the photographs. (colourless contamination). As far as blast cleaning is concerned, equivalents according to British and American standards are given in the following table. ISO 8501-01 Sa3 Sa2 Sa2 BS 4232 1st quality 2nd quality 3rd quality SSPC-Vis 1 * White metal Near white Commercial SP 5 SP 10 SP 6
Equivalents
* for more details see SSPC-SP com
Roughness of blast cleaned steel
To specify the roughness, a variety of values is used. Such as Rz, Rt and Ra. Rz = average peak to valley height = blasting profile Rt = maximum peak to valley height Ra = average distance to an imaginary centre line which can be drawn between peaks and valleys = C.L.A. = Centre Line Average (ISO 3274) Normally Sigma Coatings uses Rz values. Blasting Profile (Rz) = 4 to 6 times C.L.A. (Ra). The direct measuring of the dft of primers applied onto blast cleaned steel in a thickness up to 30 m is very inaccurate. A primer dft of 30 m and more gives an average thickness and not the thickness present on the peaks. When in the specifications blast cleaning to ISO-Sa2 is mentioned a blasting profile Rz of 35-50 m should be obtained using mineral grit unless otherwise mentioned. Above a Ra roughness of 17 m (= blasting profile Rz of 100 m) it is recommended to use an additional coat of primer to cover the roughness. A roughness profile above 100 m often results if heavily rusted steel is blast cleaned.
JAPANESE STANDARDS Standard for the preparation of steel surface prior to painting SPSS-1984
These establish a systematic standard for secondary surface preparation prior to protective painting when shop primers (prefabrication primers) are used in the construction process of hull or steel structures.
page 6/8
INFORMATION
1490
June 2007
Surface condition
H A F D R
= = = = =
shop primed steel surface in way of hand welding shop primed steel in way of automatic welding shop primed steel surface in way of gas-burning shop primed steel surface having white zinc salt shop primed steel surface having rust in the form of spots
GRADES OF SECONDARY SURFACE PREPARATION The Japanese Standard indicates six preparation degrees. The following standards are often used in specifications. SPSS-Pt2 Surface prepared by wire brushing for the surface condition A, D and R, by wire brushing and disc sander for the surface condition H, by disc sander for the surface condition F. Almost all rust and foreign matter are fairly removed. If mentioned for other surface conditions (e.g. primed or coated steel), almost all rust and foreign matter, have to be removed by wire brushing and/or disc sander. SPSS-Pt3 Surface prepared by wire brushing and (in combination with!) disc sander for the surface condition H and A and by disc sander for the surface condition F, R and D. Rust and foreign matter are removed to the extent that the surface has a uniform metallic sheen. If mentioned for other surfaces conditions (e.g. primed or coated steel) all rust and foreign matter has to be removed to the extent that the surface has a uniform metallic sheen. Also used for the preparation of primed or coated substrate to remove rust from small areas such as scratches, pinpoints or areas of mechanical damage. SPSS-Ss Surface prepared by light blast cleaning of slug sands or grits. (Shop primer (prefabrication primer) with the little trace of rust is noticeable.) Also used for the preparation of a primed or coated substrates or galvanized steel to roughen the surface and to remove contamination or traces of rust. In the Japanese Standard the expressions Sd2 and Sd3 are used, which are equivalent to the Swedish expressions Sa2 and Sa3. Preparation grades of welds, cut edges and other area with surface imperfections. See illustrations in the standard
Remarks
ISO 8501-3 Grade P2
page 7/8
INFORMATION
1490
June 2007
Degree of cleanliness
The ISO and the Japanese Standards give a visual impression of the quality of the derusted steel. However, chemical contamination like water soluble salts etc. are not visible and remains partly on the surface. Presence of excessive amounts of water soluble salts can cause blistering of the coating by osmosis. Water soluble salts in mineral abrasives. For tankcoatings the maximum value of water soluble salts in mineral abrasives is 250 S/cm (conductivity) (ISO 11127-6 1993). See further sheet 1491 Water soluble salts on the steel surface (ISO 8502-9 1998). Our maximum acceptable levels of water soluble salts, calculated as sodium chloride, on treated substrate prior to coating application depends on the area and expected service conditions. equivalent sodium chloride Cargo tanks Immersed areas Dry cargo holds 60 mg/m 80 mg/m 100 mg/m conductivity (V=15 ml) (10.0 S/cm) (13.3 S/cm) (16.7 S/cm)
Note
Determination of water soluble salts: see information sheet 1468 For water ballast tank areas to be treated in accordance with IMO resolution MSC 215(82): water soluble salts limit equivalent to sodium chloride after blasting/grinding must be equal to or lower than 50 mg/m of sodium chloride. For areas exposed to atmosphere conditions We recommend the limit per dry cargo holds as noted in the table. Prior to treatment the substrate should be High Pressure Washed with Fresh (clean) water. As a guidance we recommend that the conductivity of abrasives prior to treatment should not be higher than 250 S/cm.
REFERENCES Determination of water soluble salts according to the Bresle method (ISO 8502-6 1995) Specification for mineral abrasives Hydrojetting
see information sheet 1468 see information sheet 1491 see information sheet 1498
page 8/8
INFORMATION
SPECIFICATION FOR MINERAL ABRASIVES (ISO 11126)

a two page issue SCOPE
1491
June 2007 revision of October1999
This specification covers mineral abrasives such as corundum, aluminium silicate slag, or any slag mixtures which are suitable for removing rust, scale, old paint or shop primer from steel by blast cleaning and giving a satisfactory anchor pattern. This specification covers only those abrasives commonly known as utility grades. REQUIREMENTS Material The abrasive may be any material meeting the requirements of this specification. It shall be composed of clean, sound, hard particles free from foreign substances such as dirt, oil, grease, toxic substances, organic matter and water soluble salts. The abrasive supplier shall certify that any product to be delivered conforms to all requirements stated herein. pH 100 gram of a representative abrasive sample is crushed using a mortar and pestle. Approximately 50 grams of the crushed sample is added to 200 ml de-ionized water. The pH of this slurry is then determined through the use of an electronic pH meter with an accuracy of 0.01 pH unit. A slurry mixture prepared in this way shall not have a pH below 6.20. Water Soluble Salts (ISO 11127-6 1993) The abrasive is mixed with de-ionized water, conductivity max. 1 S/cm, in the proportion 1:1, e.g. 100 g abrasive to 100 cm water. The mixture is shaken for 5 minutes, allowed to settle for at least 1 hour and then shaken again for 5 minutes. Some of the water is decanted, the temperature is recorded and the conductivity measured by a conductivity gauge. If the conductivity gauge does not have any temperature compensation adjustment, the conductivity should be converted to 20C or measurement should be carried out at this temperature. If the conductivity exceeds 250 S/cm the abrasive is rejected. If the abrasive is to be used for High Pressure Wet Abrasive Blastcleaning the total amount of water soluble matter should be below 0,5% by weight. Moisture Content Approximately 200 grams of abrasive shall be weighed to the nearest 0.1 g in a tared weighing dish and dried at 105 to 110C for 3 hours or more until successive weighings after additional 1 hour heating periods show a weight change of not more than 0.1%. The percentage of moisture is calculated as follows: percent moisture = original weight - final weight x 100 original weight of sample The moisture content for material deliverd in bags or in bulk shall not exceed 0.5% by weight. Oil and Grease The abrasive shall not be contaminated with oil and grease. 10 cm abrasive is shaken with 10 cm methylene chloride for about 5 minutes. 5 drops of the solvent are applied to a clean glass plate. After complete evaporation of the solvent the glass plate is exposed to ultraviolet light in total darkness. If there is blue fluorescence the abrasive is rejected.
page 1/2
INFORMATION
SPECIFICATION FOR MINERAL ABRASIVES (ISO 11126)
1491
June 2007
Hardness Examine the abrasive material under a low-power microscope (10 x) and, if grains of different colour or character are present, select a few grains of each. Separately place the grains thus differentiated between two glass microscope slides. While applying pressure, slowly move one slide over the other with a reciprocating motion for 10 seconds. Examine the glass surface and, if scratched, the material shall be considered as having a minimum hardness of 6 on Mohs scale. If any grains that fail to scratch glass are present, in any appreciable quantity, the total batch is rejected. Grain Shape The individual abrasive grains shall be angular in shape. Surface Profile The abrasive material shall produce a prescribed blasting profile Rz value (varying between 30-100 m)
page 2/2
INFORMATION
Surface preparation of steel pipes and fittings Shop application

a three page issue
1492
May 1998 reprint of 8-88
SURFACE PREPARATION Surface preparation of steel pipes must be carried out according to the Dutch standard NEN 6901 or the Swedish standard SIS 055900. The metal surface must be freed from mill scale, corrosion and all contaminations such as oil, grease, dirt, soluble salts, markings and old coatings. Weldspatters and laminations must also be removed. The coating must be applied as soon as possible after completion of the surface preparation. CHEMICAL PRETREATMENT The substrate must be precleaned to remove dirt, grease and oil. Pickling must be carried out on an industrial scale by one of the following methods. The first table describes a pickling process followed by a double water rinse. The second table describes a phosphating process consisting of pickling and rinsing followed by phosphating. The requirements for the pickling and the phosphating process are drawn up to avoid excess thickness of phosphate layers and to ensure that no acids remain on the substrate. All pickling - rinsing or phosphating liquids must be renewed when the concentrations specified are reached (see tables). The content of the bath must also be renewed when the pretreated metal leaves the bath with contamination or if sediment interferes the action of the pickling process. Table 1Pickling Process Pickling Hydrochloric acid Sulphuric acid 55 - 220 g/l 50 - 295 g/l ambient 50 - 65C 100 g/l 70 g/l till complete removal of millscale and rust First Rinsing Min. water temperature Max. acid concentration Duration ambient 0,75 g/l 5 min. Second Rinsing Min. water temperature Max. acid concentration Duration 70C 0,20 g/l 1 min. 70C 0,10 g/l 1 min. ambient 0,25 g/l 5 min.
Acid concentration Temperature Max. iron concentration Duration
page 1/3
INFORMATION
1492
May 1998
Table 2Pickling/Phosphating Process Pickling Hydrochloric acid Sulphuric acid 55 - 220 g/l 50 - 295 g/l ambient 50 - 65C 100 g/l 70 g/l till complete removal of millscale and rust Rinsing Min. water temperature Max. acid concentration Duration 60 - 65C 0,75 g/l 5 min. Phosphating Temperature Duration Max. iron content Normal phosphoric acid concentration Phosphoric acid concentration for application of epoxyand polyurethane coatings * 80C 5 min. 5 g/l 20 - 10 g/l 80C 5 min. 5 g/l 20 - 10 g/l 80C 5 min. 5 g/l 20 - 10 g/l 65C 1,00 g/l 5 min. --Phosphoric acid 105 - 225 g/l 60 - 85C 30 g/l
Acid concentration Temperature Max. iron concentration Duration
5 g/l
5 g/l
5 g/l
* The performance of epoxy- or polyurethane coatings on phosphated steel should always be checked in advance. BLAST CLEANING Before blast cleaning the surface should be thoroughly degreased by means of suitable detergents or emulsifiers. Irregularities in the pipe surface should be removed by grinding or rotating discs. The surface should be dry before blasting. Blasting must be carried out until to standard of cleanliness of SIS-Sa2 of the Swedish norm SIS055900 (see sheet 1490). Usually a blasting profile (Rz) is recommended of approx. 50 micrometers which means a Ra or CLA value of 10-15 micrometers.
page 2/3
INFORMATION
1492
May 1998
Ventilation of sufficient capacity has to be used in order to maintain a workable and safe climate during blast cleaning. The pipes should rotate during the blasting operation at a sufficient speed to obtain a regular blasted surface. Only suitable abrasives according to specification should be used (see sheet 1491). Attention should be given to the weld seams which have to be blast cleaned in a way that the whole weld seam is pretreated. Abrasives and dust should be removed completely from the blasted surface. ROTATING WIRE BRUSH CLEANING Pipes to be used for the transport of Natural Gas, showing only minor rust and in good condition, may be pretreated by rotating wire brushes before they are coated with a flowcoat. Before wire brush cleaning the surface should be thoroughly degreased by means of suitable detergents or emulsifiers. Irregularities in the pipe surface should be removed by grinding or rotating discs. The surface should be dry before blasting. Cleaning must be carried out until to standard of cleanliness of SIS-St3 of the Swedish norm SIS055900 (see sheet 1490). Ventilation of sufficient capacity has to be used in order to maintain a workable and safe climate during wire brush cleaning. The pipes should rotate during the cleaning operation at a sufficient speed to obtain a regular cleaned surface.
page 3/3
INFORMATION
INTERNAL CHEMICAL CLEANING OF STEEL PIPES In-situ application
1493
May 1998 reprint of 8-1988
GENERAL ASPECTS The "in situ" cleaning process for new and old, often corroded, pipe lines should be started with a thorough inspection of the pipe line. The internal diameter of the pipe line has to be checked and samples of rust and debris have to be collected to confirm that the cleaning operation will give the desired results. Because the total cleaning procedure will consist of a number of pig runs, a lot of information can be collected about the vertical head and elevation profile of the pipe line which knowledge is of great importance for the final coating operation. Besides that it is critical, it is very important that all pig trains containing water, chemical liquids and drying liquids are being launched solid, travel solid and are being received solid in order to clean the pipe line with success. Any condition that might impose a significant under pressure in any liquid train can cause air intrusion resulting in inadequate surface preparation and transfer of liquids to a position behind the train. The improvement in cleanliness should be continuously monitored by analysing the cleaning and pretreatment liquids, followed by, if available, inspection through a camera pig. New in situ blast cleaning methods have been developed (sand jetting system) which may be very useful also to recoat previously coated pipe lines. Removal of Dirt Dirt, sand, loose rust, loose mill scale, bolts, parts of welding rods, corrosion debris, loose scale and remainders of products previously transported to be removed by mechanical cleaning with wire brush pigs and scraper pigs followed by line washing with fresh water and solvents. Degreasing Degreasing is extremely important as the presence of oil or grease will interfere with the subsequent acid cleaning. Detergent/water flushing requires a number of passes until analysis of the degreasing agents proves that all oil and grease is removed. Chemical cleaning All mill scale and rust has to be removed completely also from corrosion pits by several passes of prescribed strength inhibited acid solutions until the internal surface is near to white metal. The spend chemicals used for cleaning have to be monitored by analysis, the degree of surface preparation has to be checked by usual inspection. Passivating After the chemical cleaning all soluble salts have to be removed (often chlorides). To prevent flash rust formation a run with a prescribed concentration of inhibiting or passivating solution is to be carried out followed by rinsing the pipe line with fresh water until the water reach neutrality. Drying All moisture in the pipe line has to be removed in order that a dry steel surface is available for coating by sending selected drying solvents through the pipe line followed by pigging with foam pigs together with dry air or nitrogen ventilation. In this way a clean and dry surface is achieved, together with a dehumidified atmosphere within the pipe line giving optimal conditions to coat the pipe line in situ.
page 1/1
INFORMATION
SURFACE PREPARATION OF CONCRETE (FLOORS)

a three page issue
1496
February 2009 revision of September 2007
GENERAL ASPECTS Once a coating or a polymer flooring has been selected it is essential that the surface preparation of concrete is done correctly, otherwise optimum performance will not be obtained. New concrete: In the case of newly made concrete it is important that the concrete has been laid for a minimum of 28 days before applying a coating or polymer flooring. The moisture content of the concrete should be below 4 % by weight. The release of the surplus water is dependant on the thickness of the concrete, the season, the temperature and relative humidity of the environment and the prevailing ventilation conditions. So the moisture content of the concrete should always be measured. The moisture content at the concrete surface can be measured by an electronic instrument called Protimeter (Protimeter plc, U.K. telex 849305). An indication in the red area means that the concrete is still too wet. An indication in the green area means that the concrete can be coated. An indication in the yellow area means be careful. A concrete area of approx. 4 m should be covered by a plastic sheet for 24 hours after which the measurement has to be repeated. If the indication becomes red then the subfloor is still too wet to apply a flooring. A major problem with new concrete floors is the top surface layer known as laitance. This water rich top layer is formed during the binding period and is mechanically weak. In addition to the poor mechanical properties, the laitance has a chemical composition different from the rest of the concrete. Concrete floors with this laitance are obviously poor substrates to apply coatings to. It should therefore be a pre-condition that the laitance has been removed prior to the application of any floor coating or polymer flooring. Old concrete: The removal of all oils, greases etc., together with the removal of the remains of any previously applied coating is required to ensure a sound base for the application of a coating, polymer flooring or screed. SURFACE PREPARATION In order to ensure good adhesion and the long term performance of any floor coating or polymer flooring it is essential that the correct type of surface preparation is carried out. The removal of chemicals, oil, grease and fat must be completed before any other preparation work commences such as e.g. blasting or acid etching (ASTM D4259 or ASTM D4260). Mechanical tool cleaning must always be followed by removal of dust by means of vacuum cleaners. Removal of chemicals from floor surfaces: Concrete that has become contaminated by chemicals must be neutralised before coating. If the contamination is acidic, it must be neutralised with an alkaline cleaner and rinsed thoroughly with fresh water. If the contamination is alkaline it can be cleaned with detergents and/or steam. Oil and grease contamination can be removed by a combination of solvents, steam and/or detergents depending on the severity of the contamination.
page 1/3
INFORMATION
1496
February 2009
Abrasive blast cleaning: Abrasive blast cleaning should always be the best choice for the pretreatment of concrete if polymer flooring systems have to be applied. Blast cleaning is normally carried out using an enclosed system such as a Vacu-Blast, or Auto-Blast type machine. These systems are virtually dust free and work on the principal of propelling small particles of abrasive i.e. steel shot, against the floor surface whilst at the same time vacuum recovering the dust and abrasive to a recovery hopper. In addition to cleaning the floor and removing any laitance, blasting will leave the floor surface with a profile which will enable the coating to gain a physical as well as chemical adhesion to the substrate. Blast cleaning is the recommended system for large floor areas. Scarifying: Scarifying (sometimes known as scabbling) involves the use of rotating wheels and brushes to scour the concrete surface. The scarifying equipment is pushed over the floor and the enclosed rotating wheels abrade the surface. It is not as efficient or as dust free as a Vacu-Blast machine and can in the wrong hands, cause excessive damage to the substrate. It is most effective on small areas or areas where abrasive blast cleaning cannot be carried out. Power grinding: Similar to scarifying this method can be used to open up holes and voids and to remove loose materials from the surface of poured concrete and pre-cast slabs. Power grinding is slower than blasting but could be considered for small external floor areas. One should take care that the concrete surface is not polished by the power grinding. Wire brushing: Wire brushing can be used to remove loose material from the surface and open up holes and voids in poured concrete. This can be either by power or hand wire brushing, power wire brushing giving increased productivity and effectiveness. Impact tools: Concrete surfaces can be roughened using impact tools such as needle guns etc. However this method can be slow and should only be used for small repairs. Granulating or Hammering machines work quicker but should only be used if very hard concrete must be roughened or if flooring screeds have to be applied. Impact tools are normally electrically or compressed air driven and work on a principal of a sharpened tool vibrating against the surface. It is fairly easy for an inexperienced operative to gouge the concrete surface and therefore great care should be taken when using this method of preparation. Acid etching: This method of surface preparation is most suited for use on new concrete floors (not for sand/cement screeds). It is carried out to remove laitance but will not remove old paint or oil and grease and should only be used in areas where sufficient drainage exists to allow the removal of the water and acid solutions. To carry out acid etching the following procedure should be followed: Before commencing acid etching the concrete surface should be cleaned of all loose concrete. Deposits of oil and grease should be removed by steam cleaning or by using an alkaline cleaner or detergents. Thoroughly wet the floor with water Sprinkle an 8% to 10% solution of phosphoric acid in water uniformly over the floor. The approximate spreading rate is 1,5 m to 1 litre of solution.
page 2/3
INFORMATION
1496
February 2009
The acid solution should remain on the surface for 2 to 4 minutes and then be rinsed thoroughly with clean water. The rinsing can be done with a water hose and a sweeping broom. It is important that the rinsing is done immediately to prevent the formation of salts on the surface, which are difficult to remove. The concrete surface should be checked for acidity using pH paper and should have a pH of 7 or higher. Depending on the type of concrete, more than one operation may be required to achieve a satisfactory surface profile. A thorough rinsing with clean water should be carried out after each acid etch application. The surface profile after acid etching should be similar to fine sandpaper. The concrete should be allowed to dry prior to applying the coating. Personnel involved in acid etching operations should be provided with safety goggles, protective clothing, rubber gloves and rubber boots. Rubber buckets should be used for mixing the solution. THE ACID SHOULD ALWAYS BE ADDED TO THE WATER rather than the water added to the acid. Flame cleaning: Where conditions permit, deeply impregnated oils and greases can be removed from concrete floors by flame or superheated compressed air. This method involves the use of heat to bring the oil, grease etc. to the surface and should be carried out under strict supervision with the necessary precautions being taken in view of the possible hazards involved. After flame cleaning the surface should always be power tool cleaned.
page 3/3
INFORMATION
RELATIVE HUMIDITY - SUBSTRATE TEMPERATURE AIR TEMPERATURE

a four page issue
1650
RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN (VENTILATION) AIR-TEMPERATURE, SUBSTRATE TEMPERATURE AND RELATIVE HUMIDITY To achieve optimum results in coating work it is essential to ensure that no condensation occurs on the substrate or in-between coats during the painting process. Air at a given temperature can only contain a certain (maximum) amount of water vapour. This amount is lower at lower temperatures. The maximum water content of air at different temperatures is given in the next table: Degrees Centigrade 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 Maximum water content g/m 4,8 6,8 9,5 12,8 17,3 23,0 30,4 39,6 51,1 65,0
From these figures the relationship between dew point, air temperature and relative humidity can be calculated. This relationship is given in the next table: Relation between dew point, air temperature and relative humidity Air Temperature C 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Dew point in C at a relative humidity of: 50% 4.1 3.2 2.4 1.6 0.8 0.1 1.0 1.9 2.8 3.7 4.7 55% 2.9 2.1 1.3 0.4 0.4 1.3 2.3 3.2 4.2 5.1 6.1 60% 1.8 1.0 0.2 0.8 1.7 2.6 3.5 4.5 5.4 6.4 7.3 65% 0.9 0.1 0.8 1.8 2.7 3.7 4.6 5.6 6.6 7.5 8.5 70% 0.0 0.9 1.8 2.8 3.8 4.7 5.6 6.6 7.6 8.6 9.5 75% 0.9 1.8 2.8 3.8 4.7 5.7 6.7 7.7 8.6 9.6 10.6 80% 1.8 2.8 3.7 4.7 5.7 6.7 7.6 8.6 9.6 10.6 11.5 85% 2.7 3.7 4.6 5.6 6.6 7.6 8.6 9.6 10.6 11.5 12.5 90% 3.6 4.5 5.5 6.5 7.5 8.4 9.4 10.4 11.4 12.4 13.4
page 1/4
INFORMATION
1650
October 1999
Air Temperature C 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
Dew point in C at a relative humidity of: 50% 5.6 6.5 7.4 8.3 9.3 10.2 11.1 12.0 12.9 13.8 14.8 15.7 16.6 17.5 18.4 55% 7.0 7.9 8.8 9.7 10.7 11.6 12.5 13.5 14.4 15.3 16.2 17.2 18.1 19.1 20.0 60% 8.3 9.2 10.2 11.1 12.0 12.9 13.8 14.8 15.7 16.7 17.6 18.6 19.5 20.5 21.4 65% 9.5 10.4 11.4 12.3 13.3 14.2 15.2 16.1 17.0 17.9 18.8 19.8 20.8 21.7 22.7 70% 10.5 11.5 12.4 13.4 14.4 15.3 16.3 17.2 18.2 19.1 20.1 21.1 22.0 22.9 23.9 75% 11.6 12.5 13.5 14.5 15.4 16.4 17.4 18.4 19.3 20.3 21.2 22.2 23.2 24.1 25.1 80% 12.5 13.5 14.5 15.5 16.4 17.4 18.4 19.4 20.3 21.3 22.3 23.2 24.2 25.2 26.2 85% 13.5 14.5 15.4 16.4 17.4 18.4 19.4 20.3 21.3 22.3 23.3 24.3 25.2 26.2 27.2 90% 14.4 15.3 16.3 17.3 18.3 19.3 20.3 21.3 22.3 23.2 24.2 25.2 26.2 27.2 28.2
Using these figures curves can be drawn which give the relationship between air temperature, relative humidity and dew point. (See graph). To allow a sensible safety margin normally the substrate temperature must be at least 3 degrees centigrade above the dew point. The dew point is the temperature of a given air-water vapour mixture at which condensation starts, since at that temperature the maximum water content of the air is reached. Many important conclusions can be drawn from the graph, e.g.: at a relative humidity of 85% the lowest acceptable substrate temperature is approximately equal to the temperature of the (ventilation) air. For this reason outdoor paintwork must normally be carried out at a relative humidity below 85%. at a relative humidity of 90% the difference in temperature between substrate and dew point will be only 2C, which means that the safety margin is narrowed. This can be overcome by raising the substrate temperature by approx. 1C. at a relative humidity of 70% the relationship between the acceptable substrate temperature and the temperature of the (ventilation) air is given by the following table: air temperature C dew point C lowest acceptable substrate temperature C 5 0,0 3,0 10 4,7 7,7 20 14,4 17,4 30 23,9 26,9
page 2/4
INFORMATION
1650
October 1999
Although the substrate temperatures given in this table are well below the temperature of the surrounding air no condensation will occur under the stated prevailing conditions. if the lowest acceptable substrate temperature is for example 5C and the temperature of the atmosphere is also 5C than the ventilation air can be heated and relative humidity will then be reduced according to the following table: air temperature C relative humidity % 5 85 10 60 20 32 30 18 40 11
In general reduction in temperature leads to risk of condensation. For instance steel cooled down during the night will often show condensation and this will not evaporate until the steel is heated up again by sunlight or other means.
page 3/4
INFORMATION
1650
October 1999
page 4/4
PPG PROTECTIVE & MARINE COATINGS

PPG Protective & Marine Coatings brings unrivaled levels of innovation, experience and expertise in coatings technology, supported through our expanding global supply and distributors network in over 80 countries. We have in-depth knowledge of the industry, our customers day-to-day challenges and the environmental, health and safety standards in the marketplace. By working in close partnership with customers, our technical service representatives are able to offer an unsurpassed level of market knowledge. This enables us to respond quickly with efcient, economic solutions in all environments and industries. The result performance-enhancing coating systems that can be applied more easily, resist the elements more effectively, and deliver maximum performance with minimum downtime.
Website: www.sigmacoatings.com/protective Email: sigmacoatings.protective@ppg.com 2012 PPG Industries, all rights reserved.
0105-GLOB
No rights can be derived from the content of this publication. Unless otherwise agreed upon in writing, all products and technical advice given are subject to our standard conditions of sale, available on our website www.ppgpmc.com. Bringing innovation to the surface, PSX, STEELGUARD are trademarks or registered trademark of PPG Industries Ohio, Inc. PITT-CHAR is a registered trademark of PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc. SIGMA COATINGS and SIGMA COATINGS and Design, NOVAGUARD, PHENGUARD, SIGMA AQUACOVER, SIGMA AQUAWELD, SIGMACOVER, SIGMADUR, SIGMAGUARD, SIGMAPRIME, SIGMARINE, SIGMASHIELD, SIGMATHERM, SIGMAWELD and SIGMAZINC are trademarks or registered trademarks of PPG Coatings Nederland B.V.
Created January 2012

PPG - PC Manual

Transféré par

Informations du document

Titre original

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

PPG - PC Manual

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

PROTECTIVE COATINGS

DATA SHEETS | SYSTEM SHEETS | INFORMATION SHEETS

Data sheet index

System sheet index

Information sheet index

RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

Recommended thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure CLEANING SOLVENT

two component solvent free amine cured phenolic epoxy compound

Recommended thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure

Pot life 20C 30C 60 min. 45 min.

RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

Induction time Pot life

none 1 hour at 20C *

Recommended thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure

BRUSH/ROLLER Recommended thinner CLEANING SOLVENT

surface should be dry and free from any contamination

PDS cream green

7468 3012002200 4000001400

RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

Induction time Pot life

none 1 hour at 20C *

AIRLESS SPRAY Recommended thinner Nozzle orice Nozzle pressure

BRUSH/ROLLER Recommended thinner CLEANING SOLVENT

Pot life (at application viscosity) 20C 30C 60 min. 45 min.

PDS green cream

7755 4194542200 3002002200

RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

surface should be dry and free from any contamination

6 hours 4 hours 2 hours

RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

10C 15C 20C 30C 40C

RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

10C 15C 20C 30C 40C

RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

10C 15C 20C 30C 40C

PDS green grey

7436 4000002200 5000002200

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

5C 10C 15C 20C 30C

199289 199282 199284

PDS offwhite pink grey

7959 7001002200 6007002200 5000002200

RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

Induction time Pot life AIRLESS SPRAY

TROWEL Recommended thinner CLEANING SOLVENT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

RECOMMENDED SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS AND TEMPERATURES

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE Induction time Pot life

AIRLESS SPRAY Recommended thinner Volume of thinner Nozzle orice BRUSH/ROLLER

CLEANING SOLVENT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

Thinner 70-05 can be re-used

ADDITIONAL DATA with water borne acrylic and alkyd nishes

PDS redbrown RAL 7030

7149 2008002200 7030262200

INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE